HAITIAN PLASTICS MACHINERY GROUP

CO., LTD.
202207047061525
MA4700III-ZXD Spare parts
Machine Name Plastic Injection Molding Machine Model MA4700III
No. Code Item Specifications QT'TY Remark
1. 303013 Adjustable Mat DTE160 12PCS

5
2. 304A477 Key of Machine 3705-111 1SET
Zhu-mold Clamp
3. 304048 M20-B 12PCS
Tools

52
4. 703027XA T-type Nut T-02-006-03A 12PCS
Internal Hexagonal
5. 250008 1SET
Spanner
6. 250000 Spanner 10"" 1PC
506B070XA T-01-03E-70aB(2S) A

61
506B080XA T-01-03E-80aB B Select one type
Screw Tip 1PC according to
7. 506B085XA T-01-03E-85aB C screw type
506B090XA T-01-03E-90aB D
L508A743 T-01-04E-70BS(CT-SK-2S) A
B Select one type
508A111DT T-01-04E-80BS(470T-CT-SK)
8. L508A768
L508A773
L509A761
Collar Seat 70
T-01-04E-85BS(CT-SK)
T-01-04E-90BS(470T-CT-SK)
T-01-05E-70BS
1PC
C
D
A
according
screw type
to

509B080XB T-01-05E-80BS B Select one type

Screw Collar 1PC according to
9. L509A775 T-01-05E-85BS C screw type
04
L509A776 T-01-05E-90BS D
L507A298HS T-01-08PM-80HS(1.3-DG) B Select one type
L507A309HS Mixing Ring T-01-08PM-85HS(1.3-DG) 1PC C according to
10.
507A040HS T-01-08PM-90HS(1.3-DG) D screw type
633A053XA T-01-10E-70A(ZG) A
07

633A025XA T-01-10E-80A(ZG) B Select one type

11. Screw Tip Spanner 1PC according to
633A026XA T-01-10E-85A(ZG) C screw type
633A027XA T-01-10E-90A(ZG) D
HTF200W-01-01-01(SR15 1PC
12. L502B635 Small Nozzle
-Φ4)SK
22

Transitional Nozzle 1PC

13. L502B729 HTF380W-01-01-02(L90)
Special spanner for
14. 633023XA T-01-154A 1PC
nozzle
15. 010022 S.S.R. GTJ48-40 1PC
20

16. 008054 Quick Fuse 32A，10*38 2PCS

17. 008A074 Quick Fuse 0287003(3A 001A792) 5PCS
18. 023002 Temperature sensor 12×1.5 M 1PC
19. 023003 Temperature sensor 12×2.0 M 1PC
20. 023004 Temperature sensor 12×2.5 M 1PC
21. 023005 Temperature sensor 12×3 M 1PC
22. 023A140 Thermocouple (CE) K-Ф2.3-L100-3.5M 1PC
862C427 φ100×55，230V，750W，
23.
Heating Band L=400mm 1PC
862C456 φ42×
24.
Heating Band 35,230V,200W,L=500mm 1PC
25. 862B436 Heating Band φ190×75,230V,1900W 1PC

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2021-7-15 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2021-7-15

1-2
26. 862A350Q Heating Band Φ245X70,230V,2400W 1PC
27. 150A047 O-Ring 32.99×2.62-N90 2PCS
28. 150A579 O-Ring 31.5×1.8-N90 2PCS
29. 836005 Stopper HTK380-03-27-05 2PCS
30. 130A107 Filter Paper ME-100-114 4PCS
31. 616A051 Stopper JU4500Ⅲ-01-139 2PCS
Socket head cap
32. 201026 M16×50-12.9 4PCS
screw
33. 211005 Spring Washer 16 4PCS
Socket head cap
34. 200039 M8×60 6PCS

5
screw
35. 029A687 Lid for Linear Guide 1 SET

52
36. Instruction Manual 1COPY
37. Certificate of Quality 1 COPY
38. Packing List 1 COPY

61
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2021-7-15 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2021-7-15

2-2
MA4700III

5
INJECTION MOULDING MACHINE

52
61
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
70
04
07
22
20

HAITIAN PLASTICS MACHINERY GROUP

CO., LTD.
 MA4700III INJECTION MOULDING MACHINE

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

5
Serial number: MA4700III -SMS

52
Edition: A

61
DESIGNED
70CHECKED APPROVAL
SIGNATURE Zhang Yu Pan Lu Jing Lin Hui
DATE 2020-8-24 2020-8-24 2020-8-24
04
07
22
20

HAITIAN PLASTICS MACHINERY GROUP

CO., LTD.
20
22
07
04
70
61
52
5
 5
52
61
SAFETY MANUAL
70 MARS SERIES
EN-MARS-V1.2 Original Version
04
07
22
20
 5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

COMMUNICATION. EFFICIENCY.

INNOVATION.

TECHNOLOGY TO THE POINT

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 Foreword
1.1.1 Instructions of General Graphics and Identifications....................................................1.1-1
1.1.2 Important Statement.......................................................................................................1.1-1

1.1.3 Customer Service Contact Information..........................................................................1.1-2

1.2 General Safety Provisions

1.2.1 Basic principles.........................................................................................................1.2-1

5
1.2.2 Correct use.......................................................................................................................1.2-1

52
1.2.3 Incorrect use.............................................................................................................1.2-1

1.2.4 Selection and qualifications of the personnel...............................................................1.2-2

1.2.5 Workplaces and spaces for the operators......................................................................1.2-3

61
1.2.6 Safety Sign.......................................................................................................................1.2-6

1.2.7 Protective measures........................................................................................... 1.2-7

1.2.8 Mounting aid...................................................................................................................1.2-7

70
1.2.8.1 Material hopper.....................................................................................................1.2-7
1.2.9 Safety instructions...........................................................................................................1.2-8

1.2.9.1 General instructions...............................................................................................1.2-8

04
1.2.9.2 During transport....................................................................................................1.2-9

1.2.9.3 Storage..........................................................................................................1.2-11

1.2.9.4 During installation...............................................................................................1.2-11

1.2.9.5 During commissioning.........................................................................................1.2-11
07

1.2.9.6 During operation.................................................................................................1.2-11

1.2.9.7 Maintenance and repair work.......................................................................1.2-11

1.2.9.8 Disposal.........................................................................................................1.2-12
22

1.2.9.9 Structural modifications......................................................................................1.2-13

1.2.10 Other residual risk.......................................................................................................1.2-13

1.2.10.1 Noise Hazards.....................................................................................................1.2-13

20

1.2.10.2 Magnetic Hazards..............................................................................................1.2-14

1.2.10.3 Thermal Hazards................................................................................................1.2-14

1.2.11 Behavior in case of fire................................................................................................1.2-14

1.2.12 Emergency stop...........................................................................................................1.2-15

1.2.13 Applied standards and regulations............................................................................1.2-15

1.2.13.1 European CE region...........................................................................................1.2-15

1.2.13.2 China...................................................................................................................1.2-15
1.2.13.3 America or Canada............................................................................................1.2-15

1.2.14 Safety device LOTO Operation Flow..........................................................................1.2-16

HAITIAN MARS SERIES

1.1 Foreword

1.1.1 Instructions of Ge- Before putting the machine into operation, please carefully read this inst-
ructions manual. The following graphics and signs are used in the instruc-
neral Graphics and
tions manual and the equipment.
Identifications
The identifications and meanings of the graphics are as follows:

5
It means "if you don't avoid this, death or severe injuries may be
DANEGER caused".

52
It means "if you don't avoid this, death or severe injuries may be
WARNING
caused".

61
It means "where there is misoperation, it may cause light or mo-
CAUTION
derate damages to the operators".

NOTICE
70
It means "remarks and instructions for the related contents".

1.1.2 Important State- ● The company is only responsible for the interfacial interaction of the
04
ment injection molding machines and auxiliary equipment designed by it-
self. If the user installs or removes the auxiliary equipment by himself,
the safety protection device in compliance with related standards shall
be reinstalled and furthermore, all the problems incurred within shall
07

be undertaken by the user himself.

● If the pictures used in this manual are different from the real ma-
chiane, the real machine shall prevail.
22

● If the user does not operate in compliance with the safety operation
NOTICE procedures and maintenance regulations of the instructions manual
20

or restructures or alters the equipment not in compliance with the

company’s instructions and without permit of the company, all the
faults and losses incurred within will not be undertaken by the com-
pany, please understand.

● The user can only use the parts designated by Haitian, especially the
nozzles, plasticization components, heating rings and fasteners. The
related specifications of the nozzles can be referred in chapter 4 of the
technical manual.

1.1-1
 Volume 1 SAFETY MANUAL

● The descriptions and graphics stipulated in the instructions manual

are given in compliance with the machine models. We stress that if
there are specific requirements or further technical development, rel-
ative alterations will be made to the machine.

● For the convenience of reference when there is problem with the ma-
chine, please keep the instructions manual nearby the machine.

5
● No copy, backup or record shall be made to the instructions manual
without authorization of the company. Do not show the instructions

52
manual to the third parties.

61
1.1.3 Customer Service
Contact Informa- Classification Tel and Fax

tion 70 Tel： +86-574-86177242/86182601

Classification
Fax：+86-574-86221864
04

Service Tel： +86-574-86181801

Hotline Fax：+86-574-86182662
07

Customer Tel： +86-574-86182616

22

Complaint Fax：+86-574-86182662
20

We take customers’ demands seriously.

If you have any question for Haitian,
please contact us immediately.

E-mail：[email protected]
Internet URL：http://www.haitian.com

1.1-2

www.haitianpm.com
HAITIAN MARS SERIES

1.2 General Safety

Provisions
In this section you will find a summary of all the important safety provisi-
ons. For this reason this section is suitable for the initial, basic instruction
of members of staff.
Read these instructions thoroughly and completely before you work with
the injection molding machine.
Store the instructions so that they can be accessed by all users at any time.

5
1.2.1 Basic principles The injection molding machine has been manufactured in accordance
with generally recognized technical rules. Nevertheless, there is a risk of

52
injuries and damage if:

● The user has not followed the safety instructions and the necessary
measures as specified in this manual to operate the equipment;

61
● The injection molding machine is not used correctly;

● The injection molding machine is not operated by trained personnel;

70
● The injection molding machine is improperly changed or modified;
04
● The safety provisions and safety instructions are not followed.

● Only operate the injection molding machine in correct working or-

CAUTION
der as well correctly, with due consideration for safety and the pos-
sible hazards taking into account these operating instructions!
07

● Only operate the injection molding machine if all safety features

and protective features are fitted and functional!
22

● In case of malfunctions that impair safety and in case of changes in

the operating behavior, immediately shut down the injection mold-
ing machine and report malfunction to the responsible personnel!
20

1.2.2 Correct use The machine is intended to be used for the discontinuous manufacture
of molded parts made of plastic and/or rubber. The plasticized material
to be molded is injected through a nozzle into a mold with one or more
cavities and takes on its final form as a molded part there.

1.2.3 Incorrect use Any usage of the injection molding machine that is not covered in section
1.2.2 “Correct use” is forbidden. The clamping unit on the machine is not
allowed to be used as a press.

1.2-1
 Volume 1 SAFETY MANUAL

1.2.4 Selection and qua- Only trained and instructed personnel are allowed to operate the injec-
tion molding machine! The operators must be familiar with the opera-
lifications of the
ting instructions and the hazards stated in them. An approved operator
personnel is a person who, due to special instruction or training, is familiar with the
operator‘s tasks on the machine.
Transport, assembly, installation, commissioning, changing the mold,
maintenance, repair, troubleshooting and the rectification of malfuncti-
ons require specific knowledge and are only allowed to be undertaken by
trained specialist personnel!

5
● Work on the electrical equipment is only allowed to be undertaken

52
by an electrician or by instructed personnel under the management
and supervision of an electrician as per electrical engineering rules. An
electrician is a person who, due to his/her specialist training skills and
experience, as well as knowledge of the applicable regulations, is able

61
to assess the work assigned, to identify possible hazards and to take
appropriate safety measures.

● Only specialist personnel with special skills and experience in pneu-

70
matics are allowed to work on pneumatic components! Special skills
in pneumatics signifies that the personnel must:
◎ Be able to read and fully understand the pneumatic diagrams;
◎ Have fully understood, in particular, the interactions in relation to
04
the safety features fitted;
◎ Have knowledge of the function and layout of pneumatic compo-
nents;
◎ Have read these operating instructions.
07

● Only specialist personnel with special skills and experience in hydrau-

lics are allowed to work on hydraulic components! Special skills in hy-
draulics signifies that the personnel must:
22

◎ Be able to read and fully understand the hydraulic diagrams;

◎ Have fully understood, in particular, the interactions in relation to
the safety features fitted;
◎
20

Have knowledge of the function and layout of hydraulic compo-

nents;
◎ Have read these operating instructions.

1.2-2

www.haitianpm.com
HAITIAN MARS SERIES

1.2.5 Workplaces and Only use marked locations as access points or workplaces as shown in
the figure Fig.1.2-1or Fig.1.2-2 or Fig.1.2-3. When entering the position
spaces for the
shown for work or maintenance, the operation must be carried out in
operators the correct position. When necessary, the supporting working platform
or auxiliary fixed access facilities and auxiliary non-fixed access facilities
should be used to meet the following safety requirements:
① The facilities shall comply with the requirements of ISO 14122;
② From the entry position to the working or maintenance position, the
human body shall ensure that the dangerous area of the machine

5
cannot be reached from the facility. The safe distance between the
human body and the moving parts or auxiliary facilities of the machine

52
shall meet the requirements of ISO 13857.

Security requirements must be met to allow entry.

61
The responsibilities of the machine operator at the injection molding ma-
chine include:
◎Brief inspection of the machine prior to starting work;
◎The visual inspection of the plastic items;
70
◎Maintaining the workplace clean and tidy;
◎Compliance with the health and safety regulations;
◎Checking and modifying the production data via the machine's
control system.
04
07

6
5
22

7 4
20

1
2

Working position：1
Maintenance position：2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Fig.1.2-1 Schematic Diagram of Little Machine.

1.2-3
 Volume 1 SAFETY MANUAL

6
5

5
3
7

52
1

Working position：1

61
Maintenance position：2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

Fig.1.2-2 Schematic Diagram of Mid Machine.

70
6
04
5
7

2
07

1
22

3
Working position：1
Maintenance position：2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

Fig.1.2-3 Schematic Diagram of Big Machine.

20

● All positions which are not marked in Fig. 1.2-1 and Fig. 1.2-2and
CAUTION
Fig. 1.2-3 are not to be used as access or working positions. It is the
user’s responsibility to keep the floor and the designated access and
working positions free from oil and granules.

● Fig.1.2-1 and Fig.1.2-2 and Fig.1.2-3 are just sketch drawings and
may have differences with the actual trade dress of the machines.
The maintenance positions and the working positions may change
due to special requirements, please refer to the actual machine.

1.2-4

www.haitianpm.com
HAITIAN MARS SERIES

Enough space should be left around the machine for installation person-
nel or operator access.

● Users should ensure that the dimensions of A, B, C, D, E and F in Fig.1.2-

4 and Fig.1.2-5 are greater than 900mm.

5
52
61
Fig.1.2-4 Space Requirements around Machines

● Movable parts may cause extrusion risk when they exceed the machine
70
frame, as shown in Fig.1.2-5.
● Injection shield beyond machine frame has extrusion risk when moved.
Therefore, users should ensure that the dimension of G is greater than
500 mm when the injection shield is moved to the right end.
04
● If the machine is equipped with auxiliary equipment such as a
mold-moving machine, the overall dimensions of the machine after
installing the auxiliary equipment shall prevail.
● If there is any difference between the machine outline drawing and
07

the attached drawings, the actual machine outline shall prevail.

22
20

Fig.1.2-5 Space Requirements for Avoiding Extrusion

1.2-5
 Volume 1 SAFETY MANUAL

1.2.6 Safety Sign Instructions of Safety Logo

General warning sign Wear safety footwear

5
Warning; Electricity Wear protective gloves

52
Warning; Drop (fall) Wear protective clothing

61
Warning; Hot surface Wear a face shield

Warning; Crushing
70 Wear respiratory protection
04
Warning; Crushing Refer to instruction manual/booklet
07

Warning; Splashing Lifting sign

22

Warning; Crushing of hands Do not walk or stand here

20

No stepping on surface

No access for people with active

implanted cardiac devices

1.2-6

www.haitianpm.com
HAITIAN MARS SERIES

1.2.7 Protective measu- Close-fitting working clothing with long arms is always to be worn while
working on the machine. Watches and jewelry are not to be worn.
res
During operation
Stipulated personal protective equipment during operation:
● Safety shoes;
● For debarring work, gloves:
◎ In case of large parts with large burrs, grey chain-link gloves;
◎ In case of medium parts, yellow napped gloves;

5
◎ In case of small parts, yellow gloves without finger tips.

52
During setup and maintenance work
Stipulated personal protective equipment during setup and maintenance
work:
● Safety shoes;

61
● Safety gloves;
● Face protection and gloves on working on nozzles, degassing open-
ing, hot runner as well as work on the screw and the plunger.

1.2.8 Mounting aid

70
1.2.8.1 Material hopper Machines with material hopper must be equipped as per Plastics and
rubber machines — Injection moulding machines —Safety requirements
04
with secure access means, and the user must provide secure access means
for the machine. Proper Use:
The secure access means is only permitted for manual feeding of the
material hopper in horizontal standard injection molding machines
07

without a robot and without additional equipment.

DANEGER Danger of crushing due to moving components!

22

Unauthorized, non-permanent mounting aids can allow staff to

reach into dangerous areas of the machine.
Maintain safety distances as per ISO 13857.
The mounting aid must be present at the site prior to start of
20

production.

DANEGER Danger of falling due to oil and spilt granulate!

Keep mounting aid clean and do not use if contaminated.

1.2-7
 Volume 1 SAFETY MANUAL

1.2.9 Safety instructions

1.2.9.1 General ● Only place the machine in operation or operate it if all safety features
instructions are intact.
● Only work on the machine if there is adequate lighting. Immediately
shut down the machine in case of any malfunction and inform your
superior. Immediately shut down the machine in case of the occur-

5
rence of mist or an acrid odor and inform your superior.
● Always wear the personnel protective equipment described in section

52
1.2.7"Protective measures".
● Always keep the floor and operating areas around the machine free
of oils and granulate. Immediately clean up any oil or granulate that
has escaped onto the floor to prevent slipping.

61
● Solvents and oil binding agents can harm the health and have a ten-
dency to spontaneous combustion. Cloths and oil binding agents
soaked with solvent should be stored in fire-proof containers. Do not
place used cloths in working clothing to prevent the absorption of
70
hazardous substances via the skin.
● Tools such as tongs or grippers should be provided in a manner such
that they cannot protrude or fall into the process.
● Do not climb over any protective enclosures.
04
● Remove the last molded part and reduce the heating if you interrupt
production briefly (e.g. pause).
● On the usage of materials to be molded that release gases, vapors or
dusts harmful to the health during processing, it is necessary to install
07

an extraction system. The correct arrangement and attachment of the

extraction system is the responsibility of the operating organization.
● Check the oxygen content of the air if nitrogen is used in the injection
molding process.
22

● Leave the injected shapes to cool down and always remove them us-
ing a hook and place them on a trolley.
● The parts in the kinematic chain are selected and arranged such that
the max. velocity of injection unit forward movement is ≤30 mm/s.
20

● Due to inadequate pre-drying or the breakdown of certain plastics,

material may be unintentionally sprayed out of the nozzle or feed
opening. The stipulated personal protective equipment is always to
be worn while working with the safety doors open.
● Nozzles, plasticizing and injection cylinder and their fastening screws
must always be used as per the information stated by the manufactur-
er.

1.2-8

www.haitianpm.com
HAITIAN MARS SERIES

● Prior start the machine, the operator must ensure that all access
equipment for manual feed is in the correct place. If the feeding is
automatically, the customer shall assess the safety risks and choose
the supporting equipment in accordance with the local regulations,
and be sure that all related devices for automatic feeding of material
should be in place before the machine is started.
● Transport/storage temperature: -25°C-55°C.
● The final user should mount overvoltage protection device, and test

5
its safety function follow the section 18.2 of standard EN 60204-1.
● The equipment is not allowed to operate in explosive, corrosive or

52
underground environment or environment containing flammable or
poisonous substances.

61
1.2.9.2 During transport Prior to the transport of the injection molding machine, all attachments
must be removed.
Only ever transport the machine only in the transport position.
The injection molding machine is only allowed to be transported by
specialist staff tasked with this work.
70
The weight of the machine is stated in chapter 4 of the technical manual.

Transport position for the machine

The transport position for the injection molding machine is stated in
04
chapter 2 of the user manual.

Means of transport
The following lifting equipment and lifting gear is to be provided as the
07

means of transport:

① Transport on rollers
22

● Chains or ropes of adequate length and load bearing capacity;

● A frame with rollers of adequate load bearing capacity, e.g. heavy
duty rollers.
20

② Transport by crane
● At least 4 chains or ropes or adequate length and load bearing capac-
ity;
● 4 x transport eyes with adequate load bearing capacity;
● 1 x cross beam with adequate load bearing capacity.

Installation site
Avoid installation sites for the injection molding machine with:
● Large fluctuations in the ambient conditions;
● Heat;
● Cold;

1.2-9
 Volume 1 SAFETY MANUAL

● Humidity.
The installation site must comply with the specified ambient conditions.
The building floor as well as the floor around the injection molding ma-
chine must be smooth and flat as far as possible. The surrounding buil-
ding floor must withstand the total weight of the transport equipment
and of the heaviest part of the machine.

The specific requirements of the foundation is stated in chapter 2 of the

user manual.

5
Preparing for transport

52
Prepare for the transport of the injection molding machine as follows:
● Ensure the machine is completely switched off;
● Ensure machine is in the transport position;
● Ensure all attachments have been removed from the machine;

61
● Ensure all power lines and supplies have been disconnected;
● Make available the necessary transport equipment;
● In case of planned transport on rollers, ensure the building floor is flat
and clean;
70
● Ensure the transport routes have the necessary load bearing capacity;
● Fasten the transport locks to the doors.

Transporting machine
04
Parts and assemblies may fall on lifting
DANEGER
Death or serious injuries if parts of the body are hit and/or crushed!
● Never stand under a suspended load!
● Only use lifting equipment and lifting gear that can safely support
07

the weight of the load to be lifted!

● Wear safety shoes, gloves and a hard hat!
Transport using a crane
To transport the machine by crane proceed as follows:
22

● Screw the transport eyes to the thread shown in the transport sketch;
● Fasten the ropes or chains to the transport eyes using the lengths spec-
ified as per the transport sketch;
● Fasten the ropes or chains to the cross beam provided;
20

● Fasten a suitable rope or a suitable chain to the transport eye;

● Fasten the rope/chain to the crane;
● You can now lift the machine.

Transport on rollers
● Lift the machine using a crane. For this purpose follow the instructions
in "Transport using a crane";
● Pull out the transport pins shown in the transport sketch until they
audibly engage;
● Place the machine on the frame with rollers;
● You can now move the machine.

1.2-10

www.haitianpm.com
HAITIAN MARS SERIES

1.2.9.3 Storage The injection molding machine is to be stored as follows:

● Do not store the machine outdoors, but instead only under coveror in
a well-ventilated room;
● Cover the machine with a sheet to provide protection against dust,
dirt and sand;
● Seal all connections using sealing plugs;
● Disconnect the switch cabinet from the supply of electrical power;
● At ambient temperatures below 0°C the cooling water must be

5
drained;
● Protect all unpainted machine parts (e.g. platens).

52
CAUTION ● After storage for more than two years, the inverters must be re-conditioned.
It is imperative the manufacturer is contacted on this issue.

● After storage for three years the buffer batteries in the switch cabinet must

61
be renewed.

1.2.9.4 During installation The injection molding machine is only aligned by turning the machine‘s
feet. 70
Lay cables and wires such that they cannot be damaged and nobody can
trip over them.

1.2.9.5 During commissio- The injection molding machine is only allowed to be placed in operation
by authorized and qualified personnel.
04
ning

1.2.9.6 During operation The injection molding machine is only allowed to be operated by autho-
rized and qualified personnel.
07

It is imperative the requirements from the safety data sheets for the ma-
terials and substances used (plastic granulate, etc.) are followed. If they
are not followed, hazards may arise on eating, contact with the skin, eyes
and respiratory tract, as well as on inhaling liquids, gases and vapors.
22

1.2.9.7 Maintenance and ● Maintenance and repair work are only allowed to be undertaken by
repair work qualified specialist personnel tasked with the work. The stipulations
on the selection and qualifications of the personnel employed are to
20

be followed.
● It is imperative the intervals for maintenance and inspection work
specified in the chapter 2 of the user manual are followed.
● Due to inadequate pre-drying or the breakdown of certain plastics,
hot plastic may be sprayed out of the nozzle or feed opening. On
opening the safety door on the injection unit it is therefore necessary
to wear the specified personal protective equipment.
● Injection unit forward movement of some machine types is composed
of operating stroke and maintenance stroke. When the machine is
under maintenance stroke, the injection unit forward speed will be
slower than that under operating stroke.

1.2-11
 Volume 1 SAFETY MANUAL

● The manufacturer must specify suitable measures to reduce the risk of

bursting of molded parts after ejection from the mold.
● The machine must be electrically isolated prior to repair work: prior to
starting work, switch main switch to “OFF” and secure against inad-
vertent switching back on.
● If it is necessary to remove safety devices or safety features during
maintenance and repair, on the conclusion of the work the parts must
be immediately re-fitted and their function checked.

5
● Only use suitable tools (e.g. insulated tools) and use the tools proper-
ly.

52
● Only fit genuine spare parts.
● Only have work on electrical equipment undertaken by an electrician.
● The machine‘s electrical equipment is to be regularly inspected and
checked by an electrician. Defects such as loose connections or charred

61
cables must be rectified immediately.

To establish and ensure electrical isolation, the following safety rules are
to be followed:
◎ Electrically

◎ Secure
70
isolate: switch main switch to “0”;
against unexpected switching on again;
◎ Check for electrical isolation;
◎ Cover neighboring live parts or cordon off.
04
If work on live parts is necessary, involve a second person who can actuate
the main switch in an emergency. Only use electrically insulated tools.

1.2.9.8 Disposal On the disposal of waste that is produced at the injection molding machi-
ne, the national regulations are to be followed.
07

Note:
All waste and other materials used for operation that are produced du-
ring the operation of the injection molding machine are to be disposed
22

of such that damage to the environment is avoided in all circumstances.

Waste produced during maintenance, service and inspection such as

● Cloths;
20

● Cleaning wool;
● Oil residue;
● Packaging etc.
is to be separated from the normal waste and disposed of separately.

1.2-12

www.haitianpm.com
HAITIAN MARS SERIES

1.2.9.9 Structural modi- On fitting attachments to the machine note that:

● If safety functions on the machine are disabled a renewed safety ana-
fications
lysis is necessary. The operator must then re-establish safety by suita-
ble means.
● A renewed assessment of the risk of tipping is necessary if attach-
ments are fitted to the machine. Prior to attaching, it is necessary to
obtain the agreement of the manufacturer.
● The visibility of the hazardous area of the machine must not be redu-
ced.

5
● The workplace specified in these operating instructions must still be
accessible.

52
● After the removal of attachments, all guards originally fitted must be
re-installed.
● The machine is not allowed to be operated without a filling hopper or
supply device.

61
Danger due to missing safety gates!
DANEGER
● If safety gates are removed to support machine operations with pe-
ripheral equipment (e.g. conveyor-belts, stacking devices, etc.), the
user company must implement safety measures that do not impact
on safety levels!
70
● If the machine is then operated again without peripheral equip-
ment, ensure the original safety gates are restored to their original
state!
04
The installation of additional equipment must not reduce the view into
dangerous machine areas, it must not hinder access to workplaces speci-
fied in the operating manual.
In a case of damage, HAITIAN does not assume liability of any kind!
07

1.2.10 Other residual risk

1.2.10.1 Noise Hazards

22

The noise measurement is tested according to EN201-2009.

The noise value is dependent on clamping force value of the equipment
are as follows:
20

Noise value
Clamping force /kN ≤2500 ＞2500-5300 ＞5300-12500 ＞12500

Noise value /dB(A) ≤69 ≤70 ≤71 ≤72

Noise emission values for real machine cycles may be higher than the
values obtained under dry cycle condition by a maximum of 3 dB, depen-
ding on the kind of material, mould and processing parameters.
As the noise may be over 70dB(A), the operators shall take necessary pro-
tection measures.

1.2-13
 Volume 1 SAFETY MANUAL

1.2.10.2 Magnetic Hazards For the machine that uses magnetic mould clamping, the operator shall
pay attention to the safety of the magnetic field. The magnetic field cau-
sed by the magnetic mould clamping may affect the cardiac pacemaker,
hearing-aid and other related medical devices. After magnetization of
the magnetic mould clamping, all such articles and iron things shall be
kept away from the machine in case the strong suction may cause perso-
nal injuries. Before the mould has contacted with the magnetic surface
of the magnetic mould clamping, do not magnetize the mould clamping.

5
1.2.10.3 Thermal Hazards In the operation of the equipment, there are many high temperature
areas, like the cylinders and moulds, which may cause burning and scald if

52
contacted, so the operators are prohibited to get close to or contact with
the related areas in the operation. If it is needed to conduct the mainte-
nance or assembly in the closing area, the cylinder shall be returned to
the safety area before getting to the closing area in case of damages to
the bodies because of the high temperature.

61
When operating with the molds and nozzles, please make sure there is
no pressure with the melt within the barrel in case of splashing and cau-
sing high temperature burning. If the injection is to be done when the
locking force is not completed set up, the auxiliary protection device shall
70
be installed within the injection molding machine area to prevent the
splashing of the melt and causing high temperature burning.
The manufacturer must specify suitable measures to reduce the risk of
bursting of molded parts after ejection from the mold.
04
1.2.11 Behavior in case ● Keep calm;

of fire ● Alert the fire department;

● Switch off the machine at the main switch;
● Alert all persons in the danger zone;
07

● Switch off any venting and/or air conditioning units;

● As soon as possible, contain the fire with an approved fire extinguisher;
CAUTION ● Provide assistance and direction to anyone actively involved in fighting the
fire.
22

Use an abc class fire extinguisher

● This is most suitable due to its versatility compared with other extinguishing
agents;
● Be familiar with the instruction label attached to the fire extinguisher;
● Be aware that the fire extinguisher powder can cause an obstruction to view
20

and will leave a heavy residue which then must be removed from the machi-
ne.

DANEGER Danger of fatal injury due to electric shock!

Use suitable fire extinguishers!

If a fire has occurred on HAITIAN injection molding machine, it must not

NOTICE
be put back into operation until it has been inspected by a HAITIAN Ser-
vice Representative.

1.2-14

www.haitianpm.com
HAITIAN MARS SERIES

1.2.12 Emergency stop The machine can be manually switched to emergency stop by pressing
the emergency stop button.
On the actuation of the emergency stop button:
● All axis movements on the machine are stopped and all drives are
switched so they are free of torque;
● A re-start is prevented;
● The heating is shut down(special functions only for certain national or
regional security standards, such as European CE);
● The cooling is shut down;

5
● The mains contactor(s) are shut down;
● The emergency stop is signalled at the interfaces, e.g. to the robot.

52
After the rectification of the malfunction, unlocking the emergency stop
and confirmation of the malfunction, the supply unit can be switched
back on using the “Motor” button.

1.2.13 Applied standards 1.2.13.1 European CE region

61
and regulations 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive

2014/35/EU Low Voltage Directive

EMC Directive for Electromagnetic Compa-

2014/30/EU

EN ISO 12100
70 tibility

Machine Safety

EN ISO 13857 Machine Safety, Safety Distances

04
Plastics and rubber machines — Injection
EN 201
moulding machines —Safety requirements

Machine Safety, Electrical Equipment for

EN 60204-1
Machines
07

1.2.13.2 China

Plastics and rubber machines — Injection

GB 22530
moulding machines —Safety requirements
22

Machine Safety, Electrical Equipment for

GB 5226.1
Machines

1.2.13.3 America or Canada

20

Plastics and rubber machines — Injection

ANSI SPI B151.1
moulding machines —Safety requirements

Machine Safety, Electrical Equipment for

NFPA 79
Machines

CAN/CSA C22.2. No.14-13 Industrial control equipment standard

1.2-15
 Volume 1 SAFETY MANUAL

1.2.14 Safety device In order to ensure the maintenance, commissioning, engineering safety,
the injection molding machine is employed with LOTO (LOCK OUT TAG
LOTO Operation
OUT), i.e. lockout/tagout system. Through the establishment of the safe-
Flow ty procedure that focuses on setting up lock and tag at the fixed sliding
door\swing door, as an important part of the safety maintenance proce-
dure, the safety of maintenance personnel and equipment is guaranteed.
The tag mentioned is a common one labeled with “attended mainte-
nance/operation, and no start/close”. And the lock mentioned includes a
special-purpose buckle for locking. The tags and locks should be provided

5
by operators themselves.

LOTO operation steps:

52
● Shut off the equipment:
① Use a normal shut off procedure; or
② Switch the air circuit breaker to OFF position.

61
● Move away the fixed sliding door or the swing door.
● Lock out and tag out, swing up the buckle onto the machine outside

Fig. 1.2-6 for locking and hang the tag. See Fig. 1.2-6.
● Confirm to start work after the equipment is successfully isolated:
① confirm all other staff are clear;
70
② confirm the locking device is safe and in place;
③ enter the machine for proper functioning.
04
LOTO removal steps:
● Move away the maintenance tool from the equipment and the staff
retract from the machine inside;
● Notify others for trial-run/running;
07

● Remove the lock and the tag; swing up the buckle to the inner side
and close the door. See Fig. 1.2-7;
● Restore the equipment to normal;
Fig. 1.2-7
● Normally start.
22
20

After LOTO is fully understood, following points must be also followed:

● Everyone, including the supplier’s employees, must follow this LOTO
procedure;
● Only the one performing tagout and lockout, or the head permitted
by the one performing tagout is allowed to remove the lock and the
tag;
● Even if someone has performed tagout/lockout over the equipment
Fig. 1.2-8
and you still want to enter the machine, put up your tag and lock. Re-
member the safety is the first and be responsible for your own safety.
See Fig. 1.2-8.

1.2-16

www.haitianpm.com
20
22
07
04
70
61
52
5
20
22
07
04
70
61
52
5
 5
52
61
70
04

Volume 2
07

User Manual
22
20
 Volume 2 User Manual

Table of Contents
2.1 Installation and Calibration...............................................................2.1-1

2.1.1 Environment of installation area ................................................2.1-1

2.1.2 Lifting .........................................................................................2.1-2

5
2.1.2.1 Lifting of Small Sized Machines (Integrated Machines)........2.2-4

52
2.1.2.2 Lifting of Medium Sized Machines（Combined Machines） 2.2-4

2.1.2.3 Lifting of Large Sized Machines............................................2.2-7

2.1.3 Unloading and transportation ......................................................2.1-8

61
2.1.4 Auxiliary Parts Required during the Machine Transportation and

Descriptions ............................................................................................2.1-9
70
2.1.5 Removal of Rust Preventer .......................................................2.1-10

2.1.6 Foundation Specification ...........................................................2.1-10

2.1.7 Instruction of Adjustable Mat .....................................................2.1-11

04
2.1.8 Installation and Spouting of Foundation Bolt .............................2.1-12

2.1.9 Calibration after Installation .......................................................2.1-14

07

2.1.9.1 Level Adjustment of Small Sized Machines ........................2.1-15

2.1.9.2 Level Adjustment of Medium and Large Sized Machines ...2.1-16

2.1.9.3 Calibration of Parallelism between Platens ........................2.1-17

22

2.1.9.4 Calibration of the Coaxiality between Nozzle and Mold

Location Hole ......................................................................2.1-18

2.1.10 Cooling Water Supply System.................................................2.1-20

20

2.1.10.1 Layout of Cooling Water Piping ........................................2.1-20

2.1.10.2 Discharge of Cooling Water ..............................................2.1-21

2.1.10.3 Cooling Water Flow Rate ..................................................2.1-22

2.1.11 Filling of Hydraulic Oil ................................................................2.1-23

2.1.12 Connection of Power Circuit ......................................................2.1-24

2.1.12.1 Test of Rotation Direction of Oil Pump Motor ......................2.1-25

EN- MAIII 1
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.2 Machine Commissioning ..................................................................2.2-1

2.2.1 Instruction on Main Parts of the Injection Molding Machine ........2.2-1

2.2.2 Preparation ..................................................................................2.2-1

2.2.2.1 Proper Wearing of Operators ..............................................2.2-1

2.2.2.2 Work Needs to be Completed before New Machine

5
Commissioning ..................................................................................2.2-2

52
2.2.3 Debugging of New Machine ......................................................2.2-2

2.2.3.1 Power on .............................................................................2.2-2

2.2.3.2 Starting of Motor..................................................................2.2-3

61
2.2.3.3 Electric Heating Starting .....................................................2.2-3

2.2.3.4 Confirmation of safety precautions .....................................2.2-4

70
2.2.3.5 Manual Operation ...............................................................2.2-6

2.2.3.6 Semi-auto and Full-auto......................................................2.2-7

2.2.4 Mold Installation.........................................................................2.2-7

04
2.2.4.1 Preparation Before Mold Installation ...................................2.2-7

2.2.4.2 Correct Installation of Mold .................................................2.2-8

2.2.4.3 Correct Lifting Method for Mold...........................................2.2-9

07

2.2.4.4 Mold Installation Procedure ................................................2.2-9

2.2.4.5 Related Factors that Influence Mold Functions.................2.2-12

22

2.2.5 Procedures of Injection Molding ..............................................2.2-13

2.2.5.1 Precautions of Injection Molding .......................................2.2-13

2.2.5.2 Hydraulic Oil Temperature ................................................2.2-13

20

2.2.5.3 Working Procedure of Injection Molding ...........................2.2-13

2.2.5.4 Finish Injection Molding ....................................................2.2-15

2.2.6 Demolding .................................................................................2.2-15

2.2.7 Exhaust of proportional valve (Some models do not have this

proportional valve) ..............................................................................2.2-16

2.3 Maintenance .......................................................................................2.3-1

2 EN- MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.1 Precautions of Maintenance ........................................................2.3-1

2.3.2 Maintenance Plan........................................................................2.3-2

2.3.3 Grease and Hydraulic Oil ............................................................2.3-3

2.3.4 Lubrication and Maintenance ......................................................2.3-4

2.3.4.1 Components and Features of Lubrication System ..............2.3-4

5
2.3.4.2 Lubrication Principles ..........................................................2.3-4

52
2.3.4.3 Maintenance of Lubrication System ....................................2.3-7

2.3.4.4 Requirements of Lubrication Oil..........................................2.3-8

2.3.5 Routine Check ...........................................................................2.3-10

61
2.3.5.1 Check the Safety Device of the Machine ..........................2.3-10

2.3.5.2 Check the relaxation of Bolts on Molds and Moving Parts2.3-10

70
2.3.5.3 Check Usage of Thermocouple (may be different in compliance
with different machine types) ...........................................................2.3-11

2.3.5.4 Temperature Rising Time of Barrel ...................................2.3-11

04
2.3.5.5 Check All Switches and Devices.......................................2.3-11

2.3.5.6 Cooling Device Check.......................................................2.3-11

2.3.5.7 Lubrication Check .............................................................2.3-11

07

2.3.5.8 Structure Check ................................................................2.3-12

2.3.5.9 Heating Band Check .........................................................2.3-12

22

2.3.6 Heat Exchanger (Oil Cooler) .....................................................2.3-12

2.3.6.1 Structure of Cooler ............................................................2.3-12

2.3.6.2 Use of Cooler ....................................................................2.3-14

20

2.3.6.3 Inspection, Maintenance and Cleaning of Chiller..............2.3-15

2.3.6.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Chiller ...............................2.3-16

2.3.6.5 Tightness Test...................................................................2.3-18

2.3.6.6 Common failures and Troubleshooting .............................2.3-19

2.3.7 Oil-absorbing Filter ....................................................................2.3-20

2.3.7.1 Dismantle ..........................................................................2.3-20

EN- MAIII 3
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.7.2 Cleaning ............................................................................2.3-20

2.3.7.3 Installation .........................................................................2.3-20

2.3.7.4 Notice ................................................................................2.3-20

2.3.8 Replacement of Hydraulic Oil ..................................................2.3-21

2.3.9 Air Filter ...................................................................................2.3-22

5
2.3.10 Pipe Inspection ........................................................................2.3-22

52
2.3.11 Notice for Installation and Dismantling of Barrel and Screw ...2.3-23

2.3.11.1 The Installation of Front Barrel Screw.............................2.3-23

2.3.11.2 Preparatory Work of Screw Disassembly .......................2.3-23

61
2.3.11.3 Preparatory Operation for the Disassembling of Screw ..2.3-24

2.3.11.4 Disassembly of Barrel and Screw ...................................2.3-25

70
2.3.11.5 Schematic Diagram of Screw and Barrel Structures.......2.3-35

2.3.11.6 Disassembly of Screw Head (only for reference)............2.3-35

2.3.12 Cleaning and Test of Screw and Barrel...................................2.3-35

04
2.3.12.1 Cleaning and Test of Screw ............................................2.3-36

2.3.12.2 Cleaning and Test of Barrel ............................................2.3-38

07

2.3.12.3 Installation of Screw and Barrel ......................................2.3-39

2.3.13 Adjustment of Sliding Foot of Movable platen............................2.3-40

2.3.14 Air Supply of Energy Accumulator .............................................2.3-41

22

2.3.15 Table for the Setting of Plastic and Barrel Temperature ............2.3-42
20

4 EN- MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.1 Installation and Calibration

This chapter also applies to the reinstallation and recalibration after the machine is
shifted.

5
Check the following items once the machine arrives:

52
 Check against the part list (delivery instructions);

 Check if there are damages caused in the delivery;

61
 Check if the machine has obvious flaws.

If there are problems with the machine, please inform the agency to confirm
immediately and give feedback to the manufacture in writing.

2.1.1 Environment of installation area

70
When installing the machine, please fully confirm on the ambient
environmental conditions as follows. If the conditions cannot be met, it is not only
04
that the machine may not completely realize its functions but also may cause error
actions, damage the machine and shorten the service life of the machine.
 Ambient temperature
Minimum: +5 °C (41 °F)
07

Maximum: +45 °C (113 °F)

 Ambient relative humidity（without moisture condensation）
Minimum:+20%
Maximum:+80%
22

 Altitude
When the altitude raises 100 meters (330ft), it will losses 1% of the
performance. When the installation site is higher than altitude 1000 meters (3300
ft), a new installation place shall be considered.
20

If the humidity is too high, the insulation status gets worse or the parts may
age ahead of time. Although it is unnecessary to dehumidify, please do not
install the machine in humid environment.
Do not install the machine in places of many dust or organic gas and high

EN- MAIII 2.1-1

 Volume 2 User Manual

concentration corrosive gas.

The machine shall be kept far away from electrically interfered or magnetic
machines (e.g. welding machine).

2.1.2 Lifting

5
Three-plate hydraulic machines are divided into three types:

 small sized machines (integrated type) lift for the entire part;

52
 the medium sized machines adopt combination bodies that cannot be lifted
for the entire part. For the lifting, the locking part and injection part shall be
separated and lifted separately with the separation and lifting methods

61
referred in the following chapters;

 the large sized machines adopt complete-disassembly mode, which

requires to lift after disassembling all the clamping parts and lift the entire
injection part. 70
04
 Please be cautious in the lifting and do not stand under the crane!

 Both lifting and transportation shall be done by operators who are familiar
with mechanical dismounting!
07

 Before lifting, the movable platen shall be at the minimum mold thickness
locking position!
22

 Before lifting, the injection parts of medium and mainframes need to fix the
rear brackets of the rails and the fuselage (Figure 2.1-1) with the transition
pieces, positioning pins, etc. The clamping parts must pass through the tail
plate and the die thickness stop blocks (Figure 2.1-2A) or connected to
20

clamping body with the lifting connection board (Figure 2.1-2B).

After installation and before commissioning and operation, remove the transition
piece and the positioning pin from the injection part (Figure 2.1-1); at the same
time, remove the lifting connection plate in the clamping part (Figure 2.1-2B).

2.1-2 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

EN- MAIII 2.1-3

 Volume 2 User Manual

2.1.2.1 Lifting of Small Sized Machines (Integrated

Machines)

The small sized machines adopt integrated lifting method.

5
Minimum mold
Movable platen thickness position

52
61
70
Fig. 2.1-3 Schematic Diagram of Small Sized Machine（Integrated Machine）
04
2.1.2.2 Lifting of Medium Sized Machines（ Combined

Machines）
07

The medium sized machines adopt combined machines that can not be lifted for
the entire part. When lifting, the locking part and injection part shall be separated as
mentioned in the following chapters.
22

Bolt and Transferring oil Upper cover Side cover

Locking part locating pin cylinder base plate plate Injection part
20

Fig. 2.1-4 Schematic Diagram of Medium Sized Machine

2.1-4 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

Separation and Combination of Locking and Injection Parts:

1) Remove the hinged support of the oil cylinder so separate it from the fixed
platen;

2) Remove the cover plate, connecting hose, steel tube and wires between
the injection part and the clamping part;

5
3) Loosen the tightening screws at the two sides of the injection molding
machine from top to bottom and then dismantle them;

52
4) According to the requirements as shown in Fig. 2.1-6, tighten the cord
fastener and pull horizontally until it is separated from the clamping part.

Combination of Locking and Injection Parts:

61
1) On the basis of qualified installation, place adjustable parallels near the
foundation bolt hole;

2) Place the locking part in compliance with the requirements of the lifting
70
schematic diagram (as Fig. 2.1-5) and lift the injection part to the
corresponding position (as Fig. 2.1-6) slowly and pay attention to the
centralization of the coupling bolt and unthreaded hole when getting close
to the parallels, slightly move it once centralized and then load the spring
04
gasket and screw down the nuts. Install the locating straight pins after it is
screwed down preliminarily;

3) After the preliminary level adjustment, completely screw down the clamp
07

nuts and lock nuts;

4) Install the “upper cover plate” and “side cover plate”.

22
20

EN- MAIII 2.1-5

 Volume 2 User Manual

Lifting Schematic Diagram of Medium Sized Locking Part

Minimum mold
thickness position

5
52
61
Fig. 2.1-5 Lifting Schematic Diagram of Medium Sized Locking Part
70
Schematic Diagram of Lifting of Injection Unit of Medium Sized
Machine
04
07
22
20

Fig. 2.1-6 Schematic Diagram of Lifting of Injection Unit of Medium Sized Machine

2.1-6 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

2.1.2.3 Lifting of Large Sized Machines

The large sized machines adopt combined method so the injection unit shall be
lifted separately when lifting (Fig. 2.1-7); all the clamping units adopt
complete-disassembly method that shall be lifted separately (Fig. 2.1-8A and Fig.
2.1-8B).

5
52
Wire rope

61
70
04

Fig. 2.1-7 Schematic Diagram of Lifting of Injection Unit of Large Sized Machine
07
22
20

Fig. 2.1-8A Schematic Diagram of Lifting of Platen of Large Sized Machine

EN- MAIII 2.1-7

 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
Fig. 2.1-8B Schematic Diagram of Lifting of Clamping Body of Large Sized
Machine

61
2.1.3 Unloading and transportation
Check whether the machine is damaged and the surface is in good condition after
70
the injection molding machine is delivered to the destination and the external
packing is removed. The carrier should record the information about any damage
during the transportation and inform the manufacturer so as to make a claim on the
transportation insurance.
04
A crane with enough lifting cord force is indispensable to lift the machine. Refer to
Chapter 1 of Technical Manual for the weight of machine.
07

In order to protect the machine, the cable under the tensioning action should not be
mounted in the position with weak bearing capacity.

Movement of the machine should conform to the requirements in the cable hanging
diagram in Section 2.1.2 and use the auxiliary parts listed in the table in Section
22

2.1.4.

In case the machine needs to be moved in the plant again under the condition
without crane, rolling logs should be put under the bottom of the machine for
20

movement.

Due to the heavy machine, the loading, unloading and conveying of the machine
should only be done by experienced crane riggers. The following points should be
noted during the machine handling and conveying:

 Do use hoister, transporter and other operational tools (including crane,

hoisting equipment, wire rope) with appropriate power and strength.

 For all the machine components may contact the hanging wire rope, do put
layer of waste cloth or wood block between the wire rope and the machine
2.1-8 EN- MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

component to avoid damage to the latter, such as the tie bar of the
injection molding machine.

 The lifting rope should keep sufficient length with the formed angle less
than 60°.

 Do note the stability and horizontality of the machine during hoisting.

5
 Do remove the wood blocks, other heel blocks or pads after all the
machine handling and conveying are finished.

52
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any machine damage

61
occurred during the transportation.

70
2.1.4 Auxiliary Parts Required during the Machine

Transportation and Descriptions

04
Name Qty. Dimension & Description
Cable and lifting hook 2
Shipping safety protection of 1 Shipped together with the
clamping part machine
07

Shipping safety protection of 1 Shipped together with the

injection part machine
Rolling log or roller required for Several Length close to the machine
ground movement width
22

Waste cloth, wood block Several

20

 Be sure to remove the above mentioned parts for shipping safety

protection prior to the commission upon machine installation and
emplacement, including mold nut fixed platen, lifting supporting frame for
movable and fixed platens, lifting platen for mold closing machine, locating
pin for injection machine, etc；

 Properly keep the above-mentioned dismounted safety shipping protection

components for later use；
EN- MAIII 2.1-9
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.1.5 Removal of Rust Preventer

Rust preventer is applied on all the exposed mechanical parts, such as piston rod,
tie bar and the finished surface of the mold before leaving the factory. The existing
of rust preventer will pollute the lubricating oil and needs to be removed before
installation.

5
52
 Rust preventer provides the basic protection to protect the machine from
corrosion and severe environment;

61
 Do not apply rust preventer on the parts contacting the operating system of
the machine, unless necessary;

 Please wipe the rust preventer on the parts that do not contact with the
operation system of the machine. 70
04
Do not remove the rust preventer with solvent.
07

2.1.6 Foundation Specification

Before installing the machine, be sure to make the ground, arrange the machine
22

layout and place adjustable mats as per the outside drawing, ground plot and mat
arrangement drawing respectively provided by the manufacturer, thus to ensure:

 rational machine layout in the plant to make sufficient room around for the
entry of installation or operating personnel;
20

 bearing capacity of the ground conforming to the machine weight and

operating requirement;

 rational layout of adjustable mat to provide reasonable support for the

machine;

 matching of power and water supplying points of the plant with power and
water input points of the machine;

2.1-10 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

 reserved emplacement holes for foundation bolts installation for large and
medium-sized machine;

 Do clean up the ground in advance;

5
 As the machine is equipped with limit block, mounting hole on the ground
should be made by customer.

52
2.1.7 Instruction of Adjustable Mat

61
70
04

Fig. 2.1-9 Adjustable mat for small-size machine

07
22
20

Fig. 2.1-10 Adjustable mat for large and medium-size machines

Haitian Series injection molding machines should be placed on the adjustable mat
to adjust the machine horizontality and ensure smooth running.

Adjusting methods for the adjustable mat of small-size injection molding machine:

1) Adjust the screw rod to reach the height around the middle;
EN- MAIII 2.1-11
 Volume 2 User Manual

2) Adjust the screw rod on the mat needs to be adjusted to correct the
machine; refer to Section 2.1.9 for the final requirements for the correction.

3) Screw up the nut after the adjustment is finished;

Adjustment methods for the adjustable mats of large and medium-size injection
molding machines:

5
1) Screw the adjusting screw clockwise to heighten the mat and screw
anticlockwise to lower the mat;

52
2) Adjust the adjusting screw of the adjustable mat to reach the height around
the middle;

3) Based on the horizontal condition of the machine, adjust the screw rod on

61
the mat needs to be adjusted to correct the machine; refer to Section 2.1.9
for the final requirements for the correction.

The adjustable mat will be provided together with the machine.

70
The adoption of adjustable mats reduces the contact surface of the ground and
correspondingly increases the pressure exerted by the machine to the ground.
Therefore, do make sure the bearing capacity of the ground should meet the
requirements of Haitian.
04
07

When the adjustable mat is adopted to correct the machine, the adjusting distance
shall not exceed 15 mm, otherwise the mat will be damaged.
22

2.1.8 Installation and Spouting of Foundation Bolt

20

The excessive vibration of middle-large size machines during the operation may
cause displacement. Use foundation bolts to fix the machine. Installation and
spouting steps are as follows:

1) Steadily lift the part to be 500 mm off the ground, place the foundation bolts
from bottom to top, put on the flat washer, spring washer and nut, rotate
the nut to make the end face of the bolt to be 3 times screw pitch higher
than the upper end face of the nut.

2.1-12 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

2) Place the machine on the mat and make sure the foundation bolt aligning
to the preformed hole. Then close up the injection part and the clamping
part according to the method in 2.1.2. After that, based on the Section
2.1.9, make coarse adjustment on machine level, movable and fixed
platens and the coaxiality between the nozzle and the mold location hole.

3) Upon the confirmation of conformance, carry out concrete spouting on the

5
foundation preformed hole to fix the foundation bolts.

52
4) After a period of maintenance, make sure the spouted concrete has set
(maintenance period in summer is about ten days, and about fifteen days
in winter). Then, based on the Section 2.1.9, make fine adjustment on
machine level, index of movable and fixed platens and the coaxiality of the

61
nozzle. After the confirmation and data recording, use a leveraging rod to
screw up the foundation bolts and nuts to fix the machine. (See the
followed attached table for the recommended length of the leveraging rod).

Attached Table Length of leveraging rod

70
Specification of bolt Length of leveraging rod
M16 500
M18 600
04
M20 700
M24 850
M30 900
07

M36 1000
22

 Do not screw up the nut on the foundation bolt before the concrete is
completed solidified.
20

 Fasten the nuts on the adjustable mat after the calibration；

 In order to prevent the influence on the levelness may caused by the

possible change of the foundation, recommend to recheck the levelness
condition of the machine upon 2 weeks’ operation.

EN- MAIII 2.1-13

 Volume 2 User Manual

2.1.9 Calibration after Installation

 Do clean the movable mold orbit before machine running. Do not store any
sundries in this area；

5
 Install the components and parts dismounted during the transportation on

52
the machine again；

 The machine has been calibrated before shipping and passed the delivery
inspection. Due to the transportation and secondary assembly, some

61
indexes of the machine may change or even fail to meet the standards.
Therefore, re-calibration is necessary. Major indexes needs to be
re-calibrated are: level of clamping part, level of injection part,
perpendicularity adjustment of fixed platen, adjustment of sliding foot for
70
movable platens, coaxiality of movable and fixed platen, parallelism of
movable and fixed platen, coaxiality between nozzle and mold location
hole, etc；

 Testing tools to be prepared: 1. precision level; 2. leveling rod;

04
07
22

precision level
20

leveling rod

2.1-14 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

Suggested precision of the level: 0.02mm/m

2.1.9.1 Level Adjustment of Small Sized Machines

5
52
61
70
04
07
22

The final standard to estimate if the level adjustment of the machine is qualified is
whether the mold can be adjusted smoothly under an operating oil pressure that is
not higher than 7Mpa; and whether the mold can be moved stably under an
operating oil pressure that is not higher than 3MPa as follows:
20

1) Make sure the machine is at the minimum mold thickness position; install
the adjustable parallels in compliance with the installation holes of the
machine;
2) Put the level gauge at the operation side of the machine horizontally
between the movable platen and the adjustable platen, which shall be close
to the movable platen as much as possible as shown in Fig. 2.1-11;
3) Coarse adjustment: adjust the adjustable parallel at the operation side of
the machine until the air bubble is approximately in the middle; put the level
EN- MAIII 2.1-15
 Volume 2 User Manual

gauge at the same position of the reverse operation side of the machine
horizontally and adjust the adjustable parallel of this side until the air bubble
is approximately in the middle; rotate the level gauges 90°so that they are
on the operation side and reverse operation side of the machine
longitudinally and the air bubbles are approximately in the middle with the
same operation method as above mentioned (refer to Section 2.1.7 for
adjustment of parallels);

5
4) Fine adjustment: repeat step 3 for several times until the horizontal

52
levelness is about 0.5mm/m and the longitudinal levelness is about
0.5mm/m;
5) Estimate the mold adjustment and moving actions in compliance with the
above final standard, if qualified, the level adjustment is qualified.

61
2.1.9.2 Level Adjustment of Medium and Large Sized

Machines 70
04
07
22
20

The final standard to estimate if the level adjustment of the machine is qualified is
whether the mold can be adjusted smoothly under an operating oil pressure that is
not higher than 8Mpa; and whether the mold can be moved stably under an
operating oil pressure that is not higher than 4MPa as follows:
2.1-16 EN- MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

1) Make sure the machine is at the minimum mold thickness position;

2) Put the level gauge at the operation side of the machine horizontally
between the movable platen and the adjustable platen, which shall be
close to the movable platen as much as possible as shown in Fig. 2.1-12;
3) Coarse adjustment: adjust the adjustable parallel at the operation side of
the machine until the air bubble is approximately in the middle; put the level

5
gauge at the same position of the reverse operation side of the machine
horizontally and adjust the adjustable parallel of this side until the air

52
bubble is approximately in the middle; rotate the level gauges 90°so that
they are on the operation side and reverse operation side of the machine
longitudinally and the air bubbles are approximately in the middle with the
same operation method as above mentioned;

61
4) Fine adjustment: repeat step 3 for several times until the horizontal
levelness is about 0.5mm/m and the longitudinal levelness is about
0.5mm/m;
70
5) Adjust the injection bottom box so that the nozzle aligns with the center of
the fixed platen, the permissible deviation shall comply with Section
2.1.9.4;
6) Estimate the mold adjustment and moving actions in compliance with the
04
above final standard, if qualified, the level adjustment is qualified.

2.1.9.3 Calibration of Parallelism between Platens

07

Usually, the parallelism of the mold installation base level for fixed and movable
platens is relatively stable. However, due to the improper transportation and
installation, it may change. Recheck after the installation.
22

The parallelism tolerance of the mold installation base level for fixed and movable
platens is as follows:

Effective spacing of tie bar Clamping force = 0 Maximum clamping force

20

≤250 ≤0.12 ≤0.1

＞250～400 ≤0.15 ≤0.12
＞400～630 ≤0.20 ≤0.15
＞630～1000 ≤0.30 ≤0.20
＞1000～1600 ≤0.50 ≤0.25
＞1600 ≤0.60 ≤0.30

EN- MAIII 2.1-17

 Volume 2 User Manual

2.1.9.4 Calibration of the Coaxiality between Nozzle and

Mold Location Hole

The coaxiality between the injection nozzle and the mold location hold on the fixed
platen can be adjusted by yourself according to the following methods.
Requirements below should be met after the adjustment:

5
52
Dia. of the mold location hole ≤125 ＞125～250
Coaxiality between the nozzle
≤Φ0.2 ≤Φ0.25
and the mold location hole

61
 This calibration should be conducted after the transverse and longitudinal
level adjustment;
 Prior to the calibration, loosen the backing-up screws coupling both sides
70
and ends of nozzle base with the machine body (Figure 2.2-9), and also
loosen the lock nuts on the horizontal adjusting bolts in both sides of the
nozzle base (Figure 2.2-10);
 Temperature of barrel: 200-250°C;
04
 Be sure to complete the calibration of nozzle height by adjusting the height
of the bottom box; if necessary, use adjusting screw for assistive fine
tuning. Recheck the horizontal requirements during the adjustment;
07
22
20

Fig. 2.1-13 Diagram of nozzle centering

① Position measurement in horizontal direction (same distance from the
nozzle to the left and right sides of the mold center position, in horizontal
direction).

2.1-18 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

② Position measurement in vertical direction (same distance from the nozzle

to the up and down sides of the mold center position, in vertical direction).
③ Fixed platen.

Do calibrate the coaxiality between the nozzle and the mold location hole in case of
the following circumstances:

5
 The coaxiality between the nozzle and the center of the locating ring is out
of the tolerance range;

52
 When the contact pressure between the nozzle and the mold is built up,
the nozzle moves horizontally or vertically;

Steps of coaxiality calibration between the nozzle and the mold location hole are as

61
follows:

1) Adjust in vertical direction

a) Lower or raise the nozzle position by adjusting the machine height to

reach the requirements;
70
b) Adjust the upper and lower fastening bolts and adjusting screws (as
Fig. 2.2-9 in Section 2.2.4) on the injection unit base to ensure the
consistence of the nozzle center and the locating center in vertical
04
direction;
c) Measure with a vernier caliper to see whether the sizes of ② in Fig.
2.1-13 are the same. If not, repeatedly adjust the adjusting screw until
the sizes of ②are the same;
07

d) After the adjustment in vertical direction, adjust the barrel support to the
position contacting the guide rail with a slight jacking, whish should be
repeatedly adjusted specifically combining with the clearance between
22

the screw and the barrel. Then adjust in the horizontal direction.

2) Steps of adjustment in horizontal direction

e) adjust the level adjusting screws at the two sides of the injection unit
20

base as Fig. 2.2-10 to reach horizontal centering of nozzle center and

measure with a vernier caliper to see whether the sizes of ①in Figure
2.1-13 are the same;
f) If not, repeatedly adjust the adjusting screw until the sizes of ①are the
same;
g) Screw up the locks nut after the adjustment.

EN- MAIII 2.1-19

 Volume 2 User Manual

Prior to the buildup of the injection pressure, do adjust the nozzle center to the
central position of the mold location hole;

The calibration of the coaxiality between the screw and the barrel should be done

5
by professional staff.

52
Fasten the nuts on the adjustable mat after the calibration;

61
In order to prevent the influence on the levelness may caused by the possible
change of the foundation, recommend to recheck the levelness condition of the
machine upon 4 weeks’ operation.
70
2.1.10 Cooling Water Supply System
04
Pressure of cooling water 0.3-0.5MPA, minimum pressure difference 0.15MPA,
water temperature ≤28°C.
07

2.1.10.1 Layout of Cooling Water Piping

The cooling water system has three loops, respectively are:
22

1）hydraulic cooling loop；

2）screw machine cooling loop；
3）mold cooling loop.
20

One route of the water supply source delivers water to the oil cooler (or oil cooler
and the screw barrel), and the other delivers water to the cooling water manifold
and then to the mold upon distributary to reach effective temperature control.

2.1-20 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
Fig. 2.1-14 Schematic diagram 1 of cooling water piping layout
管道布置参考示意图
In Out

61
Oil cooler
Out
Water Injector
In cooler
manifold Out
Mold
70 To other cooling systems
Out
Cooling water supply
supply Cooling flow meter
(optional when required)
04
Out

In Oil cooler
In
07

Fig. 2.1-15 Schematic diagram 2 of cooling water piping layout

2.1.10.2 Discharge of Cooling Water

22

After the completion of injection molding, stop the cooling water and discharge the
cooling water out of the oil cooler.

In winter times, especially depending on the weather conditions, cooling water

20

should continue the circulation under lower pressure during the machine stall.
(during the night time, if any freeze possibility of the cooling water, discharge the
cooling water in the oil cooler and blow-dry the residual moisture with compressed
air to protect the oil cooler and other devices from damage.)

EN- MAIII 2.1-21

 Volume 2 User Manual

 It is crucial to keep the water for the cooling machine clean.

 If the cooling water is underground water or unfiltered pool water, the

external foreign matters will completely block the filtering components and
piping and affect the cooling efficiency of the cooler. To prevent the
occurrence of such situations, we suggest to pre-filter the cooling water,
Filtration accuracy 0.5mm or less.

5
52
In case the cooling water is supplied via the drinking water system, the operator
must make sure the cooling water would not return back to the drinking water

61
system.

2.1.10.3 Cooling Water Flow Rate

70
The change of cooling water flow rate should be subject to the injection condition,
water temperature, atmospheric temperature, pollution extent of the oil cooler and
other factors. Therefore, the flows shown in the table below are only references.
04
Appropriate flow should be set up according to the actual molding.

The cooling water flow of the cooler is shown as the table below:

Pump-driven motor Cooling water flow Pump-driven Cooling water flow

07

power motor power

11 KW (15 HP) 16 L/min or larger 55 KW (75 HP) 79 L/min or larger
15 KW (20 HP) 21 L/min or larger 75 KW (100 HP) 107 L/min or larger
22

18.5 KW (25 HP) 26 L/min or larger 90 KW (122 HP) 129 L/min or larger
22 KW (30 HP) 31 L/min or larger 110 KW (150 HP) 157 L/min or larger
20

30 KW (40 HP) 43 L/min or larger 135 KW (184 HP) 193 L/min or larger
37 KW (50 HP) 53 L/min or larger 155 KW (211 HP) 221 L/min or larger
45 KW (60 HP) 64 L/min or larger 220 KW (299 HP) 314 L/min or larger

The temperature of the hydraulic oil in the oil tank should not exceed 55℃ during
normal operation.

2.1-22 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

Cooling water flow of mold cooling water segregation (depending on the molding
condition)

Heater power Cooling water flow Heater power Cooling water flow
6 KW 10.5 L/min or larger 35 KW 60.0 L/min or larger
7 KW 12.0 L/min or larger 40 KW 69.0 L/min or larger

5
8 KW 13.5 L/min or larger 45 KW 77.5 L/min or larger

52
9 KW 15.5 L/min or larger 50 KW 86.0 L/min or larger
10 KW 17.5 L/min or larger 55 KW 94.5 L/min or larger
15 KW 26.0 L/min or larger 60 KW 103.0 L/min or larger

61
20 KW 34.5 L/min or larger 90 KW 155 L/min or larger
25 KW 43.0 L/min or larger 110 KW 190 L/min or larger
30 KW 51.5 L/min or larger 170 KW
70 290 L/min or larger
270 KW 460 L/min or larger
04

 The filling of cooling water has provided the cooling function.

07

 The cooling devices and rubber tubes are designed on basis of the
standard as the cooling water temperature reaching 50℃.

 Should you need thermal insulating hose lines for heating operation (such
22

as the connection with external heating device), please contact our Sales
Department.

2.1.11 Filling of Hydraulic Oil

20

Fill brand new clean hydraulic oil through the oil filler with special oil filter vehicle
until the upper limit of the liquid level meter (refer to Section 2.3.3 for the type of
hydraulic oil). After the completion of electrical wiring, carefully check all the parts
of the machine to see whether any obstacle and danger to the parts motion. Start
the machine upon the confirmation of safety and check the oil level of the oil tank. If
the oil level is lower than the middle scale, fill the hydraulic oil again until the oil
level higher than the middle scale, normally needs to reach 3/4-4/5 of the oil tank
capacity.

EN- MAIII 2.1-23

 Volume 2 User Manual

Refer to the oil tank capacity in Chapter 1 of Technical Manual for the supply
quantity of hydraulic oil. The actual supply may be larger than this quantity.

 Do not mix up hydraulic oil in different brands or types.

5
 Do not start the oil pump motor within three hours after the filling of
hydraulic oil in order to discharge the gas in the oil.

52
2.1.12 Connection of Power Circuit
 The electrical equipment of the machine is designed in accordance with

61
customer’s requirements and relevant national standard.

 The electrical wiring should be solved by qualified electric engineering

company or personnel.


70
For three-phase alternating-current supply, each phase should be
equipped with an over current and overload protection device conforming
to a rating value.
04
 Connect the electric power cable to the power input wiring board in the
electric component box. For related parameters requirements, please refer
to main circuit part (including the total power of the machine) in Chapter 4
of Technical Manual.
07

Other different supply voltages should be stated to the Company during ordering.
22
20

The connection of power supply unit should be executed by qualified personnel.

 The main machine power, current and wiring reference indicated on the
nameplate and electrical diagram should be provided based on
conventional working conditions. If the working conditions are not
conventional, they should be calculated subject to the actual usage;

2.1-24 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

 Pay special attention to the amperage and correct phase sequences of the
adopted over current and overload protection device;

 The sum of load current of all the external sockets should not exceed 25A；

 Do measure the supply voltage. The range of input power voltage should
be ±10% of the rated voltage and the frequency should be ±1 Hz of the
rated frequency. In case the voltage deviation is beyond the above ranges,

5
please contact the relevant power supply company.

52
 To avoid accidents caused by electric leakage, connect one guide line to
the grounding rod of the machine and connect the other end to the
grounding part conforming to the requirements of national standard. The
wiring principles of the grounding wires are:

61
1）For the power line below (including) 16 square, the section surface of
the grounding wire should be as large as the guide line (excluding high
temperature line);
70
2 ） For the power line between 16 to 35 square (including), the
grounding wire should be 16 square;
3 ） For the power line over 35 square, the section surface of the
grounding wire should be half as large as the guide line;
04

2.1.12.1 Test of Rotation Direction of Oil Pump Motor

07
22
20

Do check the rotation direction of the oil pump motor after the power supply is
connected.

Before start up the oil pump, do make sure the hydraulic oil in the oil tank has
reached the upper limit position of the liquid level meter.

The check steps are as follows:

EN- MAIII 2.1-25

 Volume 2 User Manual

1） Switch on the power;

2） Start the oil pump motor shortly with the oil pump motor switch on the
operation panel and turn it off immediately;
3） Check if the rotation direction is consistent with the arrowhead direction
on the motor shell.

If the direction is incorrect, do turn off the power switch of the machine, the power

5
switch on the supply line and then change the wiring and exchange the power input
wires L1 and L2. (refer to the major electric circuit diagram in Chapter 4 of

52
Technical Manual).

61
 In case the rotation direction of the oil pump motor is wrong, the hydraulic
oil pump will be damaged; 70
 Shut down the oil pump motor via the oil pump motor switch button on the
operation panel;
04
07
22
20

2.1-26 EN- MAIII

 Volume 2 User Manual

2.2 Machine Commissioning

This Chapter is also applied to the re-commissioning after machine displacement.

2.2.1 Instruction on Main Parts of the Injection Molding

5
Machine

52
The main parts of the injection molding machine are as follows in Fig. 2.2-1:

61
70
04
Fig. 2.2-1 Main parts of the machine

1.tail protection door 2. tail plate 3. movable

07

platen
4. movable door at non-operation side 5. fixed platen
6. movable door at operation side 7. operation panel 8. nozzle shield
9. barrel shield 10. distribution box
22

2.2.2 Preparation
20

Please read the content in Controller Operation Manual, get familiar with the
operating method of the control system applied by the machine and start the
followed commissioning before operating the machine.

2.2.2.1 Proper Wearing of Operators

Refer to the 1.2.7 in the safety manual.
EN-MAIII 2.2-1
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.2.2.2 Work Needs to be Completed before New Machine

Commissioning

Check to make sure the machine has been installed, including the levelness of the
machine, correct installation of parts dismantled during the transportation, proper

5
connection of electric wires or oil pipes disconnected during the
transportation and the removal of the parts additionally installed for

52
transportation and lifting.

Check to make sure the supply line and grounding wire of the
machine has been correctly connected and the cooling water has
been properly connected and ready in service.

61
Check to make sure the hydraulic oil has been reached above the
center line of the liquid level meter as shown in the Figure 2.2-2. Do
not started the oil pump motor within three hours after the filling of
70
hydraulic oil for the sake of the discharge of gas in the oil.

Check to make sure all the moving surfaces of the machine has Fig. 2.2-2
been cleaned and lubricated.
04
2.2.3 Debugging of New Machine

2.2.3.1 Power on
07

Switch on the supply line upon the checking of conformance requirements of

voltage and frequency between the supply line and the main motor. Pull the power
switch of the machine upward to the position of On.
22

Open the door of the distribution box, pull all the small cut off switches in the box
and connect all the loop power according to the component layout of the electric
diagram in Chapter 4 of Technical Manual. The LCD on the operation panel should
be displayed with characters or graphics at that time as shown in Figure 2.2-3. This
20

indicates the control computer starts working and ready for the next step.

2.2-2 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
61
Fig. 2.2-3 Display diagram

2.2.3.2 Starting of Motor

70
Press the motor start key on the operation panel to start up the oil pump motor. In
case of more than one motor, check the rotation of each motor respectively. If
there’s no abnormal noise, that means the motor can be normally started.
04
2.2.3.3 Electric Heating Starting
Enter the temperature setting screen to set the temperature for each zone. (for
example, for the five-zone temperature control, set the temperature for each zone
07

from the direction of the nozzle to be 180, 180, 180, 160 and 140; for the four-zone
temperature control, set the temperature to be 180, 180, 160 and 140. Different
plastic has different temperature requirements. Refer to 2.3-14 for recommended
values.
22

Press the electric heating button and the barrel starts to heat. Generally it needs
over thirty minutes to heat to the set temperature under normal condition.
20

The maximum temperature of the barrel for PVC machines (UPVC, CPVC) can be
set to 200 °C.

Do not operate the injection motion when the temperature has not reached the set
value.

EN-MAIII 2.2-3
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.2.3.4 Confirmation of safety precautions

After the machine is installed in place, and starts trial run, firstly check the

5
effectiveness of safety facilities.

52
In case of any safety device failure, lose no time to shut down the machine.

Before the machine is restored, identify the failure cause and remove.

It is recommended to use following methods to check safety facilities:

61
During trial run, a joint check should be conducted together by operators and
installers, to carefully observe each moving part of the machine with any obstacles,
confirm and close the sliding safety gate.
70
04
Emergency stop button

The emergency stop button may be installed in following areas of the machine
subject to different machine types:
07

·on the control panel of the injection molding machine

·at rear side of the injection molding machine
·on manual control device of the robot
·Inside the safeguard
22

Close all safety gates, start the motor and press emergency stop button to
immediately shut down all machine movements and motor. Then the alarm light will
flicker and emergency stop alarm will appear in the display.
20

Sliding safety gate

Visually observe the completeness of the transparent window of the safety gate.

Check whether the sliding safety gate is securely fixed, moves with smoothness
and the mechanical lock is functioning.

2.2-4 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

Check whether the safety interlock monitor device of the sliding safety gate is
functioning (such as stroke switch, safety valve, mechanical safety confirmation,
screen display)

Confirm that when the sliding safety gate is open whether all dangerous
movements come to a stop.

5
52
Automatic safety gate

Visually observe the completeness of the transparent window of the safety gate.

61
Check whether the automatic safety gate is securely fixed, and moves with
smoothness.

Check whether the safety interlock monitor device of the automatic safety gate is
70
functioning (such as stroke switch, safety valve, mechanical safety confirmation,
screen display)

Confirm that when the automatic safety gate is open whether all dangerous
movements come to a stop.
04
07

Safety step

The safety step will be activated in following two testing methods (Only suitable for
machines with CE or North America Standards):
22

Method 1: test conditions are that no emergency stop button is pressed and all
mold area safety gates are closed and the motor is shut down.

After the machine is restarted, press the safety step test confirm button on the
20

controller panel display.

At this moment, the safety step will conduct a safety check by itself.

If in a certain time, it will prompt for the completion of safety step performance test.
It indicates that the safety step is normal.

Method 2: when the machine is open for an extended time, it is necessary for
customers to manually inspect the safety step every 7 days. Operators may enter
relevant display to check.

EN-MAIII 2.2-5
 Volume 2 User Manual

When the machine has the motor closed and is under mold height adjustment
mode, click “step inspection”.

At this moment, the safety step will conduct a safety check by itself.

If in a certain time (10S), it will prompt for the completion of safety step
performance test. It indicates that the safety step is normal.

5
If the safety step is not timely cleaned, it may result in fatal injury. Make sure the
safety step surface is always clean. The obstacles amid may influence the function

52
of the safety step. And when the machine is closed, make sure to clear off. During
each maintenance, lose no time to clean the safety step.

61
Tail safety gate of the clamping unit
70
This safety gate is installed at the tail of the machine, to be used during
maintenance and repair. When the safety gate is open, make sure that all
dangerous movements of the machine will come to a stop.

Visually observe the completeness of the transparent window of the safety gate.
04
Check whether the safety gate is securely fixed.

Confirm that when the sliding safety gate is open whether all dangerous
movements come to a stop.
07

2.2.3.5 Manual Operation

As described in the operational manual, enter parameter settings screen for all the
22

moves and set parameters of low pressure and low speed for the moves.

Press move buttons in the manual state to observe whether the moves can work
steadily and make sure whether the machine function is normal. Reset parameters
20

on screen of all moves according to requirements of normal move. Press move

buttons in the manual state to observe whether the moves work normally. If there
are no problems, manual works normally.

2.2-6 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

After mold opening/closing, injection and such back finish, observe the oil level of
the tank. If the oil level is below the midline of the tank gauge, stop the motor and fill
hydraulic oil to above the midline of the tank gauge.

2.2.3.6 Semi-auto and Full-auto

After all moves work normally in the manual state, press the semi-auto button in the

5
mold open state and then open and close the safety door, the machine will
automatically start semi-auto operating cycle. Observe whether its semi-auto mode

52
operates normally. If there are no failures happening after one cycle, open and
close the safety door once again to make the machine enter next cycle.

Press the full-auto button after three to five cycles of normal semi-auto operation,

61
the machine will enter the state of full-auto. Observe whether the machine works
normally.

If the above mentioned functions all work well, the machine completes debugging
can work on injection molding. 70
Make sure whether all moving parts return to the set starting position according to
the prompt on the screen. If the parts haven’t reached the position, please press
function buttons of relevant moves to make them back to the starting position. Then
04
press the full-auto button and cycle on button, the machine will enter the state of
full-auto. Observe whether the machine works normally.

If the above mentioned functions all work well, the machine completes debugging
07

can work on injection molding.

2.2.4 Mold Installation

22

2.2.4.1 Preparation Before Mold Installation

Measure the length, width and height of the mold and compare them with the
statistics at the technical parameter table in Chapter 1 of Technical Manual to judge
20

whether the mold can be installed on the machine.

Measure the weight of the mold and compare it with mold bearing capacity of the
machine to judge whether the mold can be installed on the machine.

Measure the outer diameter of the locating ring of the mold to see whether it
matches the mold locating ring of the fixed platen in Chapter 1 of Technical Manual.

Measure the gate size of the mold and the distance between the gate and the mold
installation surface of the fixed platen. Then compare them with relevant technical

EN-MAIII 2.2-7
 Volume 2 User Manual

data in Chapter 1 of Technical Manual to judge whether the nozzle of the machine
matches the mold well.

Measure the size of the ejector platen of the mold and compare it with relevant
statistics in Chapter 1 of Technical Manual to judge whether the machine is proper.

Set mold open distance according to the actual height of the mold and the space for
the product to demold smoothly and drop down after mold open and set the mold

5
open distance to the set value by manual mold open.

52
Set up the ejector stroke according to the designed parameter of the mold so as not
to destroy the mold when adjusting the mold height.

Prepare mold clamps, heel block of pressure plate, compression bolt, nut, flat
washer, lock washer, spanner and pipe fitting.

61
2.2.4.2 Correct Installation of Mold 70
04
07

Fig. 2.2-4 Fig. 2.2-5 Fig. 2.2-6

22

 Fig. 2.2-4 Upper and lower edges of the fixed mold are not aligned (side view);

 Fig.2.2-5 Left and right size of the fix mold are not aligned (top view);

 Fig.2.2-6 Upper and lower, left and right sizes of the fix mold are aligned, which
20

is correct;

Moving and fixed molds must be installed correctly, which can not only extend the
service life of the mold but improve the quality of the product.

2.2-8 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.2.4.3 Correct Lifting Method for Mold

5
52
61
Fig. 2.2-7 Lifting diagram of mold
The center of gravity of the mold must be kept stable during lifting as shown in Fig.
70
2.2-7, which can not only make lifting smooth and mold bear averaged force but
avoid unexpected damage that may happen during lifting.

2.2.4.4 Mold Installation Procedure

04
07

Mold installation all needs to be manually operated. All the mechanical operations
below should be handled in the manual state or mold adjusting state. Shut down
the oil pump motor before manual operation to ensure the safety of operators.
22

Step 1: Start the oil pump motor;

Step 2: Open mold to open the platen;

20

Step 3: Move back the injection unit;

Step 4: Shut down the oil pump motor.

When the movable platen is at the mold open reached position, steps 1-4 can be
omitted.

Step 5: Adjust the position and the quantity of ejectors to make them appropriate
for the mold.
EN-MAIII 2.2-9
 Volume 2 User Manual

Step 6: Make sure that the surfaces of fix or movable platen and of the mold are
clean without any oil stains. Then lift a couple of mold halves and put them into the
mold platen (pay attention not to striking the mold against the tie bar or other
machine parts while putting). Place the locating ring into the mold locating ring on
the fixed platen to make the surface of the mold touch the mounting face of the
fixed platen.

5
52
Make sure that the mold halves won’t be separated during lifting.

Step 7: Fix the fixed platen of the mold on the fixed platen with bolts, mold clamps,

61
heel block of pressure plate, flat washer and lock washer. There is no need of great
clamp force.

70
Please refer to the relevant dimensions of mold installation in Chapter 1 of
Technical Manual for the size of the bolt. The depth of the screw H should be 1.5 to
1.8 times the diameter of the bolt Φ. H and Φ are shown in Fig. 2.2-8.
04

H
07

Φ
22

Fig. 2.2-8

Step 8: Start the oil pump motor.

Step 9: Manually close the mold in the mold adjusting state to make the movable
20

platen gradually touch the mold until close contact.

Step 10: After the mold is completely closed, align the center of the nozzle and the
center of the mold gate, and calibrate contacts. Make sure that the center of the
nozzle is aligned exactly with the center of the mold gate. If it is not correctly
aligned with the center, adjust up and down or left and right as required. The
following are adjustment methods:

2.2-10 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

1) Loosen the binding bolt on the nozzle support before the injection unit and
the jam nuts at both sides of the injection base, as shown in Fig. 2.2-9 and
Fig. 2.2-10.

2) Adjust the nozzle height adjustment screw as needed, to correct upper and
lower deviation; adjust the nozzle lateral adjustment screw to correct left
and right deviation.

5
3) Tighten the binding bolt and jam nut after adjustment.

52
Jam nut Injection unit

61
Nozzle lateral adjustment screw

Fig. 2.2-9
70 Fig.Fig.
4-102.2-10
04
First observe the length of the nozzle and the depth of the mold feeding inlet before
moving the nozzle to see if it is involved, which may cause damage to the nozzle or
heating band.
07

Step 11: Shut down the oil pump motor.

Step 12: Tighten the bolts of mold clamps on the fixed platen and lock the mold on
the fixed platen.
22

Step 13: Tighten the bolts of mold clamps on the movable platen as the mold
clamps on the fixed platen and lock the mold on the movable platen.
20

Fasten the bolt tightly so as to make sure that the mold won’t drop down during
mold open.

Step 14: Detach the belt or wire rope used for lifting.

Step 15: Set up all positions, pressure and speed of mold opening/closing,
especially set the high-pressure clamp pressure to the pressure required by the
product.
EN-MAIII 2.2-11
 Volume 2 User Manual

Step 16: Start the oil pump motor.

Step 17: Open mold to the end and adjust the position where opening is slow,
which shall be higher than the high pressure closing position.

Step 18: Set up parameters for mold open and close.

Step 19: Close the safety door and press the mold adjusting button twice, the

5
machine will enter the state of auto mold adjusting.

Step 20: Open and close the safety door, the machine will adjust the mold

52
automatically and then return to the manual mode after adjustment.

Step 21: Press the mold close button to do mold close and then shut down the oil
pump motor after mold close.

61
Step 22: Tighten all bolts of binding molds again.

Step 23: Connect with other pipelines relevant to the mold, such as cooling water
pipes. 70
At this point, the mold is installed.

2.2.4.5 Related Factors that Influence Mold Functions

04
 Temperature difference between moving mold and fixed mold: the
temperature difference between moving mold and fixed mold will lead to
different thermal expansions of the mold, which will further cause
07

unexpected wear or damage to the mold during operation or may cause

displacement of mold joints;

 Higher mold temperature; higher mold temperature may be as a result of

invalid alignment of the mold caused by thermal expansion. In particular,
22

asymmetrical linear fixed points are especially severe, which may lead to
coaxiality displacement of moving mold and fixed mold. Aiming at this
situation, lift the mold up to the precise positioning position with the
hoisting machine after heating, loosen the fixed bolt, repeat mold
20

installation and release pressure for three times repeatedly.

 Parallelism and height evenness of mold thermal baffle; their deviation

may lead to heterogeneous distribution of mold pressure and further result
in burr and rag of products and increase wear to the thermal baffle.
Therefore, the height and parallelism of the thermal baffle should be
checked constantly during use.

 Non-centrosymmetric mold needs greater clamp force; the farther the

asymmetric mold cavity is away from the center, the greater the clamp
2.2-12 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

force will need. Therefore, the mold had better be designed into symmetric
structure and as close to the center of the mold as possible.

2.2.5 Procedures of Injection Molding

2.2.5.1 Precautions of Injection Molding

5
In order to protect the screw, start operating the screw 15 to 30 minutes after the
temperature of all points of the barrel reaches the set value. Pay attention to the

52
following matters during injection molding:

 In order to prevent the screw from destroying, it should test run at a speed
lower than 60rpm when rotating without material.

61
 Keep your hands and face away from the front end of the injection molding
nozzle.

 Finish installing the mold before injection molding.

70
 For all moves unspecified in 2.2.5.3 Working Procedure of Injection
Molding, do in the manual status.

2.2.5.2 Hydraulic Oil Temperature

04

The best working temperature of hydraulic oil is 35-40°C. If the temperature is

below 25°C, the viscosity of oil is too high; if the temperature is above 55°C, the
07

viscosity of oil is too low.

In order that the machine can be at the best condition when starting injection
molding, machines with preheating function are recommended doing hydraulic oil
preheating if the oil temperature is below 25°C. The preheating can be controlled
22

by setting temperature parameters on the computer (servo preheating is an

optional function, which is suitable for machines used in cold areas and clients who
demands oil temperature range). The oil temperature setting and monitoring
software interface are detailed in the oil temperature of the operational manual.
20

2.2.5.3 Working Procedure of Injection Molding

Step 1: Set the temperature of barrel heating to appropriate temperature for the
currently used material, wait for about 15 minutes after the material temperature
reaches the set value and then go on to the next step;

Step 2: Open the cover of the hopper, pour into plastic raw material and cover it (in
the event of auto feeder, follow the instruction of the feeder);

EN-MAIII 2.2-13
 Volume 2 User Manual

Step 3: Roughly set up the end position of charge, pressure and speed of charge
and pressure of the charge back-pressure valve according to the weight of the
product, proportion of raw material and total injection amount of the machine;
meanwhile, set up relevant parameters of injection and holding pressure. The
storage back pressure can be adjusted directly on the operation panel. For details
of parameter setting, refer to the storage back pressure of the operational manual.

5
52
Excessive back pressure will increase energy consumption during charging.

Step 4: Press the motor on button to start the motor;

Step 5: Press the mold close button to start mold close to until the end of mold

61
close;

Step 6: Press the injection unit forward button to make the injection unit move
forward until the nozzle mouth is pressed against the mold gate;
70
For different plastics and molds, the sequence of step 5 and step 6 may be
04
changed.

Step 7: Press the charge button, screw will rotate and, at the same time, gradually
return to the set position, then charging will stop automatically; charging can also
07

be stopped by pressing the charge button again during charging;

Step 8: Press the injection button to start injection and holding pressure actions;

Step 9: Release the injection button when holding pressure finishes and press the
22

charge button to start charging of the next mold;

Step 10: Cool for enough time after charging and then press the mold open button
to start mold open;
20

Step 11: Do ejector move after mold open, open the safety door and take out the
product;

Step 12: Observe the forming status of the product and adjust relevant parameters
accordingly;

Repeat steps 7 to 12 until qualified products are formed.

Step 13: Press the semi-auto or full-auto button after the product is qualified to
enter continuous working status.

2.2-14 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.2.5.4 Finish Injection Molding

Do not turn off electric heating of the barrel if the machine is shut down temporarily
for a short period of time.

5
Press the heating button before injection molding finishes, turn off electric heating

52
of the barrel and close the baffle of the hopper.

Turn off electric heating and shut down the machine when the material runs out or
the needed products are all injected. (If the injection molding machine is equipped
with the temperature regulator used for nozzle temperature adjustment, turn the

61
switch of the regulator to 0 to cut it off.)

In order to heat the barrel in the shortest possible time in next injection molding
operation and also to prevent fused resin from retaining in the barrel, it is supposed
70
to remove excess stock in the heating barrel completely (shot to air for several
times).

Do mold close (not high-pressure clamp) in the manual status and retreat the
04
injection unit and screw back to the stop position.

Shut down the pump motor and turn off main power of the injection molding
machine.
07

2.2.6 Demolding
22

The following operations must be done in the manual state.

Step 1: Start the oil pump motor.

20

Step 2: Do mold close until the mold closes completely.

Step 3: Shut down the oil pump motor.

Step 4: Open the safety door and prepare lifting bolt, cable and other lifting devices.

EN-MAIII 2.2-15
 Volume 2 User Manual

Make sure that two halves of the mold are not separated when powering on the
injection molding machine.

Step 5: Detach the connecting pipeline of the mold and pressure plate and bolt
used to fix the plate.

Step 6: Start the oil pump motor.

5
Step 7: Press the mold open button to open the mold.

Step 8: Shut down the oil pump motor after mold open move finishes.

52
Step 9: Lift the mold up from the injection molding machine and place it in
somewhere appropriate.

61
2.2.7 Exhaust of proportional valve (Some models do

not have this proportional valve)

70
When the system pressure is not stable, there may be air in the system. The air
should be drained to stabilize the pressure. (This phenomenon occurs when a new
machine is put into use)
04
The position of the air outlet is at the coil side of the proportional valve, refer to the
figure below for details.
07
22
20

10Ω series electromagnet

2.2-16 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3 Maintenance

2.3.1 Precautions of Maintenance

5
52
Maintenance must be done when the main power switch of the injection molding
machine is at “O” position. If necessary, lock it with a padlock.

The employee has the responsibility to make operators know about the structure
and functions of safety devices and take their healthy and safety seriously.

61
70
Any operations that may destroy safety devices of the machine are prohibited.

Do not, under any circumstances, remove safety protective devices on the machine
or intentionally cause failures of safety devices. If you do need to move the safety
04
devices in order to maintain the machine, you must ensure of safety of the machine
and operators. After the maintenance, reinstall the safety devices as is and check
their functions.
07

Do not replace any safety devices without permission!

22
20

Check the safety devices at least once a month!

Following items are included to examine the safety devices:
Rigidity of executive components;
Whether the safety devices are fixed tightly on the machine;
Whether all wires are connected with the electrical safety switch correctly;
Whether every independent safety device and limit switch work normally.

EN-MAIII 2.3-1
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.2 Maintenance Plan

Time scale Maintenance work Chapter
Check the indicating oil level of the
2.1.11
level gauge on the hydraulic oil tank
Every 500 machine hours Check the lubricating oil level -
Check the hydraulic piping -
Check the lubrication of moving parts -

5
1,000 machine hours after the machine Replace or clean the core of the oil
first putting into operation suction filter

52
When the oil suction filter is blocked or a Replace or clean the core of the oil
2.3.7
blocking message appears on the screen suction filter
Every 3000 machine hours, or 6 months
at most, or the built-in pressure gauge
Replace by-pass filter 4.3.6
shows a maximum value of 5 bars, as for

61
a machine is installed with by-pass filters
A blocking message appears on the
Replace the core of the stand-alone
screen, the machine is installed with a 4.3.6
filter
stand-alone filter
A blocking message appears on the
Replace the core of the high pressure
70
screen, the machine is installed with a -
filter
high pressure filter
Every 3000 machine hours or t6 months
at most , meanwhile water quality is Check and clean the oil cooler 2.3.6
comparatively poor
04
Every 3000 machine hours or 6 months at Clean the core of the air suction filter
2.3.9
most on the oil tank
Replace or clean the core of the oil
2.3.7
suction filter
Every 6000 machine hours or 1 year at
Check the high pressure hose and
most 2.3.10
07

replace if necessary
Check and maintain the motor -
Replace hydraulic oil 2.3.8
Every 12000 machine hours or 2 years at Replace the core of the oil suction filter 2.3.7
most Replace the core of the air suction
2.3.9
22

filter on the oil tank

Replace the sealing rings and wearing
-
Every 36000 machine hours or 6 years at rings of the hydraulic oil tank
most Replace the high pressure hoses 2.3.10
Replace the system control batteries -
20

All the high-pressure hoses must be replaced every 6 years so as not to cause
failure due to aging.

Only brand new hoses (products in the alternatives list) can be used.

2.3-2 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.3 Grease and Hydraulic Oil

We recommend using the following grease and hydraulic oil

Name Specification Remark

Hydraulic Viscosity of hydraulic oil: 46CST/40°C Used for the hydraulic
oil Mobil DTE 25, Shell Tellus Oil 46, system of the machine.

5
Castrol Hyspin ZZ 46, Westminster No.
46 anti-wear hydraulic oil, Sinopec No.

52
46 anti-wear hydraulic oil
Lubricati No. 150 extreme pressure gear oil Used for lubrication of
on thin oil (priority use) mold clamp points of the

61
No. 68 anti-wear hydraulic oil thin oil lubrication models
and moving and fixed
platens and rear nozzle
plate of large-sized

Grease
70 machines.
No. 00 extreme pressure lithium grease Used to lubricate the
Not. 1 lithium grease relevant parts of the
No. 3 lithium grease clamping part and
04
injection part.

Note: Please refer to section 2.3.4.4 for specific use of grease.

07

Check status of oil regularly; control the flow and temperature of the cooling water
correctly and keep the temperature of the hydraulic oil within a proper range (oil
temperature range 5-55℃, recommended oil temperature 30-45°C).
22
20

If there are other optional hydraulic devices connected to the machine (including
cores or hydraulic nozzles), these devices must be cleaned up thoroughly.
Connecting these devices that need to consume hydraulic oil shall not influence the
quality and purity standards of the hydraulic oil.

The cleanness of hydraulic oil must reach grade 8 of NAS 1638 or 19/17/14 of
ISO4406-1999. If the delivered hydraulic oil is slightly polluted, it must go through
proper filters when being infused.
EN-MAIII 2.3-3
 Volume 2 User Manual

All used machine oil has content that may do harm to peoples’ health, so long-term
or repeated exposure of the skin and all kinds of machine oil shall be avoided.

5
2.3.4 Lubrication and Maintenance

52
In order to ensure of normal operation of machine, moving parts of the machine are
equipped with lubrication devices and lubrication points (please refer to the
lubrication diagram for details). Especially for the mold close unit, the machine

61
adopts oil-impregnated copper bush (aimed at grease lubrication models) and
auto-lubrication system. Next is the introduction to the auto-lubrication system of
mold close unit.
70
2.3.4.1 Components and Features of Lubrication System
The lubrication system is composed of lubrication oil pump, lubrication duct,
04
lubrication oil dispenser and lubrication points. The lubrication oil goes through
from the oil pump to the lubrication duct dispenser then to all lubrication points to
lubricate all moving parts of the injection molding machine.

The lubrication system is controlled by the computer and monitors the pressure
07

relay through the computer, thus to monitor the lubrication status of the lubrication
system. During lubrication, the computer will alarm and inform you of poor
lubrication when the oil tank lacks oil, oil-lines leak, oil pump filter screen is clogged
or the oil pressure is insufficient. Please check the reasons of poor lubrication and
22

promptly add lubrication oil or repair it, so as to make sure that the lubrication of the
injection molding machine works well.

Please refer to the lubrication diagram for lubrication oil types recommended by the
20

lubrication system.

2.3.4.2 Lubrication Principles

Lubrication Principles for Fixed-resistance Lubrication
System
The fixed-resistance lubricated injection molding machines are equipped with
damping distributor. When the lubrication oil pump works, along the oil ducts from
the entrance of the pump to all distributors accumulate lubrication oil with certain

2.3-4 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

pressure due to the damper. When the pressure of lubrication oil is above the
damping differential pressure, the lubrication will overcome damping and flow to all
lubrication points constantly until the lubrication time is up. Because damping holes
of the distributor can be different, the damping distributor ensures that the oil
quantity reached to all lubrication points is allocated according to needs. When the
pressure of the lubrication oil duct cannot reach the pressure set by the pressure
relay during lubrication time (or the lubrication alarm time), the machine will alarm

5
and warn you that there is something wrong with the lubrication system and you
have to repair it.

52
Schematic diagram of fixed resistance lubrication

61
70
04
07
22

Fig.2.3-1 Schematic diagram of fixed resistance lubrication

20

Introduction to elements in the figure:

F1: oil-sucking filter V2: oil-return back pressure valve B1: system pressure gauge
P1: lubrication pump V3:two-position three-way reversing valve
D1,D2: fixed resistance distributor V1: system overflow valve
F2: pressure relay M: motor

EN-MAIII 2.3-5
 Volume 2 User Manual

Lubrication Principles for Quantitative Pressurized

Lubrication System
The injection molding machines with quantitative pressurized lubrication are
equipped with quantitative pressurized distributor. When the oil pump works, the
pump exerts pressure on all distributors and press the lubrication oil at the upper
cavity of the quantitative distributor to all the lubrication points, thus to lubricate all

5
points evenly. When the pressure of the lubrication duct reaches the set pressure
of the pressure relay, the oil pump stops working, the computer starts lubrication

52
delay timing, and all distributors release pressure and add oil to the upper cavity
from the oil duct automatically. When the lubrication delay timing finishes, the oil
pump starts working again. On and on, until the total lubrication time is up. Because
oil discharge quantity of the distributor can be different, the quantitative distributor

61
ensures that the oil quantity reached to all lubrication points is allocated according
to needs. When the pressure of the lubrication oil duct cannot reach the pressure
set by the pressure relay during lubrication time (or the lubrication alarm time), the
machine will alarm and warn you that there is something wrong with the lubrication
70
system and you have to repair it.

Schematic diagram of quantitative pressurized lubrication

04
07
22
20

Fig. 2.3-2 Schematic diagram of quantitative pressurized lubrication

2.3-6 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

Introduction to elements in the figure:

M：motor F1: oil-sucking filter F2: pressure relay P1: lubrication pump
V1: system overflow valve V2: oil-return back pressure valve
V3: two-position three-way reversing valve B1: system pressure gauge
D1, D2: quantitative pressurized distributor

5
52
2.3.4.3 Maintenance of Lubrication System

61
Do not use grease that has been polluted by water, steam, dust and sunlight.

It is required to regularly observe the working status of all lubrication points of the
injection molding machine during use. Pay attention to lubricating for enough time
70
to make sure every lubrication point of the whole lubrication system is well
lubricated. The lubrication mold shots (interval time) and each lubrication time can
be set through computer parameters (at lubrication bar at the computer internal
parameters screen), so we recommend not changing relevant lubrication
04
parameter settings roughly (the machine has been properly set before leaving the
factory, but users can change the lubrication mold shots as the case may be.
Generally, set fewer lubrication mold shots for new machines within six months and
set more according to actual situation after six months. Set few for large machines
07

and more for small machines). The lubrication time of the injection molding
machine with quantitative pressurized lubrication is actually the lubrication alarm
time. We recommend setting up longer lubrication time, so as to make sure there is
22

enough time for build-up of the pressure relay and to avoid false alarm caused
because the lubrication alarm time is too short.

Observe the working status of the lubrication system regularly to keep the
lubrication oil at an appropriate level in the oil tank. If poor lubrication is found in
20

normal times, lubricate promptly and check the working status of all lubrication
points to make sure the machine is lubricated well.

Due to different mechanical lubrication designs and models, the lubrication of

Haitian injection molding machines adopts: fixed resistance grease lubrication
system, quantitative grease lubrication system, quantitative thin oil lubrication
system, quantitative graphite bushing thin oil lubrication system and some

EN-MAIII 2.3-7
 Volume 2 User Manual

lubrication requirements specially designated by customers. The lubrication

principles, programs and parameters of these lubrication systems are different, so
please refer to Chapter 4.3.8 of Technical Manual Lubrication Instruction for details.

Unless the machine is insufficiently lubricated and needs lubricating, do not

5
arbitrarily press the manual lubrication button on the operational panel. That’s
because each press will release certain lubrication oil, which will be waste of oil and

52
pollute the environment.

If the computer prompts lubrication fault warning during lubrication, it is mainly

caused by insufficient oil in the lubrication oil tank or leakage of lubrication

61
pipelines. It is supposed to add lubrication oil or repair it promptly.

2.3.4.4 Requirements of Lubrication Oil 70

Lubrication diagram of the whole machine is as shown in Fig. 2.3-3:
04
07
22

Fig. 2.3-3 Lubrication diagram of the whole machine

No. 3 lithium grease is recommended. Small and medium sized machines

20

adopt manual oil filling. Oil is filled usually in the major maintenance and
repair and when the mold adjustment load is large or when there is abnormal
sound; the large sized machines adopt automatic oil filling method and the oil
is supplied by the automatic lubrication system.

○ Grease lubrication machine types: No. 00 extreme pressure lithium

grease is recommended and the oil is supplied by the automatic lubrication
system of the machine.

2.3-8 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

○ Thin oil lubrication machine types: No. 150 extreme pressure gear oil or No.
68 anti-wear hydraulic oil are recommended and the oil is supplied by the
automatic lubrication system of the machine.

□ No. 1 lithium grease is recommended. Small- and medium-sized machines

5
adopt manual forced filling oil cup and fill oil manually on a regular basis
according to actual operating conditions. For example, the guide sleeve of

52
charging motor support needs filling at most once a month; large-sized
machines adopt manual lubrication pump to fill oil and needs filling at most
once a month.

Machines equipped with forced filling oil cup are recommended to use No. 1

61
lithium grease. Add oil during maintenance and detach the oil discharge outlet
below the charging motor support before adding oil.

Machines equipped with thin oil cup are recommended to use No. 150
70
extreme pressure gear oil. The static oil level is required to be at the midline
of the oil gauge. Generally, replace oil after 6 months for the first time and
replace every 2 years later on.
04
Machines equipped with auto lubrication system are recommended to use
No. 68 anti-wear hydraulic oil. The static oil level is required to be at the
midline of the oil gauge.
07

△ Grease lubrication machine types: No. 00 extreme pressure lithium grease is

recommended for the small sized machines and the oil is supplied by the
automatic lubrication system of the machine; No. 150 extreme pressure gear
oil or No. 68 anti-wear hydraulic oil are recommended for the medium and
22

large sized machines and the oil is supplied by the automatic lubrication
system of the independent movable platen.

△ Thin oil lubrication machine types: No. 150 extreme pressure gear oil or No.
20

68 anti-wear hydraulic oil are recommended for the small sized machines and
the oil is supplied by the automatic lubrication system of the machine.

No. 150 extreme pressure gear oil or No. 68 anti-wear hydraulic oil are
recommended for the medium and large sized machines and the oil is supplied
by the automatic lubrication system of the independent movable platen.

EN-MAIII 2.3-9
 Volume 2 User Manual

When the lubrication pump works, grease in the oil tank must be sufficient. The
manual lubrication pump of the injection unit is at the side of the rear plate of the
nozzle or at the end surface of the injection molding machine. The auto-lubrication
pump of the mold close unit is at the tail guard（may be different in compliance with
actual machine types）.

Judging conditions for manual oil filling finished: a little lubrication oil spills out of

5
the contact surface that needs lubrication.

52
2.3.5 Routine Check

2.3.5.1 Check the Safety Device of the Machine

61
During maintenance and repair of any machine, make sure to firstly check the
safety device of the machine. See chapter 2.2.3.4 for the setting of safety devices.

2.3.5.2 Check the relaxation of Bolts on Molds and Moving

70
Parts

Wrong
04
Correct 错误
正确
07
22

Fig. 2.3-4
20

2.3-10 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.5.3 Check Usage of Thermocouple (may be different in

compliance with different machine types)

Correct Wrong Not deep enough Wrong Conduit broken off

5
Wrong Not tight enough
Correct

52
61
Fig. 2.3-5

2.3.5.4 Temperature Rising Time of Barrel

70
Check whether the temperature rising time of the barrel is too short or too long and
check the circuit of the heater to see whether it will cause danger to the heating
band, thermocouple, contactor, fuse and wiring.
04
2.3.5.5 Check All Switches and Devices
Check the safety door, limit switches of safety door, clamp safety device,
07

emergency stop button, hydraulic safety valve and other additional safety devices
(including safety cover and clear cover).

2.3.5.6 Cooling Device Check

22

For the machine equipped with mold cooling water flow detector (attachment),
check positions of cooling water inlet and outlet and adjustment of flow. Check
water flow of oil cooler and see if there is any leakage.
20

2.3.5.7 Lubrication Check

With all kinds of grease injectors or cups. If the machine is equipped with a
centralized lubricating system, check the oil level of the lubrication oil and refill it
before it is lower than the requirement. Add a little lubrication oil to all the sliding
surfaces.

EN-MAIII 2.3-11
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.5.8 Structure Check

Check all the hydraulic pipelines and devices and their functions, and check
leakage or not. Check whether the motor, oil pump, oil-hydraulic motor, heating
barrel and mechanical moving parts have abnormal noise.

5
2.3.5.9 Heating Band Check

52
The external status of all heating bands is shown in the following figure. Check
each for damage.

Resin stuck Bolt loosen Line loosen Lead wire broken

61
70
Fig. 2.3-6
04
Wipe and clean the whole machine regularly to keep the machine clean all the time.

2.3.6 Heat Exchanger (Oil Cooler)

07

The water-cooled cooler mainly uses freshwater as the cooling media. The shell
pass fluid exchanges heat with the tube pass fluid through the heat transfer tube,
so as to decrease the temperature of high-temperature fluid and achieve the goal of
cooling. There are currently external coolers and internal coolers.
22

2.3.6.1 Structure of Cooler

The external cooler is composed of water inlet cover, tube plate, tube barrel, heat
20

transfer tube, baffle, seal washer and legs and other parts. Its structure is shown in
Fig. 2.3-7.1 and physical object is shown in Fig. 2.3-8.1 The space enclosed by the
external surface of the heat transfer tube and the tube barrel is called shell pass;
the space inside the heat transfer tube and that connected to it is called tube pass.
The shell pass fluid exchanges heat with the tube pass fluid through the heat
transfer tube, so as to decrease the temperature of high-temperature fluid and
achieve the goal of cooling.

2.3-12 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
61
Fig. 2.3-7.1 Structure of the external cooler

01-water inlet cover; 02-seal washer; 03-fixed tube plate; 04-seal washer;
05-baffle; 06-heat transfer tube; 07-moving tube plate; 08-“O”-shaped ring;
09-back water cover;
12-leg;
70
10-flange at the mid of oil outlet; 11-seal washer;
13-tube barrel assembly
04
07
22

Fig. 2.3-8.1 Physical picture of the external cooler

The internal cooler is composed of water inlet cover, tube plate, tube barrel, heat
transfer tube, baffle plate, sealing washer, etc. The structure is shown in Fig.
20

2.3-7.2, and the physical object is shown in Fig. 2.3-8.2. The space between the
outer surface of the heat transfer tube and the tube barrel is called the shell side,
and the space inside the heat transfer tube and the space connected with it is
called the tube side. The shell side fluid and the tube side fluid exchange heat
through the heat transfer tube, so that the temperature of the high-temperature fluid
is reduced to achieve the purpose of cooling.

EN-MAIII 2.3-13
 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
Figure 2.3-7.2 Structure of the internal Cooler

1- water inlet cover; 2-sealed O ring ； 3- fixed tube plate; 4-tank flange;

61
5-sealing washer; 6- baffle plate; 7-aluminum alloy fin；8- heat transfer tube;
9- fixed tube plate I； 10-"O" ring; 11-socket head cap screw; 12-cover plate

70
04
07

Figure 2.3-8.2 Physical picture of the internal cooler

22

2.3.6.2 Use of Cooler

20

Do not exceed the service pressure and temperature indicated at the data plate of
the product and Product Certificate during use. Use freshwater as the cooling
media only except specially ordered products, The water shall at least meet the
industrial water standards.

The freshwater quality requirements are shown in the table below:

Cooling water quality standard

2.3-14 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

Item Measurement Cooling water Make-up water

unit
PH ( 25°C) 6.5-8.0 6.0-8.0
Electrical conductivity μS/m <800 <200
( 25°C)
Total hardness (CaCO3) mg/l <200 <50
Acid consumption mg/l <100 <50
(CaCO3)

5
Chloride ion (Cl-) mg/l <200 <50
Sulfate ion (SO42-) mg/l <200 <50

52
Ferrum (Fe) mg/l <1.0 <0.3
Ion-silica (SiO2) mg/l <50 <30
Sulfide ion (S2-) mg/l 0 0
Ammonia ion（NH4+） mg/l <1.0 <0.2

61
Turbidity NTU ＜5 ＜5

2.3.6.3 Inspection, Maintenance and Cleaning of Chiller

Inspection of Chiller 70
Dismantle the chiller according to the requirement in chapter 2.3.6.4., then inspect
the following parts: (see the structure chart of chiller in chapter 2.3.6.1):

 =Check the inlet cover, outlet cover, stationary tube sheet and floating tube
04
sheet; check whether there’s incrustant on the contact surface with the
cooling medium and on the inner wall of heat pipe; and check whether
there’s dirt or is corroded.
07

 Check whether all the seal washers are damaged.

 Check the outer surface of heat pipe, the inner surface of tube, the
stationary tube sheet, the floating tube sheet, as well as the contact surface
22

with the oil, to see if there’s any dirt or is corroded.

 The heat exchanger shall be dismantled from the machine in order to

facilitate the inspection.
20

 The municipal water supply (or similar) shall be inspected once every six
months.

 The industrial water, the underground water or water with high salt content
shall be inspected once every month.

 Extend or shorten the period between 2 inspections according to the

condition of equipment.

EN-MAIII 2.3-15
 Volume 2 User Manual

In case the chiller is not used for a long time, release the liquid in the chiller; after
the chiller is shut down any there’s possibility that the liquid inside it may freeze,
release the liquid in the chiller.

Cleaning of Chiller
Any jam in the pipe may results in the reduction of cooling effect. Dismantle the
pipe caps at both ends and check whether there’s any corrosion or jam.

5
The chiller shall be cleaned at least once every half a year. The alkaline cleaning

52
solution available from the market shall be used to clean the inner part of chiller and
the outer of the heat transfer tube. For interlayer that is difficulty to dispose, soak
the main equipment and the heat transfer tube in weak hydrochloric acid solution,
and then use clear water and soft brush to clean it.

61
No cleaning agent residue shall exist in the chiller.
70
2.3.6.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Chiller
04
07
22
20

Fig. 2.3-9.1 Disassembly Chart of the external Chiller

2.3-16 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
61
Fig. 2.3-9.2 Disassembly Chart of the internal Chiller

Disassembly of Chiller
70
Disassemble the chiller according to the sequence in figure 2.3-9.1/2.3-9.2:

1) close the inlet and outlet of 2 kinds of liquid, thus to stop their flow;
04
2) Release the liquid either in the chiller or in the pipe;
3) Dismantle the external part of the chiller so it can be disassembled;
4) Make marks (especially the position of stationary tube sheet) before
07

disassembly, thus to facilitate the assembly;

5) Disconnect the backwater cap, and take out the O-shape ring;
6) Disconnect the water inlet cover, and take out the gasket
22

7) Push the pipe bundle out of the pipe barrel (the vertical disassembly and
assembly style can protect the sealing surface of the floating tube sheet
from being scraped).

The disassembly is completed then.

20

Assembly of Chiller

The assembly sequence of the chiller is just the opposite to the disassembly
sequence.

 When inserting the pipe bundle into the pipe barrel, the floating tube sheet
may contact the step at the flange. Insert some pieces of poles with proper
EN-MAIII 2.3-17
 Volume 2 User Manual

diameter into the pipe (the inserting depth shall not exceed 300mm) and lift
the pipe bundle, then it is easy to be installed into the pipe barrel.
 The O-shape ring and the gasket shall be replaced.
 The connecting bolt between the water cover and the flange shall be
tightened symmetrically and uniformly.

5
2.3.6.5 Tightness Test

52
Adopt air or water pressure to test the tightness of chiller. Block the shell outlet of
chiller by bolt, and apply water pressure at the shell inlet. Keep the pressure for 30
minutes, and there shall be no leakage at the water inlet and outlet of chiller, as

61
well as at the connecting part of flange. The testing pressure shall be in accordance
with the pressure parameter on the nameplate or quality certificate of product.

70
Be careful when executing the tightness test. The pressure shall be increased
04
slowly, and make sure there’s no person at the opposite direction of bolt and water
cover. Release the pressure in the chiller before dismantling the bolt and other
parts of the chiller.

See figure 2.3-10 for the tightness test:

07

Oil (air) inlet

Shell inlet
Shell outlet
22

Water outlet
20

Water outlet

Fig. 2.3-10 Tightness Test Diagram

2.3-18 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.6.6 Common failures and Troubleshooting

Failure Position Cause analysis Countermeasure
occurred
The The tightening screw Fasten the tightening
sealing is not fastened screw
part at the The gasket or Change the gasket or

5
stationary O-shape ring is O-shape ring.
and damaged

52
floating The sealing surface Repair the sealing
side of connecting the gasket surface or change the
chiller or O-shape ring is part.
damaged
Leakage Tubing The tightening screw Fasten the tightening

61
flange is not fastened screw
The spacer flange Align the spacer flange
leans with the connecting
flange.
Water (oil)
release
part
70
The tightening screw
is not fastened
Fasten the tightening
screw
The bolt is not Wrap the bolt with
wrapped with sealing sealing tape
tape
04
Two liquid Sealing The O-shape ring is Change the gasket or the
mixes. part at the damaged O-shape ring.
floating The sealing surface Repair the sealing
side connecting the surface or change the
07

O-shape ring is part.

damaged
The design The fluid flow fail to Increase the fluid flow to
temperature reach the design flow the design value
is not Too much dirt at both Clean the heat transfer
22

reached side of heat transfer pipe

pipe
20

Before assemble the heat exchanger, clean the chemical residue by water, and
blow it dry by compressed air.

EN-MAIII 2.3-19
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.7 Oil-absorbing Filter

The oil-absorbing filter is installed at the pump inlet at the side of oil tank, and is
used for the filtering and cleaning of
hydraulic fluid. Please follow the below
instruction when dismantling or replacing

5
(for some machine model, the oil-absorbing
filter is directly installed in the oil tank, so

52
please dismantle the filter and execute the
cleaning).

2.3.7.1 Dismantle

61
Dismantle the closing plate at the side of
the machine, loosen the inner hexagon
screw in the middle of the filter (to the end), thus to separate the oil in the filter and
70
the oil tank, then dismantle the inner hexagon screw at the end cover, thus to take
out the filter, after that, dismantle the filter core and separate the magnetic bar in
the middle.
04
2.3.7.2 Cleaning
Use light oil, gasoline or flushing oil to remove all
the dirt that may obstruct the wrapping. Remove
07

all the metal material in the magnetic bar as well. Check the surface and inner
Inject the compressed air from the inner part, and condition, and decide the
blow all the dirt far awar from the wrapping part. treating method.
22

2.3.7.3 Installation
Put the filter core into the filter, tighten the inner hexagon screw of the end cover,
and then tighten the inner hexagon screw in the middle.
20

2.3.7.4 Notice
 Stop the oil pump motor when dismantling the oil filter.
 When blowing by compressed air, do not fasten the nozzle of the blowing
pump to tight.
 In case the wire winding is broken, you must replace the filter.

2.3-20 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

 Do not damage the wire winding during the dismantling and installation of
the filter.
 After the filter core is installed, please check if the inner hexagon screw in
the middle is tightened before start the motor.
 When start the motor after the installation of filter, please keep the oil pump
work under idle mode for 10 minutes, and then turn in to normal working

5
condition if everything is ok.

52
2.3.8 Replacement of Hydraulic Oil
Implementation steps:

61
1) Pump out the oil in the oil tank through the oil inlet by hand pump or by
siphoning installation.
70
Discharge the residual oil through the oil outlet of the oil tank, for this, the
oil outlet bolts on the bottom of the oil tank shall be unscrewed.
04
Pump out all the oil in the oil tank, as well as oil in the cooling system or
pipe. Any oil residue may accelerate the ageing of new oil.

2) Open the side and top cover of oil tank, remove all the oil in it. In case the
07

oil filter is installed in the oil tank, please dismantle the oil-absorbing filter
as well. Clean the oil filter according to 2.3.7.2.

3) Clean the oil tank.

22

4) Replace it by a clean or new oil-absorbing filter, close the cover, fill in the
hydraulic fluid according to the standard in 2.1.11.
20

Pollution control: the used oil must be well handled. The used oil and oil-absorbing
filter can be returned to the oil supplier.

The oil filter can be recycled.

EN-MAIII 2.3-21
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.9 Air Filter

The air filter is installed at the top of tail part of the oil tank. When
cleaning, loosen the closing cover first, replace the filter core in
the air filter, and then tighten the closing cover.

5
52
The air filter in the oil part is a quite important component, and
shall be well maintained according to the maintenance plan. The
closing cover shall be tightened closely, or the oil may splash out. The oil filter and
the oil tank shall be well fixed. The filter core cannot be recycled. In case of

61
replacing, please contact the customer service department of our company.

2.3.10 Pipe Inspection

70
Please establish the periodical inspection and replacement plan of hydraulic hose
according to the maintenance plan in 2.3.2. The pipe shall be carefully tested to
prevent the following condition, and shall be replace If any one of the following
condition occurs:
04
 Any damage exists from the outer to the inner surface (abrasion, cutting or
break).
 The outer surface becomes fragile (fracture in the pipe material).
07

 Deformation. The natural shape of tube changes under normal, pressure

or bending condition, including the cut-off of outer surface or bubble bulge.
 Damage of deformation of lantern ring (sealing function).
22

 The pipe works without the lantern ring.

 The function and strength reduces due to corrosion.
 The storage period or working life is exceeded (see the maintenance plan
in chapter 2.3.2)
20

Please take into consideration the storage period when evaluate the service life of
hose. The maximum storage period is 2 years after manufactured.

2.3-22 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.11 Notice for Installation and Dismantling of Barrel

and Screw

2.3.11.1 The Installation of Front Barrel Screw

5
52
61
Notices before tighten the from barrel screw:
70
 Please use high quality screw with the strength grade of 12.9, apply Heat
resistant grease (such as MoS2) on the surface of screw thread.
 Tighten the diagonal bolts equally according to the right figure.
04
 Use proper spanners (torque spanner is the best) to tighten all the screws.
 Fasten the front barrel screw to tight may result in the damage of thread,
while fasten it to loose may result in material leakage.
07

2.3.11.2 Preparatory Work of Screw Disassembly

As PC and PVC are high adhesive material, it may cling to the screw and barrel
when cooled. Separate the PC incautiously may damage the metal surface. In case
22

PC or PVC is used, please use PS, PE or proper abluent for clean, thus to simplify
the cleaning and disassembling work of screw. (Blow the PS into the air for several
times).

The following material shall be prepared in addition to the necessary tools:

20

 4 or 5 pieces of wooden pole or steel pole (diameter<diameter of screw)

×(length<Injection stroke).
 4 or 5 section of squared timber(100mm×300mm)
 Clamp
 Waste cotton or rag

EN-MAIII 2.3-23
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.11.3 Preparatory Operation for the Disassembling of

Screw
Step 1: Heat the barrel until it reach the maximum temperature of the resin, then
disconnect the power supply of the heater (set the temperature 50℃higher for the

5
nozzle part and the second area, thus to facilitate the disassembly of front barrel
screw).

52
Step 2: reduce the injection speed and pressure; for the machine model with
multilevel control of injection speed and pressure, adjust the speed and pressure
close to zero.
Step 3: close the feed inlet, and exhaust the remaining material in the barrel (in

61
case engineering plastic such as PC, PA or ABS is used, please apply PP material
before operation).
Step 4: Make the screw (injection plunger) return under full stroke, and stop it in the
current position. 70
Step 5: disassembly the other parts that connecting the screw according to the
following figure. Separate those screws from other screws to prevent from being
confused.
04
1. Disassemble the fix screw of the
semi snap ring

2. Disassemble the snap ring

07

Return the screw, separate the 1. Disassemble the fix screw

spline housing from the screw tail of the semi snap ring 4. disassemble the fix
screw of flat key
and back to the end
22

3. Return the screw, separate the

spline housing from the screw tail
and back to the end. 2. Disassemble
After being separated, back the the snap ring 5. Pull out the fix
tail part to the end screw of flat key

Screw
spline housing (connect with
20

Back plate of
the coupler) launch platform

Medium and Small Sized Type Medium and Large Sized Type

2.3-24 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.11.4 Disassembly of Barrel and Screw

2.3.11.4.1 Disassembly of Barrel and Screw of Large Sized
Type Machine
2.3.11.4.1.1 Disassembly of Barrel (together with screw)

5
Step 1: relocate the whole part to the end.

52
61
70
04
Step 2: Remove the barrel cover, nozzle guard, hopper, all electric
thermocouples, and electrical components connected to the barrel, etc.
(if necessary, remove the hot wire bracket).
07
22
20

Step 3: Temporarily suspend the barrel as shown in figure below.

EN-MAIII 2.3-25
 Volume 2 User Manual

Rear plate
Front plate
Barrel

5
52
61
Step 4: After verifying that all steps in Section 2.3.11.3 have been completed and
the screw and coupling have been separated (the spacing between the
two parts should be wide enough to ensure that the barrel can be
70
removed, if not, the injection and ejection actions will increase the
spacing). Remove the barrel.

Step 5: Pull the barrel out of the front plate of the shooting platform toward the
head plate, and then lift it out. The steps are as follows:
04
1) Insert a wooden pole between the rear plate of the shooting platform and
the rear end of the barrel, as shown in the figure. Do not forget to clamp
the wooden pole with a clamp. It is dangerous to do just with hand.
07
22
20

2) Make sure that the injection speed and pressure are reduced, then
perform the injection and push the barrel forward.

3) After the barrel being moved forward, tap to retreat the injection and the
back plate of the shooting platform is retreated again.
2.3-26 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

4) Repeat step 1 to step 3.

5) The lifting height should be slightly adjusted after about half of the length
of the barrel has been pushed out of the front plate of the shooting
platform.

6) Repeat steps 1 to step 3 to separate the barrel from the injection block.

5
7) Slowly lift it and place it in a place where it will not interfere with next step.

52
61
70
04
07

If there is a small space between the head plate of some models and the front plate
of the shooting platform, the seat may be further retreated by increasing the rod
length or adding a wood plate at the head plate.
22
20

When the barrel is completely separated from the injection seat, pay special
attention to the cooling of barrel.

2.3.11.4.1.2 Disassembly of Screw (not Barrel)

Step 1: Move the whole part back to the end, remove the mold and positioning
ring, adjust the mold thickness and the die sinking to the maximum.

EN-MAIII 2.3-27
 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
61
Step 2:

1) Switch off the power and remove the electric heating rings in nozzle and
barrel area; 70
2) Remove the fastening screws of the barrel.
04
Remove nozzle heating
ring
Remove fastening screw of barrel
07
22
20

2.3-28 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

Step 3: remove the barrel and nozzle.

5
52
61
70
When the nozzle needs to be cleaned, remove the nozzle first.

Step 4: remove the screw and screw head.

04
Confirm all the procedures been done in Clause 2.3.11.3 and the screw has been
separated with coupling (if they are not yet separated, please inject and then eject
to separate them):
07

1) Put a properly long wood between the tail face of the screw and the rear
plate of the ejection plate and use a fixture (not hands) to hold the wood.
The outer diameter of the wood should be smaller than the diameter of the
screw.
22
20

Screw Wood
Rear plate of
ejection plate

Fixture

2) Jog the injection button to push forward the screw and remove the fixture.

3) After push forward all the injection action, jog the injection retreat action to
retreat the rear plate of the ejection stage.

EN-MAIII 2.3-29
 Volume 2 User Manual

4) Stack up the second wood. Repeat steps 1) to 3) until most part of screw is
out of the barrel.

5) After the screw is pulled out in the direction of the head plate, lift it out

5
52
61
70
04
If the distance between some mould platens is not enough to hang out the screw,
the main ejector rod shall be removed to increase the moving space of the screw.
07

The screw may be still too hot, do not grasp it with bare hands. For the large
22

screws, after 1/2 of the length is ejected, fasten it with rope and hang it with hook.

To prevent the screw from being damaged, put it on the wood or wooden frame. To
prevent it from deforming, if it is to be placed for a long time, hang it directly.
20

2.3.11.4.2 Injection seat rotation description

The injection base can only be rotated in the state of machine stop or "carriage
rotation", or else, it may cause danger!

2.3-30 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

In "carriage" picture--enter "rotation" state

Preparation: The seat rotation is used to remove the screw and barrel. Before use,
make preparations according to Section 2.3.11.2 and 2.3.11.3. Then follow step 1
and step 2 in Section 2.3.11.4.1.1 to remove the relevant parts, and the nozzle

5
exits (if the nozzle can not be removed from the head plate, the nozzle must be
removed), for the machine equipped with the barrel, slightly lower the support

52
height so that the support bearing disengages the guide rail.

The 60-320T machine rotates manually and the bigger machine rotates
automatically. The two functions are described separately below.

61
2.3.11.4.2.1 Injection seat manual rotation description
(60-320T)
Step 1: On the basis of the seat retreat to the last, tighten the compression block①
70
on the operating-side wire rail bracket, keep the wire rail front bracket③ and the
linear guide② relatively fixed.
04
07

④Adjustment screw

②Linear guide
22

③Rail bracket
20

①Compacting

Step 2: Remove the head plate and the retracted connecting part⑤, and tap
to inject the seat to separate the retracting piston rod joint from the
hinged seat.

EN-MAIII 2.3-31
 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
61
Step 3: Remove all the adjustment screws④ on the wire rail support⑦ and
remove the adjustment block ⑥ on non-operating side that adjusts
70
the horizontal position of the nozzle.

Step 4: Insert the relay rod into the hole in the track support⑦, push the track
support to rotate the injection seat toward the operating side to the
04
right position (as shown in below figure); the screw and the barrel can
be smoothly removed. Pay attention to the wires and hoses during
rotation, adjust and loosen properly, and do not stretch too tightly to
avoid damage.
07
22
20

Step 5: If you replace the barrel, please use the slings to lift the entire barrel
assembly in the direction of the operating side according to step 3 to
step 5 in Section 2.3.11.4.1.1.

2.3-32 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

Step 6: If you only replace the screw, withdraw the screw from the operating
side in the direction of the barrel according to Section 2.3.11.4.1.2.

Step 7: After the replacement, the seat returned to its normal position, and the
parts should be removed before fastening the reinstallation.

Step 8: After re-adjusting the nozzle, it can be used normally.

5
2.3.11.4.2.2 Injection seat automatic rotation description

52
(380-3300T)
Step 1: Retreat the seat to the maximum stroke to make the hole of the stop
block① match the hole of the linear guide②, and then install the stop

61
block①, first tighten the screw⑥, then tighten the screw⑤, keep the
front rail bracket③ relatively fixed to the linear guide②. Then remove
all adjustment screws④ on the rail support⑦.
70
04
07
22
20

Before installing stop block①, remove the screws on the linear guide② under the
stop block① (there is plastic cover on the top, only remove the screws under the
stop block① and the plastic cover, and do not remove the other screws. The stop
block① and its fixing screws are in the accessories).

Step 2: Remove the operation side retracting hinge pin ⑧ , and remove the
adjustment block ⑨ on the non-operating side that adjusts the
horizontal position of the nozzle.

EN-MAIII 2.3-33
 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
61
Step 3: Tap to inject the seat to separate the retracting piston rod joint from
the hinged seat, continue to tap to inject the seat, continue to move
the seat until the injection seat rotates to the proper position on the
operating side (as shown below), the screw and the barrel can be
70
smoothly removed. Pay attention to the wires and hoses during
rotation, adjust and loosen properly, and do not stretch too tightly to
avoid damage.
04
07
22

Step 4: If you replace the barrel, please use the slings to lift the entire barrel
assembly in the direction of the operating side according to step 3 to
20

step 5 in Section 2.3.11.4.1.1.

Step 5: If you only replace the screw, withdraw the screw from the operating
side in the direction of the barrel according to Section 2.3.11.4.1.2.

Step 6: After the replacement, the seat returned to its normal position, and the
parts should be removed before fastening the reinstallation.

Step 7: After re-adjusting the nozzle, it can be used normally。

2.3-34 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.11.5 Schematic Diagram of Screw and Barrel

Structures

5
52
61
2.3.11.6 Disassembly of Screw Head (only for reference)
70
Put on operating handle on the tail of the screw where a keyway is milled. Cover
the screw head with the special spanner and rotate it in compliance with the
direction of the diagram to put it away from the screw. Be noted that the screw head
04
is the left-hand thread.

Operating handle
07

Wood

Wood
22

Screw head
20

Spanner

Fig. 2.3-11 Disassembly Diagram of Screw Head

2.3.12 Cleaning and Test of Screw and Barrel

When it is necessary, remove the screw to clean and test it.

For the disassembly of the screw and barrel, please refer to Clause 2.3.11.

EN-MAIII 2.3-35
 Volume 2 User Manual

Besides the necessary tools, the following materials shall also be prepared:

 About 4 to 5 wooden blocks (diameter < screw diameter) x (length <

injection stroke);
 About 4 to 5 wooden blocks (square, 100 mm x 100 mm x 300 mm);
 A pair of piers;

5
 Waste cotton cloth;
 A long wooden block or bamboo (diameter < screw diameter) x (length >

52
heating barrel length);
 Incombustible solvent (e.g. trichloro ethylene);
 Brass rod and brass brush.

61
Put the disassembled screws on the wooden blocks in case of damages.
70
04
It may be burnt working beside the heating barrel.

Wear heat protective gloves and glasses.

The maximum heating temperature of the injection device is 450°C.

07

2.3.12.1 Cleaning and Test of Screw

Cleaning of Screw
22

1) Wipe the main part of the screw with waste cotton cloth to remove most of
the resinoid sediment;

Screw head Non-return valve Thrust ring Mixed ring

20

2) Remove the resinoid sediment residuals with the brass brush or heat the
sediment with a burner or similar device. After heating for a moment,
remove the sediment on the screw with waste cotton cloth or brass brush.

2.3-36 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

3) Clean the screw head, non-return ring, thrust ring and mixed ring (not used
in some machines) in compliance with the same way as cleaning the screw
part (as above figure). Besides, clean the thread of the screw head and
main screw part with the brass brush.
4) Finally, after the screw is cooled, wipe off the oil stains with incombustible
solution.

5
52
Do not rub the surface of the parts in the cleaning. Before installing the screw head,
wipe a layer of supramoly lubricating grease or silicone oil uniformly on the thread

61
in case of thread seizure. If the lubricating grease is wiped too much, the products
may be polluted.

When using solvent, take routine protection measures to prevent connecting

between the skin and smog. 70
Screw head Non-return ring Thrust ring Mixed ring
80 above screw equip
04
07

Screw
22

Fig. 2.3-12 Disassembly Diagram of Screw

Test of Screw
Test the screw as follows:
20

 Check on the damages.

 Check on the abrasion of the plating.
 Check if the thread is damaged (main part of the screw).
 Observe the surfaces of the non-return ring and thrust ring are damaged. If
damaged, countercurrent of the materials may happen in the injection,
which will affect the products quality

EN-MAIII 2.3-37
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.12.2 Cleaning and Test of Barrel

Remove the resinoid sediment stuck on the internal surface of the barrel with a
brass brush.

After the temperature of the barrel has reduced to between 30℃ and 50℃, wet
some waste cotton cloth with solvent and wrap them on the end faces of the

5
wooden blocks or long bamboos. In the cleaning of the internal surface of the
barrel, replace the cleaning waste cotton cloth for many times.

52
It is necessary to clean the front barrel and nozzle, especially the connecting
surfaces with these parts.

61
Note: be very careful in case these surfaces are bruised and damaged. Abrasion of
the surfaces will cause leakage of the resin.
70
Nozzle Cylinder head Cylinder
04

Connecting surface
07

Connecting surface

Fig. 2.3-13 Disassembly Diagram of Barrel

Test the internal surface of the barrel as shown in Fig. 2.3-14 and make sure it is
22

clean. Observe if there is abrasion or other damages on the internal surface.

20

Test

Insert a blank paper

Exposure with flashlight

Fig. 2.3-14 Test Diagram of Barrel

2.3-38 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

2.3.12.3 Installation of Screw and Barrel

Install the barrel in the reserve procedures of Clause 2.3.11.4.

Installation of Screw Head

Step 1: lay the screw horizontally on the two wooden blocks of the same

5
height and put on operating handle on the keyway as shown in Fig.
2.3.11.6.

52
Step 2: wipe a layer of supramoly lubricating grease or silicone oil uniformly
on the thread of the screw head.

Step 3: insert the non-return ring, thrust ring and mixed ring (not with some

61
machines) that have been wiped clean into the screw head one by
one.

Step 4: cover the screw head with the special spanner and fasten it in the
70
reverse direction of Fig. 2.3.11.6 to finish the assembly of the screw
part.

Installation of Plasticization Part, Front Barrel and Nozzle

04
Step 1: level the plasticization component with crane and wipe it clean.

Step 2: push the plasticization part slowly into the barrel and make sure the
screw head is outward.
07

Step 3: align the unthreaded hole bolted on the front barrel with the screw
hole and strike lightly with copper bar.

Step 4: install the front barrel bolts in compliance with Clause 2.3.11.1.
22

Step 5: wipe a layer of supramoly lubricating grease or silicon oil uniformly at

the thread of the nozzle.

Step 6: tighten the nozzle uniformly into the screw hole of the front barrel.
20

When screwing down the front barrel bolt to the torque value as follows, the barrel,
front barrel, front barrel bolt and temperature shall be compensated to the
corresponding values.

EN-MAIII 2.3-39
 Volume 2 User Manual

Recommended Value for Bolt Tightening Torque

Nominal Diameter of 12.9
Tightening Torque（N.M）
Strength Grade (mm)
10 65~78
12 65~78
16 180~200
20 280~310

5
24 600~650
30 Over 800

52
36 Over 800

2.3.13 Adjustment of Sliding Foot of Movable platen

61
The movable platen is set with adjusted block adjustable sliding foot. Before the
adjustment, the levelness of the guide rail of the locking part of the machine shall
be adjusted and then unload the mold and press the clamping action button to
straighten the linkage mechanism. Loosen the hexagon flat point set screws of the
70
sliding foot and adjust them symmetrically so that the amounts of movement of one
pair of lower adjusted block of the sliding foot are equal. Measure h1, h2 and h3 of
the operation side and the corresponding h4, h5 and h6 (Fig. 2.3-16) of the
non-operation side with inside calipers. For every measurement, calibrate the
04
actual value with the outside micrometer (0.02 vernier caliper) and make sure all
the values are the same. Then press the mold adjustment button, observe the
system pressure in the mold thickness adjustment process and check if the
movable platen is stable. After the adjustment, load the mold and try again until
07

satisfactory effects are achieved and then tighten the hexagon flat point set screws.

The copper backing is equipped on the lower adjusted block base of the sliding
foot, which will be worn after about three years. If it is severely worn, replace it
22

immediately.
20

2.3-40 EN-MAIII
 Volume 2 User Manual

5
52
Movable platen
Upper adjusted block

Lower adjusted block Socket head cap screw Set screw Tie bar

61
Fig. 2.3-15 Schematic Diagram of Sliding Foot of Movable platen

Adjustable platen
70 Movable platen Fixed platen
04
07

Socket head cap screw Lower adjusted block

Socket head cap screw

Fig. 2.3-16 Schematic Diagram of Sliding Foot of Movable platen

22

2.3.14 Air Supply of Energy Accumulator

The accumulator shall be filled with nitrogen but not any other air. Nitrogen shall be
20

filled with charging tool (attached accessory). When charging, loosen the
adjustment handle of overflow valve, open the lid on the top of the accumulator,
install the charging tool and connect it with high pressure nitrogen, slowly open the
switch of the charging tool until it reached the required air pressure. When the
pressure is too high, screw off exhaust screw to reduce the pressure to the required
value. (the charging tool is equipped with nitrogen pressure gauge and exhaust
screw). Regularly check the air pressure of the accumulator to maintain it at the
required value.

EN-MAIII 2.3-41
 Volume 2 User Manual

When charging the accumulator, do not use any other air except it is nitrogen.

5
2.3.15 Table for the Setting of Plastic and Barrel

52
Temperature
The following table is about the relations between barrel temperature and plastic
parameters, it is only for reference. The actual temperature shall be set in

61
compliance with the experiences in the long time using.

Shrinking Temperature of Barrel

Plastic Melting Mould
70
Proportion Percentage
Name Point Temperature Central Tail
(％) Nozzle
Part Part
PS 1.05 130~165 0.4 10-75 180-260 200-260 160-250
HIPS 1.04~1.06 130~165 0.4 5-75 220-270 190-260 160-250
04
ABS 1.06~1.1 130~160 0.6 50-80 190-250 180-240 170-240
LDPE 0.91~0.93 108~126 1.5-5 35-60 230-310 220-300 170-220
HDPE 0.94~0.97 126~137 2.0-5 35-60 230-310 220-300 170-220
07

PP 0.95 160~176 1-2.5 50-80 210-300 180-260 160-240

PVC 1.35 160~200 0.1-0.5 10-60 170-200 160-195 150-195
PMMA 1.18 160~210 0.5 50-90 180-230 160-240 140-220
PA6 1.13 210~215 0.8-1.5 50-80 210-230 210-230 200-210
22

PA66 1.14 250~265 2.25 50-80 250-280 240-280 220-280

CA 1.3 69~105 0.5 40-75 180-200 170-190 150-180
PC 1.2 215~265 0.8 80-99 250-320 260-340 280-350
POM 1.41~1.42 165~175 2.0 50-90 190-210 175-220 160-210
20

2.3-42 EN-MAIII
 5
52
61
70
Volume 3
Operation manual
04
07
22
20
20
22
07
04
70
61
52
5
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Doc No. Name Description

Haitian MA Machine Operation

V1.2 MA_55_3354_EN_210806
Manual (TECHMATION Controller)
20
22
07
04
70
61
52
5
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Contents

3.1. General layout of the machine.......................................................................... 3.1-1

3.1.1. Overall introduction of the controller system .............................................. 3.1-2

3.1.1.1. Overall introduction of the controller ................................................ 3.1-2

3.1.1.2. Introduction to main communication interface ................................. 3.1-3

3.1.1.3. Introduction to HMI3354 panel ......................................................... 3.1-4

5
3.1.1.4. IO extended module ........................................................................ 3.1-4

52
3.1.1.5. RMTP12 expansion module ............................................................ 3.1-6

3.1.2. Introduction of button on the button plate .................................................. 3.1-7

61
3.1.2.1. General introduction of the button plate ........................................... 3.1-7

3.1.2.2. Detail introduction of buttons ........................................................... 3.1-8

3.1.3. General layout of the controller screen ...................................................... 3.1-14

70
3.1.3.1. Introduction of the main screen ....................................................... 3.1-15

3.1.3.2. Introduction of the status bar ........................................................... 3.1-15

3.1.3.3. Introduction of title bar ..................................................................... 3.1-16

04
3.1.3.4. Introduction of parameter part ......................................................... 3.1-17

3.1.3.5. Introduction of alarming and prompt part ......................................... 3.1-19

07

3.1.3.6. Introduction of soft button ................................................................ 3.1-19

3.1.4. Program update method ............................................................................ 3.1-24

3.1.4.1. HMI program burning method .......................................................... 3.1-25

22

3.1.4.2. DSP55,DSP28,RMTP12 temperature program,RemoteIO program 3.1-25

3.1.5. General setting of user .............................................................................. 3.1-26

20

3.1.6. RFID Introduction (Option) ......................................................................... 3.1-29

3.1.6.1. User login ........................................................................................ 3.1-29

3.1.6.2. User logout ...................................................................................... 3.1-31

3.1.6.3. User Management ........................................................................... 3.1-31

3.2. Introduction of clamping unit structure and function ......................................... 3.2-1

3.2.1. Move mold and clamping system............................................................... 3.2-1

3.2.1.1. Introduction of platen structure ........................................................ 3.2-1

3.2.1.2. Introduction of clamping screen and clamping action ...................... 3.2-2

EN-MA_55_3354 1
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.2.1.3. Introduction of low pressure mold protection function ...................... 3.2-3

3.2.1.4. Introduction of auto mold adjusting function .................................... 3.2-5

3.2.1.5. Opening screen and introduction of opening action ......................... 3.2-7

3.2.1.6. Setting of cooling time ..................................................................... 3.2-8

3.2.1.7. Operating Instructions of Auto Mode ............................................... 3.2-10

3.2.2. Ejector System........................................................................................... 3.2-15

5
3.2.2.1. Introduction of ejector screen and function ...................................... 3.2-16

52
3.2.2.2. Introduction of link action of ejection and opening ........................... 3.2-18

3.2.2.3. Introduction of requisition cut function(Option) ................................ 3.2-19

61
3.2.3. Core System .............................................................................................. 3.2-21

3.2.3.1. Introduction of core function selection and types ............................. 3.2-21

3.2.3.2. Position of core action ..................................................................... 3.2-23

70
3.2.3.3. Introduction of neutron core-pulling opening linkage function .......... 3.2-26

3.2.3.4. Introduction of core forward hold function ........................................ 3.2-27

3.2.3.5. Introduction of core action priority .................................................... 3.2-28

04
3.2.3.6. Introduction of action delay setting of cores ..................................... 3.2-30

3.2.3.7. Introduction of core whole-process monitoring function ................... 3.2-33

07

3.2.3.8. Introduction of core decompression principle and function(Option) . 3.2-34

3.2.4. Introduction of mold installation ................................................................. 3.2-34

3.2.4.1. Instructions of magnetic platen machine installation mold (option) .. 3.2-35

22

3.2.4.2. Instructions on the installation of hydraulic fixture mold (Option) ..... 3.2-38

3.2.5. Instructions on blasting function................................................................. 3.2-40

20

3.2.5.1. Instructions on blasting screen ........................................................ 3.2-40

3.3. Introduction of heating system.......................................................................... 3.3-1

3.3.1. Charging barrel heating system ................................................................. 3.3-1

3.3.1.1. Introduction of the basic screen of charging barrel temperature heating

..................................................................................................................... 3.3-1

3.3.1.2. Setting and meaning of charging barrel anti-cold function ............... 3.3-3

3.3.1.3. Introduction of thermal insulation function and idle automatic thermal

insulation transferring ................................................................................... 3.3-3

3.3.1.4. Setting of manual mode of temperature control ............................... 3.3-5

2 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.3.1.5. Weekly heating plan function ........................................................... 3.3-7

3.3.1.6. Introduction of material entrance cooling ......................................... 3.3-8

3.3.1.7. Maximum allowable material temperature function .......................... 3.3-9

3.3.1.8. Oil temperature preheating function ................................................ 3.3-10

3.3.2. Hot runner heating system(Option) ............................................................ 3.3-11

3.3.2.1. Introduction of basic screen of mold temperature ............................ 3.3-11

5
3.3.2.2. Introduction of mold temperature soft start function ......................... 3.3-15

52
3.3.3. Temperature PID self-learning system ....................................................... 3.3-17

3.3.3.1. Temperature PID self-learning settings ............................................ 3.3-17

61
3.3.3.2. Temperature PID self-learning function monitoring .......................... 3.3-19

3.4. Introduction of injection plasticization system ................................................... 3.4-1

3.4.1. Injection system ......................................................................................... 3.4-1

70
3.4.1.1. Basic introduction of injection screen............................................... 3.4-2

3.4.1.2. Introduction of injection transform holding function .......................... 3.4-4

3.4.1.3. Introduction of automatic purge function .......................................... 3.4-6

04
3.4.1.4. Use of valve function (Option) ......................................................... 3.4-7

3.4.1.5. Introduction to the use of the injection curve function ...................... 3.4-10
07

3.4.1.6. Introduction of secondary charging function .................................... 3.4-10

3.4.1.7. Introduction of pre-injection function ................................................ 3.4-12

3.4.1.8. Introduction of gas assistant injection function (Option)................... 3.4-13

22

3.4.1.9. Basic introduction of nozzle function (Option).................................. 3.4-15

3.4.1.10. Introduction of injection speed cycle function ................................ 3.4-17

20

3.4.2. Charging System ....................................................................................... 3.4-20

3.4.2.1. Basic introduction of charging screen .............................................. 3.4-21

3.4.2.2. Setting of charging backpressure .................................................... 3.4-21

3.4.2.3. Setting of suckback before charge .................................................. 3.4-22

3.4.2.4. Setting of suckback after charging ................................................... 3.4-24

3.4.2.5. Setting of cooling time before charge .............................................. 3.4-25

3.4.3. Nozzle system ........................................................................................... 3.4-26

3.4.3.1. Basic introduction of nozzle screen ................................................. 3.4-26

EN-MA_55_3354 3
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.4.3.2. Function introduction of nozzle forward hold ................................... 3.4-28

3.5. Production management .................................................................................. 3.5-1

3.5.1. Introduction of mold parameters/machine parameters saving and loading 3.5-1

3.5.2. Production count setting and output .......................................................... 3.5-5

3.5.3. Setting of quality parameters ..................................................................... 3.5-9

3.5.4. Process data monitoring ............................................................................ 3.5-11

5
3.5.5. Description of process parameters change records................................... 3.5-12

52
3.5.6. Notes for automatic cycle start................................................................... 3.5-15

3.5.7. Introduction to the use of quality curve ...................................................... 3.5-18

61
3.5.8. Identification of program version ................................................................ 3.5-19

3.5.9. Lubrication setting...................................................................................... 3.5-21

3.5.10. Storage and loading of machine parameters ........................................... 3.5-22

70
3.5.11. Introduction to robot interface (Option) .................................................... 3.5-23

3.5.11.1. Simple robot ................................................................................... 3.5-23

3.5.11.2. Robot mold open middle function (Option) ..................................... 3.5-24

04
3.6. J6 card introduction (Option) ............................................................................ 3.6-1

3.6.1. Basic introduction of J6 screen .................................................................. 3.6-1

07

3.6.2. Alarm information ....................................................................................... 3.6-9

3.6.2.1. Introduction to Alarm Information ..................................................... 3.6-10

3.6.2.2. Analysis of alarm content on J6 and drive screen ............................ 3.6-13

22

3.6.3. Drive zeroing/self-learning function............................................................ 3.6-15

3.6.3.1. Zero-finding/self-learning significance ............................................. 3.6-15

20

3.6.3.2. Zeroing/self-learning settings........................................................... 3.6-15

3.6.3.3. Tips for zeroing and self-learning ..................................................... 3.6-16

3.7. Alarm list ........................................................................................................... 3.7-1

4 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Preface
Use of documents:

The documents describes the main screen of Haitian controller, the main operating
procedures, as well as prompt message in the visibility operating screen.

Target group and condition of user

The following conditions must be available when using this manual.

5
Target group Required knowledge and skill

52
Basic technique education or operation training
Knowledge required:

61
Safety standard training;
Machine setter
Function of injection molding machine;
Parameter setting of edit panel;
70
Set a injection molding machine.

Operation training
Knowledge required:
04
Machine operator
Safety standard training;
Injection molding procedure
07
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 5
20
22
07
04
70
61
52
5
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.1. General layout of the machine
Clamping part Injection part

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

5
52
61
1
70 9 10

1. Safety door of the clamping zone

04
2. Top plate and top bar

3. Movable platen

4. Fixed platen
07

5. Hopper base of the injection zone

6. Screw cylinder

7. charging cylinder
22

8. Advance speed motor

9. PC operating panel
20

10. Distribution box

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-1
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.1.1. Overall introduction of the controller system

General rules

PILOT5 series (including PILOT5580 and PILOT5530) is a simple, fully functional injection
molding machine control system, and is also a series of control systems used by Haitian
Group.

Outlines

5
⚫ Overall introduction of the controller

Introduction to main communication interface

52
⚫

3.1.1.1. Overall introduction of the controller

61
70
04
07
22
20

The PILOT5580 controller has a total of 48 digital input points (PB points), 48 digital output
points (PC points), 12 AD channels, 12 DA channels (voltage type), and no temperature
input channel.The controller is equipped with EtherCAT communication function,
expandable IO module and temperature module.

3.1-2 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
The PILOT5531 controller has a total of 32 digital input points (PB points), 32 digital output
70
points (PC points), 6 AD channels, 8 DA channels (voltage type), and 10 sets of temperature
input channels.The controller is equipped with EtherCAT communication function,
expandable IO module and RMTP12 temperature module.

3.1.1.2. Introduction to main communication interface

04
07
22
20

The PILOT5 system provides one set of NET1 interface to the HMI panel and one set of
NET5 interface to EtherCAT.Two groups of CANBus control can be connected to RMTP12
temperature module and IO expansion module.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-3
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.1.1.3. Introduction to HMI3354 panel

5
52
USB socket

61
70
04
Data lock Emergency stop
button
07

On the back of the HMI3354, a set of NET1 interfaces is provided to the host. A group of
network ports is reserved and a set of 232/485 communication interfaces is provided.

3.1.1.4. IO extended module

22

TmIoT_i202 is a simple, fully functional expansion card that communicates with the host
CAN to perform remote IO point expansion.

Among them, the upper and lower IO interfaces are isolated design and there is no direct
20

connection inside.IN1~IN8 and O01~O08 are a set of power supplies, and IN9~IN16 and
O09~O016 are another set of power supplies.The IO power supply connection of the
expansion board provides a total of 4 HCOM nodes, and all the wiring can load up to 32A
current return (48W * 16 valves open at the same time).The maximum current of single point
at input point is 5mA, while the maximum current of single point at output point is 2A.

3.1-4 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Power
supply
A

5
52
Input point

61
Power supply B
70
Output point
04
07

This module provides 2 CANs and 1 NET. The two SCANs are connected in parallel and
define one input and one output, which are used via communication with the host. The
22

remaining MCAN and NET interfaces are reserved.

Note that the end device must have a terminating resistor on the SCAN OUT connector.
20
Reserve

Reserve

Reserve

Reserve

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-5
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.1.1.5. RMTP12 expansion module

The RMTP12 is a simple, fully functional temperature control expansion card.Remote

temperature expansion can be performed through CAN communication with the host.It can
be used as temperature detection control of material temperature or mold temperature.

The module provides 12 points DC24V transistor output, single point maximum current
is1.2A and the sharing point is 24V.

5
power

52
TRM
COM
CAN-
CAN+
COM
+24V
FGND

+24V
TO1
TO2
TO3
TO4
TO5
TO6
TO7
TO8
TO9
TO10
TO11
TO12
CAN Temperature control

61
Dial
E
F 1 70
23
CD

45
AB

67
89

PWR.ON ERR.
/RUN

TC1+
04
TC1
TC2+
TC2

RMTP12
TC3+
TC3
TC4+
TC4
TC5+
TC5
07

TC6+
TC6
TC7+
TC7
TC8+
TC8
TC9+
TC9
TC10+
22

TC10
TC11+
TC11
TC12+
TC12
20

The module uses CAN communication. At the end of the device, TR and CAN must be short-
circuited to the termination resistor.

3.1-6 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.1.2. Introduction of button on the button plate

General rules

User shall be familiar with the button on the operating panel of controller before using the
machine. The button plate integrates several action buttons and screen shortcut buttons. It
allows you to switch among different operating mode and the manual control of the machine.

Outline of the section

5
⚫ General introduction of the button plate

52
⚫ Detail introduction of buttons

3.1.2.1. General introduction of the button plate

1 2

61
70
04
07
22
20

3 4 5 6 7 8

Button plate

[1] interface switch button

[2] input and select button

[3] Manual button of clamping unit

[4] Select the operating mode of machine

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-7
 Volume 3 Operation manual
[5] Mold adjustment backward and forward button

[6] Injection unit manual button

[7] Motor heater mold temperature on/off button

[8] Lubricating unit button

3.1.2.2. Detail introduction of buttons

(1). Button for the operating mode of the machine

5
52
Manual semi-automatic automatic mold adjustment

61
Manual button: This button integrates several functions. It can be used to switch
70
the machine from any operating mode to the manual operating mode, or to eliminate the
abnormity. It can also be used for the emergency stop of action under other mode. When
the button light is on, the machine is under the manual mode.
04

Mold aduusting button: The adjusting mode is used for the assembly and
adjustment. Under this mode, the pressure and speed of action is comparatively low. This
07

mode is used together with many other functions, such as the manual mold adjustment and
the auto mold adjustment.

The machine is under mold adjusting mode when the button light is on.
22

Semi-automatic button: The machine will enter into the semi-automatic mode
20

when you press this button. Please close the safety door before enter into next circulation.
The machine is under semi-automatic mode when then button light is on.

Automatic button: The machine will enter into the automatic mode when you press
this button. The machine will execute the entire circulation automatically when running this
operating mode. In case the operating time reach the set value or there’s error in the
machine, the controller will stop the machine and the alarm will ring. The machine is under
automatic mode when then button light is on.

3.1-8 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
(2). Mold forward/backward button

Mold Mold
Backward Forward

5
52
Mold oorward button: When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting
mode, by pressing the button, the injecting molding machine will make the mold forward
action. The mold forward action will be executed according to the set value on the parameter
screen. Upon the release of the button or in case the mold is forwarded to the position, the

61
action will stop.

70
Mold Backward button: When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting
mode, by pressing the button, the injecting molding machine will make the mold backward
action. The mold backward action will be executed according to the set value on the
parameter screen. Upon the release of the button or in case the mold is backed to the
04
position, the action will stop.

(3). Manual button of clamping unit

07
22
20

Mold opening button: When certain condition is met under the manual operating
mode, the injection molding machine will execute the mold opening action by pressing this
button. The mold opening action will be executed according to the set value on the technique
screen. The mold opening will be stopped by releasing the button or when the mold is
opened to the position. The button integrates the reset function in case the core, the blast
or the thimble is set. Certain sequential actions will be executed by operating this button.

When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting mode, by pressing the button, the

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-9
 Volume 3 Operation manual
mold opening action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.

Clamping button: When certain condition is met under the manual operating mode,
the injection molding machine will execute the clamping action by pressing this button. The
clamping action will be executed according to the set value on the technique screen. The
clamping will be stopped by releasing the button or when the mold is closed to the position.

5
When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting mode, by pressing the button, the
clamping action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.

52
juector backward button: When certain condition is met under the manual

61
operating mode, the injection molding machine will execute the ejector backward action by
pressing this button. The ejector backward action will be executed according to the set value
on the technique screen. The ejector backward will be stopped by releasing the button or
when the mold is backward to the position.
70
When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting mode, by pressing the button, the
ejector backward action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.
04
juector forward button: When certain condition is met under the manual operating
mode, the injection molding machine will execute the ejector forward action by pressing this
button. The ejector forward action will be executed according to the set value on the
07

technique screen. The ejector forward will be stopped by releasing the button or when the
mold is forward to the position.

When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting mode, by pressing the button, the
ejector forward action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.
22

Core A forward Core A backward: Select the function of core A. By pressing

20

the forward or backward button under the manual operating mode, it can realize the core A
forward/backward with the set pressure, speed and speed at any position of mold opening
or clamping.

Core B forward Core B backward: Select the function of core B. By

pressing the forward or backward button under the manual operating mode, it can realize
the core B forward/backward with the set pressure, speed and speed at any position of mold
opening or clamping.

3.1-10 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Core C forward Core C backward: Select the function of core C. By

pressing the forward or backward button under the manual operating mode, it can realize
the core C forward/backward with the set pressure, speed and speed at any position of mold
opening or clamping.

5
Core D forward Core D backward: Core D function is selected. Pressing the

52
forward or backward key under manual mode can perform core D forward and backward at
any position of the switch mode according to the set pressure, velocity and time conditions.

61
Core j forward Core j backward:Core E function is selected. Pressing the
forward or backward key under manual mode can perform core E forward and backward at
any position of the switch mode according to the set pressure, velocity and time conditions.
70
Core o forward Core o backward: Core F function is selected. Pressing
the forward or backward key under manual mode can perform core F forward and backward
04
at any position of the switch mode according to the set pressure, velocity and time conditions.

When there are more than 6 sets of cores in the machine configuration, manually core
objects can be set on the core function screen to operate advance and retreat of G and H
cores.
07

Male mold blasting: Select the blasting function. By pressing the male mold blasting
22

button, it can realize the blasting function according to the set blasting time at any position
of mold opening or clamping.
20

oemale mold blasting: Select the blasting function. By pressing the female mold
blasting button, it can realize the blasting function according to the set blasting time at any
position of mold opening or clamping.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-11
 Volume 3 Operation manual
(4). Manual button of injecting unit

5
52
Inuection button: When certain condition is met under the manual operating mode,
the injection molding machine will execute the injecting action by pressing this button. The
injecting action will be executed according to the set value on the technique screen. In case

61
the button is released or the injection is completed, the action will be stopped. If the feeding
inlet is set, this button will have the reset function. Certain sequential actions will be executed
by the operation of this button. When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting mode,
by pressing the button, the injecting action will be executed with independent speed and
70
pressure.

This button is a composite function button: It can be used to start the automatic cleaning
process. For details, refer to the description of the “Automatic Cleaning” function.
04

Charging button: When certain condition is met under the manual operating mode,
the injection molding machine will execute the charging action according to the set value on
07

the technique screen by pressing this button. In case the button is pressed again or the
charging is completed, the action will be stopped.

When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting mode, by pressing the button, the
22

charging action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.

Note：The button does not have uog function.

20

Suckback button: When certain condition is met under the manual operating mode,
the injection molding machine will execute the suckback action by pressing this button. The
suckback action will be executed according to the set value on the technique screen. In case
the button is released or the suckback is completed, the action will be stopped. I

When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting mode, by pressing the button, the
suckback action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.

Nozzle forward button: When certain condition is met under the manual operating
mode, the injection molding machine will execute the nozzle forward action according to the
3.1-12 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
set value on the technique screen by pressing this button. In case the button is released or
the nozzle forward is completed, the action will be stopped.

When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting mode, by pressing the button, the
nozzle forward action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.

Nozzle backward button: When certain condition is met under the manual

5
operating mode, the injection molding machine will execute the nozzle backward action
according to the set value on the technique screen by pressing this button. In case the button

52
is released or the nozzle backward is completed, the action will be stopped.

When certain condition is met under the mold adjusting mode, by pressing the button, the
nozzle backward action will be executed with independent speed and pressure.

61
(5). Manual lubricating button

70
04
Lubrication 1: When this button is pressed in manual mode, Group 1 lubricant pump
can be turned on.
07

Lubrication 2: When this button is pressed in manual mode, Group 2 lubricant pump
can be turned on.

(6). Power unit button zone

22
20

Heater on/off button: When certain condition is met under the manual operating
mode, user can press the heat on button to start heating the feed cylinder, and can stop the
heating by pressing again. User can judge the status by observing the status light

Note： The button does not have uog function.

Motor on/off button: When certain condition is met under the manual operating or

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-13
 Volume 3 Operation manual
adjusting mode, user can start the motor by pressing the motor button, and can stop the
motor by pressing the motor button again under the manual mode. User can judge the status
by observing the status light

Note： The button does not have uog function.

Mold temperature key: In the manual or molding adjustment operation mode, if the

5
conditions are met, press the mold temperature button, the mold temperature electric
heating will start heating. Press the mold temperature button again in the manual mode, the

52
mold temperature electric heating stops heating. The status light display can determine the
current status.

Note: The button does not have uog function.

61
(7). Online help button

Online help key: In any screen, press the online help key. If there is corresponding
70
help information, the corresponding help content can be displayed.

3.1.3. General layout of the controller screen

04
General rules

It introduces the general layout of the controller screen,

It introduces the general layout of the controller screen, including the basic icon, and the
07

data setting. Through this section, user can have a general understanding on the controller
screen and the basic setting.

Section introduction
22

⚫ Introduction of main screen

⚫ Introduction of status bar

⚫ Introduction of title bar

20

⚫ Introduction of parameter part

⚫ Introduction of alarming and prompt part

⚫ Introduction of soft button

⚫ Introduction of digital and letter input

⚫ Introduction of screen components’ function

Main function of the screen layout

⚫ Facilitate the users’ operation

⚫ Check the action status of the machine

3.1-14 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
⚫ Parameter setting of the machine

3.1.3.1. Introduction of the main screen

Status bar

Title bar

5
Parameter area

52
61
70 Warning area
04
Soft button area
3.1.3.2. Introduction of the status bar
07

Haitian logo Power meter Mold temp Heat Motor 55 Communicate 28Communicate Current time

Status
22

Power meter communication connected

Power meter communication not connected

20

Mold temp open status

Mold temp closed status

Heat open status

Heat closed status

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-15
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Motor open status

Motor closed status

55 communication connected

5
55 Communication not connected

52
28 Communication connected

3.1.3.3. Introduction of title bar

61
Action mark Page name 70 Current mold name Action mode

(1). Action Mode:

manual mode
04
Press the manual button, and the machine will enter into the manual mode;

mold adjusting mode

07

Press the mold adjusting button, and the machine will enter into the mold adjusting mode;

semi-automatic mode
22

Press the semi-automatic button, and the machine will enter into the semi-automatic mode;

automatic mode
20

Press the automatic button, and the machine will enter into the automatic mode;

(2). Actual action mark on the screen:

clamping action

opening action

nozzle forward action

3.1-16 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

nozzle backward action

injecting action

charging action

5
ejector forward action

52
ejector backward action

lubricating action

61
core forward action

core backward action

70
blasting action
04
3.1.3.4. Introduction of parameter part
07
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-17
 Volume 3 Operation manual
It shows the status parameter when the machine is under working condition, including the
pressure flow, the rpm, the clamping pressure, the injection pressure, the mold base position,
the screw position, the thimble position and the nozzle position.

Actual output display zone:

It show the pressure and flow of system I and system II respectively.

5
52
61
Actual feedback display zone:

It shows the rpm of screw, the injecting pressure and the clamping pressure respectively,
the last two items are standby.
70
04
07

Actual position display zone

It shows the mold base position, the screw position, the thimble position and the nozzle
position.
22
20

Actual action display zone:

It show the current time, the mold number, the circulation time and the soak time.

oeed cylinder temperature display zone:

3.1-18 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Oil temperature display zone:

3.1.3.5. Introduction of alarming and prompt part

5
52
It show the alarming and prompt message of the machine at present.

3.1.3.6. Introduction of soft button

61
(1). Word button:

70
04
07
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-19
 Volume 3 Operation manual

(2). Graphical button:

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Switch between the word button and the graphical button:

3.1-20 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: Main screen→F10 →F7
70
Enter the password and enter into the system parameter screen, you can change the display
style of the soft button.
04
User can choose the graphical button for operation. Select the Graphical style in the drop-
down list of Toolbar Select.

Introduction of digital and letter input

07
22
20

The button is used for the digital input. Upon the pressing of any number in this zone, the
screen will display the number you entered. The controlling unit of the computer has set the
maximum and the minimum value. Any number larger than the maximum will not be
executed. Such value will be shown at the lower part of the screen. In the following screen,
the input value between 0 to 140 is allowed. In case the input value in not within the minimum
and the maximum value, the cursor can not leave the current input box until you input a right
value.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-21
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Press button for a continuous time to enter the letter through the numerical keyboard. For
example: if you want to input a, you shall press the 7 for 2 times.

70
04

introduction of some button in the keyboard.

07

space button：double press for screenshot.

22

decimal point button： Press this button to input the decimal point. For dialog box
with several options, it can also be used to callout the drop-down list
20

Introduction of the screen components’ function

(1). Drop-down list：

3.1-22 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Press the decimal point button, and move the cursor to select the needed option.
04
07
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-23
 Volume 3 Operation manual
(2). function selection

5
52
61
70
The drop-down list is also used in the function selection, you can choose “Use” or “No use”.
04
(3). Screenshot selection:

Insert the USB flash disk, click the space button for 2 times on the screen the need
07

to be saved, and wait for a moment, then a dialog box will prompt you that the data is saved.
The screenshot is saved in the folded named “Print” in the USB flask disk.

(4). OK and cancel button

22

OK button: Press this button to confirm the current selection.

20

Cancel button: Press this button to cancel the current selection.

3.1.4. Program update method

General rules

This section describes how to update the HMI3354 panel and host program. Note that the
HMI and host program update methods are different.

Outlines

⚫ Update mode of HMI3354 panel

3.1-24 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
⚫ Update mode of host system

3.1.4.1. HMI program burning method

After powering on, press F10+F8 to enter the bootmenu screen and update it from the USB
device.

5
52
61
70
04

3.1.4.2. DSP55, DSP28, RMTP12 temperature program, RemoteIO program

(1). After the panel is turned on, select groups under F10 →F7 system →F9 download, and
07

according to need, select the corresponding program from the USB device.

(2). After the DSP55 program is updated, it needs to be powered off and restarted, without
any other operations.
22

(3). Please update the program with manual mode, motor off, electric off and mold off.
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-25
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

3.1.5. General setting of user

General rules

Haitian injection molding machine provides clients with several language option. User can
select the needed language through setting. Thus can facilitate the user in different countries.
The Date Time is used to modify the time, and to cooperate with other actions.

Introduction of this chapter

⚫ Introduction of screen for language selection

3.1-26 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
⚫ The available language list

⚫ The default language and unit setting

Introduction of screen for language selection

5
52
61
70
04

Entry path: main screen→F10 →F7

07
22
20

Language: set the language of screen. Press the Language icon and callout the drop-down
list, and there appears a list of the available languages. Press the up and down button to roll
the list, click the needed language, and the system will switch the current interface language
into the language you selected.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-27
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Start from idle time: When the idle time is set, the system will start the screensaver or blank

5
screen when then idle time reach the set value.

52
Start from the opening times: When this value is set, the system will start the screensaver
or blank screen when the set value is reached.

Start after enter the main screen automatically: After restarting the machine, the system will

61
start the screensaver or blank screen after stay in the main screen for certain time.

Screen saver animation: select whether to use screen saver animation, if not, the blank
screen will be used.
70
04

Set the date and time of the system. Input number to change the date or time.

Language list
07

Chinese name Corresponding words on the screen

简体中文 简体中文
22

繁体中文 繁體中文

英文 English
20

土耳其语 Turkish

俄罗斯语 Russian

西班牙语 Spanish

希腊语 Greece

葡萄牙语 Portuguese

3.1-28 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

伊朗语 Iranian

日语 Japan

韩语 Korea

越南语 Vietnam

5
波兰语 Polish

52
阿尔巴尼亚语 Albanian

塞维利亚语 Serbian

61
德语 German

法语 French

斯洛伐克语
70
Slovakia

匈牙利语 Maygar
04
芬兰语 Finland

泰语 Thailand
07

3.1.6. RFID Introduction (Option)

General rules
22

In order to facilitate production management, Haitian Group has defined different user levels
for users.Different levels have different usage rights.The rights include the permission to
enter the screen, the permission to set the parameters, the language settings, which all need
to define different levels of users.Each user's specific information includes: user name, use
20

code, power level, and use password.Machines that use the RFID function can only gain
permission by logging in to change the machine parameters.No login when power on, the
default level is 0.

Outlines

⚫ How to use the function

⚫ Explain how the user information is changed

3.1.6.1. User login

1) Log in to a new user using an ID card

The precondition for using an ID card is that the user information has been successfully
EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-29
 Volume 3 Operation manual
saved on the ID card.

Place the card in the sensing area to log in to the new user.

The location to swipe card is as follows:

5
52
61
70
04
07

The location
22

to swipe card
20

2) Login using the user name and password entered on the screen

Access: main interfaceright arrow key on the keyboarduse the keyboard to input use code
and use password.

After the login is successful, the current user and the power level will be displayed under the
title bar in the upper right corner of the main interface. The icon and user's rights are
displayed in the title bar and can be seen on each screen.

3.1-30 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.1.6.2. User logout

1) Swipe out

When a logged-in user swipes card for the second time, it represents logging out.

2) Automatic logout

Setting: Main screen→Groups under F10 →F7 system.

Automatic logout instructions

5
⚫ The default time for automatic logout is 1 minute, with the upper and lower limit of 1~99;

52
⚫ When the panel does not operate, and the time is up, it will automatically log out;

⚫ 15s before the automatic logout, the lower left corner prompts "The user is about to
automatically log out."

61
3.1.6.3. User Management

Haitian Group provides customers with different user rights to facilitate customer
management.Customers can add, modify and delete users through user
70
management.Before performing management operations on the user, you must first obtain
the user management authorization, that is, the login password of the Administrator user
from the related department of Haitian Group.
04
07
22
20

1) Add users

In the option column, select "Add User"enter the user name, password and power level in
the last column of the form OK.

2) Modify user data

EN-MA_55_3354 3.1-31
 Volume 3 Operation manual
In the option column, select "Modify user data" enter the user's serial number in read
columnenter the modified content at the bottom line of the form OK.

3) Delete users

In the option column, select "Delete user"enter the user's serial number in read columnOK.

4) Write the user information into the card

In the option column, select "Write the user information into card" enter the user serial

5
number in read columnselect OK in the column of access to the cardprompt "Please
swipe."OK.

52
5) Store the user information in memory card

The two methods of operation are similar, and the instructions are combined here.

61
In the option column, select “Write user information into memory card” or “Read user
information from memory card”OK.

If the storage device is not inserted well or not plugged in, the system will pop up and say
"The external storage device is not ready". 70
6) Reading user information from the memory card

Same as above.
04
07
22
20

3.1-32 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.2. Introduction of clamping unit structure and function
3.2.1. Move mold and clamping system

3.2.1.1. Introduction of platen structure

ounction of clamping unit

⚫ Clamp the mold

⚫ Hold the clamping force during injection

5
⚫ Open the mold after the product is formed

52
⚫ Eject the product

Composition of the clamping unit

61
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

70
04
07
22

【1】hopper base of the clamping part

20

【2】position gage of mold closing

【3】rear platen

【4】crankshaft

【5】tie bar

【6】roof plate and roof bar

【7】movable platen

【8】fixed platen

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-1
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.2.1.2. Introduction of clamping screen and clamping action

General rules

The clamping action is an

The closing action is an important procedure in the injection molding machine. The clamping
shall be quick and smooth, and shall not damage the mold. It can be realized through
adjustment of pressure and flow in different stages.

5
Introduction of this section

Introduction of clamping screen

52
⚫

⚫ Introduction of clamping action

1)Introduction of mold clamping screen

61
70
04
07
22
20

Entry path: main screen→F2 clamp

[1] mode closing action setting: in this part, the user can set the corresponding pressure flow
according to the starting position of each section to achieve the most appropriate mode
closing process.

[2] die opening action setting: in this part, the user can set the corresponding pressure flow
according to the starting position of each section to achieve the most appropriate die
opening process.

[3] correlation value display area: in this area, users can clearly know the actual value of
relevant parameters such as time and location.

[4] opening and closing curve: in this area, users can clearly see the opening and closing
3.2-2 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
velocity curve of each module

Note: the size of the pressure flow shall be carried out according to the protection
requirements of the mold, and the relevant slope shall be matched to achieve the
requirements of fast and smooth clamping.

2) Introduction of clamping action.

The clamping action can be divided into: clamping->low pressure->high pressure clamping

5
Clamping: set the related flow pressure according to the technical requirement of mold, thus
to guarantee that the movable platen can reach the clamping position smoothly.

52
Low pressure: the speed is low at the low pressure clamping syage, thus to prevent the mold
from being damaged due to foreign matter. Therefore, low pressure shall be set. The
switching point between the closing stage III and the low pressure stage shall be set in such

61
a position that the foreign matter may exists.

High pressure clamping: After the clamping action is completed, the machine will increase
the pressure until it reach the set value.
70
Note: the incorrect parameter may damage the machine or mold.

3.2.1.3. Introduction of low pressure mold protection function

General rules
04
The low pressure mold protection function can protect the mold from being damaged due to
the mixed products during the clamping procedure.

Option introduced in the document

07

⚫ Screen of low pressure mold protection function

⚫ Alarming message

ounction of low pressure mold protection

22

⚫ To protect the mold

20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-3
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Screen of low pressure mold protection function

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F2 clamp
04
Low pressure mold protection stage: When the platen moves to the set position during
the clamping, the mold protection will start. The output pressure flow is in accordance with
the set value in the above figure.
07

As within the time scope of circulation, please set such a pressure that can ensure the platen
is completely closed. The lower the set flow is, the better the protective effect will be.
22
20

3.2-4 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: Main screen→F10NEXT→F2PM→F8PARA
70
Timing limit of low pressure closing: In case the mold protection time exceeds the set value,
the circulation will be stopped and the system will make alarm.
04
3.2.1.4. Introduction of auto mold adjusting function

General rules
07

The auto mold adjusting function is used during the mold replacement. After the new mold
is installed in the machine, please execute the auto mold adjusting procedure to obtain the
mold thickness, thus to guarantee that the machine can execute the normal clamping action.

Options introduced in the document

22

⚫ Auto mold adjustment screen

⚫ Operation of auto mold adjustment

20

⚫ Operation of manual mold adjustment

⚫ Alarm information

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-5
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Auto mold aduustment screen

5
52
61
70
Mold closing pressure: set the closing pressure during auto mold adjustment.
04
Mold closing flow: set the closing flow during auto mold adjustment.

Mold opening pressure: set the opening pressure during auto mold adjustment.

Mold opening flow: set the opening flow during auto mold adjustment.
07

II. Operation of auto mold aduustment

Step 1: Rapid press the mold adjustment button for 2 times, and the computer screen will
show the message of “Please open the safety door”. After the safety door is open, press the
22

loop start button(it’s needed when the loop start button is installed),then the machine will
enter into the auto mold adjustment procedure.

Step 2: After the auto mold adjustment is finished by the machine, open the mold completely.
20

Step 3: The computer screen shows the message that the “Auto mold adjustment is
completed”, and the auto mold adjustment is completed by then.

III. Operation of manual mold aduustment

Step 1 : Set the proper mold adjusting pressure and flow

Step 2 : Press the mold adjusting button on the panel

Step 3 : Under the mold adjusting mode, press the clamping button to execute the clamping
action. In case the fixed and movable platen can not clamp the mold tightly, press the open
mold button.

Step 4 : Press the Mold Adjustment Forward button, and make the mold adjusting gear move

3.2-6 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
forward for 1 unit.

Step 5 : Return to step 3, and make sure that the fixed and movable platen clamp the mold
tightly.

Step 6 : Press the opening button and open mold completely. Press the Mold Adjustment
Backward button and make the mold adjusting gear move backward for 1 unit.

Step 7 : Press the clamp button and make clamping action. The manual mold adjustment is
successful if the fixed and movable platen fails to clamp the mold (in principle, the clamping

5
shall succeed if the gear go forward for 1 unit, and shall fail if the gear go backward for 1

52
unit)

Step 8 : Manual mold adjustment completed.

3.2.1.5. Opening screen and introduction of opening action

61
General rules: this section introduces the opening action after the completion of cooling
and before the ejection of product. The pressure flow in each section can be set
independently.

I. Manual opening action button

70
04
II. Opening

Through the shrink of crankshaft, the movable platen can be opened to such a position that
the product can be obtained.
07

Action icon:

Parameter setting:
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-7
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: Main screen→F2clamp
70
Multilevel control of opening can be realized through the setting of parameters in different
positions, thus to achieve a quick and smooth opening action.
04
3.2.1.6. Setting of cooling time

General rules
07

The hot cooling material shall be cooled and formed. The cooling time is decided by the
plasticization procedure and the ejection capability of the product.

Options introduced in the document

22

⚫ Screen of cooling time setting

⚫ Cooling time function

ounction of cooling time

20

⚫ To avoid deformation during ejection

⚫ To guarantee the quality of product

3.2-8 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Screen of cooling time setting

5
52
61
70
Entry path: main screen→F2clamp→F5function→ F3function

II. Cooling time function

04
Cooling time(sec): After the cooling time is set, the machine will start timing upon the
completion of injection. The opening action can be executed after the cooling time is reached.
In case the nozzle backward mode is selected to be executed before opening, then it can
be executed after the cooling time is reached, and then the opening action will be executed
07

as well.
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-9
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.2.1.7. Operating Instructions of Auto Mode

1. Switch to Auto Mode

5
52
61
70
04
Entry path: Main screen→F2clamp→F7configuration

Select auto mode to no use enter normal mode;select use to enter auto mode;default no
use.
07

2. Intruduction of Auto Mode

Different from normal mode,auto mode divide the close mold motion into 3
segments:intelligent close mold segment,low pressure segment and high pressure
segment,divide the open mode motion into 2 segments:high pressure open mode segment
22

and intelligent open mode segment.

The deceleration method of auto mode is different from normal:it realize curve deceleration
from starting position to ending position of mode open motion through the open mode
20

kp(calculate the starting position of open mode),open mode gain,mold open end pressure
ramp and mold open end flow ramp in parameter 2,then end the open mode motion with
mold open end pressure ramp and mold open end flow ramp.

The deceleration method of auto mode:it realize curve deceleration from starting position to
ending position of close mode motion through the open mode kp(calculate the starting
position of open mode).

3.2-10 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen→F2clamp.

Setting clamp motion pressure,flow position and travel in clamp

04
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen→F2clamp→F5parameter 1.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-11
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Setting clamp motion ramp of pressure and flow in parameter 2.

5
52
61
70
04
Entry path: Main screen→F2clamp→F6parameter 2.

Setting mold opening and closing motion setup pressure and flow,deceleration KP and open
mode gain in parameter 2.
07
22
20

3.2-12 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3. KP test in auto mode

Open mold KP test.

Open mold parameters set.

In mold screen when setting the open mold travel and its pressure and flow,please refer to
the picture below.

5
52
61
70
04
07

Open mold KP set

Please enter parameter screen to adjust open mold KP,until the mold stop at the finish line
steadily,the larger the value setting,the stronger the impact.
22

If mould can not open to the finish line,for example:the open mold travel set 350mm,but
348.5 actually,we can increase the number of open mold KP.On the contrary can decrease
when the impact is too stronger.
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-13
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Close mold KP test

Set suitable close mold KP value in the screen of parameter 2.

04
07
22
20

(4) introduction of debugging screen

In order to facilitate the debugging of opening and closing die, a debugging screen is added
in the status bar.This screen places the parameters commonly used for opening and closing
3.2-14 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
die debugging.

5
52
61
70
3.2.2. Ejector System
04
General rules

The ejector is used to eject the workpiece from the injection mold.
07

Options introduced in the document

⚫ Ejector structure

I. juector structure
22
20

[1] ejector driver

[2] ejector connecting plate
[3] ejector connecting head
[4] ejector

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-15
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.2.2.1. Introduction of ejector screen and function

General rules

On ejector screen, user can set the pressure and flow of ejection action, as well as other
related functions.

Options introduced in the document

⚫ Ejector screen

5
⚫ Introduction of ejection function

52
⚫ Ejection parameter screen

juection menu

Enter into the ejection screen, see the following figure:

61
70
04
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen→F5 ejector

Ejection mode: three ejection mode, including stay, count and vibration can be selected.
Under count and vibration mode, you can choose the times, and the scope is 1-99.

From the above figure we can see that, a good ejection can be realized through the proper
setting of position, pressure, flow and delay of ejecting action.

3.2-16 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
juector function screen

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen→F5eject→F4function
04
juector parameter screen
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen→F5eject→F5parameter

Set the pressure and flow of ejecting action under mold adjusting mode.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-17
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Set the position and flow of ejector backward (to prevent the impact during ejector backward
due to overlarge flow).

3.2.2.2. Introduction of link action of ejection and opening

04
General rules

To execute the ejecting action during opening procedure can significantly shorten the
production cycle of product.
07

Options introduced in the document

⚫ Screen of link action of ejection and opening

22

⚫ Parameter setting of link action of ejection and opening

20

3.2-18 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Screen of link action of euection and opening

Select and set parameter under the eject function screen, see the following figure:

5
52
61
70
04
Entry path: main screen→F2 eject→F3 function
07

Function selection: whether to select the link action of opening and ejection.
22

Set the link position: to select the opening position at which the ejection is started.

Note: this is an optional function.

3.2.2.3. Introduction of requisition cut function(Option)

20

General rules

The requisition cut function is to cut sprue in the mold. In practical use, the ejector will cut
the useless bur from the product, thus to facilitate the separation of product and mold.

Options in introduced in the document

⚫ Requisition cut function description

⚫ Principle of requisition cut function

⚫ Screen of requisition cut function

Requisition cut function description:

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-19
 Volume 3 Operation manual
The requisition cut procedure:The pressure flow rate set to cut off the screen is set to be
ejected automatically when the injection pressure is maintained; in addition, user can choose
to hold or backward after ejection. The standard ejecting action can be executed after the
charging and opening action are completed.

Principle of requisition cut function:

Inject Eject Eject

5
and charge open
1st 2nd
hold

52
Select whether

61
to hold or back
after eject

Screen of requisition cut function:

70
04
07
22
20

3.2-20 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: main screen→F5eject→F4function→F3cut

Set the parameter on the cut screen under eject function. User can choose whether to use
eject backward or not.
04
3.2.3. Core System

General rules:
07

The core is used for the oil cylinder movement in the mold. It can control the forward and
backward action of oil cylinder during the automatic procedure of the injection molding
machine. The core valve plate and the core valve is used to control the action of core.

3.2.3.1. Introduction of core function selection and types

22

General rules

Select the core function in the core screen of the injection molding machine. You can choose
20

whether to use the core, and can set the parameters related to the core.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-21
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Selection of core function

5
52
61
70
Entry path：Main screen→F6core
04
See the above figure, enter the core screen of the injection molding machine, choose
whether to use core or screw, and set the related parameters.

II. Core parameters setting

07
22
20

According to the above figures, when you select core as the controlling mode, the core
options available for selection are travel, time and travel + time; when you select screw as
the controlling mode, the screw options available for selection are count, time and travel.

(1)Type:

【1】Time: The action of core or screw is controlled by time. When the platen reaches the
set position, the core will go in/out according to the time setting. The core action is only
controlled by time, and will not depend on the protection of limit switch. When the set time
reaches, the action will be stopped. The screw mode is just the same with the core mode.

3.2-22 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
【2】Travel: The action of core is controlled by the limit switch. When the platen reaches
the set position, the core will go in/out until it reach the end position of limit switch, and then
the core action stops.

【3】Travel + time: The action of core is controlled by the limit switch and the time. When
the platen reaches the set position, the next action will be executed only if the core contact
the travel switch and the set time ends.

【4】Count: It is used in screw mode. When the platen reaches the set position, the action

5
of screw will be count, when certain number is reached, the action ends.

52
(2)Pressure: Set the pressure of core action.

(3)olow: Set the flow of core action.

(4)Set position: Set the position of core in/out. When the platen reaches the set position,

61
the core will go in/out.

(5)Set time: It is the action time of core when the time mode is selected. After the set time
is reached, the core action stops.
70
(6)Screw count: It is the action times of screw under the screw mode. When the set times
are reached, the screw action stops.

(7)Hold: You can choose whether to use or not. If you choose to use, upon the pressing of
injection button, the core valve will start outputting; release the injection button to close the
04
core valve. The core needs to finish before the injection.

3.2.3.2. Position of core action

General rules
07

The action of core is limited by the set position. When the platen moves to the set position,
the core will execute the in/out action; in case the positional deviation of core is set, then the
action of core is decided by the set position and effective area of core position together.
22

I. introduction of core action and position

In the following, we take core A as an example to explain the relationship between the core
action and the set position.
20

Do not set the effective area of core position

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-23
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
The normal core action way is: during closing, when the platen reaches the set position, the
core will go in; during opening; when the platen reaches the set position, the core will go out.
According to the above figure, when the platen is closed to 42mm, the core goes in; and
04
when the platen is opened to 42mm, the core goes out.

In case the machine is under manual operation, when the current position of platen is just
the set position of core in, user can manually execute the core in action; when the current
position of platen is just the set position of core out, user can manually execute the core out
07

action.

Set the effective area of core position:

Enter the core – parameter screen, and you can see the frame for set the effective area of
22

core position. See the following figure, we set the effective area of 100 and take it as an
example to introduce the influence of effective area on the core action.
20

3.2-24 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: main screen→F6core→F7 parameter
70
In case effective area is not set, when the set position of core in is just the current position
of platen, we can manually execute the core in action. If the effective area of 10 is set, when
04
the set position of core in is 10 unit larger than the current position of platen, we can not
execute the core in action manually, or the machine will make alarm: Core A Action Deviation.
See the following figure. The core out action is just the same.
07
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-25
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.2.3.3. Introduction of neutron core-pulling opening linkage function

General rules

During the opening process, the realization of the linkage of neutron core pulling and
opening can reduce the cycle time and improve the production efficiency.

I. Selection of opening linkage function

The following is based on neutron A to introduce you the opening linkage function.

5
Choose the neutron to be linked in the linkage column and set the position to be realized in
the link position column as follows.

52
61
70
04
07
22

Entry path: Main screen →F2 mold base →F3 function

After choosing this function, set the neutron action position at the neutron screen. When the
machine opens to the set position, the machine will conduct opening and neutron retreat
20

actions at the same time. You will find the opening and neutron retreat icons on the left upper
corner of the main screen as the follows.

3.2-26 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
3.2.3.4. Introduction of core forward hold function

General rules

During the automatic operation of the machine, if the core forward hold function is selected,
04
the core forward will output in the injection action until the action ends.

I. Selection of core forward hold function

The following is to introduce the core forward hold function based on core A as example.
07

Enter the core screen and choose maintain option in the injection core, which means the
core forward hold function is used as follows.
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-27
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Entry path: Main screen →F6 core

II. Use of core forward hold function

After choosing core hold function, in the injection action under the automatic operation of
the machine, the core A forward valve outputs, which can be validates through PC output as
follows.

5
52
61
70
04

Entry path: Main screen →F10 next group →F4IO→F4PC1

07

3.2.3.5. Introduction of core action priority

General rules
22

When the machines applies multi groups of cores (over or equal to 2 groups), if the action
positions of many cores are the same one platen position, the action sequence of the cores
are decided by the action priority of the cores and the core forward and backward priority is
set in compliance with three types.
20

I. Setting of core action priority:

Take cores A and B as examples, if the action positions of the cores are the same one platen
position, we will introduce you the setting of the priority of the core actions.

Enter the core function screen and set the core forward and backward sequences under the
core forward and backward sequence column. The higher the priority is. As shown in the
following picture, the forward priority of core A is higher than the one of core B, which means
core A conducts the forward action earlier than core B; the backward priority of core B is
higher than the one of core A, which means the core B conducts the backward action earlier
than core A.

3.2-28 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry patch: Main screen →F6 core →F5 function
04
II. Use of core action priority

As the above figure, after setting the priority of the cores, during the operation process of
the machine, when the platen arrives at the set position for the forward action of the cores,
07

core A forwards first then core B; when the platen arrives at the set position for the backward
action of the cores, core B backwards first and then core A.

Under the manual mode, as the above figure after setting priority of the cores, if both cores
A and B are under the forward status, manually conduct the backward action of core A, as
22

the backward priority of core A is lower than core B, the machine will alarms: core B not
backwards to the place. As the following pictures shows for the alarm, the core B backward
action shall be earlier than the backward action of core A.
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-29
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: Main screen →F10 next group →F4IO
70
3.2.3.6. Introduction of action delay setting of cores
04
General rules

By setting the delay of core actions, the forward and backward actions or cores or the
opening and closing of core valves can be delayed for some time.
07

I. Introduction of core action delay setting:

Enter core parameter 2 screen to set the delay of related actions of cores as the following
figure.
22
20

3.2-30 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry patch: Main screen →F6 core →F7 parameters
04
07
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-31
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Core forward delay timing:
70
When the core clamping arrives the set position, the core delays for the set time to do the
forward action.
04
Core backward delay timing:

When the core opening arrives the backward set position, the core delays for the set time to
do the backward action.
07

Core forward start proportional valve open:

If the core is equipped with the proportional valve, after the core completes the forward
action, the proportional valve starts the delay setting time.
22

Core backward start proportional valve open:

If the core is equipped with the proportional valve, after the core completes the backward
20

action, the proportional valve starts the delay setting time.

Core forward end direction valve delay close:

If the core is equipped with the direction valve, after the core completes the forward action,
the direction valve closes the delay setting time.

Core backward end direction valve delay close:

If the core is equipped with the direction valve, after the core completes the backward action,
the direction valve closes the delay setting time.

Core forward end delay timing:

When the core clamping arrives the set forward position, after the forward action, the core

3.2-32 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
will continue to do the clamping action after the set delay time.

Core backward end delay timing:

When the core opening arrives the backward set position, after the backward action, the
core will continue to do the opening action after the set delay time.

Core midway delay time:

When the clamping or opening arrives the core forward or backward position, the core will

5
forward or backward after the set delay time.

52
3.2.3.7. Introduction of core whole-process monitoring function

General rules

Under the travel mode, if the core whole-process inspection function is selected, the

61
procedure will monitor the core forward and backward end electric signal for the entire
opening and clamping process and once the signal lost time is over the set filtration time,
the ma chine will alarm to remind the user the core is not at the forward or backward end
position.
70
I. Specific description of core whole-process monitoring function

Enter 1 in mold opening and closing whole-process inspection core signal column, which
means the core whole-process inspection function is used as follows.
04
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F6 neutorn →F7 parameters

Notice: The above functions are used for default. The non-professional personnel are not
authorized to change the functions as inappropriate changes many cause damages to the
Molds.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-33
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.2.3.8. Introduction of core decompression principle and function(Option)

General rules

When replacing the core oil tube, even with the motor turned off, there will be pressure within
the oil tube. The user can press the core decompression button on the machine to release
the pressure within the tube.

I. Core decompression principle

5
The machine releases the pressure of the oil tube with the output of the core decompression
valve and core forward and backward valves.

52
II. Introduction of core decompression function

Step 1. The motor must be turned off in the decompression of the core and the machine
shall be under the manual mode.

61
Step 2. If the machine is equipped with the core decompression valve, when the core
decompression button is pressed, the core decompression valve outputs and will turn off
after a certain time of decompression.
70
Step 3. If the core is applied by the machine this moment, the core inlet valve will be closed
after outlet for a certain time; then the core backward valve will be closed after outlet for a
certain time.
04
After the three steps as above, the decompression action of the core is completed.

3.2.4. Introduction of mold installation

General rules
07

The steps referred for the installation process of Molds and the preparation before the
production.

Options involved in the document

22

⚫ Mold installation steps

⚫ Mold parameter loading and related preparation work

20

I. Mold installation steps

a). Under the “manual” status, press the mold opening button to start the opening action,
and ensure that the machine is under the opening status;

b). Set the opening position in compliance with the requirements of the new Mold opening
stroke;

c). Under the adjustment status, switch the opening platen to the maximum place slowly;

d). Pull the nozzle out from the plane of the core platen to make sure the nozzle will not
knock down the new Molds;

e). Make sure the thimble number is matched with the relative new Molds and the thimbles
are backwarded to the place;
3.2-34 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
f). The new Molds are loaded by the crane with the core platen aimed at the corresponding
hole;

g). The new Molds are loaded by the crane with the core platen aimed at the corresponding
hole;

h). Use Mold pressing platen or fast die equipment to make sure the fixed and movable
Molds are clamped to the place;

i). Dismantle the locking block of the movable and fixed platens;

5
j). Release the loading equipment of the Molds;

52
k). Connect the corresponding water line, oil line and electric equipment of the Molds.

Notes: the above operation is only for reference.

61
II. Mold parameter loading and related preparation work

The user shall enter the mold parameter screen to conduct the corresponding parameter
loading.
70
a). After loading the mold parameters, turn on the corresponding water line devices.

b). Heat the charging barrel.

c). If there is mold hot runner temperature control, heat it up.

04
d). Under the adjustment status, slowly open the mold.

e). Test the thimble and core actions.

f). Once the charging barrel temperature meets the requirements, test the sprue action.
07

g). When the external auxiliary machinery is well prepared and under the semi-auto status,
conduct the trial production.

Notice: the above operation is only for reference.

22

3.2.4.1. Instructions of magnetic platen machine installation mold (option)

General rules
20

For the injection molding machines that are not equipped with fast mold replacing devices,
the molds shall be installed with hands with multiple installation and fixed methods including
clamping clips, magnetic platens and hydraulic fixtures; the following is about the
instructions for the mold installation of E70 magnetic platen machines.

Options involved in the document

⚫ Introduction of E70 magnetic platen

⚫ Mold installation steps

⚫ Relative alarm information

I. Introduction of j70 magnetic platen

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-35
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Magnetic platen means the electric magnetic fixture as follows:

5
52
61
70
04
07

mold replacing enabling key magnetic platen reset key

The following is E70 magnetic platen screen for the display of status of various conditions
of E70 magnetic platen injection molding machine.
22
20

3.2-36 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: Main screen →F9 Next→F8 QMC
70
MCS enabling: it is the signal provided by magnetic platen, that is usually closed, magnetic
platen failure is OFF when the injection molding machine cuts off all the power;
04
Standard signal: signals of this section are the injection molding machine allowed magnetic
platen actions. The injection molding machine shall meet the requirements including:
07

QMC key ON: means the mould replacing key;

Adjustment mode: means switching the injection molding machine to the adjustment status;

Clamping to end: eject to the end, clamp to the end, close both the front and back doors;
22

Available signals: normal safety tread, normal mold thickness, semi-mold mode and normal
locking force. If the device is equipped with locking force sensor, the locking force will also
become a judgment condition.
20

II. Mold installation steps

Take Haitian three platen injection molding machine type to introduce the mold installation
steps:

Replacing mold out

1. Normal clamping, rising at high pressure, pull the set back to the end (enough stroke or
come into contact with the travel switch at the back of the nozzle) to make sure the thimble
backward to the end;

2. Open the door, lock the mold connector and pull out the oil tube, water tube and electric
socket;

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-37
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3. Hang the mold still with the crane to make sure the mold will not go down during the
opening;

4. After closing the door, turn on the motor and switch to adjustment mode and turn on the
mold replacing key;

5. Unload the magnetism of the magnetic platen;

6. Turn off the mold replacing key and switch to the manual mode, turn on the magnetic
platen reset key;

5
7. Close the core and hot runner functions.

52
8. Press opening key and switch to adjustment mode after opening the flashboard, then
slowly open the mold;

9. Lift out the mold.

61
Replacing mold in

1. Hang the mold into the molding area with the crane, locate and match it with the central
hole of the core platen; 70
2. Close the safety door and switch to the adjustment mode, start the automatic adjustment
mode;

3. After completion of the automatic adjustment, switch to the manual mode, normally open
04
and compress to make sure the mold has certain locking force;

4. Switch to the adjustment mode and turn on mold replacing key;

5. Magnetisms the platen into place;

07

6. urn off the mold replacing key;

7. Open the back door, discharge the hanger, turn on the mold connector, oil tube of the
water pipe and electric socket;
22

8. Close the back door and load the corresponding mold parameters.

3.2.4.2. Instructions on the installation of hydraulic fixture mold (Option)

20

General rules

For the injection molding machines that are not equipped with fast mold replacing devices,
the molds shall be installed with hands with multiple installation and fixed methods including
clamping clips, magnetic platens and hydraulic fixtures; the following is about the
instructions for the mold installation of hydraulic fixture machines.

Options involved in the document

⚫ Introduction of hydraulic fixture

⚫ Mold installation steps

⚫ Relative alarm information

3.2-38 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Introduction of hydraulic fixture

The magnetic platen physical picture is as follows:

Hydraulic

5
fixture

52
61
70
Mold replacing enabling key
04
The commonly used hydraulic fixtures of Haitian are Santianshun fixture ports and Shunxing
fixture ports;

Santianshun fixture ports:

07

Input test: opening and clamping allowed;

Output: clamping end indicator light, nozzle backward end indicator light;
22

Shunxing fixture ports:

Input test: QMC normal;

Output: clamping end indicator light, nozzle backward end indicator light;
20

II. Mold installation steps

Take Haitian three platen injection molding machine type to introduce the mold installation
steps:

Replacing mold out

1. Normal clamping, rising at high pressure, pull the set back to the end (enough stroke or
come into contact with the travel switch at the back of the nozzle) to make sure the thimble
backward to the end;

2. Open the door, lock the mold connector and pull out the oil tube, water tube and electric
socket;

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-39
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3. Hang the mold still with the crane to make sure the mold will not go down during the
opening;

4. After closing the door, turn on the motor and switch to adjustment mode and turn on the
mold replacing key;

5. Loosen the hydraulic fixture and make sure it is loosened to the end;

6. Turn off the mold replacing key and switch to the manual mode;

5
7. Close the core and hot runner functions.

8. Press opening key and switch to adjustment mode after opening the flashboard, then

52
slowly open the mold;

9. Lift out the mould.

61
Replacing mold in

1. Hang the mold into the molding area with the crane, locate and match it with the central
hole of the core platen;
70
2. Close the safety door and switch to the adjustment mode, start the automatic adjustment
mode;

3. After completion of the automatic adjustment, switch to the manual mode, normally open
and compress to make sure the mold has certain locking force;
04
4. Switch to the adjustment mode and turn on mold replacing key;

5. Clamp the hydraulic fixture to the place;

07

6. urn off the mold replacing key;

7. Open the back door, discharge the hanger, turn on the mold connector, oil tube of the
water pipe and electric socket;
22

8. Close the back door and load the corresponding mold parameters.

3.2.5. Instructions on blasting function

3.2.5.1. Instructions on blasting screen

20

General rules

The main function of blasting is ejection, which means to blow off the products and molds
so that the products can be taken out smoothly. The blasting function can be applied onto
movable and fixed molds.

Section overview

⚫ Blasting button and icon

⚫ Blasting function screen

Blasting button and icon

3.2-40 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Blasting button

Blasting action icon

Blasting function screen

5
52
61
70
04

Entry path: Main screen →F5 ejection →F3 blasting

07

Initial position: set the start position of blasting so that when the blasting arrives at the set
position, it starts the blasting action.

Delay time: set the delay time to control the blasting action so that when the opening arrives
at the set position, it start the blasting action after the set delay time.
22

Action time: set the blasting action time, if it is "0", it means blasting is not needed.

Instructions on the setting of extended blasting functions

20

General rules

The main function of blasting is ejection, which means to blow off the products and molds
so that the products can be taken out smoothly. The blasting function can be applied onto
movable and fixed molds.

Options involved in the document

⚫ Introduction of multiple blasting functions

⚫ Multiple blasting function usage screen

⚫ Multiple blasting function screen

EN-MA_55_3354 3.2-41
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Introduction of multiple blasting functions

Blasting functions have three types of modes (opening, closing, injection, charge, injection
forward and injection backward). The user shall choose the mode in compliance with
different processing requirements so that the blasting action can be conducted in the
required time.

II. jxtended blasting function usage screen

5
52
61
70
04

Entry path: Main screen →F5 ejection →F3 blasting

07

Opening: when choosing opening mode, the starting position for blasting is decided by the
platen position. When the platen arrives at the set position, the blasting valve opens.

Closing: when choosing closing mode, the starting position for blasting is decided by the
22

platen position. When the platen arrives at the set position, the blasting valve opens.

Injection: when choosing ejection mode, the blasting valve opens in the process of injection.
20

Charge: when choosing charge mode, the the blasting valve opens in the process of charge.

Injection forward: when choosing injection forward mode, the blasting valve opens in the
process of forward injection.

Injection backward: when choosing injection backward mode, the blasting valve opens in
the process of backward injection.

3.2-42 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.3. Introduction of heating system
3.3.1. Charging barrel heating system

General rules

The charging barrel of the machine shall be heated up before putting into production so as
to accurately control the charging barrel temperature to fully melt the materials. All the
heating components are very important to the heating.

5
Options involved in the document

⚫ Introduction of charging barrel heating components

52
I. Introduction of charging barrel heating components

61
70
04
【1】nozzle: the melted materials are ejected here;

【2】charging barrel: materials enters the charging barrel from charging inlet and melt in the
barrel;
07

【3】thermocouple: test the temperature of charging barrel. Every section of charging barrel
heating area is equipped with a thermocouple;

【4】screw: screw forwards in the injection and backwards during the rotation in the charge
22

process;

【5】heating ring: the charging barrel is heated up with the heating ring;

【6】charging inlet: the material inlet.

20

3.3.1.1. Introduction of the basic screen of charging barrel temperature heating

General rules

The charging barrel of the machine shall be heated up before the production so that the
temperature of the barrel can achieve the target temperature and the materials can be fully
melted.

Options involved in the document

⚫ charging barrel heating screen

⚫ alarm information

EN-MA_55_3354 3.3-1
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Charging barrel heating screen

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature
04

Actual temperature: It shows the actual temperature of the current charging barrel.
07

Set value: set the temperature of the barrel heating.

Upper deviation: set the upper deviation of the temperature of the hot runner.

Lower deviation: set the lower deviation of the temperature of the hot runner.
22

Thermal insulation using: to use time thermal insulation, please choose use, when the
preset temperature arrives, the computer will turn on the heater switch.

Holding temperature: when the temperature reaches the preset temperature, the computer
20

will turn on the heater switch automatically and start the thermal insulation function.

Anti-cold start timing: start timing when the actual temperature reaches the one that is the
difference of the preset temperature minus the lower deviation. The action can only be
proceeded after the timing.

Instructions on colors of heater bands:

Blue: heating circuit is normal.

Green: heating circuit is working.

Red: heating circuit is abnormal.

3.3-2 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.3.1.2. Setting and meaning of charging barrel anti-cold function

General rules

Charging barrel anti-cold start function is applied before the screen action. When the
charging barrel temperature is heated to the set lower limit, the anti-cold start function is
initiated and if the anti-cold start time is not up, the screw related actions can not be
conducted.

Section overview

5
⚫ Introduction of charging anti-cold function

52
⚫ Screen of charging anti-cold function

⚫ Alarm information

61
I. Function introduction

When the charging barrel temperature achieves the lower limit of the set temperature, the
anti-cold time starts. If the time is not up, all the screw actions are not valid. When the set
time is over, the controller will allow for the screw actions. With this function, it is able to
70
make sure all the materials in the charging barrel have reached this set temperature.

II. Screen of charging anti-cold function

04
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature

Anti-cold start timing: setting the start time of anti-cold.

Anti-cold countdown: it displays the actual anti-cold time.

3.3.1.3. Introduction of thermal insulation function and idle automatic thermal insulation

EN-MA_55_3354 3.3-3
 Volume 3 Operation manual
transferring

General rules

When the machine is not used for production, use the thermal insulation function to make
sure the charging barrel is maintained at a set temperature.

Options involved in the document

⚫ Introduction of thermal insulation function

5
⚫ Screen of thermal insulation function

52
I. Introduction of thermal insulation function

When the machine is not producing, use the thermal insulation function, the charging barrel
enters the thermal insulation function immediately; when it is not used, once the thermal

61
insulation transferring time is up, it transfers into the thermal insulation status automatically
so that the charging barrel is maintained at the set temperature. When it requires to resume
the production, it is not needed to start heating from the room temperature, which is quick
for heating and time saving.

II. Screen of thermal insulation function

70
04
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature

Thermal insulation using: it switches to temperature holding status automatically when

choosing, which will maintain the charging barrel temperature at a set temperature.

Holding temperature: when the holding temperature is chosen, the charging barrel will be
maintained at this input temperature.

3.3-4 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F4 parameter 1

Time to automatically switch to temperature holding status: if the holding temperature

is not input, it will automatically switch to the temperature holding status after the input time.
04
3.3.1.4. Setting of manual mode of temperature control

General rules
07

When the sensor is faulted, the user can apply the manual mode for the charging barrel
heating.

Options involved in the document

22

⚫ Introduction of manual temperature mode

⚫ Screen of manual temperature mode

I. Introduction of manual temperature mode

20

When the sensor is faulted, the user can apply the manual mode for the charging barrel
heating. Choose the manual mode for the charging barrel heating, set the PWM of the
heating, for example, at 25%, which means the heating time within 1 second is 0.25 second
and is turned off for 0.75 second.

II. Screen of manual temperature mode

EN-MA_55_3354 3.3-5
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F7PID

Mode: choose manual mode for the heating of charging barrel, the charging barrel enters
the manual heating mode.
04
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature

Setting: set the PWM of the heating, for example, at 25%, which means the heating time
within 1 second is 0.25 second and is turned off for 0.75 second as follows.

3.3-6 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.3.1.5. Weekly heating plan function

General rules:

This section is about the setting of the parameters of weekly heating function and its usage.
The specific time for heating of charging barrel can be preset in compliance with the actual
needs of the user. It takes week as the unit.

5
52
61
70
04

Entry path: Main screen→F8 temperature →F3 function

07

Operation mode:

1. press F8 temperature enters F3 function screen.

22

2. tick the heating day required for, for example, if the user needs to preset Sunday for the
heating, the user shall tick the box at the lower side of Sunday.
20

3. set the specific starting time.

4. the same principle applies for the turning off.

Notice:

Premises for the validation of this function: the power supply of the inuection molding
machine shall be on.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.3-7
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.3.1.6. Introduction of material entrance cooling

General rules

Material entrance cooing function is mainly used for controlling the temperature of material
entrance. When the material entrance temperature is higher than the set temperature, the
cooling function is started.

⚫ Options involved in the document

5
⚫ Screen for the setting of material entrance cooling function

Material entrance cooling IO point

52
⚫

I. Screen for the setting of material entrance cooling function

Set the required material entrance deviation value, we set the deviation value 9 as shown in

61
the following picture.

70
04
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F5 parameter 1

When the material entrance temperature is higher than set temperature plus the deviation
value, the material entrance cooler starts to work. As shown in the following figure,
25+9=34<36, the input point is 26 and the entrance material cooling shows it is working.

I. Introduction of IO point

3.3-8 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
3.3.1.7. Maximum allowable material temperature function

General rules
04
The highest temperature the charging barrel of the machine can achieve.

Options involved in the document

⚫ Method for using the function of maximum allowable material temperature

07

⚫ Alarm information

I. Method for using the function of maximum allowable material temperature

1. Enter the required set temperature in the “allowable maximum temperature.

22

Notice: the machine will send an alarm whichever the actual electric heating
temperature meets the condition of the allowable maximum material temperature or
the allowable material temperature upper limit.
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.3-9
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F4 parameter 1

3.3.1.8. Oil temperature preheating function

04
General rules

The function to preheat the oil temperature.

Options involved in the document

07

⚫ Method to use oil temperature preheating function

⚫ Alarm information

I. Method to use oil temperature preheating function

22
20

3.3-10 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F5 parameter 2

Oil temperature preheating: to choose whether to use the oil temperature preheating
function.
04
jnd temperature of first stage: If the actual oil temperature is higher than this set
temperature, the oil temperature heating switches to the second stage.

Action time of first stage: When the total running time of the first stage oil temperature
07

preheating reaches this set action time, the oil temperature preheating switches to the
second stage.

jnd temperature of second stage: If the actual oil temperature is higher than or equal to
22

this set temperature, the oil temperature preheating ends automatically and the current
procedures solidifies to +3°of the oil temperature lower limit.

3.3.2. Hot runner heating system(Option)

20

3.3.2.1. Introduction of basic screen of mold temperature

General rules

Hot runner is the heating assembly used in the mold to inject the molten plastic into the
empty cavity of the mold.

Options involved in the document

⚫ Introduction of basic screen

⚫ Function introduction

⚫ Alarm information

EN-MA_55_3354 3.3-11
 Volume 3 Operation manual
ounction of hot runner

⚫ shorten the molding cycle of the products and increase the efficiency of the machine

⚫ economize plastic raw materials

⚫ reduce the quantity of wastes and improve the quality of products

⚫ improve the surface quality and mechanical property of products

⚫ extend the range of application for injection technique

5
I. Introduction of basic screen

52
Screen name: mold temperature setting (or temperature setting)

61
70
04
07
22

Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F4 mold temperature

20

3.3-12 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F4 function

II. Instruction of mold temperature icon

04
When the mold temperature is selected for use, press the mold temperature button on the
panel, the heating icon will light up, indicating that the mold temperature has been turned
on. As shown below:
07
22

III. Display of temperature colors

Blue: it means this temperature section is within the set temperature scope and the heater
20

is not working in this section.

Red: it means this temperature section is beyond the upper and lower deviations of the set
values.

Green: it means the heater is heating when the electric heating starts.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.3-13
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
IV. Thermocouple types
70
04
07
22
20

Currently there are j type, K type and J type thermocouples.

K type temperature sensor (nickel-chromium – nickel-silicon) thermocouples have the

highest coverage currently. The using temperature is between -200°and 1300°. K type
thermocouples feature good linearity, high thermoelectromotive force, high sensitivity,
stability, uniformity and oxidation resistance and lower prices. They can be used in oxidizing
inert atmosphere.

3.3-14 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
K type thermocouples can not be directly used in sulfur under high temperature, reducing
or reduction oxidation alternated atmosphere or vacuum, they can neither be used in weak
oxygen environment.

J type temperature sensor (iron-nickel-copper) thermocouples are a kind of cheap base

metal thermocouples with the measuring temperature ranging from -200° to 1200°, but the
temperature usually used is from 0° to 750°. Advantageous of J type thermocouples include
good linearity, high thermoelectromotive force, high sensitivity, stability, uniformity and lower
prices. They can be used in vacuum oxidation, reducing and inert atmosphere. They can not

5
be used in high temperature vulcanized atmosphere without protections.

52
E-type temperature sensor (Nichrome-Constantan) thermocouples.The E-type
thermocouple has a large thermal electromotive force and high sensitivity and is the highest
among all thermocouples.Thermopiles should be made to measure small temperature
changes.It is not very sensitive to the corrosion in high-humidity atmospheres and should

61
be used in high humidity environments.E thermocouple also has the advantages of good
stability, excellent anti-oxidation performance, low price, etc. It can be used in oxidizing and
inert atmosphere and widely used by users.
70
E-type thermocouples cannot be used directly in sulfur at high temperatures. In a reducing
atmosphere, thermoelectric power is poorly uniform.

Each thermocouple has different temperature measuring scope and precision and shall
choose the proper thermocouple in compliance with different using situations.
04
Notice: once the thermocouple type is confirmed, it needs to restart the controller to
validate it.

3.3.2.2. Introduction of mold temperature soft start function

07

General rules

The function of soft start can be used during the heating process of mold hot runners for
slow heating of preliminary temperature and internal moisture evaporation of the mold with
22

“dehumidification” effect.

Options involved in the document

20

⚫ Principle of mold temperature soft start

⚫ Setting screen of mold temperature soft start

EN-MA_55_3354 3.3-15
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Principle of hot runner soft start

5
52
61
Stage 1: output at 30% PWM until reaching the setting value;
70
Stage 2: stabilization stage of the temperature according to the setting “soft start
temperature” to ensure the moisture removal inside the mold;

Stage 3: normal heating after the completion of the dehumidification time.

04
II. Setting screen of mold temperature soft start
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F4 function

Starting temperature of mold temperature soft start: after the various temperature
sections are soft started and heated to this set temperature and maintain for the certain time,

3.3-16 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
the second stage heating starts.

Mold temperature soft start time: the various temperature sections can only start the
second stage heating after heating to the soft start temperature and maintaining the set mold
temperature soft start time.

3.3.3. Temperature PID self-learning system

3.3.3.1. Temperature PID self-learning settings

5
1) In the temperature PID screen, if the second stage wants PID self-learning, the second
stage selects "PID".If multiple temperature PIDs learn at the same time, select the

52
desired number of segments.

61
70
04
07
22

Entry path: Main screen →F8 temperature →F7PID

2) In the temperature screen, enter "set value". The PID self-learning program will be
heated to 100 degrees for the first time, so enter "set value" greater than 100 degrees,
20

and then press the electric heating key on the panel.

Note: The barrel temperature is best to start heating from room temperature

EN-MA_55_3354 3.3-17
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
3) On the temperature PID screen, select “Use” for the “PID self-learning” option. After
selecting “Use”, a prompt “Temperature self-learning, please wait...” appears.

4) When the temperature PID self-learning is completed, it will pop up the dialog box
04
“temperature self-learning completed” and press OK.
07
22
20

3.3-18 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.3.3.2. Temperature PID self-learning function monitoring

After completing the temperature PID self-learning, you can see in the temperature PID
screen the parameter values of KP, KI, KD have changed, as shown in the figure

5
52
61
70
04
Note: During the PID self-learning process, do not cut off the power and turn off the
electric heat. If the power is cut off or the electric heat is turned off, wait until the
barrel temperature drops to room temperature before restarting the PID self-learning
07

procedure.In the PID self-learning process, do not change the temperature related
parameters and function options, so as not to cause the failure of PID self-learning.
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.3-19
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.4. Introduction of injection plasticization system
3.4.1. Injection system

General rules

The injection unit is used to melt and uniformly mix the materials to move the nozzle to the
mold and the press on mold resisting the injection pressure, and inject materials into the die
cavity with high pressure. The components mainly include nozzle, screw, charging barrel,
hopper, hydraulic motor of drive screw, hydraulic injection cylinder and screw positioning

5
gauge as shown below:

52
61
70
04

1 2 3 4 6 7 5
07

【1】electrical heating nozzle

【2】electrical heating charging pipe

【3】hopper
22

【4】cooling charging section

【5】hydraulic motor of drive screw

【6】hydraulic injection cylinder

20

【7】position display of screw

Options involved in the document

⚫ Nozzle and screw charging barrel

⚫ Drive motor and hydraulic injection cylinder

⚫ Display of screw position ruler

I. Nozzle and screw charging barrel

Small parts as shown below:

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-1
 Volume 3 Operation manual

【1】Nozzle is the exit of material injection. Hydraulic nozzle or pneumatic nozzle can also

5
be used to control the switch to prevent material leakage.

52
【2】Raise the temperature of the charging barrel with thermocouple output for ease of the
injection after material melting.

【3】Screw is mainly used for material stir and ejection.

61
【4】Material entrance is mainly used to feed the materials.

II. Drive motor and hydraulic injection cylinder

Drive motor and hydraulic injection cylinder are the dynamical system of screw action
70
available for injection, plasticizing and decompression.

III. Display of screw position ruler

The display of screw positioning gauge is normally in the side of the injection unit with the
04
specific function as provide the user an exact reading of the time of injection plasticizing and
decompression action, as well as the position of the screw to ensure the accuracy without
the influence on product quality.
07

3.4.1.1. Basic introduction of injection screen

General rules

Settings of various data for the nozzle, including the pressure, velocity and function selection.
22

Options involved in the document

⚫ Ejection setting screen

20

3.4-2 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Injection setting screen

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F3 injection
04
07

Position: Setting of the position where the injection transforms to pressure velocity.
22

Pressure: Setting of injection pressure.

Speed: Setting of injection speed.

20

Pressure switchover: Mode selection of pressure switchover from injection.

Pressure: pressure setting of packing pressure mode for the injection cylinder pressure
sensor.

Position: position setting of pressure switchover position mode.

Time: time setting of pressure switchover time mode.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-3
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Pressure: setting of packing pressure.

5
Velocity: setting of packing velocity.

Time: setting of packing time.

52
3.4.1.2. Introduction of injection transform holding function

General rules

61
This documents introduces the injection transform holding function and several standard
transform holding manners.

Outlines of the section

⚫ Injection transform holding position manner

70
⚫ Injection transform holding time manner

⚫ Injection transform holding pressure manner

04
Inuection transform holding position manner:
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F3 ejection

Function settings are as shown in the red box above.

3.4-4 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Injection transform holding position selection: the position is set as the Injection transform
holding position of screw, which means the injection starts. When the screw position is less
than the set position, it starts to transform holding; under the transform holding mode when
both times action, whichever comes first will prevail.

Inuection transform holding time manner:

5
52
61
70
04

Function settings are as shown in the red box above.

07

Tick the Time option, set the injection time as the time of the injection transform holding, that
is, start the injection and switchover from transform holding after the setting time;
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-5
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Mode of inuection transform holding:

5
52
61
70
Function settings are as shown in the red box above.
04
Under the mode of pressure switchover, set the pressure to the pressure of the pressure
transfer and the injection starts. Upon the set pressure, the transfer of pressure maintaining
is started. The pressure should be the feedback pressure of the pressure sensor for
transform holding and the position should be the protected position of the switch-over screw,
07

that is, start the injection and transform holding when the feedback pressure of the pressure
sensor is higher than the setting pressure and the screw position is smaller than the switch-
over testing position; time also functions at this time, transform holding would be performed
whether the pressure and the position are satisfied or not after the setting time.
22

3.4.1.3. Introduction of automatic purge function

General rules
20

The automatic purge function is applied to remove the residual materials stored in the
charging barrel. When in material recharging, the original materials in the charging barrel
needs to be removed. The automatic purge function can help the user to eliminate the
excess material in the charging barrel in an automatic and effective way.

Section overview

⚫ Screen of automatic purge function

⚫ Operation of automatic purge

3.4-6 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Screen of automatic purge function

5
52
61
70
Entry path：Main screen →F4 Charging→F3 Purging
04
Introduction of automatic purge function:

The automatic purge function can be divided into three actions, such as injecting, charging
and suckback. Pressure and speed should be set according to the setting operation in the
injection screen during each action. Note: the charging action is controlled by time and will
07

be stopped upon reaching the setting time.

Discharging counting: set the number of cycles for operative automatic purge.

Discharging time: set the operating time (in second) of charging during the automatic purge.
22

II. Automatic purge operation

Automatic purge:
20

Select to “Use” the purge on the purge screen in the mode of mold adjustment, then press
the “Injection” button on the control panel and enter the process of automatic purge.

3.4.1.4. Use of valve function (Option)

General rules

The valve function is applied in the switch control of valves in the mold for effective control
of the mold runners. During injection, users can set the number of gates needed to be
opened, the mode of open and the time of open, etc.

Section overview

⚫ Screen of gate

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-7
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Screen of gate

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F3 Injection →F3 Valve
04
Debug the valve switch manually:

Under the manual or mold-adjustment mode, manually debug the corresponding valve
setting 1, the valve will in the output of setting time. (The lamp of the valve output point will
be on.) select the “All” setting 1 to realize the manually output of all the valves.
07
22
20

Open: set the open mode (time, position) of the valve.

3.4-8 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
In the drop-down list of the Function Menu, select the valve control mode wanted. There are
five modes including "not used": Not Used; Time ON Time OFF; Position ON Position OFF;
Time ON Position OFF; Position ON Time OFF.

Time ON Time OFF: the open mode of the valve is set to be time, and the clamping mode
04
is to be time. Set the open time to be “time of injection beginning” and the valve will output
upon the beginning of injection. Set the close time to be “time of injection off” and the valve
will close upon the setting time of output.
07

Position ON Position OFF: the open mode of the valve is set to be position, and the clamping
mode is to be position. Set the open time to be “ position of injection beginning” and the
valve will output after the screw reaching the setting position. Set the close time to be
“position of injection off” and the fate will close after the screw reaching the setting position.
22

Time ON Position OFF: the open mode of the valve is set to be time, and the clamping mode
is to be position. When the open time is set to be “time of injection beginning”, the valve will
output after the beginning time of injection. When the clamping time is set to be “position of
20

injection off”, the valve will close after the screw reaching the setting position.

Position ON Time OFF: the open mode of the valve is set to be position, and the clamping
mode is to be time. When the open time is set to be “position of injection beginning”, the
valve will output after the screw reaching the setting position. When the clamping time is set
ot be “time of injection off”, the valve will close upon the setting time for output.

Holding process:

Holding: When the valve is selected to be used, the valve during the holding process should
be set as per time whether the modes of open and clamping is time or position.

Holding opening time: set the delay time of valve holding opening.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-9
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Holding clamping time: set the output duration time for valve holding.

3.4.1.5. Introduction to the use of the injection curve function

General rules

The injection curve function is applied during injection to monitor the changing situations of
relevant variables and show them in curves.

Section overview

5
⚫ Screen of injection curve function

52
I. Screen of inuection curve function

61
70
04
07

Entry path: Main screen →F3 Injection→F5 Curve

22

The screen of injection curve can display the setting speed, setting pressure, injection speed
and injection pressure.
20

Press [1] and [3] keys to move the reticule to check the position, pressure, time and speed
of a certain point-in-time.

The curve can be removed in the curve removal window 1.

Select to display the current curve or the historical curve in the curve selection option.

3.4.1.6. Introduction of secondary charging function

General rules

The secondary charging function is used for intrusion and makes sure the barrel is filled with
materials during cold slug injection to meet the requirements of some special processes.

Section overview

3.4-10 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
⚫ Screen of secondary charging function

⚫ Action process of secondary charging

I. Screen of secondary charging

5
52
61
70
04
Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging→F4 Function

Select the mode of secondary charging function on the charging function screen as shown
in the Figure (default to be time, the time of secondary charging is 0).
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-11
 Volume 3 Operation manual
If the mode of position is selected, set the proper secondary charging position in the charging
screen. The secondary charging position is the forward (injection) distance of the screw
before the secondary charging.

If the mode of time is selected, set the proper time for secondary charging time in the
charging screen.

II. Action process of secondary charging function

5
Mode of position Mode of time

52
mold
合模到底clamping end
mold clamping end
合模到底

螺杆前进设定
setting distance for screw

61
的距离（注
forward
射）(injection)

setting储料设定的时
time of
charging间
charging 70
储料

injection, pressure
注射、保压
holding
injection, pressure holding
04
注射、保压

charging, cooling
charging, cooling 储料、冷却
07

储料、冷却

mold opening mold opening

开模
22

开模

3.4.1.7. Introduction of pre-injection function

20

General rules

The pre-injection function is a special injection process with the aim of discharging some
oxidized materials in the front of the nozzle before nozzle forward action to make sure the
products could meet the customers’ needs.

Section overview

⚫ Background of pre-injection function

⚫ Screen of pre-injection function

I. Background of pre-inuection function

During the injection process with PVC materials, some customers found that the materials

3.4-12 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
on the front sections of the previous mold turn to be yellowing or cooling frequently. The
main reason is that the materials remain too long time in nozzle barrel or air contact and
thus lead to the failure in satisfying customers’ needs. That’s why the pre-injection function
is needed to discharge this part of materials out.

II. Screen of pre-inuection function

5
52
61
70
04

Entry path: Main screen →F3 Injection →F4 Function

As shown in the above settings, set the injection time of nozzle forward and injection
07

distance of nozzle forward in the screen of injection function. If the distance is not set to be
0, the machine would be in the action upon distance; if the distance is set to be 0, the
machine would be in the action upon time.
22

When the machine is in the automatic mode, the machine will proceed injection before the
nozzle forward action. If the injection distance of nozzle forward is not set to be 0, set the
distance of screw forward, then proceed the nozzle forward action and continue to complete
the cyclic action; if the the injection distance of nozzle forward is set to be 0, set the time for
20

injection and then proceed the nozzle forward action.

3.4.1.8. Introduction of gas assistant injection function (Option)

General rules

The gas assistant injection function of HAITIAN is optional and used to blow to the inside of
the mold during injection, and is applied to partial process demanded molds.

Section overview

⚫ Use of gas assistant injection function

⚫ Logic of gas assistant injection function

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-13
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Use of gas assistant inuection function

Gas assistant injection function options are in the screen of injection configuration screen,
as shown below.

5
52
61
70
04
Entry path: Main screen →F3 Injection→F4 Function

Set the position of gas assistant action and gas injecting timing. Output point 32 gas
assistant injection starting would output when the condition is met as shown below.
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F4IO→F4PC1

II. Logic of inuection blowing function

3.4-14 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

mold mold
Injection charging
clamping opening

gas assistant action

position end

gas assistant gas assistant

injection start output end
time end

5
3.4.1.9. Basic introduction of nozzle function (Option)

52
General rules

During the charging process of the injection molding machine, the nozzle can be used to
prevent the materials from being leaked from the front end of the barrel with pneumatic or

61
hydraulic braking piston to control the opening and clamping.

Section overview

⚫ Structure of nozzle

⚫ Function application of nozzle

70
⚫ Action logic of nozzle function

I. Structure of nozzle
04
07
22
20

II. ounction application of nozzle

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-15
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F3 Injection→F4 Function→F5 Nozzle

Make corresponding settings on the screens of injection, function and nozzle. The hydraulic
nozzle can set the pressure velocity of the nozzle switch.
04
The stroke mode should set the action time and the time mode should set the holding timing.
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F4IO

The PB input point of the nozzle is shown as above.

3.4-16 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back →F4IO→F4PC1
70
The PC output point of the nozzle is shown above.
04
III. Action logic of nozzle function

Four optional combination control modes are available for the nozzle switch.

Nozzle on stroke, nozzle Off stroke:

07

Nozzle on→On PB confirmation→On holding timing→Injection and pressure

holding→Nozzle Off→Off PB confirmation→Off holding timing

Nozzle on stroke, nozzle Off time:

22

Nozzle on→On PB confirmation→On holding timing→Injection and pressure

holding→Nozzle Off→Time of clamping action

Nozzle on time, nozzle Off time:

20

Nozzle on→Time of on action→Injection and pressure holding→Nozzle Off→time of

clamping action

Nozzle on time, nozzle Off stroke:

Nozzle on→Time of on action→Injection and pressure holding→Nozzle Off→Off PB

confirmation→Off holding timing

3.4.1.10. Introduction of injection speed cycle function

General rules

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-17
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Injection speed cycle is a standard function of MAⅢ machine. The repeatability and low-
speed stability of injection are important standards to evaluate injection performance.This
function can improve injection repetition precision and injection stability.

1） Injection speed cycle function

5
52
61
70
04

Entry path: Main screen →F3 INJE →F4 FUNC

07

Injection speed cycle function enabled: It can be selected to use in the function screen,
default to use.

When this feature is enabled, the injection`s pressure and holdpress`s speed are
22

fixed as one segment.

20

3.4-18 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
2） Injection maximum speed mode selection

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F3INJE →F4FUNC
04
07
22
20

Injection maximum speed mode selection: standard mode, fast mode.

The two modes correspond to two injection speeds to meet different requirements.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-19
 Volume 3 Operation manual
They are separate and distinct from one another, easy to switch.

3.4.2. Charging System

General rules

The strengthen of plasticization capacity is one of the important indexes to evaluate the
performance of an injection molding machine. Only good plasticization capacity can lead to
high quality products. This function requires to uniformly fuse and plasticize plastic in
specified quantity to the molding temperature within the stipulated time and deliver to the

5
injection port.

52
Section overview

⚫ Component description of charging unit

⚫ Operating principle of charging

61
I. Component description of charging unit

70 2

3 1
04
07

【1】Preplastication motor: to provide charging power and back pressure.

22

【2】Hopper throat: the inlet of raw materials.

【3】Barrel screw: melt the materials and deliver them to the injection port.
20

Note: Do not activate the charging motor for charging action before the barrel reaching the
preset temperature, otherwise surfaces of the screw barrel will be damaged and would even
cause screw fracture.

II. Operating principle of charging

During the process of charging, the barrel temperature reaches the preset temperature and
the charging motor drives the screw to rotate and transfer the ram materials, and to achieve
plasticization with the barrel temperature and shearing of screws. Finally build up pressure
in the front end of the screw and keep closed-loop pressure control to realize uniform
plasticization.

3.4-20 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.4.2.1. Basic introduction of charging screen

General rules

Charging plasticization is an important step during the whole production process.

Section overview

⚫ Basic introduction of charging screen

I. Basic introduction of charging screen

5
52
1

61
3

2
70
04
07

Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging

【1】Setting of charging action: in this section, users can set the corresponding pressure
22

velocity and charging backpressure according to the start position of each stage to reach
the most appropriate charging process.

【2】Function setting of charging: in this section, users can set the suckback after charging
20

and suckback before charge according to the process requirements. More detailed
information about these functions will be given in other separate module.

【3】Display area of related values: in this area, users can be clear about the actual
numerical values of related parameters such as shot, time and position.

3.4.2.2. Setting of charging backpressure

General rules

Charging backpressure is the pressure value set for more compact plasticization.

Section overview

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-21
 Volume 3 Operation manual
⚫ Setting of charging backpressure

I. Introduction of charging backpressure screen and function

5
52
61
70
04
Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging

On the basis of the charging stages set by the users, there is a backpressure set value for
each stage to be used for accurate control of charging backpressure zonally.
07

3.4.2.3. Setting of suckback before charge

General rules

Suckback before charge refers to decompress the screw to a certain position before charge
22

due to process requirements.

Section overview

⚫ Setting of suckback before charge

20

⚫ Setting of suckback before charge

3.4-22 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging→F4 Function

According to the requirements of the process, user can select to use the suckback before
charge function. If used, HAITIAN provides time mode and position mode for customers to
04
select. Time mode means to decompress for how long time before charge and the position
mode means to decompress to which position before charge.

Note: After using the "Single cylinder inuection protection" function, only position
07

mode can be used.

22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-23
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging

If the time mode is selected, the option of Time before charge is available to choose.

If the position mode is selected, the option of Position before charge is available to choose.

Setting of time and position is available in the screen of charging.

Note: the position here refers to the absolute position, for example, if the customer sets the
value to be 10, then the screw will be decompressed to a position of 10mm.

5
3.4.2.4. Setting of suckback after charging

52
General rules

Suckback after charging refers to decompress the screw to a certain position after charging
due to process requirements.

61
Section overview

⚫ Setting of suckback after charging

⚫ Setting of suckback after charging 70

04
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging

According to the requirements of the process, user can select to use the suckback after
charging function. If used, HAITIAN provides time mode and position mode for customers
to select. Time mode means to decompress for how long time after charging and the position
mode means to decompress to which position after charging.

Selection of time and position is available in the screen of charging function.

3.4-24 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging→F4 Function
70
If the time mode is selected, the option of Time after charging is available to choose.
04
If the position mode is selected, the option of Position after charging is available to choose.

Note: the position here refers to the absolute position, for example, if the customer set the
value to be 10, then the screw will be decompressed 10mm based on the end position.
07

3.4.2.5. Setting of cooling time before charge

General rules

Cooling time before charge is the delay time before charge but after the injection.
22

Section overview

⚫ Setting of cooling time before charge

20

⚫ Setting of cooling time before charge

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-25
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: Main screen →F4 Charging
70
The figure above is the setting place for cooling time before charge. Users can select to set
cooling before charge upon the process requirements.
04
3.4.3. Nozzle system

3.4.3.1. Basic introduction of nozzle screen

General rules
07

Settings of various data for the nozzle, including the pressure, velocity and function selection.

Section overview

⚫ Screen of nozzle
22

⚫ Screen of nozzle parameters

I. Screen of nozzle
20

3.4-26 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: Main screen →F7 Nozzle
70
04
07

Setting of pressure velocity for nozzle forward action.

22
20

Setting of pressure velocity for nozzle backward action.

Delay time setting and time setting for nozzle backward action.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-27
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Nozzle backward mode: the nozzle backward action can be selected to be active after

5
charging, before mold opening or after injection.

52
3.4.3.2. Function introduction of nozzle forward hold

General rules

The nozzle hold function is applied during injection, pressure holding and charging, during

61
when the nozzle needs to keep forward as to prop the mold with the nozzle to prevent
material discharging. Meanwhile, may keep nozzle forward for a period of time after the
nozzle going forward in place.

Section overview

⚫
70
Action screen of nozzle forward hold function

⚫ Function screen of keeping nozzle forward after getting in place

04
I. Action screen of nozzle forward hold function

(1) Nozzle forward valve output during injection:

07
22
20

(2) Nozzle forward valve output during pressure holding:

3.4-28 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
(3) Nozzle forward valve output during charging:
04
07
22
20

（4）Function screen of keeping nozzle forward after getting in place

EN-MA_55_3354 3.4-29
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry path: Main screen →F7 Nozzle
70
Time: the holding time of keeping nozzle forward action after getting in place.
04
07
22
20

3.4-30 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.5. Production management
3.5.1. Introduction of mold parameters/machine parameters saving and loading

General rules

Mold parameters are used to record the parameters for different molds. Machine parameters
include machine parameters, level data, monitoring data and alarming data.

Section overview

5
⚫ Screen of mold parameters/ machine parameters saving and loading

52
⚫ Functions of mold parameters

ounctions of mold parameters/machine parameters

⚫ Solve the problem of parameter changes due to the changes of molds during mold

61
exchange.

⚫ Solve the problem of machine parameter loss due to program change.

⚫ Facilitate the mold management and usage 70

Introduction of function screen

(1). Mold save: enter the copy screen, select the proper object and saving type, then edit
the mold name, material, color, mold number and other relevant information, select to
04
confirm the mold parameter saving.
07
22
20

Enter path: Main screen →F10 Back→F5 Mold

Obuect: MMI/SD card

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-1
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Select the media format of the source mold.

Saving mode: save/save as

Save: to overwrite the data of source mold into another existing mold.

Save as: copy the name data of the source mold into another mold that no longer exists,
set the “mold name” + “material”+ “color” in the line for SaveAs, while the save date would
be in automatic generation without inputting.

5
Maximum count: maximum quantity of mold data for storing.

Remaining count: remaining quantity of mold data for storing.

52
(2). Mold reading: enter the screen of mold reading and select the required source and
mold number to read the mold parameters.

61
70
04
07
22

Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F5 Mold→F3 Read

20

Source: MMI/SD card

Select the media format of the source mold.

Sort type: date/name.

Maximum count: maximum quantity of mold data for storing.

Remaining count: remaining quantity of mold data for storing.

(3). Mold copy: enter the screen of copy mold and copy the mold parameters stored in the
MMI/external storage device into the external storage device/MMI.

3.5-2 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F5 Mold→F4 Copy

Copy mold: input the mold number that needed to be copied in this edit box, select to
confirm and realize the data copying.
04
Source: MMI/SD card

Select the media format of the source mold.

07

Sort type: date/name.

Maximum count: maximum quantity of mold data for storing.

Remaining count: remaining quantity of mold data for storing.

22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-3
 Volume 3 Operation manual
(4). Mold delete: enter the screen of delete mold to delete the mold parameter that has
been stored.

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F5 Mold →F5 Delete

Source: MMI/SD card

04
Select the media format of the source mold.

Sort type: date/name.

Maximum count: maximum quantity of mold data for storing.

07

Remaining count: remaining quantity of mold data for storing.

22
20

3.5-4 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
(5). Machine parameters storing and reading: enter the screen of the machine to store
and read the machine parameters, level data, monitoring data and alarming data.

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F5 Mold→F6 Machine
04
Mode operation: select to save or read the data.

Mode obuective: select to save the data into the MMI or external storage device, or read
the data stored in the MMI or external storage device.
07

Adu.MachData: current machine data, CONFIG and D/A data;

User level data: setting of all levels for the current user;

Monitoring data: data in the monitoring screen;

22

Alarming data: historical alarming records.

3.5.2. Production count setting and output

20

General rules

Production plan refers to the production situation and production schedule under the
available resource condition within a certain time.

Section overview

⚫ Screen introduction

⚫ Alarm information

ounctions of production plan

⚫ Proceed orderly production

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-5
 Volume 3 Operation manual
⚫ Conducive to enhance resource utilization rate

⚫ Lower the cost of production and operation

⚫ Reduce inventory

⚫ Refine the cost management

I. Production count

(1) Count

5
52
61
70
04
07

Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F7 Production

Count per mold: the product quantity, total count and reject count for each mold shall be
22

increased as per the count per mold.

Clear count: select “use” in this setting and press confirm to return the total count to zero.
20

Shot count set: set the required total production quantity. When the shot count set is
reached, the computer will alarm that the shot count set has been reached and stop the
machine operation. The machine may not work until the shot count is returned to be zero.

Total count real: refers to the current real production quantity.

Packing count set: set the required packing quantity. The alarm will ring when the packing
quantity reach the set number and the screen will prompt that the total packing quantity has
been reached to inform the user. While, the machine will not stop but continue to the action
for next mold.

Packing count real: refers to the current real packing quantity, and the current value will be
cleared to 0 when it is same as the set value.

3.5-6 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Clear reuect count:return the reject count real to zero.

Reuect count set: the upper limit of the allowable reject count.

Reuect count real: accumulate in case of any reject and the action will be stopped and
alarm when reaching the reject count set.

Reuect count continuous set: the upper limit of the allowable continuous reject count.

Reuect count continuous real: accumulate in case of any reject and return to zero upon

5
normal production of one mold. When the reject count continuous real reaches the reject
count continuous set, the action will be stopped and alarm.

52
Automatic monitoring off bad out: when the automatic monitoring is off, PC point will
output with no alarm nor count.

(2) PPH

61
70
04
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F7 Production→F3PPH

Display the production curve within the 24 hours.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-7
 Volume 3 Operation manual
(3) life cycle

Life cycle is currently optional.

5
52
61
70
04
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F7 Production→F4 Maintain

Classification: There are 6 categories in total, 6 progress bars, 6 reset buttons, 80%, 100%
and 110% progress bars, and the minimum unit of time is hours.
07

(a) The first project is maintained on a calendar time (system time) and on a weekly (7 days)
basis.

(b) The second to sixth projects are maintained according to the operation time, 500 hours,
3000 hours, 6000 hours, 12000 hours and 36000 hours respectively.
22

(c) When the progress bar reaches 100%, a maintenance flicker icon will appear in the top
status bar.
20

3.5-8 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
(d) jvent recording function: the maintenance of the life cycle has a separate page record,
record the maintenance occurred time (100%) and reset time.

5
52
61
70
04
07

Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F9RECD→F5Event

3.5.3. Setting of quality parameters

General rules
22

Monitor the production parameters to protect the full-automatic production during the
production process.
20

Section overview

⚫ Screen of quality parameters setting

⚫ Function introduction

⚫ Alarming information

ounction of quality parameters setting

⚫ Monitor the production process time and ensure production safety and product quality.

⚫ Control the production process accurately based on the productive task and prevent
overproduction and save resources.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-9
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Screen of quality parameters setting

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F3 Monitoring
04
Close mold: time of the whole mold clamping stroke.

Low pressure: time of the mold clamping stroke under low pressure.

High pressure: time of the mold clamping stroke under high pressure.
07

Mold open: time of the whole mold opening stroke.

Injection end: position when the injection ends.

Cycle: time for one cycle in automation.

22

Ejection: time for ejection stroke.

Mold opening end: mold platen position when mold opening ends.
20

Charging peak pressure: maximum pressure during the charging process.

Injection peak pressure: maximum pressure during the injection process.

Injection time: total time required for injection.

V→P switch: position for injection transform holding.

V→P switch: pressure for injection transform holding.

V→P switch: time for injection transform holding.

Injection monitoring: position for injection and holding end.

Injection starting point: position for injection starting.

3.5-10 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Charge: time for the charging stroke.

Suckback time: time required for suckback.

Selection of reference data: choose the selection mode of reference data in the pull-
down menu.

5
52
Automatic sampling: take the action parameter of the mold produced during the starting
of the automatic monitoring function as the reference value for alarm. Relevant parameters
should be locked and not changeable for the user.

61
User set: the reference value set and tested by the user.

Automatic sampling + user set: take the action parameter of the mold produced during
the starting of the automatic monitoring function as the reference value for alarm, which
70
could also set by the user upon requirement.

Parameter setting: all the parameters related to the product quality are set in this table,
including the set value, actual value and allowable error. Options in the pull-down menu of
04
each parameter are used to control whether monitor the corresponding parameter, whether
give an alarm and when to stop the action, etc.

II. ounction
07

When the Monitor option in the Quality screen is selected to use, the product will be marked
as bad part when exceeds the set tolerance range and generate related alarm if the alarm
output is selected to use.

Relevant aspects can be set to identify bad parts are: mold close time, inject time, plasticize
22

time, cut off time, cut off position, plasticization reached position, maximum inject pressure,
cut off pressure and maximum RMP. Several of them can be selected at the same time to
monitor the product quality.
20

3.5.4. Process data monitoring

General rules

Screens of Monitor 2/3 can record the vital production parameters and the error change
during the production. Adjust the relevant setting data upon the comparison through different
production cycle to improve the production quality.

Section overview

⚫ Screen of process data monitoring

⚫ Function introduction

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-11
 Volume 3 Operation manual
ounction of process data monitoring

⚫ Monitor the parameters of production process to ensure production safety and product
quality.

I. Introduction of screen

5
52
61
70
04

Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F4 Monitor 2 /F5 Monitor 3
07
22
20

3.5.5. Description of process parameters change records

General rules
3.5-12 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Process parameters change records and alarm records can be searched in relevant screens.

I. Screen of alarm set

All the parameter changes and alarm records are recorded in the tables of the information
screen in event format.

5
52
61
70
04

Entry path: →F10 Back→F2 PM

07

Display Start No.: up to 10 sets of alarm data can be displayed on this screen. Enter the serial
number of the previous alarm data and the data would be displayed on the screen. At most
5000 sets of alarm data can be stored by the system and remain to be saved upon starting up
after switch-off.
22

Total jrror Count: record the total count of the alarms.

No.: indicating the displaying serial number is 1, which could increase to 5000.
20

Start Time: the time when the error is generated.

Reset Time: the time when the error is eliminated.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-13
 Volume 3 Operation manual
II. Screen of modify record viewing and time tracking

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen→F10 Back→F2 PM→F9 Record
04
This screen is the viewing page for modifying record of reference data.
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen→F10 Back→F2 PM→F7 Record →F3 Event

This screen is the viewing page for machine status record.

3.5-14 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
Entry path: Main screen→F10 Back→F2 PM→F7 Record →F4 Event

This screen is the viewing page for each module communication statues record.
04
3.5.6. Notes for automatic cycle start

General rules

The machine needs to enter the automatic mode for production after normal manual
07

operation. Before enterting the automatic mode for production, there are some points for
attention and the way the machine enters the automatic mode.

Section overview
22

⚫ Preparation before entering the automatic mode

⚫ Operation of entering the automatic mode

I. Preparation before entering the automatic mode

20

As the machine will proceed coherent production operation according to the previously set
parameters of each action after entering the automatic mode, following matters needs to be
noticed.

【1】Check all the set parameters again to see if reasonable or conform to assumption. In
case the parameters are gotten from mold parameters loading, make sure the loaded mold
parameters conform to the molds installed on the machine.

【2】Confirm each motion under the manual mode and observe whether correct and meet
the requirements.

【3】Make the mold opened before entering the automatic mode and plasticized if no special

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-15
 Volume 3 Operation manual
reason.

【4】In case have any auxiliary machinery such as robot, mold heater, hot runner control
cabinet, make sure the auxiliary machinery is in normal operation.

【5】Turn on heating to the set temperature and switch on the motor.

II. Operation of entering the automatic mode

After the completion of preparation, then enter the automatic mode.

5
The automatic mode can be divided into full-automatic mode and semi-automatic mode.

52
Full-automatic mode means the machine will be in operation according to the setting cycle
until reach the setting cycle count or due to some abnormal interrupt; semi-automatic mode
means the machine stops running after a cycle or due to some abnormal interrupt.

61
Press the semi-automatic or full-automatic button on the panel, in case the safety gate is
opened, the machine will warn “the safety gate is not closed”; if the machine is equipped
with auto door, press the Safety door close button and the machine will proceed the motion
of safety door close; after the door is closed, press the Cycle start button again and the
70
machine will enter the automatic mode. If the machine is not equipped with auto door, close
the door manually, pressure the Cycle start button again and the machine will enter the
automatic mode. When the machine is equipped with a cycle start button, it is necessary to
press the cycle start button after the door is closed, or directly enter the automatic mode
04
after the door is closed.

Press the semi-automatic or full-automatic button on the panel, in case the safety gate is
closed, the machine will warn “Please open the”; if the machine is equipped with auto door,
press the Safety door open button and the machine will proceed the motion of safety door
07

open; after the door is opened, repeat the above steps and the machine will enter the
automatic mode. If the machine is not equipped with auto door, open the door manually,
repeat the above steps and the machine will enter the automatic mode.
22
20

3.5-16 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
III. Screen of operation tips

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-17
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

3.5.7. Introduction to the use of quality curve

General rules

The quality curve is applied for signal detection, data analysis, data comparison and so on.
In case the machine is in some problem, user can use this function to conduct analysis and
detection and helpful for problem finding and solving.

Section overview

3.5-18 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
⚫ Entry of screen

⚫ Selection of relevant monitoring parameters

I. jntry of screen

Entry the screen of quality curve.

5
52
61
70
04

Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back→F2 PM→F6 Curve

07

Start No.: displays the quality curves for the subsequent 10 molds after this one.

Time (position) maximum/minimum value: displays the quality curve within this range.
22

Selection of relevant monitoring parameters

Select a parameter needed to check, and press the OK button. The light of this parameter
will be on and the relevant quality curve will be displayed in the curve chart as shown in the
above figure “cycle time”.
20

3.5.8. Identification of program version

General rules

Software version is the “ID card” for this set of software. It is important to provide the correct
software version to the supplier in case any problem with the program or change of program
is required for function upgrading.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-19
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Version identification

Enter the screen of version.

5
52
61
70
04
Entry path: Main screen →F10 Back →F8 Version

Enter the screen of version, the information in the red box in the figure above is the content
of program version for this machine.
07
22
20

Entry path: Main screen →F10 down group →F8 Version →F4 Version

Entering the F4 version interface, the version number and communication status of each
3.5-20 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
module are displayed. In the above figure, the green light represents the normal
communication module.

3.5.9. Lubrication setting

General rules

During the production process, lubricate the machine through the setting of lubrication to
prevent the machine from abrasion.

5
Section overview

52
⚫ Screen of lubrication setting

⚫ Alarm information

I. Screen of lubrication setting

61
70
04
07
22

Entry path: Main screen →F9 Quick set→F4 Parameter

20

Automatic lubricator count

The count interval in each lubricator

Remain lubricator count

Remain count from the next lubrication

Lubricator alarm time

Alarm when no lubrication input signal is detected within the lubrication alarm time

Startup automatic lubrication days

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-21
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Start automatic lubrication when power on, if the off time exceeds this number of days;

II.Alarm information

5
52
61
70
04
Lubrication pressure test

The machine will always detect the lubrication pressure during the lubrication operation. If
the machine still detects the existence of lubrication pressure after the lubrication interval,
the machine will send an alarm " Lub#1PresReliefFail ".
07

3.5.10. Storage and loading of machine parameters

General rules
22

After the test run of the equipment in the workshop, a set of statistics or the machine
parameters will be saved, including mechanical stroke statistics of the equipment,
parameters of the oil cylinder, calibrated linearity of the position transducer and the pump.
For the loss of machine parameters, the machine will not be able to work properly. Therefore,
20

it is essential to save and load the machine parameters.

Options introduced in this document

⚫ Introduction to screen of machine parameters

⚫ Introduction to storage of machine parameters

⚫ Introduction to loading of machine parameters

3.5-22 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
I. Introduction to screen of machine parameters

5
52
61
70
Entry pass: Main screen→F10 Next→F5 Mold→F6 Machine
04
II. Introduction to storage of machine parameters

The machine parameters can be saved locally or in the USB. Select one in the options below:

【1】Insert the USB to the USB interface of the controller;

07

【2】Choose “Save” at the pull-down menu of “ModeOption”;

【3】Choose the item that needs to be saved after entering the password;

【4】Choose the storage target at the pull-down menu of “ModeObj”, MMI or Mem. Card;
22

【5】It will inform that “Data saved” after choosing Confirm at the pull-down menu of
“Confirm”.
20

III. Introduction to loading of machine parameters

The procedure of loading machine parameters is the same as that of saving machine
parameters, so just choose “Read” at the pull-down menu of “ModeOption”;

3.5.11. Introduction to robot interface (Option)

3.5.11.1. Simple robot

Options introduced in this document

⚫ Operation of interface

⚫ Introduction to IO points

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-23
 Volume 3 Operation manual
⚫ Alarm information

ounctions of robot

⚫ It can get products instead of workers, which is more convenient and faster.

⚫ It can avoid accidents, which is safer.

Selection of robot use

5
52
61
70
04
07

Entry pass: Main screen→ F9 Fast →F9 Take

Enter the Take screen and choose Use at the Robot mode bar, then you can use the robot
function.→
22

3.5.11.2. Robot mold open middle function (Option)

ounction:
20

The injection molding machine sends the robot a mold open middle signal to make the robot
reach a safe holding position in advance, which can reduce the product taking time of the
robot. Add an input point ROBOpnAgainEn and an output point IMMRbtMiddle.

ounction settings:

Enter the Take screen, select the mode of Robot Midl Op, Robot Midl DownPos and Robot
Midl DownTim.

3.5-24 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
Entry pass: Main screen→ F9 Fast→F9 Take
70
04
07
22
20

KeepOpn: When the mold reaches the down position, the movable platen will continue to
open the mold instead of stop running.

PBCtrlStay: When the mold reaches the set down position, stop opening the mold and
check if the PB point “OpnAgainEn” has any signal. The machine can continue to open the
mold only when the PB point has signals. Or it shall wait all the time.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.5-25
 Volume 3 Operation manual
KeepOpn: When the mold reaches the down position, stop opening the mold and start
counting, and open the mold again when the time is up.

Robot Midl DownPos: Stop opening the mold when the mold reaches the set position and
start the robot.

Robot Midl DownTim: If choose the KeepOpn mode for the Robot Midl Opt, stay and start
counting when the mold reaches the set position, and then open the mold again when the
time is up.

5
Introduction to I/O points:

52
Input points:

ROBOpnAgainjn: a signal that the robot sends to the injection molding machine. When
the robot is selected to use, the Robot Middle is selected to use, the mode of Robot Midl Op

61
is set to PBCtrlStay, the injection molding machine can only realize the Robot Middle function
when it can monitor the OpnAgainEn signal.

Output points:
70
IMMRbtMiddle: When the robot and the robot middle function are both selected to use, this
point outputs when the mold reaches the robot middle position and continues until the
beginning of the next mold.

Note:
04
1. This function shall be used with the robot, which means the robot shall have the
corresponding function.

2. jnsure absolute safety while using this function. You can aduust by setting a
07

larger set position and then decreasing gradually to reach a best value.
22
20

3.5-26 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.6. J6 card introduction (Option)
3.6.1. Basic introduction of J6 screen

General

Haitian J6 card is an optional function. This chapter mainly introduces the parameters and
function settings of J6 card and driver.

The options described in this document

5
⚫ Hydraulic axis J6 screen

52
⚫ Hydraulic axis drive screen

⚫ Hydraulic axis debugging screen

⚫ Hydraulic axis compensation screen

61
⚫ Hydraulic axis temperature screen

⚫ Hydraulic axis configuration screen

⚫ Hydraulic axis forced screen

1) Hydraulic axis J6 screen

70
04
07
22
20

Access: main screen →F9 quick set→ F5J6

Hydraulic axis Hydraulic system, shaft one represents the first hydraulic
index system.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.6-1
 Volume 3 Operation manual

General KP KI KD for the system pressure loop,In addition to the

injection pressure holding action, other actions use this
pressure loop.

Injection KP KI KD for Injection action.

Pressure KP KI KD for Pressure holding action.

holding

5
Write-in write to EEPROM and modify the J6 card parameters need
confirmation write-in confirmation, otherwise the parameters will be

52
restored after restart.

Alarm Alarm content when an alarm occurs on the J6 card.Read-

informatio only

61
PressureSet Pressure information sent by the controller to the J6 card,
read-only.

FlowSet
70
The flow information sent by the controller to the J6 card,read-
only.

TorqueOut Torque information sent to the drive after the J6 card is

calculated by the pressure loop,read-only.
04

VelocityOut Speed information sent to the drive after the J6 card is

calculated by the pressure loop,read-only.
07

PresActual the actual pressure of system, read-only.

Pressure Loop Motor acceleration, unit %/ms

Acc.
22

Pressure Loop Motor deceleration, unit %/ms

Dec.
20

Torque Slope The speed at which the pressure relief torque is released
during pressure relief, unit %/ms

Minimal Flow Minimum motor speed during operation.

Pressure Internal parameters of pressure relief torque control.

control upper
and lower limit
coefficients

Maximum Internal parameters of pressure relief torque control.

pressure load
torque

3.6-2 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Pressure relief Internal parameters of pressure relief torque control.

pullback
torque

Pressure relief Maximum motor negative speed allowed during pressure

maximum relief.
negative
speed

5
Pressure Internal parameters of pressure holding stability control.
control

52
accuracy

Pressure relief After the end of the action, the speed coefficient of the
coefficient pressure relief, the greater the value, the slower.

61
2) Hydraulic axis drive screen

70
04
07
22
20

Access: main screen→F9 quick set→F5 J6→F3 drive

Drive Index Drive 1 represents the current display of the parameters of the
first drive

Maximum drive speed (rpm) corresponding to 100% flow

speed

Torque factor The percentage of torque the controller gives to the drive. The
maximum value of F5 and HI drive is 1, ie (100%), F6 drive
defaults to 4

EN-MA_55_3354 3.6-3
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Encoder The encoder type of the motor: 1 represents endat and 2 for
interface type resolve.

Drive Index When the machine has multiple drive motors, the following
parameters need to be selected according to the axis index.

The full The internal address of the drive parameter can be entered
address of the directly in the address box, and the parameter values of this

5
drive searches address are displayed and modified in the content box.
for the address
and content

52
Speed loop speed PID of the driver, The bigger the value, the stronger

Operating The drive's operating status value. For drives of different

61
status brands, the status values are different.

SetVelocity The drive receives the speed command for the J6 card, read-
only.

ActEncodSpd
70
The actual output speed of the motor, read-only.

SetTorque The drive receives the torque command for the J6 card, read-
only.
04

ActAppCurent The actual output torque of the motor, read-only.

Actual current Actual output current of the driver,read-only.

07

Bus voltage The capacitor voltage of the driver,read-only.

The output Actual output voltage of the drive, read-only.

22

voltage

Switching The output switching frequency of the driver,read-only.

frequency
20

Motor zero Motor encoder zero,read-only.

Enabled state 0: The driver is not enabled, 1: The driver is enabled,read-only.

Current spike The maximum output current of the driver after power-on,
read-only.

Bus voltage The maximum bus voltage after power-on,read-only.

spike

Drive version The version number of the driver software

3.6-4 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Alert Code The code that drives the alert. Different brands of drives have
different code meanings.

Alert Status Common driver alert content,translated according to the code

3) Hydraulic axis debugging screen

5
52
61
70
04
07

Access: main screen→F9 quick set→F5J6F4 test

Enable After use, the drive motor J6 card does not enable the drive.
disconnection
22

Reset: Resets the drive parameters and restores the factory

settings.
20

Parameter Download: Download the drive parameters saved in J6 to the

function drive.

Upload: Backup the parameters of the drive into the J6 card and
SD.

Zeroing: The driver performs zero-setting and all permanent-

magnet synchronous motors must do.
Zero-finding
function
Self-learning: Impedance measurement is performed and so far
only KEB supports.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.6-5
 Volume 3 Operation manual

One-click Same as zero-finding function (easy operation)

zeroing

Encoder/motor Drive parameters, encoder and motor rotation direction

direction

4) Hydraulic axis compensation screen

5
52
61
70
04
07

Access: main screen→F9 quick set→F5J6→F5 compensation

Leakage Compensation switch

22

compensation

The output speed compensation is based on the actual pressure, as shown in the
following icon:
20

Serial pressure flow

number （bar） （rpm）

1 10 0

2 20 20

3 30 25

4 90 60

3.6-6 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5 100 80

6 110 120

7 120 130

8 135 145

5
52
5) Hydraulic axis temperature screen

61
70
04
07
22

Access: main screen→F9 quick set →F5J6→F6 temperature

20

Drive The real-time temperature of the drive.

temperature

Motor Real-time temperature of the motor（only zero is displayed if ptc

temperature is connected）

Drive When one of the drive temperatures is higher than this

warning temperature, the controller will warn of an over-temperature
temperature warning (liquid-cooled drive setting 60, air-cooled setting 70).

Drive Alarm When one of the drive temperatures exceeds this temperature,
Temperature the controller alerts the over-temperature alarm and stops the
action (Liquid Cooled Drive Setup 70, Air Cooled Setup 80).

EN-MA_55_3354 3.6-7
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Motor When one of the motor temperatures is higher than this

warning temperature, the controller will warn of an over temperature
temperature warning (setting 90).

Motor Alarm When one of the motor temperatures exceeds this temperature,
Temperature the controller will warn the over-temperature alarm and stop the
action (setting 100).

5
6) Hydraulic axis configuration screen

52
61
70
04
07

Access: main screen →F9 quick set →F5J6→F7 configuration

22

Model You can choose MAIIs MAIII JUIII

selection
20

Power Optional,conventional power configuration, power first gear,

configuration power first gear

Driver Brand Optional HI F5 F6

Special Default 0 for special cases

encoding

Import file When the above content is selected, the corresponding file
selection name will pop up automatically, and select the confirmation file.

Special For special models, manually enter the configured file name.

3.6-8 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
configuration

USB import to SD: Overwrite FILE files in U disk to SD card.

J6 to SD: Back up the AXS, SYS, and MEC files of the J6 card
Parameter
to the SD card.
Management
SD to USB: Copy the FILE file of the SD card to the USB flash
drive.

5
7) Forced screen

52
61
70
04
07
22

Access: main screen →F9 quick set→ F8 force

Pressure rating: The maximum pressure (bar) of the pressure sensor, which is
20

marked on the sensor label.

Sensor minimum voltage: The minimum voltage of the pressure sensor, which is marked
on the sensor label.

Sensor maximum voltage: The maximum voltage of the pressure sensor, which is marked
on the sensor label.

Alarm Clear: Used to clear J6 card alarms, or clear alarms by pressing the manual button.

3.6.2. Alarm information

EN-MA_55_3354 3.6-9
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.6.2.1. Introduction to Alarm Information

ER: Drive 1 ERROR

Cause Hydraulic Shaft Drive 1 Alarm

It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the

Influences
current operation.

5
Check the specific alarm content on the hydraulic axis driver screen,

52
and combine the actual alarm resolution content to clear alarm. Refer
Reset
to “3.6.2.2. Introduction to Analysis on Alert Contents on J6 and
Drive Screen ”.

61
ER: Drive 2 ERROR

Cause Hydraulic Shaft Drive 2 Alarm

Influences
current operation.
70
It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the

Check the specific alarm content on the hydraulic axis driver screen,
04
and combine the actual alarm resolution content to clear alarm. Refer
Reset
to “3.6.2.2. Introduction to Analysis on Alert Contents on J6 and
Drive Screen ”.
07

ER: J6 Card Error

Cause Hydraulic Shaft J6 card generates alarm

22

It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the

Influences
current operation.
20

Check the specific alarm content on the hydraulic axis driver screen,
and combine the actual alarm resolution content to clear alarm. Refer
Reset
to “3.6.2.2. Introduction to Analysis on Alert Contents on J6 and
Drive Screen ”.

ER: Electric shaft drive 1 ERROR

Cause Electric shaft drive 1 generates an alarm

It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the

Influences
current operation.

3.6-10 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Check the specific alarm content on the electric axis driver screen,
and combine the actual alarm resolution content to clear alarm. Refer
Reset
to “3.6.2.2. Introduction to Analysis on Alert Contents on J6 and
Drive Screen ”.

ER: Electric shaft drive 2 ERROR

5
Cause Electric Shaft Drive 2 Generates an Alarm

52
It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the
Influences
current operation.

Check the specific alarm content on the electric axis driver screen,

61
and combine the actual alarm resolution content to clear alarm. Refer
Reset
to “3.6.2.2. Introduction to Analysis on Alert Contents on J6 and
Drive Screen ”.

70
ER: Electric Shaft J6 card ERROR

Cause Electric Shaft J6 card generates alarm

04
It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the
Influences
current operation.

Check the specific alarm content on the electric axis J6 screen, and
07

combine the actual alarm resolution content to clear alarm. Refer to

Reset
“3.6.2.2. Introduction to Analysis on Alert Contents on J6 and Drive
Screen ”.
22

ER: Injection shaft drive temperature is too high

Injection Shaft Drive Temperature Is Higher Than Drive Alarm

20

Cause
Temperature

It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the

Influences
current operation.

Reset Turn off the motor and wait for the driver temperature to drop

ER: The temperature of the storing shaft drive is too high

Cause The storing shaft drive temperature is higher than the drive warning

EN-MA_55_3354 3.6-11
 Volume 3 Operation manual
temperature.

It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the

Influences
current operation.

Reset Turn off the motor and wait for the driver temperature to drop.

5
ER: Injection shaft motor temperature is too high

52
Injection shaft motor temperature is higher than motor warning
Cause
temperature

It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the

Influences

61
current operation.

Reset Turn off the motor and wait for the motor temperature to drop.

70
ER: The temperature of the storing shaft motor is too high

Storing shaft motor temperature is higher than motor warning

Cause
04
temperature

It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the

Influences
current operation.
07

Reset Turn off the motor and wait for the motor temperature to drop.

ER: Temperature of Drive 1 is too high

22

Temperature of hydraulic shaft drive 1 is higher than the driver alarm

Cause
temperature
20

It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the

Influences
current operation.

Reset Turn off the motor and wait for the motor temperature to drop.

ER: Temperature of Motor 1 is too high

Hydraulic shaft motor 1 temperature is higher than the motor warning

Cause
temperature

3.6-12 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the

Influences
current operation.

Reset Turn off the motor and wait for the motor temperature to drop.

ER: offline communicatation with the axis card

5
Cause Controller disconnected from J6 card

52
It is forbidden to clamp, inject, store materials, etc., and stop the
Influences
current operation.

Check if the communication cables between the controller and the

61
J6 card are properly connected.
Reset
Whether the J6 state is turned on or not and whether it is in normal
communication state.
70
3.6.2.2. Analysis of alarm content on J6 and drive screen
04
07
22
20

Alarm information Cause Reset

J6 card master station Communication between J6 card Check whether

communication lost as master and driver is not communication lines between
established J6 and drive are normal

SD card does not exist No SD card inserted during Insert SD card and perform

EN-MA_55_3354 3.6-13
 Volume 3 Operation manual
parameter import parameter import again

U disk does not exist No U disk inserted during Insert U disk and perform
parameter import parameter import function
again

Pressure sensor error 1 Shaft 1 - pressure sensor - error 1 Check if pressure sensor
value is within normal range

5
Pressure sensor error 2 Shaft 2 - pressure sensor - error 1 Check if pressure sensor
value is within normal range

52
Pressure sensor error 3 Shaft 3 - pressure sensor - error 1 Check if pressure sensor
value is within normal range

61
Pressure sensor error 4 Shaft 4 - pressure sensor - error 1 Check if pressure sensor
value is within normal range

70
04
07
22
20

Alarm information Cause Reset

Drive overload Drive load is too high Press the manual to clear
alarm after closing the motor

Motor protection Motor overload Press the manual to clear

alarm after closing the motor

Motor overspeeding Motor speed is too high Press the manual to clear
alarm after closing the motor

3.6-14 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Self-learning failed Drive self-learning failed Press the manual key to

clear the alarm and then
restart the self-learning
function

Encoder failure Encoder wiring error Check if the encoder wiring is

normal

5
3.6.3. Drive zeroing/self-learning function

3.6.3.1. Zero-finding/self-learning significance

52
The permanent magnet synchronous motor of the drive looks for the encoder zero position.
Each drive must perform this operation. If the motor is turned on and enabled before this
operation is performed, it may result in a galloping.

61
3.6.3.2. Zeroing/self-learning settings

1) Enter the debug screen, turn off the motor and disconnect the enable function to use.
70
04
07
22
20

2) Enter the password 66, then enable Write Select Use and turn on the motor.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.6-15
 Volume 3 Operation manual

5
52
61
70
3) Select zero/self-learning, start zero/self-learning, and pop up the prompt box. Zero-
finding prompt box is finding the zero position, please wait!
04
07
22
20

4) Wait for the zero-finding/self-learning action to complete.

3.6.3.3. Tips for zeroing and self-learning

1) It is forbidden to open the motor and enable the driver before zero-zero/self-learning
operation.

3.6-16 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
2) Please do not cut the screen as much as possible during the zero-finding/self-learning
process.

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

EN-MA_55_3354 3.6-17
 Volume 3 Operation manual
3.7. Alarm list
Safety confirmation:

ER: Mold ID Check Failure

The mold ID used to read the mold is different from the actual mold
Cause
ID.

5
Semi-auto or full-auto cannot be performed and the machine will shift
Influence
directly to the manual mode in the semi-auto or full-auto mode.

52
Read the mold ID correctly to be consistent with the actual mold ID.
Reset
Set the mold ID correctly.

61
ER: Transmission Failure

Cause
70
The injection molding machine does not receive the communication
ready or communication received signal.

The information cannot be transmitted, so that the mold number

Influence
transfer function cannot be used.
04
Check the corresponding input signal according to specific alarm.
Reset
Check the robot and the electrical circuit related to the controller.
07

ER: Safety Door Not Closed

22

Prompt before entering the auto or auto mold adjust state, or open
Cause
the door in the wrong time.

Influence Mold closing, injection and charging are prohibited.

20

Close the safety door and check the electrical hardware circuit of the
Reset
safety door.

ER: Safety Door 2 Not Closed

The front safety door is detected by several limit switches. When the
Cause safety door is closed, one of the limit switches is not pressed, which
causes the alarm.

Influence Mold closing, injection and charging are prohibited.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-1
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Check if the front safety door is closed completely.

Check the limit switch that corresponds to the “Safety door closed 2”
input point and adjust its installation position properly while ensuring
Reset
safety after having contacted after-sales staff of Haitian for
confirmation;
Check the electrical hardware circuit of safety door closed 2.

5
ER: Rear Safety Door Not Closed

52
Cause The rear safety door is opened.

Influence All actions are prohibited.

61
Reset Close the rear safety door.

ER: Please Open Safety Door

70
If the safety door is closed before entering the auto or auto mold
Cause adjust state, the machine will inform of opening and closing the
04
safety door to activate the desired mode.

Wait for taking products during the interval in the semi-auto mode
Influence
and wait for activation before the auto and auto mold adjust mode.
07

Reset Open the safety door.

ER: Please Open Safety Door 2

22

If the safety door is closed before entering the auto or auto mold
Cause adjust state, the machine will inform of opening and closing the
safety door to activate the desired mode.
20

Wait for taking products during the interval in the semi-auto mode
Influence
and wait for activation before the auto and auto mold adjust mode.

Reset Open the safety door.

ER: Safety Door Detection Abnormal

Foreign matters enter the door close area while the automatic door
Cause
is closed.

3.7-2 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Influence Immediately stop closing the door.

Reset Check if there are foreign matters in the door close area.

ER: Rear Safety Door Detection Abnormal

5
Foreign matters enter the door close area while the rear automatic
Cause
door is closed.

52
Influence Immediately stop closing the door.

Reset Check if there are foreign matters in the door close area.

61
ER: Safety Door Servo Abnormal

Cause The driver does not send a servo signal to the controller.
70
Influence Stop opening or closing the door.

Reset Check the electrical circuit of the driver safety door.

04

ER: Zero Position of Safety Door Lost, Please Close Door To End
07

Cause The computer cannot find the zero position of the safety door.

Influence Stop opening the door.

22

The first action after power on. If the door is not closed, close the
door manually (press the door close button all the time). The alarm
Reset
will disappear automatically and return to normal when the door is
closed.
20

ER: Please Release Cycle Start Button

The program will check the cycle start button to see if it is in the safe
state when entering the auto mode. If the button is fount to be
Cause
pressed for long, the program will raise the alarm and prohibit
entering the auto mode.

Prompt to release the cycle start button. The prompt will disappear
Influence
when the cycle start has no signal.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-3
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Release the cycle start button.

Reset
Check the circuit connection.

ER: Please Release Cycle Stop Button

When pressing the semi-auto/full-auto button, the cycle stops and

Cause

5
there is no signal.

52
Prompt to release the cycle stop button. The prompt will disappear
Influence
when the cycle stop has a signal.

Release the cycle stop button.

Reset

61
Check the circuit connection.

ER: Please Press Cycle Start Button

70
In the semi-auto, full-auto or auto mold adjust state, the machine will
Cause prompt the operator to press the cycle start button after the safety
door is closed to start cycle actions.
04
Influence Prompt you to press the cycle start button.

Reset Press the cycle start button according to the prompt.

07

ER: Please Select To Use Electric Motor Temperature Detection

Function
22

Do not use the electric motor temperature detection function for the
Cause
air-cooled electric motor.
20

Prompt you to select the electric motor temperature detection

Influence
function.

Select to use the electric motor temperature detection function

Reset
according to the prompt.

ER: Please Press Mold Close Button

Cause In the semi-auto, full-auto or auto mold adjust state, part safety
standard will inform the operator of pressing the mold closing button

3.7-4 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
after the safety door is closed so as to confirm start of real cycle.

Influence Prompt you to press the mold close button.

Reset Press the mold close button according to the prompt.

ER: Release Manual/Emergency Stop Button

5
The manual button is long pressed

52
Cause
The emergency stop button is pressed

Influence Stop all actions and turn off the motor.

61
Release the manual button
Reset
Release the emergency stop button while ensuring safety

Safety alarm:
70
ER: Mechanical Safety Abnormal
04
The mechanical safety has the function of electrical inspection which
Cause is to check if the mechanical safety block is successfully lifted up and
dropped.
07

Influence Raise the alarm and stop opening and closing the mold.

The alarm appears during mold closing means that the mechanical
safety is not successfully lifted up. Check the position of the block. If
the block is lifted up, adjust the installation position of the detection
22

sensor. If the sensor is installed correctly, check the electrical

hardware circuit related to the sensor;

Reset In order to prevent the block dropping in the wrong time or manual
short-circuiting in the semi-auto state, the program will check if the
20

block has dropped when the last cycle finishes and the next cycle
starts. If the program does not detect that the block has dropped,
adjust the installation position of the detection sensor. If the sensor
is installed correctly, check the electrical hardware circuit related to
the sensor.

ER: Low Air Pressure

The machine does not receive the air pressure check signal during
Cause
mold opening and closing.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-5
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Influence Mold opening and closing are prohibited.

Reset Increase the air pressure.

ER: Front Door Light Screen Blocked

The light screen of the front door is blocked.

5
Cause

Influence Cannot do the mold closing action and raise the alarm.

52
Check if the light screen of the front door is blocked.
Reset
Check the relative electrical circuit.

61
ER: Mechanical Protection

Cause
70
Foreign matters enter the mold open area of the toggle injection
molding machine or the two-plate injection molding machine, which
causes the alarm.

Influence
04
Prohibit all actions.

Check if there are foreign matters in the mold open area;

Reset Check the electrical element (generally, light screen) that
07

corresponds to the “mechanical protection” input point.

ER: Feeding Ladder In Use

22

Cause The feeding ladder is put down when the injection unit actions.

Influence Injection, charging, suckback and nozzle actions are prohibited.

20

Reset Put the ladder back while ensuring safety.

ER: Please Keep Away From Safety Pedal

Cause The safety pedal is pressed down.

Influence Prohibit all actions and disable the alarm manually.

Keep away from the safety pedal;

Reset
If you are sure that there is no foreign matter on the pedal, check if

3.7-6 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
the pedal gets stuck;
Check the installation position of the limit switch of the pedal. If
necessary, adjust the installation position properly while ensuring
safety;
Check the electrical hardware circuit of the safety pedal.

ER: Hydraulic Safety Abnormal

5
The hydraulic safety valve core is not opened or closed in time.

52
Cause

Influence The alarm lamp lights and all actions stop.

Press the manual button to disable the alarm and repeat the earlier

61
operations. If the alarm continues, check the hydraulic safety valve.
If the hydraulic safety detection switch is not that with a built-in valve
Reset
core, check the installation position of the hydraulic safety detection
switch to enable it to sense correctly;
70
Check the hydraulic safety valve to see if it is stuck
04
ER: Mold Height Abnormal

The actual mold height exceeds 20% of the limit range of the set
Cause
mold height.
07

Influence Cannot do the mold opening/closing, nut and tie bar actions.

Reset Set a proper mold height.

22

ER: Clamp Abnormal

20

The injection molding machine does not receive the “mold close
Cause enable” or “mold open enable” signal from the clamp when opening
or closing the mold.

Influence Cannot do the mold closing action and raise the alarm.

Overhaul the clamp and the controller.

Reset
Check the related electrical circuit.

QMC:

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-7
 Volume 3 Operation manual

ER: QMC Error

Cause Input point: OMC normal, no signal input.

Influence Prohibit all actions and disable the alarm manually.

Check the electromagnetic platen and the electrical wiring

Reset
connection.

5
52
ER: QMC Mode Error

When choosing the QMC mode in the semi-auto/full-auto mode, the

Cause
machine will warn of QMC mode error and shift to the manual mode.

61
Influence Prohibit all actions and disable the alarm manually.

Do not use the QMC function in the semi-auto/full-auto mode. Use it

70
Reset
in the manual or mold adjust mode.

Tie bar:
04
ER: Limit Failure

1. When pressing the tie bar forward/backward button, the fixed

platen nut and the rear platen nut does not move backward to end.
07

2. When the tie bar moves backward and the rear platen nut does
Cause not move backward to end, the fixed platen nut starts to move
backward
22

3. When the tie bar moves forward and the fixed platen nut does not
move backward to end, the rear platen nut starts to move forward.

Influence The tie bar cannot move forward or backward.

20

Check the position of the nut, the limit switch and the wiring
Reset
connection.

ER: Under Mechanical Protection

1. After choosing the tie bar option button, press the mold
opening/closing and mold adjust buttons.
Cause 2. When any of the fixed platen nut, rear platen nut and tie bar does
not move forward to end, pressed the mold opening/closing and
mold adjust buttons.

3.7-8 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

The tie bar cannot move forward or backward and mold opening and
Influence
closing cannot be performed.

Do not press the mold opening and closing or the mold adjust
Reset
forward and backward buttons in the tie bar mode.

Material temperature:

5
ER: Keep Warm On Time Not Up

52
Cause Keep warm timing is not finished.

Influence Cannot do injection, charging and suckback actions.

61
Allow to perform injection, charging and suckback after the keep
Reset
warm on timing is up.

70
ER: Temp.ReachUpLimit, ElectricHeatAutoOff

The temperature exceeds the upper limit of the set temperature

Cause
value.
04
Influence Raise the alarm and turn off the electric heat.

Check if the heating band is abnormal. If not, reset a proper

07

temperature parameter; after pressing the manual button, the alarm

Reset
will disappear but the electric heat still cannot heat. Turn off the
electric heat and restart it, the electric heat will then start to heat.
22

ER: Electricity Leakage Protection Abnormal

Cause Electricity of barrel heating circuit leaks away.

20

Influence The electric heat will be turned off after the alarm.

Check the heating circuit and find out the source of leakage;
Reset Check the electrical hardware circuit detected by electricity leakage
protection.

ER: Heating Abnormal

Cause The machine will raise the alarm if the increased value of the
temperature is below the “continuous heating check degree” within

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-9
 Volume 3 Operation manual
three minutes after starting the barrel heating.

Influence The electric heat will be turned off after the alarm.

Check if the heating circuit is abnormal;

Reset Properly adjust the “continuous heating check degree” according the
actual situation of the machine.

5
ER: Temperature Deviation

52
Cause The temperature of the tube is not high enough or a bit too high.

Influence Injection, charging and suckback are prohibited.

61
Check the set temperature and the actual temperature of the tube,
Reset
and examine the heating circuit.
70
ER: Mold Temperature Deviation

Cause The mold temperature exceeds the limit range.

04
Influence Injection, charging and suckback are prohibited.

Wait the actual mold temperature to reach within the set range.
07

Reset Check the set temperature and the actual temperature of the tube,
and examine the heating circuit.
22

ER: Oil Temperature Deviation

The actual oil temperature is lower than the enable lowest oil
Cause
20

temperature.

Influence Mold closing is prohibited.

Check the set oil temperature, actual oil temperature and oil cooling
Reset
circuit, or start the oil preheating function.

ER: Oil Temperature Too High

The actual oil temperature is higher than the enable highest oil
Cause
temperature.

3.7-10 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Influence Mold closing is prohibited and the motor stops.

Check the set oil temperature, actual oil temperature and oil cooling
Reset
circuit, or start the oil preheating function.

ER: System Auto Into Keep Warm, Please Press Manual Button To
Return

5
If the machine is not operated for long in the manual state, the barrel

52
Cause heating will automatically switch to the Keep warm state and the
machine will display the information.

Influence Inform of entering Keep warm.

61
Reset Press the manual button to restore normal heating.

ER: Heating Zone 1 Cut Off 70

Cause Heating zone 1 is cut off and the input point has no signal.
04
Influence Inform that heating zone 1 is cut off.

Check the hardware of the heating zone 1 and the electrical circuit,
Reset
and press the manual button to reset.
07

ER: Heating Zone 2 Cut Off

22

Cause Heating zone 2 is cut off and the input point has no signal.

Influence Inform that heating zone 2 is cut off.

20

Check the hardware of the heating zone 2 and the electrical circuit,
Reset
and press the manual button to reset.

ER: Heating Zone 3 Cut Off

Cause Heating zone 3 is cut off and the input point has no signal.

Influence Inform that heating zone 3 is cut off.

Check the hardware of the heating zone 3 and the electrical circuit,
Reset
and press the manual button to reset.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-11
 Volume 3 Operation manual

ER: Heating Zone 4 Cut Off

Cause Heating zone 4 is cut off and the input point has no signal.

Influence Inform that heating zone 4 is cut off.

Check the hardware of the heating zone 4 and the electrical circuit,

5
Reset
and press the manual button to reset.

52
ER: Heating Zone 5 Cut Off

Heating zone 5 is cut off and the input point has no signal.

61
Cause

Influence Inform that heating zone 5 is cut off.

Check the hardware of the heating zone 5 and the electrical circuit,
70
Reset
and press the manual button to reset.

ER: Heating Zone 6 Cut Off

04

Cause Heating zone 6 is cut off and the input point has no signal.

Influence Inform that heating zone 6 is cut off.

07

Check the hardware of the heating zone 6 and the electrical circuit,
Reset
and press the manual button to reset.
22

ER: Heating Zone 7 Cut Off

Cause Heating zone 7 is cut off and the input point has no signal.
20

Influence Inform that heating zone 7 is cut off.

Check the hardware of the heating zone 7 and the electrical circuit,
Reset
and press the manual button to reset.

ER: Heating Zone 8 Cut Off

Cause Heating zone 8 is cut off and the input point has no signal.

3.7-12 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Influence Inform that heating zone 8 is cut off.

Check the hardware of the heating zone 8 and the electrical circuit,
Reset
and press the manual button to reset.

ER: Heating Zone 9 Cut Off

5
Cause Heating zone 9 is cut off and the input point has no signal.

52
Influence Inform that heating zone 9 is cut off.

Check the hardware of the heating zone 9 and the electrical circuit,
Reset
and press the manual button to reset.

61
ER： Thermocouple Cut Off

Cause The thermocouple is cut off.

70
Influence Switch off the electric heat and warn that the thermocouple is cut off.
04
Reset Check the heating circuit.

ER: Upper Top Cover Not Closed

07

Cause The upper top cover is opened.

Mold opening and closing, injection, charging and nozzle forward are
22

Influence
prohibited.

Close the upper top cover;

Check the installation position of the limit switch of the upper top
20

cover and properly adjust the installation position while ensuring

Reset
safety after contacting after-sales service personnel of Haitian for
confirmation;
Check the electrical hardware circuit of the upper top cover.

ER: Hopper Check Abnormal

Cause The hopper is not closed.

Influence Injection, charging and suckback are prohibited.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-13
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Reset Close the hopper.

ER: Hopper Check Abnormal#2

Cause The hopper2 is not closed.

Influence Injection, charging and suckback are prohibited.

5
Reset Close the hopper2.

52
ER: Injection Shield Not Closed

61
The machine will check if the injection shield is closed during
Cause injection and will raise the alarm if not. New national safety standards
will also be checked during charge and nozzle forward.

Influence
shield is not closed.
70
Injection, charging and nozzle forward will be stopped if the injection

Close the injection shield, repeat the above actions to see if the
04
Reset alarm continues. If the alarm continues, check the electrical
hardware circuit related to the injection shield.
07

ER: Injection Shield Safety Circuit Abnormal

The machine will check the injection shield and injection shield
close#2 input signals during injection and will raise the alarm when
Cause
22

both the injection shield and injection shield close#2 signals become
abnormal.

The current action will stop if it is not closed during injection,

Influence charging and nozzle forward, and cannot start electric heating and
20

the motor.

Close the injection shield and check the electrical hardware circuit
Reset
related to the injection shield.

ER: Heating Abnormal

The machine will raise the alarm if the increased value of the
Cause temperature is below the “continuous heating check degree” within
three minutes after starting the barrel heating.

3.7-14 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Influence Turn off the electrical heating and warn of abnormal heating.

Check if the heating circuit is abnormal; adjust the “continuous

Reset heating check degree” properly according to the actual situation of
the machine.

ER: Charge Gas Injection Timeout

5
When the screw position exceeds 85% of the total charge stroke,

52
Cause
gas injection time is not up.

Influence Close the injector and raise the alarm.

61
Reset Check the electrical circuit related to charging.

ER: Screw Melt Pressure Too High

70
Cause The screw melt pressure exceeds the set value.

Influence Stop injection and raise the alarm.

04
Reset Check the electrical circuit related to charging.
07

ER: Charge No Move Monitor Timeout

When the motor is on, do the charging action. If the actual screw
position is within the detecting position all the time and the
22

Cause
accumulative duration reaches the set monitoring time, stop the
action and raise the alarm.

Influence Stop charging and raise the alarm.

20

Reset Press the manual button to disable the alarm.

ER: Charge Safety Position Protection

When the charging starts, record the current screw position as S1,
and then force to suckback with a suckback distance ≥1.0mm. When
the suckback finishes, check the actual position of the screw during
Cause
the subsequent charging process. If the value is smaller than S1+X
and lasts T seconds, the action will stop and the machine will raise
the alarm.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-15
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Influence Stop charging and raise the alarm.

Reset Press the manual button to disable the alarm.

ER: Material Shortage

The material shortage alarm input point has no input signal while the

5
Cause
feeding forward end point has signal during charging.

52
Influence Warn of material shortage.

Reset Press the manual button to disable the alarm.

61
ER: Feed Enable

The material shortage alarm input point has input signal during
70
Cause
charging.

Influence Warn of feeding enable.

04
Reset Press the manual button to disable the alarm.

Automatic detection:
07

ER: Cycle Not Finish On Time

The actual circulation time of one cycle exceeds the enabled upper
Cause
limit.
22

Influence The alarm lamp lights and the next mold action is stopped.

Check the set upper limit value and the time spent each step of the
Reset
20

cycle.

ER: Injection Monitoring Failure

The minimum screw position exceeds the monitoring limit range after
Cause
the injection pressure holding finishes.

The alarm lamp lights. The cycle stops and the bad piece signal will
Influence
appear according to the settings on the monitoring screen.

Reset Check the set upper limit. If the set value is normal, it may be

3.7-16 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
because of the change of injection technical parameter. If injection
is not sufficient, it may be because of insufficient eject or flash.

ER: Charge Not Finish On Time

Cause The actual charging time exceeds the set charging monitoring time.

5
The alarm lamp lights. The cycle stops and the bad piece signal will
Influence
appear according to the settings on the monitoring screen.

52
First check if the machine is short of material. The reason why
Reset charging cannot be finished within the prescribed time may be that
the charge back pressure is too high.

61
ER: Mold Close Set Position Not Reached

Cause
70
The actual high-pressure clamping time exceeds the set high-
pressure clamping monitoring time.

The alarm lamp lights. The cycle stops and the bad piece signal will
Influence
appear according to the settings on the monitoring screen.
04
The mold height is not adjusted well, so the high-pressure clamping
cannot be performed. Please readjust the mold height;
There are foreign matters inside the mold, so the high-pressure
07

clamping cannot be performed successfully. Please check if there

Reset are foreign matters in the cavity;
The pressure and the flow rate of high-pressure clamping are set so
low that the high-pressure clamping power is not sufficient and
22

clamping cannot be performed. Please readjust the set value of the

pressure and flow rate of high-pressure clamping.
20

ER: Injection Start Position Deviation

When the injection starts, the program will take samples from the
current screw position and compare it with the upper and lower limits
Cause
of the injection start position on the monitor I screen. If it exceeds
the range, the machine will raise the alarm and stop injection.

The alarm lamp lights. The cycle stops and the bad piece signal will
Influence
appear according to the settings on the monitoring screen.

Reset On the premise that the upper and lower deviation values of the
injection start position are correctly set, the appearance of this alarm

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-17
 Volume 3 Operation manual
means that deviation of the charge end position or the after-charge
suckback end position occurs, which causes the deviation of the
injection start position. Please check the relative parameter settings
of charge and suckback. If necessary, check the oil-way.

ER: Injection End Position Deviation

5
Cause The pressure holding end position exceeds the limit range.

The alarm lamp lights. The cycle stops and the bad piece signal will

52
Influence
appear according to the settings on the monitoring screen.

On the premise that the upper and lower deviation values of the
injection end position are correctly set, the appearance of this alarm

61
Reset means that deviation of the pressure holding end position occurs.
Please check the relative parameter settings of injection pressure
holding. If necessary, check the oil-way.

70
ER: Injection Time Deviation

The accumulative time from injection start to pressure holding end

04
Cause exceeds the upper and lower deviation values of the injection
monitoring time on the monitor I screen.

The alarm lamp lights. After the pressure holding finishes, the
Influence charging is not performed. After the cooling time, open the mold to
07

the end, do ejection and do not continue the next cycle.

On the premise that the upper and lower deviation values of the
injection monitoring are correctly set, the appearance of this alarm
22

Reset may mean that the entire system of injection is not stable. If you are
not able to solve this problem, please contact the service department
of Haitian.
20

ER: Mold Close Protection Failure

The actual low-pressure mold protection time exceeds the set low-
Cause
pressure mold protection monitoring time.

The alarm lamp lights. The cycle stops and the bad piece signal will
Influence
appear according to the settings on the monitoring screen.

The mold height is not adjusted well, so the low-pressure mold

Reset protection cannot be completed and please readjust the mold height;
there are foreign matters inside the mold, so the low-pressure mold
protection cannot be completed and please check if there are foreign

3.7-18 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
matters in the cavity; the pressure and flow rate of the low-pressure
mold protection are set too low, so the low-pressure clamping force
is not strong enough and the low-pressure clamping cannot be
completed. Please adjust the set value of the pressure and flow rate
of low-pressure mold protection within a proper range.

ER: Suckback End Set Position Not Reached

5
Cause The actual suckback time exceeds the set suckback monitoring time.

52
The alarm lamp lights. In the manual state, all the actions stop
immediately and the alarm light blinks. The cycle stops and the bad
Influence
piece signal will appear according to the settings on the monitoring
screen in the auto status.

61
The pressure and the flow rate of suckback are set too low, so the
suckback power is not enough and please readjust the pressure and
Reset
flow rate of suckback; the suck back end position is set improperly,
so please readjust the suckback end position.
70
ER: Mold Opening Amount Reached
04
The accumulative amount of mold opening reaches the set value on
Cause
the production screen.

Influence The alarm lamp lights. The machine stops running after this mold.
07

Enter the PM-Production screen and set the total mold opening
Reset
amount to zero.
22

ER: Mold Opening Packaging Amount Reached

The accumulative packaging amount exceeds the preset value.

20

Cause

Influence The alarm lamp blinks but the machine will continue the next mold.

Enter the PM-Production screen and set the total amount of

Reset
packaging to zero.

ER: Number Of Bad Piece Reached

The accumulative number of bad pieces has reached the set upper
Cause
limit.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-19
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Actions stop and the production of the next mold cannot be

Influence
continued.

Clear the actual number of bad pieces and check items of bad piece
Reset
monitoring and alarm.

ER: Continuous Bad Piece Number Reached

5
Cause The continuous bad piece number has reached the set upper limit.

52
Actions stop and the production of the next mold cannot be
Influence
continued.

61
Check items of bad piece monitoring and alarm and clear
Reset
automatically after normal production.

70
ER: Mold Open End Position Deviation

The actual mold open end deviates from the set upper and lower
Cause
deviation value on the monitor I screen.
04
The alarm lamp lights. In the manual state, actions stop immediately
and the alarm lamp blinks. The cycle stops and the bad piece
Influence
signal will appear according to the settings on the monitoring screen
in the auto status.
07

Adjust relative parameters of mold open to make the position of the

movable platen within the set upper and lower deviation values on
Reset
the monitor I screen after mold opening. If necessary, change the set
22

value of the effective zone under the guidance of engineering staff.

Robot:
20

ER: Robot Emergency Stop

When the robot is used, the emergency stop button of the robot is
Cause
pressed.

Influence The alarm lamp lights and the motor stops.

Release the emergency stop button of the robot while ensuring

Reset
safety.

3.7-20 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Cycle Start

The injection molding machine does not receive the robot cycle start
Cause
signal.

Influence Cannot do the next cycle.

Check the corresponding input signal according to specific alarm.

5
Reset
Check the robot and the electrical circuit related to the controller.

52
ER: Wait For Robot—Mold Zone Safe

61
When the robot is selected to use but it does not send the injection
molding machine the confirmation signal, the injection molding
Cause machine will be not able to do corresponding actions and raise the
“wait for robot-mold zone safe” alarm to inform the operator of
checking the corresponding input signal.
70
Influence Cannot do the mold opening and closing and raise the alarm.

Check the corresponding input signal according to specific alarm.

04
Reset
Check the robot and the electrical circuit related to the controller.
07

ER: Wait For Robot—Mold Close Enable

When the robot is selected to use but it does not send the injection
molding machine the confirmation signal, the injection molding
machine will be not able to do corresponding actions and raise the
22

Cause
“wait for robot-mold close enable” alarm to inform the operator of
checking the corresponding input signal.

If the injection molding machine does not detect the mold close
20

enable signal when preparing to close the mold, it cannot close the
mold and has to wait, and will sound the alarm if not receiving the
Influence signal within 20 seconds. If receiving the signal, the alarm will
disappear and the machine will continue the cycle.
The alarm will be raised and operation will be stopped if the signal
disappears during mold close.

Check the corresponding input signal according to specific alarm.

Reset
Check the robot and the electrical circuit related to the controller.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-21
 Volume 3 Operation manual

ER: Wait For Robot—Mold Open Enable

When the robot is selected to use but it does not send the injection
molding machine the confirmation signal, the injection molding
Cause machine will be not able to do corresponding actions and raise the
“wait for robot-mold open enable” alarm to inform the operator of
checking the corresponding input signal.

5
Influence The alarm lamp lights and the mold opening cannot be performed.

52
Check the corresponding input signal according to specific alarm.
Reset
Check the robot and the electrical circuit related to the controller.

61
ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Eject Forward Safe

When the robot is selected to use but it does not send the injection
molding machine the confirmation signal, the injection molding
70
Cause machine will be not able to do corresponding actions and raise the
“wait for robot-ROB eject forward safe” alarm to inform the operator
of checking the corresponding input signal.
04
Influence Cannot do the eject forward action and raise the alarm.

Check the corresponding input signal according to specific alarm.

Reset
Check the robot and the electrical circuit related to the controller.
07

ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Eject Backward Safe

22

When the robot is selected to use but it does not send the injection
molding machine the confirmation signal, the injection molding
Cause machine will be not able to do corresponding actions and raise the
“wait for robot-ROB eject backward safe” alarm to inform the
20

operator of checking the corresponding input signal.

Influence Cannot do the eject backward action and raise the alarm.

Check the corresponding input signal according to specific alarm.

Reset
Check the robot and the electrical circuit related to the controller.

ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Core Forward Enable

Cause When the robot is selected to use but it does not send the injection
molding machine the confirmation signal, the injection molding

3.7-22 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
machine will be not able to do corresponding actions and raise the
“wait for robot-ROB core forward enable” alarm to inform the
operator of checking the corresponding input signal.

Influence Cannot do the core forward action and raise the alarm.

Check the corresponding input signal according to specific alarm.

Reset
Check the robot and the electrical circuit related to the controller.

5
52
ER: Wait For Robot—ROB Core Backward Enable

When the robot is selected to use but it does not send the injection
molding machine the confirmation signal, the injection molding

61
Cause machine will be not able to do corresponding actions and raise the
“wait for robot-ROB core backward enable” alarm to inform the
operator of checking the corresponding input signal.

Influence Cannot do the core backward action and raise the alarm.
70
Check the corresponding input signal according to specific alarm.
Reset
Check the robot and the electrical circuit related to the controller.
04

ER: Wait For Robot Eject Enable

07

When passing the eject middle point after using the robot eject
Cause
middle function, the keep eject enable signal disappears.

Influence The alarm lamp lights and the eject action stops.
22

Reset Check the electrical circuit of the robot.

Spacing check:
20

ER: Mold Open Set Position Not Reached

The machine will check if the position of the current movable platen
Cause is within the effective zone of the mold open position during eject and
will raise the alarm if not.

Influence The alarm lamp lights. Stop the ejection and cannot do tie bar action.

Adjust the parameters related to mold opening to make the position

Reset of the movable platen within the effective zone of mold opening when
mold opening finishes. If necessary, change the set value of the

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-23
 Volume 3 Operation manual
effective zone with the guidance of engineering staff.

ER: Eject Set Position Not Reached

The machine will check if the eject reaches the set position during
Cause
mold closing and core action and will raise the alarm if not.

5
Influence Prohibit mold closing and core forward.

52
Enter the mold adjust mode and press the eject button. Check the
Reset
eject position transducer and the limit switch of eject end.

61
ER: Mold Adjust End Reached

The machine will raise the alarm and stop the action if the mold
adjust forward end switch is pressed during mold adjust forward;
70
Cause If the mold adjust backward end switch is pressed during the mold
adjust backward action, the machine will raise the alarm and stop
the action.
04
Influence Restrict mold adjust forward/backward.

Do the reverse mold adjust action to make the pressed switch not
Reset
move.
07

ER: Mold Adjust Sensor Failure

22

The machine will raise the alarm if the mold adjust sensor is not
Cause correctly sensed in the auto mold adjust state and during mold adjust
forward or mold adjust backward.
20

Influence Press the manual button to eliminate and cannot do other actions.

Please check the mold adjust ring gear to see if it gets stuck with
foreign matters, so that the mold adjust forward and backward
Reset cannot be performed normally;
Please adjust the installation position or the sensing distance of the
mold adjust sensor to make the mold adjust sensor correctly sensed.

ER: Mold Not Eject Backward

3.7-24 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

The machine will check constantly if the mold goes backward to the
Cause safe position during mold closing and will raise the alarm if it does
go backward to the end.

Influence Stop closing the mold.

Check if the mold backward end is confirmed.

Reset

5
Check the relative electrical circuit.

52
ER: Mold Not Backward End

The ejector of the fixed mold does not go backward to the end during
Cause
mold closing.

61
Influence Stop closing the mold.

Check if the ejector of the fixed mold goes backward to end.

70
Reset
Check the relative electrical circuit.
04
ER: Core Status Abnormal

When choosing travel control for the core, both limit switches of core
Cause
forward end and core backward end can be sensed.
07

Influence The alarm lamp lights and relative actions stop.

Check the status of the core to see if it is at the safe position.

Reset
22

Check the electrical circuit connection.

ER: Core A Forward Set Position Not Reached

20

The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold
Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;

Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.

Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of

Reset cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-25
 Volume 3 Operation manual
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.

5
ER: Core B Forward Set Position Not Reached

52
The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold
Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it

61
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;

Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.
70
Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of
cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
04
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
Reset
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
07

back to the safe position through the manual operation button.

Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.
22

ER: Core C Forward Set Position Not Reached

The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
20

(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold

Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;

Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.

Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of

cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
Reset or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach

3.7-26 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.

ER: Core D Forward Set Position Not Reached

5
The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position

52
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold
Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;

61
Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.

Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of

70
cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
Reset
04
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
07

ensuring mold safety.

ER: Core E Forward Set Position Not Reached

22

The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold
Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it
20

will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;

Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.

Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of

cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
Reset interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-27
 Volume 3 Operation manual
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.

ER: Core F Forward Set Position Not Reached

5
The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold
Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it

52
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;

Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.

61
Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of
cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
70
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
Reset
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
04
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.
07

ER: Core A Backward Set Position Not Reached

22

The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold
Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;
20

Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.

Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of

cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
Reset safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.

3.7-28 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.

ER: Core B Backward Set Position Not Reached

The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold

5
Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;

52
Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.

Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of

61
cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
Reset
70
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.
04
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.
07

ER: Core C Backward Set Position Not Reached

The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold
22

Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;

Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.
20

Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of

cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
Reset
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-29
 Volume 3 Operation manual

ER: Core D Backward Set Position Not Reached

The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold
Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;

5
Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.

52
Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of
cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s

61
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
Reset
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
70
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.
04

ER: Core E Backward Set Position Not Reached

07

The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold
Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;
22

Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.

Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of

20

cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2

or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
Reset
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.

3.7-30 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

ER: Core F Backward Set Position Not Reached

The machine will check if all groups of cores are at the safe position
(forward end or backward end) during ejector or mold
Cause opening/closing. If it finds that the core is not at the safe position, it
will raise the alarm: Core X Forward Set Position Not Reached or
Core X Backward Set Position Not Reached;

5
Influence The alarm lamp lights. Restrict mold opening/closing and ejector.

52
Enter the manual state and operate the corresponding group of
cores to reach the safe position according to the alarm. Notice: If 2
or more groups of cores are selected to use, these cores will be
interlocked in the manual state, which is: Core A will check Core B’s
safety position while moving and Core B will also check Core A’s

61
safety position while moving, so it will be hard for the cores to reach
Reset
the safe position. Enter the rough mold adjust state while ensuring
safety and the program will unlock the interlocking among all groups
of cores in the state of rough mold adjust, so as to make the cores
70
back to the safe position through the manual operation button.
Remember: Operation of all cores must be done on the premise of
ensuring mold safety.

Oil level check:

04

ER: Lubrication Oil Level Deviation

07

The lubrication oil level is lower than the lower limit. This function is
Cause
currently used for thin oil lubricated machines.

Influence The alarm lamp lights and the current group lubrication stops.
22

Check the lubrication oil level. If it is below the lower limit, add the
Reset lubrication oil. If the oil level is normal, check the relative electrical
circuit.
20

ER: Group 2 Lubrication Oil Level Deviation

Cause The group 2 lubrication oil level is lower than the lower limit.

Influence The alarm lamp lights and the current lubrication stops.

Reset If the oil level is normal, check the relative electrical circuit.

ER: Lubrication Detection Failure

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-31
 Volume 3 Operation manual

If the program does not detect the feedback signal of the lubrication
Cause pressure relay during lubrication and lubrication alarm timing, the
machine will raise the alarm after the lubrication alarm timing.

Influence Restrict mold closing and stop the current action.

The lubrication oil is not enough, so please add lubrication oil;

The lubrication pressure relay or the lubrication pipeline breaks

5
down, so the program cannot receive the feedback signal. Please
Reset check the lubrication circuit;

52
The lubrication detection electrical hardware circuit becomes
abnormal, so the program cannot receive the feedback signal.
Please check the lubrication detection electrical hardware circuit.

61
ER: Group 2 Lubrication Detection Failure

If the program does not detect the feedback signal of the group 2
70
lubrication pressure relay during group 2 lubrication and lubrication
Cause
alarm timing, the machine will raise the alarm after the lubrication
alarm timing.
04
Influence Restrict mold closing and stop the current action.

The lubrication oil is not enough, so please add lubrication oil;

The lubrication pressure relay or the lubrication pipeline breaks
07

down, so the program cannot receive the feedback signal. Please

Reset check the lubrication circuit;
The lubrication detection electrical hardware circuit becomes
abnormal, so the program cannot receive the feedback signal.
22

Please check the lubrication detection electrical hardware circuit.

ER: Group 3 Lubrication Detection Failure

20

If the program does not detect the feedback signal of the group 2
lubrication pressure relay during group 3 lubrication and lubrication
Cause
alarm timing, the machine will raise the alarm after the lubrication
alarm timing.

Influence Restrict mold closing and stop the current action.

The lubrication oil is not enough, so please add lubrication oil;

Reset
The lubrication pressure relay or the lubrication pipeline breaks
down, so the program cannot receive the feedback signal. Please

3.7-32 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
check the lubrication circuit;
The lubrication detection electrical hardware circuit becomes
abnormal, so the program cannot receive the feedback signal.
Please check the lubrication detection electrical hardware circuit.

ER: Mold Adjust Lubrication Failure

5
If the program does not detect the feedback signal of the lubrication
pressure relay during mold adjust lubrication and lubrication alarm

52
Cause
timing, the machine will raise the alarm after the lubrication alarm
timing.

Influence Warn of mold adjust lubrication failure.

61
The lubrication oil is not enough, so please add lubrication oil;
The lubrication pressure relay or the lubrication pipeline breaks
down, so the program cannot receive the feedback signal. Please
Reset 70
check the lubrication circuit;
The lubrication detection electrical hardware circuit becomes
abnormal, so the program cannot receive the feedback signal.
Please check the lubrication detection electrical hardware circuit.
04

ER: Oil Amount Detection Failure

07

Cause The oil pressure and oil level is below the lower limit.

The alarm lamp lights. Restrict any action, stop the motor after the
Influence abnormal signal lasts for 10 seconds, and do not switch the
22

operation mode.

Check the oil level in the oil tank. If it is below the lower limit, add the
hydraulic oil. If it is at a normal level, check the relative electrical
Reset circuit.
20

The alarm will disappear if the signal returns to normal.

ER: Filter Screen Check Failure

Cause The hydraulic oil filter screen is clogged up.

Influence Restrict any action.

Reset Please clean the hydraulic oil filter screen. If there is nothing wrong
with the filter screen, check the electrical hardware circuit related to

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-33
 Volume 3 Operation manual
it.

ER: Oil Filter Screen#0Check Failure

Cause The hydraulic oil filter screen is clogged up.

Influence Inform of oil filter screen#0 check failure.

5
Please clean the hydraulic oil filter screen. If there is nothing wrong

52
with the filter screen, check the electrical hardware circuit related to
Reset it.
It can be reset if there is any signal.

61
ER: High-pressure Filter Screen Abnormal

The high-pressure filter screen has no signal during injection and is

Cause
clogged up. 70
Influence Warn that the high-pressure filter screen is abnormal.

Please clean the hydraulic oil filter screen. If there is nothing wrong
04
Reset with the filter screen, check the electrical hardware circuit related to
it.

Power:
07

ER: Servo Controller Abnormal

Cause The servo controller becomes abnormal after the motor starts.
22

Influence Check when the motor is on and prohibit all actions.

Reset Check the servo driver and the fault code, and solve the problem.
20

ER: Motor Overloaded

Cause The motor overloaded input point has an input signal.

Do not turn on the motor during cycle check. If the motor is on, turn
Influence
off the motor.

Check the servo driver and the motor.

Reset
Check the relative electrical circuit.

3.7-34 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

ER：Motor Start Failure

The motor start done input point has no signal during start-up of the
Cause
motor.

Influence The motor cannot be turned on.

5
Check the servo driver and the motor.
Reset

52
Check the relative electrical circuit.

ER：Motor Closed

61
Cause The motor start done input point has no signal when the motor is on.

Influence Turn off the motor.

Reset
70
Check the servo driver and the motor.
Check the relative electrical circuit.
04
ER: Driver Temperature Abnormal

The temperature of the driver exceeds the set upper limit after the
07

Cause
motor starts.

Influence Check when the motor is on and prohibit all actions.

22

Check the servo driver to see if the temperature of the driver is

Reset
normal.
20

ER: Electric Heating Motor Not Start

The machine will raise the alarm and prohibit entering the auto state
Cause if the electric heating motor does not start when entering the auto
state.

Influence Cannot enter the auto mode.

Reset Turn on electric heating and the motor in the manual state.

Others:

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-35
 Volume 3 Operation manual

ER: Entering Auto Prohibited

The entering auto prohibited input point has no signal when entering
Cause
the auto state.

Inform that entering the auto state is prohibited and switch back to
Influence
the manual state.

5
Reset Check the relative electrical circuit and hardware.

52
ER: Pilot Oil Accumulator Failure

1 Check the pressure of the pilot oil accumulator constantly in the

61
state of semi-auto, full-auto, auto mold adjust or auto purge, and the
pilot oil pressure detection point signal will be off after it continues
for 2 seconds.
2 Check the pressure when shifting the manual mode to the semi-
70
Cause
auto, full-auto, auto mold adjust or auto purge, and the pilot oil
pressure detection point signal will be off.
3 Press the keys of other actions except the motor switch, electric
heating switch and the lubrication key, the energy accumulation time
04
exceeds 6 seconds.

Warn of “pilot oil accumulator failure” and do not allow shifting the
Influence
operation mode.
07

Reset Check the accumulator and the relative electrical circuit.

22

ER: Cavity Pressure Abnormal

The detected value of the cavity pressure sensor during injection

Cause
exceeds the set cavity safety pressure.
20

Influence Warn of “cavity pressure abnormal” and stop injection.

Reset Check the cavity pressure sensor and the relative electrical circuit.

ER: Input Mold Adjust Tonnage 1

If there is a clamping pressure sensor, the machine will prompt you

Cause to input mold adjust tonnage 1 before correction of the clamping
pressure sensor.

3.7-36 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual

Influence Inform of inputting mold adjust tonnage 1.

Input the currently actual mold closing tonnage (generally, 50% of

Reset the maximum mold closing tonnage of the machine), press the OK
button and then the program will continue to start auto mold adjust.

ER: Input Mold Adjust Tonnage 2

5
If there is a clamping pressure sensor, the machine will prompt you

52
Cause to input mold adjust tonnage 2 before correction of the clamping
pressure sensor.

Influence Inform of inputting mold adjust tonnage 2.

61
Input the currently actual mold closing tonnage (generally, the
Reset maximum mold closing tonnage of the machine), press the OK
button and finish correction.
70
ER: Core Valve Pressure Release End, Press Manual Button To
Stop Pressure Release
04
Press the auto mode button or other manual action buttons except
the motor on button, the electric heating on/off button, emergency
Cause
stop button, automatic door on/off button (including the front door
and the rear door).
07

Influence Prohibit any action.

Press the manual button to stop pressure release and do the

Reset
22

subsequent actions.

ER: Fluid Injection Emergency Stop

20

Cause The fluid injection emergency stop does not detect any input signal.

Influence The auto state will switch to the manual state and prohibit any action.

Reset Check the injection unit and the relative electrical circuit.

ER: Fluid Injection Abnormal

Cause In the auto state, the machine will check if there is an input impulse
signal for 30 seconds when the mold opening/closing starts and will

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-37
 Volume 3 Operation manual
warn of fluid injection abnormal if there is no such signal. In the
manual state, the machine will check if there is an input impulse
signal as soon as the mold opening/closing starts and will warn of
fluid injection abnormal if there is no such signal

Influence Prohibit mold opening and closing.

Reset Check the relative electrical circuit.

5
ER: Clamping Force Deviation

52
The machine is equipped with the clamping force sensor. The
machine will raise the alarm if the actual clamping force detected by
Cause
the clamping force sensor after high-pressure mold clamping is

61
beyond the enabled range of clamping force set on the screen.

Influence The alarm lamp lights and needs to be disabled manually.

Reset
70
Readjust the clamping force, automatically or manually.

ER: Hopper Sensor Detection Failure

04
Open the mold to the end in the full-auto state of sensor. The
Cause machine will raise the alarm if the hopper detection sensor does not
find any product dropping within 6 seconds after eject.
07

Influence The alarm lamp lights and stop the action after finishing this mold.

First check if there are products dropping. If there are, adjust the
Reset
22

position of the hopper sensor and check the hopper sensor circuit.

ER: Poor Position Settings

20

Cause The input part of the controller hardware A/D becomes abnormal.

Influence The alarm lamp lights and any action is restricted.

Reset Check the input part of the controller hardware A/D.

ER: Poor Position Detection

Cause The corresponding channel of the position transducer has no input

3.7-38 EN-MA_55_3354
 Volume 3 Operation manual
signal..

Influence The alarm lamp lights and any action is restricted.

Reset Check the input part of the controller hardware A/D.

ER: Complete Auto Mold Adjust

5
Cause The prompt will appear when the auto mold adjust is completed.

52
Influence The alarm lamp lights.

Reset Press the manual button to make the prompt disappear.

61
ER: Cooling Source Pressure Too Low

Cause
70
The cooling water level is too low.

Influence Inform that the pressure of the cooling source is too low.
04
Check the cooling water level.
Reset
Check the relative electrical circuit.
07

ER: External Storage Device Not Ready

When the panel communicates with the external storage device, the
Cause
external storage device is not connected.
22

Influence Inform that the external storage device is not ready.

Check the external storage device and ensure normal use of the
20

Reset external storage device.

Check the interface.

EN-MA_55_3354 3.7-39
 Volume 3 Operation manual
Attention：
Considering that users may have different requirements for different functions, not all
machines are equipped with the functions that described in specification. Please take the
actual machine as the criterion.

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

3.7-40 EN-MA_55_3354
 5
52
Volume 4
61
70
Technical Manual
04
07

MA4700III
22
20
20
22
07
04
70
61
52
5
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

Table of Contents

4.1 Machine parameters ··································································4.1-1

5
4.2 Mechanical Drawings ·································································4.2-1

52
4.3 Hydraulic drawing ·····································································4.3-1

4.4 Electrical drawing ······································································4.4-1

61
70
04
07
22
20

EN-MA4700III 1
20
22
07
04
70
61
52
5
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.1 Machine parameters

5
4.1.1 Data Sheet ·············································································4.1-2

52
4.1.2 Mould Mounting Dimensions······················································4.1-3

4.1.3 Machine Dimensions & Installation Plan ·······································4.1-4

61
4.1.4 Machine Mat Diagram ······························································4.1-5

4.1.5 Clamp Unit Cable Suspension Diagram ·······································4.1-6

70
4.1.6 Injection Unit Cable Suspension Diagram·····································4.1-7

4.1.7 Machine Outline Diagram··························································4.1-8

04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2021-05-25 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2021-05-25

EN-MA4700III 4.1-1
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.1.1 Data Sheet:

A B C D
Screw Diameter mm 70 80 85 90
Calculated Injection Volume (Theory) cm 3 1424 1860 2100 2354
Injection Capacity (PS) g 1296 1692 1911 2142
Injection speed rate

5
g/s 427 558 630 706
Plasticization Capacity（GPPS） g/s 67.9 89.5 98.3 111.1

52
Plasticization Capacity（HDPE） g/s 97.2 131 148 170
Injection Pressure MPa 224 172 152 136
Injection Stroke mm 370
Screw Speed r/min 0-210

61
Heating Input Power kW 32.15
Clamping Force kN 4700
Space Between Tie-Bars (HXV) mm 820×800
Die-Height Available (Max.)
Die-Height Available (Min.)
70 mm
mm
780
320
Mold Opening Stroke mm 780
Open Daylight (Max.)
04
mm 1560
Ejector Stroke mm 200
Ejector Force kN 110
Ejector Holes Number PC 17
07

Pump Motor Power kW 65

Oil tank Capacity l 640
Machine Dimension (LXWXH) m 8.22x1.96x2.55
22

Total Machine Weight (approx.) t 19.6

Minimal Mold Dimension (LXW) mm 580×560
≥320—400mm μm 80
Die Die μm
＞400—630mm 100
20

parallelism height
＞630—780mm μm 120

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2021-05-25 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2021-05-25

4.1-2 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.1.2 Mould Mounting Dimensions 600

50

5
Ф4
Ф160

52
SR15

61
780 320～780
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2021-05-25 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2021-05-25

EN-MA4700III 4.1-3
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.1.3 Machine Dimensions &Installation Plan

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Note:
A：Mould Installation Surface on the Fixed Platen

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2021-05-25 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2021-05-25

4.1-4 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.1.4 Machine Mat Diagram

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2021-05-25 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2021-05-25

EN-MA4700III 4.1-5
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.1.5 Clamp Unit Cable Suspension Diagram

5
13.8T

52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Note: 1. Before the machine is lifted, make adjustment first so as to ensure smooth
lifting.
2. Entangle the cast lifting lug of the fixed platen and the back platen with the
wire rope, and then lift the machine via such four points.

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2021-05-25 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2021-05-25

4.1-6 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.1.6 Injection Unit Cable Suspension Diagram

5.8T

5
52
61
70
04
07
22

Note:
20

1. Before the machine is lifted, make adjustment first so as to ensure smooth lifting.
2. The transition block for shipment and the stopper are only used for lifting and
transportation and shall be assembled in sequence as shown in Figure A prior to lifting.
3. Use the wire rope to entangle the four ends of the machine body, and then lift the
machine via such four points.
4. Before installing and testing the machine in place, be sure to remove such transition
block for shipment and stopper.

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2021-05-25 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2021-05-25

EN-MA4700III 4.1-7
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.1.7 Machine Outline Diagram

Safety door
Alarm (operating side) Operating panel Nozzle cover Hopper

5
52
61
70
Product out gate Electric cabinet Power switch
04
Front view
07

Oil level
22

Oil entrance

Grounding Oil tank

20

Side view

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2021-05-25 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2021-05-25

4.1-8 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.2 Mechanical Drawings

4.2.1 Clamping Unit ............................................................................................4.2-2

4.2.1.1 Movable platen base module ............................................................4.2-3

5
4.2.1.2 Ejector cylinder module.....................................................................4.2-4

52
4.2.1.3 Ejection cylinder ................................................................................4.2-5

4.2.1.4 Clamping cylinder module.................................................................4.2-6

61
4.2.1.5 Mold height adjustment module ........................................................4.2-7

4.2.1.6 Toggle linkage module ......................................................................4.2-9

70
4.2.1.7 Mechanical Safety module (OPTIONAL) ........................................ 4.2-11

4.2.2 Injection Unit ............................................................................................4.2-12

04
4.2.2.1 Carriage cylinder module ................................................................4.2-14

4.2.2.2 Injection cylinder module ................................................................4.2-15

07

4.2.2.3 Charging module ............................................................................4.2-18

4.2.2.4 Plasticizing unit ...............................................................................4.2-19

22

4.2.2.5 Schematic diagram for nozzle .........................................................4.2-22

20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-1
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.2.1 Clamping Unit

5
52
61
List of Clamping Unit

No.
1
Description
Fixed platen
70Specification
MA4700Ⅲ-02-54TB
Qty
1
2 Movable platen MA4700Ⅲ-02-56TB 1
04
Movable platen base
3 See 4.2.1.1 2
module
Ejector cylinder
4 See 4.2.1.2 1
module
07

5 Ejector cylinder See 4.2.1.3 1

6 Tie bar PA4700-02-63C 4
7 Back platen MA4700Ⅲ-02-76 1
22

8 Copper block MA2800Ⅱ-02-26-01A 2

Clamping cylinder
9 See 4.2.1.4 1
module
20

Mold height
10 See 4.2.1.5 1
adjustment module
11 Toggle linkage module See 4.2.1.6 1

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-2 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.2.1.1 Movable platen base module

5
52
61
70
04

List of movable platen base module

No. Description Specification Qty

07

Movable platen base upper

1 HTWA380-02-26-02 2
wedge
2 Spring washer 8 8
Socket head cap screw
22

3 M8×40 8
4 Cylindrical pin 10×20 4
Movable platen base lower
5 HTWA380-02-26-01 4
wedge
20

6 Gliding block HTWA380-02-26-03A 4

7 Felt δ4 0.011
8 Base seal holder HTF360X-02-26-03 4
9 Socket head cap screw M6X16 8
Hexagon socket set screw
10 M12×50 4
with flat point
11 Flat washer 10（φ20×φ10.5×2） 8
12 Socket head cap screw M10×55 8

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-3
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.2.1.2 Ejector cylinder module

5
52
61
70
04
List of ejector cylinder module

No. Description Specification Qty

07

1 Plug HTF532W-02-30-16 1
2 Auxiliary ejector pin HTF470W-02-30-12 4
3 Spring washer 20 6
4 Socket head cap screw M20×55 4
22

5 Ejector cylinder 1
6 Socket head cap screw M16×50 6
7 Spring washer 16 7
8 Ejector guide plate HTF470W-02-30-09A 1
20

9 Nut HTF451W-02-30-08 2
10 Ejector connector HTF451W-02-30-17 1
11 Auxiliary ejector pin HTF451W-02-30-11 6
12 Center ejector pin HTF451W-02-30-10 1
13 Socket head cap screw M6×35 2

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-4 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual
4.2.1.3 Ejector cylinder

5
52
61
List of ejector cylinder
No. Description Specification Qty
1
2
Ejector piston
Piston ring
70
JU5501Ⅱ-02-30-04
OE090008300211D
1
1
3 Guide tape (PARKER) F3000005225097A270mm 2
Hexagon socket set screw with
04
4 M6×12 3
cone point
O ring 82.14×3.53 2
5
Snap ring BH2700900-PT00 2
07

6 Spring washer 16 4
7 Hexagon nut M16 4
8 Tie bar of ejector cylinder MA3800p-02-30-01 4
Angle coupling 2D9-30 1
9
22

Straight bite type fittings 1DM-30-27WD 1

10 Rear cover of ejector cylinder MA3800ⅡS-02-30-02 1
11 O ring 37.69×3.53 1
12 Ejector cylinder tube MA4700ⅡS-02-30-03 1
20

Head cover copper bushing of

13 MA3800ⅡS-02-35-02 1
ejector cylinder
14 Head cover of ejector cylinder MA3800ⅡS-02-30-05 1
15 Y type seal ring RUJ000450-Z20 1
16 Wiper ring DH45 1
17 Ejector piston rod MA4700IIS-02-30-07 1

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-5
 Volume 4 Technical Manual
4.2.1.4 Clamping cylinder module

5
52
List of clamping cylinder module

61
No. Description Specification Qty
1 Thrust bearing PA4700-02-24 1
2 Spacer HTF530-02-85 1
3 Circlip for bore 95
70 1
4 Head cover of clamping cylinder MA4700IIS-02-01-09 1
5 Spring washer 20 4
6 Socket head cap screw M20×90-12.9 4
04
7 Rear cover of clamping cylinder MA4700IIS-02-01-02 1
8 Hexagon nut M20 8
9 Tie bar of clamping cylinder MA4700IIS-02-01-01 4
10 Clamping cylinder tube MA4700IIS-02-01-06 1
07

O ring 107.54X3.53 2
11
Snap ring, cut (Trelleborg) BH2701150-PT00 2
12 Toggle piston MA5300IIS-02-01-04 1
Guide tape (Trelleborg)
22

13 GP7301150-T47 2
14 Piston ring (Trelleborg) PW4301150-Z20N 1
15 O ring 44.04×3.53 1
Head cover cushion of clamping
16 MA4700IIS-02-17-02 1
20

cylinder
17 Y type seal ring RUJ00075-Z20 1
Head cover bushing of clamping
18 MA4700IIS-02-18-02 1
cylinder
19 Wiper ring WDJ300750-Z201 1
20 Toggle bar nut HTF530-02-25 1
21 Toggle piston rod MA4700IIS-02-01-05 1

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-6 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.2.1.5 Mold height adjustment module

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-7
 Volume 4 Technical Manual
List of mold height adjustment module

No. Description Specification Qty

1 Tie rod cover MA4700Ⅱ-02-07C 4
2 Socket head cap screw M20×190-10.9 12
3 Spring washer 20 12
4 Tie rod holder HTFA450X-02-13A 4

5
5 Tie rod holder strut HTW380-02-19 12
6 Tie rod nut washer HTFA450X-02-15b 4

52
7 Tie rod nut HTFA450X-02-14B 4
8 Tie rod nut washer MA4700ⅡS-02-15a 4
Hexagonal socket
9 M6×20-12.9 16
countersink screw

61
Taper pins with internal
10 A8×100 2
thread
11 Socket head cap screw M16×95 4
12 Hydraulic motor housing T-02-77-02 1

13
Hexagon socket set screw
with cone point
M8×10
70 1
Mold height adjustment
14 T-02-78-02 1
motor gear
04
15 Hydraulic motor (WHITE) 255320A1212ZAAAA 1
16 Spring washer 12 4
17 Socket head cap screw M12×35 4
Mold height adjustment
07

18 MA4700Ⅲ-02-09 1
gear
19 Retaining pin T-02-10-02 4
Single row angular ball
20 80308 4
bearing
22

21 Locating pin washer T-02-08-01 4

22 Spring washer 16 8
23 Socket head cap screw M16×150 4
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-8 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.2.1.6 Toggle linkage module

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-9
 Volume 4 Technical Manual
List of toggle linkage module

No. Description Specification Qty

1 Movable platen MA4700Ⅲ-02-56TB 1
2 Socket head cap screw M10×35 24
Main link pin positioning
HTW680-02-33 2
key
3
Main link pin positioning
HTW680-02-33-01 10

5
key
4 Main link pin PA4700-02-68 6

52
Graphite steel bushing PA4700-02-70 10
5
Graphite copper bushing MA4700Ⅱ-02-70-01 2
6 Front link PA4700-02-61 4
Rear link PA4700-02-65a 2
7
Rear link PA4700-02-65c 2

61
8 Rear link PA4700-02-65b 4
9 Sub link PA4700-02-23B 4
10 Back platen MA4700Ⅲ-02-76 1
11 Socket head cap screw M12×40
70 8
12 Spring washer 12 8
13 Locking plug HTFA450X-02-25 2
14 Thrust bearing PA4700-02-24 1
15 Cross head link pin PA4700-02-83a 2
04
16 Socket head cap screw M8×30 16
17 Spring washer 8 16
Cross head link pin
18 HTF630-02-22A 8
positioning key
19 Graphite steel bushing PA4700-02-82 8
07

20 Cross head link pin PA4700-02-83b 2

21 Graphite copper bushing PA4700-02-90 2
22 Rear link spacer ring PA4700-02-65-01b 4
23 Rear link spacer ring PA4700-02-65-01a 2
22

24 Cross head guide rod PA4700-02-75A 2

20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-10 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual
4.2.1.7 Mechanical Safety module(OPTIONAL)

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-11
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.2.2 Injection Unit

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-12 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

List of injection unit

No. Description Specification Qty

Auxiliary linear rolling
1 LGD35AL2PA4L1960ⅡZWND 2
guide
Rear bracket of linear
2 MA4700Ⅲ/3200-01-15-03 1
guide

5
3 Injection rod nut MA5300ⅡS-01-68A 2
4 Linear guide holder MA4700Ⅲ/3200-01-15-01 1

52
5 Barrel nut T-01-11-07 1
6 Splash jacket module PA4700-01-12-01-00 1
Front bracket of linear
7 JU5500III-01-24-02B 1
guide

61
8 Barrel dust cover MA4700Ⅲ/3200-01-11-05 1
9 Barrel casing MA4700Ⅲ/3200-01-11-01 1
10 Nozzle See Item 1 in 4.2.2.4 1
11 Plasticizing unit See 4.2.2.4
70 1
Carriage connection
12 T-01-40-01 2
base
Carriage connection
13 T-01-41-01 4
base pin
04
14 Carriage piston collar HTF532W-01-50-08 2
Carriage cylinder
15 See 4.2.2.1 2
module
Carriage connection
07

16 T-01-54-01 2
base
17 Screw barrel base MA4700Ⅲ/3200-01-12-01 1
18 Injection module See 4.2.2.2 1
22

19 Charging module See 4.2.2.3 1

Charging motor See 4.3.3 List of Hydraulic
20 1
Components HM1

Note: In the screw barrel module of item 11, only one model is installed on the machine.
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-13
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.2.2.1 Carriage cylinder module

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-14 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

List of carriage cylinder module

No. Description Specification Qty

Rear cover of carriage
1 MA7000ⅡS-01-50-05A 1
cylinder
2 Piston ring F3000005225097A224mm 2
3 Guide tape OE075008300211C 1

5
4 O ring 37.69×3.53 1
O ring 66.27×3.53 2

52
5
Snap ring, uncut XA07500010901XU 2
Head cover of carriage
6 MA7000ⅡS-01-50-06 1
cylinder
7 O ring 55.25×2.62 1

61
8 Wiper ring DH45 1
9 Carriage collar nut T-01-43-01 1
Head cover guide sleeve
10 HTW128-02-01-08A 1
of carriage cylinder 70
11 Carriage cylinder tie bar JU6500IIS-01-50-12A 4
Hexagon nut M16 4
12
Spring washer 16 4
13 Y type seal ring RUJ000450-Z20 1
04
14 Carriage cylinder tube JU5500ⅡS-01-50-01A 1
15 Carriage piston rod JU5500ⅡS-01-50-03 1
16 Carriage piston JU5500IIS-01-50 1
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-15
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.2.2.2 Injection cylinder module

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-16 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

List of injection cylinder module

No. Description Specification Qty

Rear cover of carriage cylinder MA4700ⅡS-01-12-07 1
1
Rear cover of carriage cylinder MA4700ⅡS-01-12-07A 1
O ring 189.87×5.33 2
2
Snap ring XA20000010901XX 2

5
3 Guide tape GP7302000-T47 4
4 T-Ring PT0401800-T46N 2

52
5 O ring 104.37×3.53 2
O ring 189.87×5.33 2
6
Snap ring XA20000010901XX 2
7 Guide tape GR7301120-T47 4

61
8 Stepseal RSK301120-T46N 2
9 Rimseal RR112X127.1X6.3PU 2
10 Wiper ring WDJ301120-Z201 2
11
12
Injection piston rod
Head cover of injection cylinder
70 MA4700ⅡS-01-12-09
MA4700Ⅲ/3200-01-12-06
2
2
13 Injection cylinder tube MA4700ⅡS-01-12-03 2
14 Injection piston MA4700ⅡS-01-76 2
04
15 Hexagon socket set screw with cone point M8×10 2
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-17
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

4.2.2.3 Charging module

5
52
61
70
04
07

List of charging module

No. Description Specification Qty

22

1 Oil seal cover PA4700-01-17 1

2 Coupling PA4700-01-20 1
3 Single-direction thrust ball bearing 51332 1
4 Single row angular ball bearing 1000922 1
20

5 Circlip for shaft 110 1

6 Screw drive base MA4700ⅡS-01-19 1
7 Bearing gland T-01-21-03 1
8 Single row conical roller bearing 2007121 1
9 Rubber oil seal with reinforce WA230X260X15 1

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-18 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual
4.2.2.4 Plasticizing unit

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-19
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

List of plasticizing unit (Only one model is installed on the machine)

No. Description Specification Qty

1 Nozzle PA3800-01-01(ZS) 1
Socket head cap
2 screw M20X120-12.9 16
A End cap HTF470WA-01-02n 1

5
B End cap HTF470WC-01-02n 1
3
C End cap HTF470W-01-02-84n 1

52
D End cap HTF470WD-01-02n 1
4 Front barrel nut HTF470W-01-02-11a 1
A Barrel HTF470WA-01-06aN 1

61
B Barrel HTF470WC-01-06n 1
5
C Barrel HTF470W-01-06-84n 1
D Barrel HTF470WD-01-06n 1
A Screw head T-01-03E-70B 70 1
B Screw head T-01-03E-80B 1
6
C Screw head T-01-03E-85B 1
D Screw head T-01-03E-90B 1
A Collar seat
04
T-01-04E-70B(CT-SK) 1
B Collar seat T-01-04E-80B(470T-CT-SK) 1
7
C Collar seat T-01-04-85ENX(CT-SK) 1
D Collar seat T-01-04E-90B(470T-CT-SK) 1
07

A Screw collar T-01-05E-70B 1

B Screw collar T-01-05E-80B 1
8
C Screw collar T-01-05E-85B 1
D Screw collar T-01-05E-90B 1
22

B Mixing ring T-01-07PM-80(1.3)(DG) 1

9 C Mixing ring T-01-07PM-85(1.3)(DG) 1
D Mixing ring T-01-07PM-90(1.3-DG) 1
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-20 EN-MA4700III
 Volume 4 Technical Manual

List of plasticizing unit (Only one model is installed on the machine)

No. Description Specification Qty

A Screw MA4700ⅡSA-01-07J(JX-DH) 1
B Screw MA4700ⅡSB-01-07J(JX-DH) 1
10
C Screw MA4700ⅡSC-01-07J(JX-DH) 1
D Screw MA4700ⅡSD-01-07J(JX-DH) 1

5
Socket head cap
11 screw M14×40-12.9 2

52
12 Spring washer 14 2
13 Snap semi-ring PA4700A/i-01-15-14A 1
Socket head cap

61
14 screw M16×110-12.9 8
15 Spring washer 16 8
16 Spline joint PA4700A/i-01-15-04B 1
17 Screw washer PA4700/i-01-15-10 1
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

EN-MA4700III 4.2-21
 Volume 4 Technical Manual
4.2.2.5 Schematic diagram for nozzle

5
52
61
70
04
07
22
20

Designed/Date: Zhou Li 2020-08-24 Checked/Date: Pan Lujing 2020-08-24

4.2-22 EN-MA4700III
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5
52
61
4.4 Electrical drawing

70
Machine model MA4700III

4
Company Name HAITIAN

70
Controller TECH 5531

Version No.
0
22
Page 83
20

&AAB/2
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Title page / cover sheet MA4700III Page 1
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Catalog HT_TOC

Page Page description Version No. Date Drawn by

5
&AAA/1 Title page / cover sheet 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&AAB/2 Catalog : &AAA/1 - &EFS=01+C1/33 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

52
&AAB/3 Catalog : &EFS=01+C1/34 - &EFS=08+C3/66 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&AAB/4 Catalog : &EFS=08+C3/67 - &APB/83 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&AAC/5 Specification 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&AAC/6 Specification 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&AAC/7 Specification 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong

61
&ADB/8 Structure identifier overview 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&ADB/9 Structure identifier overview 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&ADB/10 Structure identifier overview 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&MTL/11 Machine outside 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

70
&MTL/12 Heater layout 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&MTL+C1/13 Mounting plate layout 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&MTL+C2/14 Mounting plate layout 2 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&MTL+C3/15 Mounting plate layout 3 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EMX3/16 PLC card overview 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong

4
&EMX3/17 PLC diagram : =10+C3-A10 - =10+C3-A10 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&EMX3/18 PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong

70
&EMX3/19 PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&EMX3/20 PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&EMX3/21 PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&EMX3/22 PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&EMX3/23 PLC diagram : =06+J28-A2 - =06+J28-A20 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&EFS=00+C1/24 Main power circuit 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=00+C1/25 Main power circuit 2 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
22
&EFS=00+C1/26 Cooling circuit of distribution box 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=00+C1/27 Mounting plate grounding of the distribution box 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=00+C2/28 220V control circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=00+C2/29 Public terminal strip power supply 2 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=00+C3/30 24V control circuit 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
20

&EFS=00+C3/31 24V control circuit 2 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

&EFS=00+C3/32 Public terminal strip power supply 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=01+C1/33 Motor circuit 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

&AAA/1 3
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Catalog : &AAA/1 - &EFS=01+C1/33 MA4700III Page 2
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Catalog HT_TOC

Page Page description Version No. Date Drawn by

5
&EFS=01+C1/34 Motor circuit 2 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=01+C3/35 Motor start circuit 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

52
&EFS=01+C3/36 Motor drive control circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=02+C2/37 Solid state relay fan circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=02+C2/38 Electric heating circuit 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=02+C2/39 Heater circuit 2 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=02+C3/40 Heater start circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

61
&EFS=02+C3/41 Heater temperature control circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=02+C3/42 Heater temperature input circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=03+C2/43 Socket circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=04+C3/44 Lubrication circuit 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

70
&EFS=05+C3/45 Cooling circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/46 Controller wiring circuit 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/47 Controller wiring circuit 2 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/48 Location scale circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/49 Hydraulic oil temperature control circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

4
&EFS=06+C3/50 Injection circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/51 Storing circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

70
&EFS=06+C3/52 Integral shift circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/53 Back pressure circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/54 Mold opening and closing circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/55 Thimble circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/56 Mold adjusting circuit 0 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/57 Oil level detection circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/58 Inspection circuit of oil filter screen 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
22
&EFS=06+C3/59 Cycle start circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=06+C3/60 Circuit for preventing wrong insertion of harness 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=07+C3/61 Alarm lamp circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=08+C3/62 Front safety door circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=08+C3/63 Rear safety door circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
20

&EFS=08+C3/64 Emergency stop circuit 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

&EFS=08+C3/65 Hydraulic safety circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=08+C3/66 Output circuit of safety relay 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

2 4
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong Catalog : &EFS=01+C1/34 - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN &EFS=08+C3/66 MA4700III Page 3
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Catalog HT_TOC

Page Page description Version No. Date Drawn by

5
&EFS=08+C3/67 Nozzle protecting cover circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=10+C3/68 Manipulator interface circuit 1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong

52
&EFS=10+C3/69 Manipulator interface circuit 2 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=10+C3/70 Manipulator interface circuit 3 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=15+C3/71 Neutron circuit1 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&EFS=21+C3/72 Blow circuit 2021/12/24 Xia Xudong
&APB/73 Equipment list : W24024 - WJ100 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong

61
&APB/74 Equipment list : WJ400 - WS202 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&APB/75 Equipment list : WS203 - =02+C2-F21 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&APB/76 Equipment list : =02+C2-F22 - =06+C3-A1 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&APB/77 Equipment list : =01+C3-AJ6 - =00+C3-U20 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong

70
&APB/78 Equipment list : =07+C3-X33P - =06+C3-XD122 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&APB/79 Equipment list : =21+C3-XD2234 - =02+Z1-E16 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&APB/80 Equipment list : =02+Z1-E17 - =06+P3-S208 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&APB/81 Equipment list : =07+D1-L1 - =06+J30-X31 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong
&APB/82 Equipment list : =15+J30-X100 - =07+J50-XL1 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong

4
&APB/83 Equipment list : =08+J50-XS204 - =08+J50-XS277 2021/12/13 Xia Xudong

0 70
22
20

3 &AAC/5
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Catalog : &EFS=08+C3/67 - &APB/83 MA4700III Page 4
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

The marking of electrical schematic diagram and equipment shall be in accordance with IEC 81346-1

I. The complete device identifier is divided into page structure and display device identifier

5
=04+C3-K3:A1

52
Connection point designation
Equipment identifier
Location designation
(Example: +C3 is distribution box 3)
Higher-level designation
(Example: =04 is the lubrication circuit)

61
A1 A1 A1 A1
-K3 =05-K4 +C1-K5 =06+C2-K6
A2 A2 A2 A2 = 04
+ C3
Number of pages 5
*a *b *c *d Total pages 100

70
*a...The complete device identifier is: =04+C3-K3, it will not be displayed when the function code and location code are the same as the code in the page structure

*b...... The complete device identifier is: =05+C3-K4, it will not be displayed when the position code is the same as the code in the page structure

*c...... The complete device identifier is: =04+C1-K5, it will not be displayed when the function code is the same as the code in the page structure

*d...... The complete device identifier is: =06+C2-K6, which will be displayed when the function code and location code are different from the code in the page structure

4
II. Terminal block identification
+C2-TB2:3:3

70
Terminal block name Definition
Connection point designation TB1 B
Terminal name TB2 C
Terminal strip identification TB3 B+/B-
Location designation TB6 C+/C-
(Example: +C2 is distribution box 2) TB7 220
TB8 0220
Single terminal TB1：1：2 TB1：1：1 TB9 PE
1
0 TB10 N
-TB1 1 TB11 24
2
TB12 024
TB13 T0
TB14 T1
22
Double-layer terminal, connection point: 1234 are all TB19 Heating(Cabinet)
conductive TB20 Heating(Junction Box)
TB2：3：4 TB2：3：3 TB21 Null Line(Junction Box)
-TB2 1 TB23 Thermocouple(Junction Box)
TB31 Short Circuit（Cabinet）
TB2：3：2 TB2：3：1 TB32 Input Short Circuit（Mold Closing Area）
TB33 Output Short Circuit（Mold Closing Area）
20

Double-layer terminal TB31：2：3

TB31：2：4
Connection point: 1 and 2 conductive, 3 and 4 conductive,
1 and 2, 3 and 4 not conductive to each other
1 3
-TB31 1 2
2 4
TB31：1：2
TB31：1：1
Due to the limited printing space on the actual terminal block, the terminal block code and connection point code are omitted
For example: for TB2: 3: 3, the actual printing is: 2:3
&AAB/4 6
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Specification MA4700III Page 5
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3.Location designation J28 Button box junction box 1

P3 Tail plate P2 Moving plate P1 Fixed plate J29 Button box junction box 2

5
D1 Protection door

52
61
C1 Distribution box 1

4 70
Z3 Frame in the mold closing area Z2 Frame in the injection area

70
J10 Injection junction box 1 J20 Fixed plate junction box 1
J21 Fixed plate junction box 2 J30 Moving plate junction box 1

Z1 Injection seat J40 Tail plate junction box 1

0 J41 Tail plate junction box 2
22
20

J50 Frame junction box 1

J51 Frame junction box 2

5 7
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Specification MA4700III Page 6
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4. Connector and cable device identifier

5
=06-XC500P:1A

52
=06-XJ500:1A =06-XS205:1A =06-XC600:1A
Connection point designation
Connection point designation Connection point designation Connection point designation Identification of male and female pins:
1 digit serial number Component equipment identifier Serial number, starting at 600 male P, female S (for example, male pin P)
Junction box serial number Connector identification Connector identification 1 digit serial number
Connector identification Higher-level designation Higher-level designation Junction box serial number
Higher-level designation (Example: =06 is the control circuit) Connector identification
Higher-level designation

61
1. Junction box wiring harness male 3. Cabinet wiring harness male connector 4. Cabinet wiring harness male and female
connector 2. Component connectors (discrete wire) to plug connectors

WJ500 WS205

70
1 digit serial number
Junction box serial number Component equipment identifier
Cable identification Cable identification
1. Wire harness cable 2. Component cable

Example: Example:

4
Male and female pair connector of distribution box wire harness (male) Male connector of distribution box wiring harness (discrete wire)
XC501P XC600

70
Male and female pair connector of distribution box wire harness (female)
XC501S Component connector
XS205
Wire harness cable
WJ501

Distribution box identifier

0
22
Component cable
Male connector of distribution box wire harness
WS205
XJ501
Component connector
XS205

Component cable
WS205
20

Component Component
S205 S205

6 &ADB/8
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Specification MA4700III Page 7
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Structure identifier overview HT_STRUCTURE_OVERVIEW

5
Full designation Labeling Structure description

&AAA Document type Cover sheet

52
&AAB Document type Table of contents

&AAC Document type Specification

&ADB Document type Structure description

&MTL Document type Panel layout

61
&EMX3 Document type PLC diagram

&EMX4 Document type Safety PLC diagram

&EFS Document type Electrical schematic diagram

&EFA Document type Overview map

70
&EPA Document type Summarized parts list

&APB Document type Device tag list

&EMA1 Document type Terminal-strip overview

&EMA2 Document type Terminal diagram

4
&EMA3 Document type Connection list

&EMB1 Document type Cable overview

70
&EMB2 Document type Cable diagram

&EMX1 Document type Plug overview

&EMX2 Document type Plug diagram

=00 Higher-level designation Power distribution circuit

=01

=02
Higher-level designation

Higher-level designation
0Power circuit

Heating circuit
22
=03 Higher-level designation Socket circuit

=04 Higher-level designation Lubrication circuit

=05 Higher-level designation Cooling circuit

=06 Higher-level designation Control circuit

20

=07 Higher-level designation Alarm circuit

=08 Higher-level designation Safety circuit

=09 Higher-level designation Automatic door

&AAC/7 9
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Structure identifier overview MA4700III Page 8
EW Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Structure identifier overview HT_STRUCTURE_OVERVIEW

5
Full designation Labeling Structure description

=10 Higher-level designation Robot

52
=11 Higher-level designation Hopper magnet interface

=12 Higher-level designation Mold opening and closing proportional valve

=13 Higher-level designation External socket

=14 Higher-level designation Increased electric power

61
=15 Higher-level designation Core

=16 Higher-level designation Hot runner

=17 Higher-level designation Energy consumption display

=18 Higher-level designation Display device for measuring clamping force

70
=19 Higher-level designation Injection proportioning valve

=20 Higher-level designation Safety confirmation switch interface for return of mold top plate

=21 Higher-level designation Air valve

=22 Higher-level designation Needle valve

4
=23 Higher-level designation Signal interface of volumetric doser

=24 Higher-level designation Electrical interface of peripheral safety equipment

70
=25 Higher-level designation Gas-assisted electrical interface

=26 Higher-level designation Carriage position transducer

=27 Higher-level designation Closed loop control of the temperature at the feeding port

=28 Higher-level designation Neutron and needle valve pressure relief

=29

=30
Higher-level designation

Higher-level designation
0Injection signal interface

Mold adjustment limit switch

22
=31 Higher-level designation Oil temperature cooling water valve

=32 Higher-level designation Discharge detection

=33 Higher-level designation Feeding platform

=34 Higher-level designation Electrical interface of hydraulic fixture

20

=35 Higher-level designation Unscrewing

=36 Higher-level designation Floodlight

=37 Higher-level designation electric heater oil

8 10
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Structure identifier overview MA4700III Page 9
EW Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Structure identifier overview HT_STRUCTURE_OVERVIEW

5
Full designation Labeling Structure description

=38 Higher-level designation Die temperature display electrical interface

52
=39 Higher-level designation Servovalve pour injection

+C1 Location designation Distribution box 1

+C2 Location designation Distribution box 2

+C3 Location designation Distribution box 3

61
+Z1 Location designation Injection seat

+Z2 Location designation Frame in the injection area

+Z3 Location designation Frame in the mold closing area

+P1 Location designation Fixed plate

70
+P2 Location designation Moving plate

+P3 Location designation Tail plate

+D1 Location designation Protection door

+J10 Location designation Injection junction box 1

4
+J11 Location designation Injection junction box 2

+J20 Location designation Fixed plate junction box 1

70
+J21 Location designation Fixed plate junction box 2

+J28 Location designation Button box junction box 1

+J29 Location designation Button box junction box 2

+J30 Location designation Moving plate junction box 1

+J31

+J40
Location designation

Location designation
0Moving plate junction box 2

Tail plate junction box 1

22
+J41 Location designation Tail plate junction box 2

+J50 Location designation Frame junction box 1

+J51 Location designation Frame junction box 2

20

9 &MTL/11
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Structure identifier overview MA4700III Page 10
EW Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-M1

=06+P3-S205 =08+P1-S202 =06+J28-S1 =08+J28-S201_1 =06+Z1-S100 =06+Z1-R1

=07+D1-L1

5
=06+P2-R3

=06+Z1-S103

52
=00+C1-MF2

61
=00+C1-MF1

70
=06+Z2-S102

=00+C1-Q100
=08+Z3-S227 =08+Z3-S277 =00+C3-MF5 =00+C2-MF3
=00+C3-MF6 =00+C2-MF4
=02+Z1-E1

4
...... =08+P1-S203
=02+Z1-Ex =08+P1-S200 =06+P3-S208
=04+P2-S209
=08+D1-S201_2 =06+P2-S206

0 70 =06+P3-R2
22
20

=03+Z2-X1
=03+Z2-X2
=03+Z2-X3

=06+Z2-S101 =08+Z3-S226 =04+Z3-M13

=01+Z2-M1

&ADB/10 12
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Machine outside MA4700III Page 11
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5
52
61
Heater 6 zone Heater 5 zone Heater 4 zone Heater 3 zone Heater 2 zone
Heater 1 zone

E62 E61 E52 E51 E42 E41 E32 E31 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1

70
1TC06 1TC05 1TC04 1TC03 1TC02 1TC01

4
0 70
22
20

11 +C1/13
Date 2022/3/17 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Heater layout MA4700III Page 12
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-M1

5
=01-LC1 =01-KM1

52
61
=00-Q100
70
=01-FR1

=00-X55
=01-IV1

4
070
22
20

+/12 +C2/14
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C1
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Mounting plate layout 1 MA4700III Page 13
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-M1

5
52
=00-T1

61
0

T1

11 12
1
2
3
70
=00-Q121

=03-Q111
=05-Q136
=04-Q131

=02-F22

=02-F42

=02-F62
=02-F21

=02-F31

=02-F61
=02-F41

=02-F52
=02-F11

=02-F51
=05-K12
=04-K3

=02-KH1

4
=02-KS1

1 1 1 1
0 1
70 =02-KS2

1 1 1 1 1
22
20

+C1/13 +C3/15
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C2
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Mounting plate layout 2 MA4700III Page 14
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-M1

5
52
61
=06-AMP0
=08-KR13
=08-KA1

=08-K201
=10-KR1
=08-KA15

=08-KR10

=08-KR11

=10-KR12
=00-F1
=08-KA8
=21-XC600

=08-XC601

=00-U20 13 23 33 13 23 33
=10-A10

70
A1 Y1 Y2 A1 Y1 Y2
Pilz Pilz
PZE X4 PZE X4
=04-XC401P =08-XC501P =06-XC400P =06-XC100P

=04-XC410P =08-XC280P =06-XC500P =08-XC200P

CH.1 CH.1
CH.2 CH.2

13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43

19396
19396
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44

43 44 A2 43 44 A2

14 24 34 14 24 34

4
=00-G2

=00-G3
70
=06-A1

=01-AJ6
Y
0
22
345
EF 2
67
1
0

89A

BCD
20

=06-P3

+C2/14 &EMX3+/16
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Mounting plate layout 3 MA4700III Page 15
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
Modification
&MTL+C3/15
0

Date
DCOM
+10V
DA1
AD1
DA2
AD2

Name
DCOM_1
ACOM
DA3
+10V_1

COM
DA4

+24V
PVO
AD3

PI
DCOM_2
1

AD4

Appr
Date
DA5
ACOM_1

Drawn by
DA6
+10V_2
DCOM_3

Normalization
(Potentiometer Input)
AD5
(Proportion Valve Output)

DA7

X1
AD6
DA8
ACOM_2

Li Rili
+24V_1 O01

Xia Xudong
2021/12/24

Zhu Huadong
O02
IN1 O03
IN2
2

O04
IN3 O05
IN4 O06

TALK2 TALK1
RUN2 RUN1
IN5 O07
IN6 0
EF
12 O08
IN7

BCD
345
89A
67
O09
IN8
O10

TR

HAITIAN
IN9 O11

MCAN-
MCAN+
COM_1
SCAN-
SCAN+
IN10 O12
3

IN11 O13

NET4
NET5
NET1
(PANEL)

IN12 O14
IN13 O15
IN14 O16
20
IN15 O17
IN16 O18
DVO

IN17 O19
IN18 O20
22
4

IN19 O21
O22

LII
IN20
(Director Valve Output )

0
IN21
IN22
IN23
O23
O24
O25
IN24 O26

(Limit Installation Input)

PLC card overview

IN25 O27
70
IN26 O28
IN27 O29
5

IN28
IN29
4 O30
O31
O32
IN30
IN31 HCOM
IN32 HCOM_1
70
PCOM H24V
P24V
SC
TR1
6

TR2
61
TR3
TC1+ TR4
TC1- TR5
TC2+ TR6
PILOT5531

52
TC2- TR7
TC3+ TR8
TC3- TR9
TC4+
5
7

TOA52
TC4-
TO52
TC5+
TOA53
TC5-
TO53
TI

TC6+ TOA54
TC6- TO54
RO

TC7+ TOA55
TO55
(Thermocouple Input)

TC7-
(Relay Output )

TC8+
MA4700III
8

Y
TC8- DL
TC9+ MOTON
TC9- MOTOFF
TC10+ ACO
TC10- ACIN
+
=

Page
Total pages
9

PE
X1

83
16
17
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =10+C3-A10

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Connection Symbolic address Placement
CN1 H24V_1 &EFS/70.3

52
CN1 HCOM_1 &EFS/70.3
PT1 H24V_2 +C3-TB3:5 &EFS/70.4
PT1 IN1 +C3-A1:LII:IN23 &EFS/69.3
PT1 IN2 +D1-X103:31 &EFS/69.1
PT1 IN3 +C3-A10:PT1:IN4 &EFS/69.4

61
PT1 IN4 +C3-A10:PT1:IN1 &EFS/69.4
PT1 IN5 +C3-A10:PT1:IN6 &EFS/69.5
PT1 IN6 +C3-A10:PT1:IN3 &EFS/69.5
PT1 IN7 +C3-KR12:14 &EFS=08/64.2
PT1 IN8

70
PT1 HCOM_2 +C3-TB1:9 &EFS/70.4
PT2 O1 +D1-X103:10 &EFS/68.6
PT2 O2 +D1-X103:5 &EFS/68.4
PT2 O3 +D1-X103:4 &EFS/68.3
PT2 O4 +D1-X103:6 &EFS/68.4
PT2 O5 +D1-X103:7 &EFS/68.5

4
PT2 O6 +D1-X103:12 &EFS/68.6
PT2 O7

70
PT2 O8
PT2 COMR_2 +D1-X103:16 &EFS/68.9
PT2 COMR_1 +C3-KR1:11 &EFS/68.1

0
22
20

16 18
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong PLC diagram : =10+C3-A10 - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN =10+C3-A10 MA4700III Page 17
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+C3-A1

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Connection Symbolic address Placement
PVO DCOM

52
PVO DA1
PVO DA2
PVO DCOM_1 Proportional back pressure- &EFS/53.1
PVO DA3 Proportional back pressure+ +C3-AMP0:SIN &EFS/53.1
PVO DA4

61
PVO DCOM_2
PVO DA5
PVO DA6
PVO DCOM_3
PVO DA7

70
PVO DA8
DVO 001 Mold close +C3-KA1:13 &EFS/54.3
DVO 002 Mold close fast (differential) +Z3-D201:x1 &EFS/54.7
DVO 003 Mold open +Z3-D202:x1 &EFS/54.6
DVO 004 Injection +C3-KA1:23 &EFS/50.3
DVO 005 Suck back +Z1-D101:x1 &EFS/50.6

4
DVO 006 charge +C3-KA8:21 &EFS/51.5
DVO 007 Injection unit forward +C3-KA8:31 &EFS/52.5

70
DVO 008 Injection unit backward +Z1-D104:x1 &EFS/52.6
DVO 009 Ejector forward +P2-D204:x1 &EFS/55.5
DVO 010 Ejector backward +P2-D205:x1 &EFS/55.6
DVO 011 Core A in +P2-D206:x1 &EFS=15/71.5
DVO 012 Core A out +P2-D207:x1 &EFS=15/71.6
DVO 013 Mold height adjustment forward
0 +Z3-D208:x1 &EFS/56.5
DVO 014 Mold height adjustment backward +Z3-D209:x1 &EFS/56.6
DVO 015 Core B in +J30-X31:2 &EFS=15/71.7
22
DVO 016 Core B out +J30-X31:1 &EFS=15/71.8
DVO 017
DVO 018
DVO 019 Air A (movable die) +Z3-X132:1 &EFS=21/72.1
DVO 020 Air B (fixed die) +Z3-X132:2 &EFS=21/72.1
DVO 021 Red alarm lamp +D1-L1:11 &EFS=07/61.1
20

DVO 022 Mold open slowly (mold open low pressure) +Z3-D203:x1 &EFS/54.8
DVO 023
DVO 024 Oil cooling water +Z2-D122:1 &EFS/49.5
DVO 025 Yellow alarm lamp +D1-L1:21 &EFS=07/61.1

17 19
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 18
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+C3-A1

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Connection Symbolic address Placement
DVO 026 Green alarm lamp +D1-L1:31 &EFS=07/61.2

52
DVO 027 Mold open from beginning to end +Z3-D300:1 &EFS=08/65.5
DVO 028 Mold close from beginning to end +C3-A1:DVO:027 &EFS=08/65.6
DVO 029
DVO 030
DVO 031 +D1-L1:41 &EFS=07/61.2

61
DVO 032 Tail plate support lubrication +P3-D335:1 &EFS=04/44.6
DVO HCOM 0V &EFS/46.2
DVO HCOM_1
DVO H24V 24V &EFS/46.3
RO SC &EFS=02/40.4

70
RO TR1 Heating 1 +C2-KS1:X1:3 &EFS=02/41.1
RO TR2 Heating 2 +C2-KS1:X2:3 &EFS=02/41.2
RO TR3 Heating 3 +C2-KS1:X4:3 &EFS=02/41.4
RO TR4 Heating 4 +C2-KS1:X5:3 &EFS=02/41.4
RO TR5 Heating 5 +C2-KS2:X2:3 &EFS=02/41.6
RO TR6 Heating 6 +C2-KS2:X4:3 &EFS=02/41.8

4
RO TR7
RO TR8

70
RO TR9
RO TOA52 AMP cooling +C3-TB2:2 &EFS=05/45.6
RO TO52 = +C2-K12:A1 &EFS=05/45.6
RO TOA53 Lubrication +C3-TB6:1 &EFS=04/44.5
RO TO53 = +C2-K3:2 &EFS=04/44.5
RO TOA54 0
RO TO54 Robot mold open position +C3-KR1:A1 &EFS=10/70.1
RO TOA55 Electric heating +C3-TB7:2 &EFS=02/40.2
22
RO TO55 = +C2-KH1:A1 &EFS=02/40.1
RO MOTON +C3-KR13:13 &EFS=01/35.3
RO MOTOFF
RO ACO
RO ACIN &EFS=02/40.3
RO DL
20

RO Y
PI +10V
PI AD1
PI AD2 Mold Position +C3-A1:PI:ACOM_1 &EFS/48.4

18 20
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 19
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+C3-A1

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Connection Symbolic address Placement
PI ACOM

52
PI +10V_1 Mold Position + &EFS/48.4
PI AD3 Ejector Position +C3-A1:PI:+10V_2 &EFS/48.6
PI AD4
PI ACOM_1 Mold Position - &EFS/48.3
PI +10V_2 Ejector Position + &EFS/48.6

61
PI AD5
PI AD6
PI ACOM_2 Ejector Position - &EFS/48.6
PI +24V_1
LII IN1

70
LII IN2 purge guard closed 2 +C3-KA8:41 &EFS=08/67.5
LII IN3
LII IN4 Rear door closed +C3-KR11:21 &EFS=08/63.1
LII IN5 Front door closed 2 +Z3-S227:11 &EFS=08/62.7
LII IN6
LII IN7 Mold clamp end +P3-S205:NO &EFS/54.1

4
LII IN8
LII IN9 Emergency stop +C3-K201:11 &EFS=08/64.1

70
LII IN10
LII IN11 Purge Guard closed +J20-X38:3 &EFS=08/67.2
LII IN12 Ejector backward end +J30-X31:4 &EFS/55.1
LII IN13 Safty relay reset +C3-KA1:42 &EFS=08/66.3
LII IN14 Injection unit forward end +Z1-S100:BN &EFS/52.1
LII IN15 Lubrication oil level check
0 +Z3-M13:2 &EFS=04/44.2
LII IN16 oil filter check +Z2-S101:11 &EFS/58.1
LII IN17 Charge RPM check +Z1-S103:2 &EFS/51.1
22
LII IN18 Mold height adjustment sensor check +P3-S208:2 &EFS/56.1
LII IN19 Tail plate support lubrication detection +P3-S413:11 &EFS=04/44.7
LII IN20
LII IN21
LII IN22
LII IN23 Robot Mold Close Enable +C3-A10:PT1:IN1 &EFS=10/69.0
20

LII IN24 Hydraulic safety check +C3-KA15:11 &EFS=08/65.1

LII IN25 Core A in end +J30-X100:10 &EFS=15/71.1
LII IN26 Core B in end +J30-X100:12 &EFS=15/71.2
LII IN27 Core A out end +J30-X100:9 &EFS=15/71.1

19 21
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 20
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+C3-A1

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Connection Symbolic address Placement
LII IN28 Core B out end +J30-X100:11 &EFS=15/71.2

52
LII IN29 Oil level check +Z2-S102:11 &EFS/57.1
LII IN30 Lubrication pressure check +P2-S209:13 &EFS=04/44.4
LII IN31 Cycle start button +J28-S272:13 &EFS/59.1
LII IN32 Cycle stop button +J28-S272:21 &EFS/59.1
LII PCOM 0V &EFS/46.3

61
LII P24V 24V &EFS/46.4
TI TC1+ Temperature zone 1 + +Z1-1TC01:+ &EFS=02/42.1
TI TC1- Temperature zone 1 - +Z1-1TC01:- &EFS=02/42.1
TI TC2+ Temperature zone 2 + +Z1-1TC02:+ &EFS=02/42.2
TI TC2- Temperature zone 2 - +Z1-1TC02:- &EFS=02/42.2

70
TI TC3+ Temperature zone 3 + +Z1-1TC03:+ &EFS=02/42.3
TI TC3- Temperature zone 3 - +Z1-1TC03:- &EFS=02/42.3
TI TC4+ Temperature zone 4 + +Z1-1TC04:+ &EFS=02/42.3
TI TC4- Temperature zone 4 - +Z1-1TC04:- &EFS=02/42.4
TI TC5+ Temperature zone 5 + +Z1-1TC05:+ &EFS=02/42.4
TI TC5- Temperature zone 5 - +Z1-1TC05:- &EFS=02/42.4

4
TI TC6+ Temperature zone 6 + +Z1-1TC06:+ &EFS=02/42.5
TI TC6- Temperature zone 6 - +Z1-1TC06:- &EFS=02/42.5

70
TI TC7+
TI TC7-
TI TC8+
TI TC8-
TI TC9+
TI TC9- 0
TI TC10+ Oil temperature thermocouple + +Z2-1TC00:+ &EFS/49.1
TI TC10- Oil temperature thermocouple - +Z2-1TC00:- &EFS/49.1
22
X1 +24V 24V &EFS/46.1
X1 COM 0V &EFS/46.1
X1 NET1 PANEL &EFS/46.4
X1 NET5 CAT &EFS=01/36.9
X1 SCAN+
X1 SCAN-
20

X1 COM_1
X1 TR
X1 MCAN+
X1 MCAN-

20 22
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 21
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+C3-A1

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Connection Symbolic address Placement
X1 IO_EXPAND

52
X1 PE PE &EFS/46.5
RO TO54 Robot mold open position +C3-TB6:2 &EFS=10/70.2

61
4 70
0 70
22
20

21 23
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 22
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+J28-A2

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Connection Symbolic address Placement
X2 CAN+

52
X2 CAN-
X2 COM_GND &EFS+C3/47.3
X2 +24V &EFS+C3/47.1
X2 COM_1 &EFS+C3/47.1
X2 MANUAL_KEY

61
X2 RESET
X2 COM_2
X2 DOOR_OPEN
X2 COM_3
X2 SPARE 1

70
X2 COM_4
X2 SPARE 2
X2 COM_5
X2 NET1 &EFS+C3/47.2
X2 NET2 &EFS+C3/47.4
X2 LOCK +J28-S1:14 &EFS+C3/47.2

4
X2 COM_6 &EFS+C3/47.3
X2 232/485

0 70
22
20

22 &EFS=00+C1/24
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong PLC diagram : =06+J28-A2 - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN =06+J28-A2 MA4700III Page 23
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

R / 25.0

S / 25.0

5
T / 25.0

N.00 / +C2/29.5

52
2 4 6
I> I> I>

-Q100
250A 1 3 5

61
70
-X55
232A
-PE1
15

4
1;2

070
22
-W01 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 16.0
20

=01/33.1 / R.01

=01/33.1 / S.01

=01/33.2 / T.01
L1 L2 L3 N PE

User power distribution recommendations Motor 1

&EMX3=+/23 25
Date 2022/3/17 = 00
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C1
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Main power circuit 1 MA4700III Page 24
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
R R R
BK BK BK
6.0 1.0 1.0
24.9 / R
S S
BK BK
6.0 1.0
24.9 / S

5
T T T
BK BK BK
6.0 1.0 1.0
24.9 / T

52
61
4 70
070
22
20
=02+C2/38.1 / R.02

=02+C2/38.1 / S.02

=02+C2/38.1 / T.02

=03+C2/43.1 / R.03

=03+C2/43.1 / S.03

=03+C2/43.1 / T.03

+C2/28.1 / R.00

+C2/28.1 / T.00

=05+C3/45.1 / R.05

=05+C3/45.1 / S.05

=05+C3/45.1 / T.05
Electric heating Socket Transformer Cooling
24 26
Date 2021/12/24 = 00
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C1
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Main power circuit 2 MA4700III Page 25
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2.0220.1 / +C2/29.2

2.0220.2 / +C2/29.2

2.0220.3 / +C2/29.2

2.0220.4 / +C2/29.3

1.0220.1 / +C3/32.5

1.0220.2 / +C3/32.5
2.220.1 / +C2/29.0

2.220.2 / +C2/29.0

2.220.3 / +C2/29.0

2.220.4 / +C2/29.0

1.220.1 / +C3/32.3

1.220.2 / +C3/32.3
5
52
61
70
+C1-PE1:3 4 +C2-PE2:24 25 26 27

4
PE PE PE PE PE PE
BK BK GNYE BK BK GNYE BK BK GNYE BK BK GNYE BK BK GNYE BK BK GNYE

70
-WMF1 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WMF2 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WMF3 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WMF4 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WMF5 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WMF6 1.0 1.0 1.0

0
22
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

+C1-MF1
M +C1-MF2
M +C2-MF3
M +C2-MF4
M +C3-MF5
M +C3-MF6
M
1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~
3 3 3 3 3 3
20

Middle box fan Middle box fan

Right box fan 1 Right box fan 2 1 2 Right box fan 1 Right box fan 2
25 27
Date 2021/12/24 = 00
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C1
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Cooling circuit of distribution box MA4700III Page 26
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5
52
61
70
+Z2 +C2-PE2
+C2-MT1:PE -PE1:21 +C3-MT2:PE -PE1:22 -PE1:20 +C2/28.4 15 -PE1:10
+C2/28.4
+C3/30.3
=01+C3/36.2
=06+C3/46.5
=06+C3/47.3

4
=03+C2/43.2
+C2/28.4
/26.4

PE PE
0 70
PE PE
22
GNYE GNYE GNYE GNYE
6.0 6.0 16.0 16.0
20

26 +C2/28
Date 2021/12/24 = 00
Drawn by Xia Xudong Mounting plate grounding of the + C1
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN distribution box MA4700III Page 27
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

+C1/25.7 / T.00

5
+C1/25.6 / R.00

52
1 3
-Q121
2A 2 4

61
+C2-PE2:1

380 O380 PE
BK BK GNYE
1.0 1.0 1.0

70
+C2-PE2:13
380V 0V PE

-T1 PE
440VA GNYE
1.0
220V 0V_1 GND

4
220V

+C2-PE2:2

70
PE
GNYE
1.0

220 O220
RD RD
1.0 0 1.0
22
29.0 / 220

29.2 / 0220
20

220V power supply

+C1/27 29
Date 2021/12/24 = 00
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C2
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN 220V control circuit MA4700III Page 28
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 28
TB7_2
TB2_2

Modification
+C1/26.1 / 2.220.1 220 / 28.3 =04+C3/44.5 / 2.C.2 2.C.1 / =02+C3/41.0
0

+C1/26.3 / 2.220.3 2.220.2 / +C1/26.2 / 2.C.4 2.C.3 /

Date
1
1
=02/37.1 / 2.220.5 2.220.4 / +C1/26.5 / 2.C.6 2.C.5 /
/ 2.220.7 2.220.6 / =02/37.2 +C3/32.4 / C.0 2.C.7 /

2
2
C
WH
1.0

Name
/ 2.220.9 2.220.8 /
/ 220.0 2.220.10 /

RD
1.0
220
1

Appr
Date
Drawn by

Normalization
Li Rili
2022/3/17
Xia Xudong

Zhu Huadong
2

TB8_2
+C1/26.1 / 2.0220.1 0220 / 28.3
+C1/26.4 / 2.0220.3 2.0220.2 / +C1/26.2

1
=01+C3/35.5 / 2.0220.5 2.0220.4 / +C1/26.5
=02/37.3 / 2.0220.7 2.0220.6 / =02/37.1

HAITIAN
/ 2.0220.9 2.0220.8 / =02+C3/40.1
3

/ 0220.0 2.0220.10 /
3

RD
1.0
O220
20
22
4

0
-TB10_2
1

=02/38.1 / 2.N.1
2
N
BU
6.0

70
=02/39.1 / 2.N.2 N.00 / +C1/24.9
3
N
BU
6.0

=03/43.2 / 2.N.3
4
N
5

BU

4
6.0

Public terminal strip power supply 2

70
6

61
52
5
7

MA4700III
8

+
=

Page
Total pages
9

83
29
C2
00
+C3/30
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1.0220.3 / 32.5

1.0220.4 / 32.5
1.220.3 / 32.3

1.220.4 / 32.4

5
52
+C2-PE2:5 6

61
220 O220 PE 220 O220 PE
RD RD GNYE RD RD GNYE
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

70
-G2 G3
150W L N PE 300W L N PE
Switching power supply Switching power supply
+V1 +V2 -V1 -V2 +V1 +V2 -V1 -V2

4
24V 24V

70
CC
WH
1.0

1
-F1
10A 2

24
WH
1.0
0 O24
WH
1.0
C24
WH
1.0
C
WH
1.0
C-
WH
1.0
22
32.6 / 24

32.7 / 024

=04/44.1 / C24

32.4 / C

32.2 / C-
20

+C2/29 31
Date 2021/12/24 = 00
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN 24V control circuit 1 MA4700III Page 30
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 30

Modification
0

Date
-U20

Name
1.1
=06/47.1 / 24A

WH
0.5
24A
1.2
/ PS+
1

Appr
Date
1.3

Drawn by
1.4
1.24.1 / 32.6

Normalization
1
WH
24

1.0

2.1
32.0 / B+

WH
B+

1.0

Li Rili
2.2

Xia Xudong
2021/12/24

Zhu Huadong
2.3
2

2.4
1.C.1 / 32.4
C

2
WH
1.0

3.1
=06/50.6 / C1.1

3.2
=06/50.7 / C1.2

3.3
=06/54.5 / C1.3

3.4

HAITIAN
=06/54.6 / C1.4 1.C.2 / 32.4
C
WH
1.0

3-9

4.1
3

=06/50.8 / C2.1

4.2
=06/51.6 / C2.2

Remarks:
4.3
20
=06/54.8 / C2.3

4.4
=06/56.6 / C2.4

5.1
=06/55.6 / C3.1
22 5.2

=06/55.7 / C3.2
4

5.3

=15/71.6 / C3.3
0
=15/71.7 / C3.4
5.4
6.1

=15/71.8 / C4.1
6.2

24V control circuit 2

70
=15/71.9 / C4.2
6.3

=06/54.7 / C4.3
5

4
6.4

=06/56.7 / C4.4
7.1

=21/72.2 / C5.1
7.2

=08/65.5 / C5.2
70
7.3

/ C5.3
7.4

=07/61.2 / C5.4
6

8.1

=06/52.6 / C6.1
61
8.2

=06/52.7 / C6.2
8.3

/ C6.3
8.4

52
/ C6.4
9.1

=04/44.7 / C7.1
5
9.2
7

/ C7.2
9.3

/ C7.3

/ C7.4
All B+ (inside and outside the box) pass through the terminal strip and then the fuse of the PCB board
9.4 10.1

/ C8.1

/ C8.2
MA4700III

/ C8.3
8

10.2 10.3 10.4

=06/49.6 / C8.4 1.C.3 / 32.4

C
WH

10
1.0

+
=

Page
Total pages
9

83
31
C3
00
32
 31
TB3
TB1

-TB31

Modification
/ 202.2 202.1 / =01+C1/34.4 / 1.BP.1 B+ / 31.2 =01+C1/34.4 / 1.B.1 B / =06/46.3
=08/63.4 / S11A.2 S11A.1 / =08/62.4 =06/53.6 / 1.BP.3 1.BP.2 / =06/51.2 =04/44.4 / 1.B.3 1.B.2 / =04/44.3
0

1 2
1
1

Date
=08/63.8 / S21A.2 S21A.1 / =08/62.8 =06/56.2 / 1.BP.5 1.BP.4 / =06/55.2 =06/51.2 / 1.B.5 1.B.4 / =04/44.8
=08/63.7 / B200A.2 B200A.1 / =08/63.4 =08/63.4 / 1.BP.7 1.BP.6 / =08/62.4 =06/53.6 / 1.B.7 1.B.6 / =06/52.1

3 4
2
2

Name
/ B201A.2 B201A.1 / =08/65.4 / 1.BP.9 1.BP.8 / =08/64.9 =06/55.2 / 1.B.9 1.B.8 / =06/54.1
=08/65.5 / C300.2 C300.1 / =08/65.5 =08/66.5 / 1.BP.11 1.BP.10 / =08/66.1 =06/57.1 / 1.B.11 1.B.10 / =06/56.2

5 6
3
3
=08/65.7 / C300.3
/ B101.2
1

/ B101.3 B101.1 / =10/69.2 / 1.BP.13 1.BP.12 / =08/67.1 =06/59.2 / 1.B.13 1.B.12 / =06/58.1

Appr
Date
=10/70.3 / 1.BP.15 1.BP.14 / =15/71.3 =08/62.3 / 1.B.15 1.B.14 / =08/62.1

7 8
4
4

Drawn by

Normalization
=08/64.5 / 302.2 302.1 / =08/64.4 / 1.BP.17 1.BP.16 / =10/70.4 =08/63.1 / 1.B.17 1.B.16 / =08/62.7
=08/64.8 / 302A.2 302A.1 / =08/64.7 / 1.BP.19 1.BP.18 / =08/64.1 / 1.B.19 1.B.18 / =08/63.7

5
5

9 10

Li Rili
Xia Xudong
2021/12/24

Zhu Huadong
=08/65.1 / 1.B.21 1.B.20 / =08/64.9

TB6
=08/65.4 / 1.B.23 1.B.22 / =08/65.3
6

=02/40.4 / 1.CN.1 C- / 30.5

2

=05/45.6 / 1.CN.3 1.CN.2 / =04/44.5

1
=08/66.2 / 1.B.25 1.B.24 / =08/66.1
=08/67.1 / 1.B.27 1.B.26 / =08/66.6
7

=10/70.2 / 1.CN.5 1.CN.4 / =06/46.2

/ 1.CN.7 1.CN.6 / =04/44.1

2
=08/67.5 / 1.B.29 1.B.28 / =08/67.2
=10/69.9 / 1.B.31 1.B.30 / =10/69.2
8

/ 1.CN.9 1.CN.8 /

HAITIAN
/ 1.CN.11 1.CN.10 /
3
=08/64.2 / 1.B.33 1.B.32 / =15/71.3
3

=10/70.4 / 1.B.35 1.B.34 / =10/70.3

9

TB7

+C1/26.7 / 1.220.1 220 / / 1.B.37 1.B.36 /

20
30.3 / 1.220.3 1.220.2 / +C1/26.8 / 1.B.39 1.B.38 /
1
10

=02/40.2 / 1.220.5 1.220.4 / 30.5

TB2

/ 1.220.7 1.220.6 / =02/40.3

2

+C2/29.0 / C.0 C / 30.5

22
31.3 / 1.C.2 1.C.1 / 31.2
4

/ 1.220.9 1.220.8 /
/ 1.220.11 1.220.10 /
3

0 =06/46.3 / 1.C.4
=10/70.1 / 1.C.6
1.C.3 / 31.8
1.C.5 / =05/45.6
2

TB8

+C1/26.7 / 1.0220.1 0220 / / 1.C.8 1.C.7 /

70
30.3 / 1.0220.3 1.0220.2 / +C1/26.9 / 1.C.10 1.C.9 /
1
3
5

4 / 1.0220.5 1.0220.4 / 30.5

Public terminal strip power supply 1

/ 1.0220.7 1.0220.6 /
2

/ 1.0220.9 1.0220.8 /
/ 1.0220.11 1.0220.10 /
3

70
TB11

31.1 / 1.24.1 24 / 30.3

6

=01/36.3 / 1.24.3 1.24.2 / =01/36.1

61
1

=06/53.4 / 1.24.5 1.24.4 / =06/46.1

/ 1.24.7 1.24.6 /
2

52
/ 1.24.9 1.24.8 /
/ 1.24.11 1.24.10 /
3

5
7

TB12

=01/36.1 / 1.024.1 024 / 30.3

=06/46.1 / 1.024.3 1.024.2 / =01/36.5
1

=06/47.1 / 1.024.5 1.024.4 / =06/53.4

/ 1.024.7 1.024.6 /
2

MA4700III

/ 1.024.9 1.024.8 /
8

/ 1.024.11 1.024.10 /
3

+
=

Page
Total pages
9

83
32
C3
00
=01+C1/33
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-IV1
/34.1
75kW

5
IN OUT DN15
R S T + - BR PE_2 U V W PE_1 PE T1 T2

52
R14 S14 T14
BK BK BK
25.0 25.0 25.0

61
-PE1:17 +C1-PE1:18

L1' L2' L3'

-FR1
230A 3
PE PE

70
L1 L2 L3 GNYE GNYE
PE 16.0 16.0

R13 S13 T13

BK BK BK
25.0 25.0 25.0

4
-PE1:16

U2 V2 W2
SH RD YE BU GNYE RD BU

70
-LC1 -WM1 10.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 0.75 0.75

210A
PE
U1 V1 W1 GNYE
PE 16.0
+Z2-M1
65kW U V W PE

R12 S12 T12

BK BK BK
25.0 25.0 25.0

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

0 x1
M
3~
‎Θ
22
-KM1 -R0
+C3/35.5 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 2R -WM1.1 1 X3A T2 T1 GND
x2
+C3/36.7 / WCAT1

R S T
BK BK BK
25.0 25.0 25.0
20
=00/24.6 / R.01

=00/24.6 / S.01

=00/24.6 / T.01

=00+C3/32 34
Date 2021/12/24 = 01
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C1
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Motor circuit 1 MA4700III Page 33
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-IV1
/33.1
2_ 4_ 6_ 8_ 10_
J29

5
1_ 3_ 5_ 7_ 9_ 6 7 19 20

52
61
4 70
WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

0 B B+
22
WH WH
1.0 1.0
=00+C3/32.0 / 1.B.1

=00+C3/32.0 / 1.BP.1
20

33 +C3/35
Date 2021/12/24 = 01
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C1
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Motor circuit 2 MA4700III Page 34
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1
=06/46.1

5
RO

MOTON

52
12
RD
1.0

61
-KR13
=08/66.5 13

14
10
RD
1.0

11

70
RD
1.0

12 14 +C1 A1
x1

-KR11 -KM1 -RC1

=08/63.7 11 SC-N6APM-CF A2
x2

4
O220
RD
1.0

0 70
=00+C2/29.3 / 2.0220.5
22
20

1/L1 2/T1 +C1/33.1

3/L2 4/T2 +C1/33.1
5/L3 6/T3 +C1/33.2
53 54
83 84
61 62
71 72

Motor on
+C1/34 36
Date 2021/12/24 = 01
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Motor start circuit 1 MA4700III Page 35
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-AJ6 =06-A1
=06/47.3 =06/46.1
=06/48.1

5
+24V 0V ‎〨 AI0 GND_1 GND Master Slave IN NET5

52
61
+Z2-BP1
Pressure sensor

V +

70
24 O24 PE - O24
24V 0V
WH WH GNYE WH
0.5 0.5 1.0 0.5 -WCAT1 BK -WCAT BK

4
+C2-PE2:7 -PE4:4

70
-WBP1 RD BK WH
/36.3 SH 0.34 0.34 0.34

0
22
=00/32.6 / 1.24.2

=00/32.7 / 1.024.1

=00/32.6 / 1.24.3

=00/32.7 / 1.024.2

+C1/33.2 / WCAT1
20

35 =02+C2/37
Date 2021/12/24 = 01
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Motor drive control circuit MA4700III Page 36
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2.0220.6 / =00/29.3

2.0220.7 / =00/29.3
2.220.5 / =00/29.0

2.220.6 / =00/29.0

5
52
61
4 70
BK BK BK BK

70
-WKS1 1.0 1.0 -WKS2 1.0 1.0

0
22
1 1

-KS1
M -KS2
M
+C3/41.1 1~ +C3/41.5 1~
2 2
20

=01+C3/36 38
Date 2021/12/24 = 02
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C2
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Solid state relay fan circuit MA4700III Page 37
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

R82 / 39.1

S82 / 39.1

5
T82 / 39.1

52
R82 R82 R82 S82 T82 T82
BK BK BK BK BK BK
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

1 1 1 1 1 1

-F11 -F21 -F22 -F31 -F41 -F42

32A 32A 32A 32A 32A 32A
2 2 2 2 2 2
H11 H23 H24 H31 H43 H44

61
BK BK BK BK BK BK
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

X1:3 X2:3 X3:3 X4:3 X5:3 X1:3

-KS1 -KS2
+C3/41.1 X1:4 X2:4 X3:4 X4:4 X5:4 +C3/41.5 X1:4
H1 H21 H22 H3 H41 H42
BK BK BK BK BK BK

70
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

+J10
TB20 1 TB20 2 TB20 3 TB20 4 TB20 5 TB20 6 -TB21 1

4
+Z1 H1 H2 H3 H4 H4
WH WH WH WH WH
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
H1 H2 H3
WH WH WH

70
3.5 3.5 3.5

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

-KH1 -E1 -E2 -E3 -E4 -E5 -31 -E32 -E41 -E42
+C3/40.1 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

R S T N
0
22
BK BK BK BU
16.0 16.0 16.0 6.0

N N N N N N N N N
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
20
=00+C1/25.5 / R.02

=00+C1/25.5 / S.02

=00+C1/25.5 / T.02

=00/29.5 / 2.N.1

ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

‎1X φ42×35,200W ‎2Xφ245×70,230V,2400W ‎1X φ190×145,3300W ‎1X φ190×116,2350W

‎1X Φ100×55,750W ‎1Xφ190×75,230V,1900W ‎1X φ190×116,2350W ‎1X φ190×145,3300W
37 39
Date 2022/3/21 = 02
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C2
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Electric heating circuit 1 MA4700III Page 38
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

38.8 / R82

38.8 / S82

5
38.8 / T82

=00/29.5 / 2.N.2

52
R82 R82 S82 T82
BK BK BK BK
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

1 1 1 1

-F51 -F52 -F61 -F62

32A 32A 32A 32A
2 2 2 2
H53 H54 H63 H64

61
BK BK BK BK
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

X2:3 X3:3 X4:3 X5:3

-KS2
+C3/41.5 X2:4 X3:4 X4:4 X5:4
H51 H52 H61 H62
BK BK BK BK

70
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

+J10
TB20 7 TB20 8 TB20 9 TB20 10 -TB21 2

4
+Z1 H5 H5 H6 H6
WH WH WH WH
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5

70
1 1 1 1
-E51 -E52 -E61 -E62
2 2 2 0 2
22
N N N
WH WH WH
3.5 3.5 3.5
20

ZONE 5 ZONE 6

‎2X φ190×145,3300W ‎2X φ190×145,3300W

38 +C3/40
Date 2022/3/21 = 02
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C2
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Heater circuit 2 MA4700III Page 39
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1
=06/46.1

5
RO RO RO RO

TO55 TOA55 ACIN SC

52
200
RD
1.0

61
70
+C2 A1
x1

-KH1 -RC20
SC-E3PM-CF A2
x2

4
O220 220 220 C-
RD RD RD WH

70
1 1 1 1.0

0
=00+C2/29.3 / 2.0220.8

=00/32.4 / 1.220.5

=00/32.4 / 1.220.6

=00/32.2 / 1.CN.1
22
20

1/L1 2/T1 +C2/38.1

3/L2 4/T2 +C2/38.1
5/L3 6/T3 +C2/38.1
53 54
83 84
61 62
71 72

Heating on
+C2/39 41
Date 2021/12/24 = 02
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Heater start circuit MA4700III Page 40
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1
=06/46.1

5
RO RO RO RO RO RO

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6

52
61
70
C400 C401 C402 C403 C404 C405
WH WH WH WH WH WH

4
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

C401 C403 C404 C405

WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

+C2-KS1 X1:3 X2:3 X3:3 X4:3 X5:3 +C2-KS2 X1:3 X2:3 X3:3 X4:3 X5:3
+C2/37.1 +C2/37.2
+C2/38.2 +C2/38.7
40A X1:4 X2:4 X3:4 X4:4 X5:4 +C2/39.1 X1:4 X2:4 X3:4 X4:4 X5:4
0 40A
22
C C C C C C C C C C
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
=00+C2/29.0 / 2.C.1
20

X1:1 X1:2 X2:1 X2:2 X3:1 X3:2 X4:1 X4:2 X5:1 X5:2 X1:1 X1:2 X2:1 X2:2 X3:1 X3:2 X4:1 X4:2 X5:1 X5:2
X1:3 X1:4 +C2/38.2 X2:3 X2:4 +C2/38.3 X3:3 X3:4 +C2/38.4 X1:3 X1:4 +C2/38.7 X2:3 X2:4 +C2/39.1 X3:3 X3:4 +C2/39.2
X4:3 X4:4 +C2/38.5 X4:3 X4:4 +C2/39.3
X5:3 X5:4 +C2/38.6 X5:3 X5:4 +C2/39.4

Heating 1 Heating 2 Heating 3 Heating 4 Heating 5 Heating 6

40 42
Date 2021/12/24 = 02
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Heater temperature control circuit MA4700III Page 41
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1
=06/46.1

5
TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI

TC1+ TC1- TC2+ TC2- TC3+ TC3- TC4+ TC4- TC5+ TC5- TC6+ TC6-

52
61
4 70
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- 5+ 5- 6+ 6-
RD BK RD BK RD BK RD BK RD BK RD BK

70
-WTC01 0.25 0.25 -WTC02 0.25 0.25 -WTC03 0.25 0.25 -WTC04 0.25 0.25 -WTC05 0.25 0.25 -WTC06 0.25 0.25

+J10
-TB23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

0
22
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- 5+ 5- 6+ 6-
-WTC01W RD BK -WTC02W RD BK -WTC03W RD BK -WTC04W RD BK -WTC05W RD BK -WTC06W RD BK

+Z1 + - + - + - + - + -
-1TC01 -1TC02 -1TC03 -1TC04 -1TC05 -1TC06
‎ф2.3-L100
20

Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature

zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4 zone 5 zone 6
41 =03+C2/43
Date 2021/12/24 = 02
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Heater temperature input circuit MA4700III Page 42
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=00+C1/25.6 / T.03

=00+C1/25.6 / S.03

5
=00+C1/25.6 / R.03

2.N.3 / =00/29.5

52
61
1 3 5
-Q111
32A
2 4 6

R0 S0 T0 N
BK BK BK BU

70
6.0 6.0 6.0 4.0
T0 T0
BK BK
2.5 2.5

S0 S0
BK BK
2.5 2.5

R0 R0
BK BK

4
2.5 2.5

N N
BU BU
2.5 2.5

70
+C2-PE2:12

PE
GNYE
1.0
PE PE
GNYE GNYE
1.0 0 1.0
22
+Z2
L1 L2 L3 N PE L1 L2 L3 N PE L1 L2 L3 N PE
-X1 -X2 -X3
32A 16A 16A
20

External socket External socket External socket

1 2 3
=02+C3/42 =04+C3/44
Date 2021/12/24 = 03
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C2
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Socket circuit MA4700III Page 43
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=00/32.2 / 1.CN.6
=06-A1
=06/46.1

5
=00/30.4 / C24

LII LII RO RO DVO LII

IN15 IN30 TO53 TOA53 032 IN19

52
1.B.2 / =00/32.0

1.B.3 / =00/32.0

1.B.4 / =00/32.0
C7.1 / =00/31.7
61
1
+C2-Q131
3A 2
43 B209 B C219 C335 C7 B413 B
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC401P = -XC410P =
1 -XC401P 1A 1B -XC410P 1A 1B 2A 2B
+C2-K3 /44.3 2 /44.6
/44.5 4 5 +C2-K3
MKS3P 10
-XC401S = -XC410S =
-XC401S 1A 1B -XC410S 1A 1B 2A 2B

4
/44.3 /44.6

41 C- B276 B -WJ401 C C- -WJ410

WH WH WH WH =06/55.1 1 7 WH WH =06/54.1 1 7 2 8

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 =15/71.1 0.3 0.3 1.0 1.0 =06/56.1 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J40 -XJ401 = +J41 -XJ410 =

-XC601 5A 6A 5B 6B -XJ401 1A 1B -XJ410 1A 1B 2A 2B
/44.3 /44.6

-XM13 =
-XM13
/44.1
1A 2A 1B 2B
0 -XS209 =
-XS209
/44.3
1A 1B
-XD335 =
-XD335
/44.6
1A 1B
-XD413 =
-XD413
/44.7
1A 1B
22
BN GY BU BK BN BU BN BU BN BU
-WM13 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 -WS209 1.0 1.0 -WD335 0.5 0.5 -WS413 0.5 0.5

=00+C2/29.0 / 2.C.2

=00/32.2 / 1.CN.2
+Z3 -M13 +P2 13 +P3 1 11
-S209 P -D335 -S413 P
V1 2
U1 M 1
14 2 12
20

40W
4
5 1 /44.1
6
7 3
9
8 11

Lubrication oil Lubrication Lubrication Lubrication

level check pressure check Lubrication pressure check pressure check
=03+C2/43 =05/45
Date 2021/12/24 = 04
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Lubrication circuit 1 MA4700III Page 44
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=00+C1/25.8 / T.05
=06-A1
=06/46.1
=00+C1/25.8 / S.05

5
=00+C1/25.7 / R.05

RO RO

TO52 TOA52

52
61
C419 C

70
WH WH
1.0 1.0

1 3 5 A1
+C2-Q136 +C2-K12
2A DILEEM-10-G A2
2 4 6

4
101 102 103 C-
BK BK BK WH

70
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

+C2-K12
/45.6 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

+C1-PE1:14
0
=00/32.2 / 1.CN.3

=00/32.4 / 1.C.5
104 105 106
22
BN BK GY GNYE
-WM17 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

+Z2 1 2 3

-M17
M
400W 3~
20

PE

1/L1 2/T1 /45.1

3/L2 4/T2 /45.1
5/L3 6/T3 /45.2
13 14

Cooling motor AMP cooling

=04/44 =06/46
Date 2021/12/24 = 05
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Cooling circuit MA4700III Page 45
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=01/35.1
=01/36.8
=02/40.1

5
=02/41.1
=02/42.1
=04/44.2
=05/45.5 X1 X1 DVO DVO LII LII X1 X1
/48.3
/49.1 +24V COM HCOM H24V PCOM P24V NET1 PE

52
/49.5
/50.1
/51.1
/52.1
/53.1
/54.1
/55.1
/56.1
/56.5
/57.1
/58.1
/59.1

61
=07/61.1
=08/62.6
=08/63.1
=08/64.1
=08/65.1
=08/66.3
=08/67.1
=10/69.0
=10/70.1
=15/71.1
=21/72.1

70
+C2-PE2:8

4
24 O24 C- C B PE
WH WH WH WH WH GNYE

70
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

0
22
=00/32.6 / 1.24.4

=00/32.7 / 1.024.3

=00/32.2 / 1.CN.4

=00/32.4 / 1.C.4

=00/32.0 / B

47.2 / WPANEL
20

=05/45 47
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Controller wiring circuit 1 MA4700III Page 46
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-AJ6

1.024.5 / =00/32.8
=01/36.1

WPANEL / 46.4
24A / =00/31.1

5
EtherNET

52
61
+C2-PE2:9

24A O24 PE
WH WH GNYE

70
0.5 0.5 1.0

-XC280P 6A 6B -XC601 8A
=08/64.3

-XPE =
-XC280S 6A 6B -XPE 1A

4
=08/64.3 /47.3

6 16

70
-WJ280 0.3 0.3

+J28
-XJ280 6A 6B
=08/64.3 13
+J28-S1
14
-X24024 =
-X24024
/47.1
1A 1B
0 PE
22
BN BU GNYE
-W24024 0.5 0.5 -WPANEL 1.0 -WFAC BK

+J28-A2
+24V COM_1 NET1 LOCK COM_6 COM_GND NET2
20

46 48
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Controller wiring circuit 2 MA4700III Page 47
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-AJ6 -A1
=01/36.1 /46.1

5
+10V AI3 GND_5 PI PI PI PI PI PI

ACOM_1 AD2 +10V_1 +10V_2 AD3 ACOM_2

52
61
4 70
70
-PE4
/48.3 1 -PE4:2 -PE4:3
/48.5
=01/36.2

-WR1
/48.1 SH
I101
RD
0.34
I102
WH
0.34
I103
BK
0.34
-WR2
/48.3
0
SH
I203
BK
0.34
I202
WH
0.34
I201
RD
0.34
-WR3
/48.5 SH
I211
RD
0.34
I212
WH
0.34
I213
BK
0.34
22
+Z1 +P3 +P2
-R1 -R2 -R3
2 2 2
20

3 1 3 1 3 1

Screw position Mold Position Ejector Position

47 49
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Location scale circuit MA4700III Page 48
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1 -A1
/46.1 /46.1

5
TI TI DVO

TC10+ TC10- 024

52
C8.4 / =00/31.8
61
C122 C8
WH WH

70
0.5 0.5

-XC600 8A 8B
=21/72.1

-XD122 =
-XD122 1A 1B

4
/49.5

0+ 0-
0 70
22
RD BK BN BU
-WTC00W 0.25 0.25 -WD122 0.5 0.5

+Z2 +Z2
-1TC00 1
4.0m -D122
2
20

Oil temperature Oil cooling

thermocouple water
48 50
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong Hydraulic oil temperature control + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN circuit MA4700III Page 49
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/46.1

5
DVO DVO

004 005

52
C1.1 / =00/31.2

C1.2 / =00/31.2

C2.1 / =00/31.3
61
C100 C100B C1 C101 C1 C100B C2
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC100P 4A 4B 5A 5B -XC100P 6A 6B
-KA1 /51.1 /51.1
=08/66.1 23

24

-XC100S 4A 4B 5A 5B -XC100S 6A 6B

4
/51.1 /51.1

C100A
WH -WJ100 4 14 5 15 -WJ100 6 16

70
1.0 /53.9 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 /53.9 0.3 0.3

+J10
-XJ100 4A 4B 5A 5B -XJ100 6A 6B
11 /51.1 /51.1
-KA8
=08/67.1 14 12
0 -XD100 =
-XD100
/50.5
-XJ100:4A /50.5
1A 1B
-XD101 =
-XD101
/50.6
1A 1B
-XD100.1 =
-XD100.1
/50.7
1A 1B
22
BN BU BN BU BN BU
-WD100 0.5 0.5 -WD101 0.5 0.5-WD100.1 0.5 0.5

+Z1 x1 x1 x1
-D100 -D101 -D100.1
x2 x2 x2
20

Injection Suck back

49 51
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Injection circuit MA4700III Page 50
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/46.1

5
LII DVO

IN17 006

52
C102
WH
1.0

21

1.BP.2 / =00/32.0

1.B.5 / =00/32.0
-KA8

C2.2 / =00/31.3
=08/67.1 24 22

61
B103 B+ B C102A C2
WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC100P =
-XC100P 1A 2A 2B -XC100P 7A 7B
/51.1 /51.1

-XC100S =
-XC100S 1A 2A 2B -XC100S 7A 7B

4
/51.1 /51.1

-WJ100 1 2 12 -WJ100 7 17

70
/53.9 0.3 0.3 0.3 /53.9 0.3 0.3

+J10 -XJ100 = +J10

-XJ100 1A 2A 2B -XJ100 7A 7B
/51.1 /51.1

-XS103 =
-XS103
/51.1
1A 2A 2B
0 -XD102 =
-XD102
/51.5
1A 1B
22
BN BU
-WS103W BK BN BU -WD102 0.5 0.5

2
+Z1 +Z1 x1
-S103 -D102
- +
x2

3 1
20

Charge RPM
check charge
50 52
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Storing circuit MA4700III Page 51
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/46.1

5
LII DVO DVO

IN14 007 008

52
C103
WH
1.0

31

1.B.6 / =00/32.0
-KA8

C6.1 / =00/31.6

C6.2 / =00/31.6
=08/67.1 34 32

61
B100 B C103A C6 C104 C6
WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC100P 10A 10B -XC100P 8A 8B 9A 9B

/51.1 /51.1

-XC100S 10A 10B -XC100S 8A 8B 9A 9B

4
/51.1 /51.1

-WJ100 10 20 -WJ100 8 18 9 19

70
/53.9 0.3 0.3 /53.9 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J10 +J10
-XJ100 10A 10B -XJ100 8A 8B 9A 9B
/51.1 /51.1

-XS100 =
-XS100
/52.1
1A 1B
0 -XD103 =
-XD103
/52.5
1A 1B
-XD104 =
-XD104
/52.6
1A 1B
22
BN BU BN BU
-WS100W BN BU -WD103 0.5 0.5 -WD104 0.5 0.5

+Z1 BN +Z1 x1 x1
-S100 -D103 -D104
10mm x2 x2
BU
20

Injection unit Injection unit Injection unit

forward end forward backward
51 53
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Integral shift circuit MA4700III Page 52
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1 -AMP0
/46.1

5
PVO PVO
SIN SCOM 24V COM P- P+
DCOM_1 DA3

52
61
P3+ P3- P3
WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5
-P3
0-2A
-XC100P 3B 3A
Ain+ /51.1

A
24V+ Ain- 24V-

-WJ100
-XC100S 3B 3A

4
B+ B /51.1
/50.5
WH WH /50.7
1.0 1.0 /51.1
PP3+ PP3- 24 O24 /51.5
WH WH WH WH /52.1 13 3

70
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 /52.5 0.3 0.3

+J10

=00/32.0 / 1.BP.3

=00/32.0 / 1.B.7
-XJ100 3B 3A
/51.1

0 -XDP3 =
-XDP3
/53.8
1B -XDP3
/53.8
1A
22
BU BN
-WDP3 0.5 0.5

+Z1 1
=00/32.6 / 1.24.5

=00/32.8 / 1.024.4

-DP3
2
20

Proportional
back pressure
52 54
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Back pressure circuit MA4700III Page 53
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/46.1

5
LII DVO DVO DVO DVO

IN7 001 003 002 022

52
C200
WH
1.0

1.B.8 / =00/32.1

C1.3 / =00/31.3

C1.4 / =00/31.3

C4.3 / =00/31.5

C2.3 / =00/31.3
61
B205 B C200A C1 C202 C1 C201 C4 C203 C2
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC500P =
-XC410P 3A 3B -XC500P 1A 1B 2A 2B -XC500P 5A 5B 6A 6B
=04/44.6 -KA1 /54.4 /54.4
=08/66.1 13

14
-XC500S =
-XC410S 3A 3B -XC500S 1A 1B 2A 2B -XC500S 5A 5B 6A 6B

4
=04/44.6 /54.4 /54.4

-WJ500
/56.5
-WJ410 3 9 =08/65.3 1 11 2 12 5 15 6 16

70
=04/44.6 0.3 0.3 =08/65.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J41 +J50 -XJ500 =

-XJ410 3A 3B -XJ500 1A 1B 2A 2B -XJ500 5A 5B 6A 6B
=04/44.6 /54.4 /54.4

-XS205 =
-XS205
/54.1
1A 1B
0 -XD200 =
-XD200
/54.4
1A 1B
-XD202 =
-XD202
/54.5
1A 1B
-XD201 =
-XD201
/54.6
1A 1B
-XD203 =
-XD203
/54.7
1A 1B
22
BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU
-WS205 0.5 0.5 -WD200 0.5 0.5 -WD202 0.5 0.5 -WD201 0.5 0.5 -WD203 0.5 0.5

+P3 NC NO +Z3 x1 x1 x1 x1
-S205 -D200 -D202 -D201 -D203
C x2 x2 x2 x2
20

Mold open
slowly (mold
Mold close fast open low
Mold clamp end Mold close Mold open (differential) pressure)
53 55
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Mold opening and closing circuit MA4700III Page 54
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/46.1

5
LII DVO DVO

IN12 009 010

52
1.BP.4 / =00/32.0

1.B.9 / =00/32.1

C3.1 / =00/31.4

C3.2 / =00/31.4
61
B206 B+ B C204 C3 C205 C3
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC400P =
-XC401P 2A 3A 3B -XC400P 1A 1B 3A 3B
=04/44.3 /55.5

-XC400S =
-XC401S 2A 3A 3B -XC400S 1A 1B 3A 3B

4
=04/44.3 /55.5

-WJ400
-WJ401 2 3 9 =15/71.5 1 11 3 13

70
=04/44.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 =21/72.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J40 +J40 -XJ400 =

-XJ401 2A 3A 3B -XJ400 1A 1B 3A 3B
=04/44.3 /55.5

-XS206 =
-XS206
/55.1
1A 2A 2B
0 -XD204 =
-XD204
/55.5
1A 1B
-XD205 =
-XD205
/55.6
1A 1B
22
BN GY BK BN BU BN BU
-WS206 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WD204 1.0 1.0 -WD205 1.0 1.0
+J30-X31 4 5 6
=15/71.7
4' 5' 6' +P2 x1 x1
-D204 -D205
x2 x2
-WS206W BK BN BU
20

2
+P2
-S206
- +

3 1

Ejector Ejector
backward end Ejector forward backward
54 56
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Thimble circuit MA4700III Page 55
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1 -A1
/46.1 /46.1

5
LII DVO DVO

IN18 013 014

52
1.BP.5 / =00/32.0

1.B.10 / =00/32.1

C2.4 / =00/31.4

C4.4 / =00/31.5
61
B208 B+ B C208 C2 C209 C4
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC410P 4A 5A 5B -XC500P 7A 7B 8A 8B
=04/44.6 /54.4

-XC410S 4A 5A 5B -XC500S 7A 7B 8A 8B

4
=04/44.6 /54.4

-WJ410 4 5 11 -WJ500 7 17 8 18

70
=04/44.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 /54.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J41 +J50
-XJ410 4A 5A 5B -XJ500 7A 7B 8A 8B
=04/44.6 /54.4

-XS208 =
-XS208
/56.1
1A 2A 2B
0 -XD208 =
-XD208
/56.5
1A 1B
-XD209 =
-XD209
/56.6
1A 1B
22
BN BU BN BU
-WS208W BK BN BU -WD208 0.5 0.5 -WD209 0.5 0.5

2
+P3 +Z3 x1 x1
-S208 -D208 -D209
- +
x2 x2

3 1
20

Mold height Mold height Mold height

adjustment adjustment adjustment
sensor check forward backward
55 57
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Mold adjusting circuit MA4700III Page 56
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/46.1

5
LII

IN29

52
1.B.11 / =00/32.1

61
B102 B
WH WH

70
0.5 0.5

-XC600 3A 3B
=21/72.1

-XS102 =
-XS102 1A 1B

4
/57.1

070
22
BN BU
-WS102 0.5 0.5

+Z2 11
-S102
12
20

Oil level check

56 58
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Oil level detection circuit MA4700III Page 57
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/46.1

5
LII

IN16

52
1.B.12 / =00/32.1

61
B101 B
WH WH

70
0.5 0.5

-XC600 1A 1B
=21/72.1

-XS101 =
-XS101 1A 1B

4
/58.1

0 70
22
BN BU
-WS101 0.5 0.5

+Z2 11
-S101 P
12
20

oil filter
check
57 59
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong Inspection circuit of oil filter + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN screen MA4700III Page 58
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/46.1

5
LII LII

IN31 IN32

52
1.B.13 / =00/32.1

61
B272 B273 B
WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC280P 7A 8A 8B
=08/64.3

-XC280S 7A 8A 8B

4
=08/64.3

7 8 18

70
-WJ280 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J28
-XJ280 7A 8A 8B
=08/64.3

-XS272 =
-XS272
/59.1
1A 2A 2B
0
22
BN GY BK
-WS272 0.5 0.5 0.5

+J28 13 21
-S272
14 22
20

Cycle stop
button
Cycle start
button
58 60
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Cycle start circuit MA4700III Page 59
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5
52
61
70
-XF1 = -XF2 = -XF3 = -XF4 = -XF5 = -XF6 = -XF7 = -XF8 =
-XF1 -XF2 -XF3 -XF4 -XF5 -XF6 -XF7 -XF8
/60.2 /60.3 /60.3 /60.4 /60.5 /60.5 /60.6 /60.7

-XC100S 1B -XC200S 5A -XC280S 3A -XC400S 2B -XC401S 2B -XC410S 4B -XC500S 3B -XC501S 5B

4
/51.1 =08/67.1 =08/64.3 /55.5 =04/44.3 =04/44.6 /54.4 =08/63.6

XG1:x1 XG2:x1 XG3:x1

70
WH WH WH
0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC200P 5B -XC280P 3B -XC501P 5A

=08/67.1 =08/64.3 =08/63.6

0
22
20

59 =07/61
Date 2021/12/24 = 06
Drawn by Xia Xudong Circuit for preventing wrong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN insertion of harness MA4700III Page 60
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1
=06/46.1

5
DVO DVO DVO DVO

021 025 026 031

52
C5.4 / =00/31.6

61
C220 C221 C222 C753 C5
WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC501P 6A 6B 7A 8A 7B
=08/63.6

-XC501S 6A 6B 7A 8A 7B

4
=08/63.6

-WJ501 6 16 7 8 17

70
=08/63.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J50
-XJ501 6A 6B 7A 8A 7B
=08/63.6

-XL1 =
-XL1
/61.1
1A 1B 2A 3A 2B
0
22
-X33P = BN BU GY BK1 BK2
-WL1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
-X33S =
-X34P =
-X34S =
-X35P = -X33P 1 -X34P 1 -X35P 1 -X36P 1 -X37P 1
-X35S = /61.0 /61.0 /61.0 /61.0 /61.0
-X36P = -X33S 1 -X34S 1 -X35S 1 -X36S 1 -X37S 1
-X36S = /61.0 /61.0 /61.0 /61.0 /61.0
-WL1W
20

RD YE GN BN BK
-X37P =
-X37S =
+D1 11 21 31
41

-L1
12 22 32
42

Alarm lamp
=06/60 =08/62
Date 2021/12/24 = 07
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Alarm lamp circuit MA4700III Page 61
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1 -KA1 =06-A1 -KA1

/66.1 =06/46.1 /66.1

5
LII S34 S12 LII S22

IN21 IN5

52
1.B.15 / =00/32.1
S12S34
WH
1.0

1.BP.6 / =00/32.0

S11A.1 / =00/32.0

1.B.16 / =00/32.1

S21A.1 / =00/32.0
B

61
WH
1.0

A2
-KR10
A1

B202 B202A B+ S11A S12 B227 B S21A S22

WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC280P 4B 5B 4A 5A -XC501P 3B 4B 3A 4A
11 /64.3 /63.6
-KR10
/62.3 14 12

-XC280S 4B 5B 4A 5A -XC501S 3B 4B 3A 4A

4
/64.3 /63.6

B
WH 14 15 4 5 -WJ501 13 14 3 4

70
1.0 -WJ280 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 /63.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J28 +J50
-XJ280 4B 5B 4A 5A -XJ501 3B 4B 3A 4A
/64.3 /63.6

-XS202
0
-XS202 =
/62.3
1B 2B 1A 2A
-XS227 =
-XS227
/62.6
1B 2B 1A 2A
22
BU BK BN GY BU BK BN GY
-WS202 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 -WS227 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

+P1 13 33 +Z3 11 31
=00/32.1 / 1.B.14

-S202 -S202 -S227 -S227

/62.4 14 /62.3 34 /62.8 12 /62.7 32
20

14
12 11 /62.1
24
22 21 =10/68.2
34
32 31
44
42 41
Front door Front door Front door Front door
closed closed closed 2 closed 2
=07/61 63
Date 2021/12/24 = 08
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Front safety door circuit MA4700III Page 62
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1 -KA1
=06/46.1 /66.1

5
LII S11 S52 S21

IN4

52
1.B.18 / =00/32.2
S11S52
WH
1.0

B200A.1 / =00/32.0

B200A.2 / =00/32.0
S11A.2 / =00/32.0

1.BP.7 / =00/32.0

S21A.2 / =00/32.0
B

61
WH
1.0

A2
-KR11
A1
B200 S11 S11A B200A B+ B200A B200B S21A S21
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC501P =
-XC200P 7A 8A 7B 8B -XC501P 1B 2B 1A 2A
21 /67.1 /63.6
-KR11
/63.7 24 22
-XC501S =
-XC200S 7A 8A 7B 8B -XC501S 1B 2B 1A 2A

4
/67.1 /63.6

B -WJ501
WH 7 8 17 18 =07/61.1 11 12 1 2

70
1.0 -WJ200 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 /62.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J20 +J50 -XJ501 =

-XJ200 7A 8A 7B 8B -XJ501 1B 2B 1A 2A
/67.1 /63.6

-XS200
0
-XS200 =
/63.3
1A 2A 1B 2B
-XS226 =
-XS226
/63.6
1B 2B 1A 2A
22
BN GY BU BK BU BK BN GY
-WS200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 -WS226 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
=00/32.1 / 1.B.17

+P1 33 13 +Z3 11 31
-S200 -S200 -S226 -S226
/63.4 34 /63.3 14 /63.8 12 /63.7 32
20

14
12 11 =01/35.3
24
22 21 /63.1
34
32 31 =10/68.2
44
42 41
Rear door Rear door Rear door Rear door
closed closed closed 2 closed 2
62 64
Date 2021/12/24 = 08
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Rear safety door circuit MA4700III Page 63
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1 -A10 -KR13

=06/46.1 =10/68.1 /66.5

5
LII PT1
S11 S52 S12 S34 S21 S22 41 42
IN9 IN7

52
S11S52 S12S34
WH WH
1.0 1.0

304 304A
WH WH

61
1.0 1.0

302A.1 / =00/32.2

302A.2 / =00/32.2
302.1 / =00/32.1

302.2 / =00/32.1
22 24 32 34
-KR12 -KR12
=10/69.2 21 =10/69.2 31

B201 B221 301 302 302 303 301A 302A 302A 303A B201A

70
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH
1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0
-XC280P =
-XC280P 1A 2A -XC200P 3A 4A -XC280P 1B 2B -XC200P 3B 4B
11 12 14 /64.3 /67.1 /64.3 /67.1 A1
-K201 -KR12 -K201
/64.9 14 12 =10/69.2 11 A2
-XC280S =
-XC280S 1A 2A -XC200S 3A 4A 1B 2B 3B 4B

4
/64.3 /67.1

70
+J28 -XJ280 = +J20 +J28 +J20
-XJ280 1A 2A -XJ200 3A 4A -XJ280 1B 2B -XJ200 3B 4B
/64.3 /67.1 /64.3 /67.1

B B
0
-XS201_1 =
-XS201_1
/64.3
1A 2A -XS201_2
/64.7
1A 2A -XS201_1
/64.3
1B 2B
-XS201_2 =
-XS201_2
/64.7
1B 2B

B+ B
22
WH WH -WS201_1 BN GY -WS201_2 BN GY -WS201_1 BU BK -WS201_2 BU BK WH WH
1.0 1.0 /64.6 0.5 0.5 /64.8 0.5 0.5 /64.3 0.5 0.5 /64.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0

+J28 11 +D1 11 +J28 21 +D1 21

=00/32.2 / 1.B.19

=00/32.3 / 1.B.33

=00/32.1 / 1.BP.8

=00/32.2 / 1.B.20
-S201_1 -S201_2 -S201_1 -S201_2
/64.6 12 /64.8 12 /64.3 22 /64.5 22
20

14
12 11 /64.1

Emergency stop Robot emergency stop Emergency stop Emergency stop Emergency stop Emergency stop
63 65
Date 2022/3/14 = 08
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Emergency stop circuit 1 MA4700III Page 64
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1
=06/46.1

5
LII DVO DVO

IN24 027 028

52
1.B.22 / =00/32.2
C300
WH
1.0

1.BP.9 / =00/32.1

1.B.23 / =00/32.2

C300.3 / =00/32.1
C5.2 / =00/31.6
B

61
WH
1.0

=00/32.1 / C300.1
A2
-KA15 =00/32.1 / C300.2
A1
B204 B204A B+ B C300 C5 C333 C300
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC500P 3A 4A 4B -XC500P 9A 9B -XC500P 10A 10B

11 =06/54.4 =06/54.4 =06/54.4
-KA15
/65.3 14 12

-XC500S 3A 4A 4B -XC500S 9A 9B -XC500S 10A 10B

4
=06/54.4 =06/54.4 =06/54.4

B
WH -WJ500 3 4 14 -WJ500 9 19 10 20

70
1.0 =06/54.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 =06/54.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J50
-XJ500 3A 4A 4B 9A 9B 10A 10B
=06/54.4

-XS204
0
-XS204 =
/65.3
1A 2A 2B
-XD300 =
-XD300
/65.5
1A 1B
-XS277 =
-XS277
/65.6
1A 1B
22
BN GY BK BN BU BN BU
-WS204 0.5 0.5 0.5 -WD300 0.5 0.5 -WS277 0.5 0.5
=00/32.2 / 1.B.21

2 3
+Z3 1 +Z3 11
-S204 -D300 -S277
+ -
2 12
4 1
20

14
12 11 /65.1
24
22 21
34
32 31
44
42 41 Mold close from
Hydraulic Hydraulic beginning to
safety check safety check Mold open from beginning to end end
64 66
Date 2021/12/24 = 08
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Hydraulic safety circuit MA4700III Page 65
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-KA1 =06-A1 -KR13

=06/50.3 =06/46.1 =01/35.3
=06/54.3 /64.3
/62.4 =10/68.0

5
/62.7
/63.3
A1 A2 41 42 LII
A1 A2
IN13

52
61
4 70
B+ B B B124 B+ B
WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

0
22
=00/32.1 / 1.BP.10

=00/32.2 / 1.B.24

=00/32.2 / 1.B.25

=00/32.1 / 1.BP.11

=00/32.2 / 1.B.26
20

Safty relay
reset
65 67
Date 2021/12/24 = 08
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Output circuit of safety relay MA4700III Page 66
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1
=06/46.1

5
LII LII

IN11 IN2

52
1.B.27 / =00/32.2

1.BP.12 / =00/32.1

1.B.28 / =00/32.3
B

61
WH
1.0

A2
-KA8
A1
B203A B+ B203 B B122
WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0

-XC200P =
-XC200P 1A 2A 1B 2B
/67.1 41
-KA8
/67.1 44 42
-XC200S =
-XC200S 1A 2A 1B 2B

4
/67.1
1 2 11 12
-WJ200 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

70
+J20 -XJ200 =
-XJ200 1A 2A 1B 2B
/67.1

-XS203 =
-XS203 1A 2A 1B 2B
/67.1

+J20-X38
-WS203
1
BN
0.5

2
GY
0.5

3
BU
0.5

4
BK
0.5
0 B
22
1' 2' 3' 4' WH
wh bn bu bk 1.0
-WS203W 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+P1 wh bu
=00/32.3 / 1.B.29

-S203
bn bk
20

14
12 11 =06/50.3
24
22 21 =06/51.5
34
32 31 =06/52.5
44
42 41 /67.4
Purge Guard purge guard
closed closed 2
66 =10/68
Date 2021/12/24 = 08
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Nozzle protecting cover circuit MA4700III Page 67
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A10
=08/64.2
/69.1
/70.2

5
PT2 PT2 PT2 PT2 PT2 PT2 PT2 PT2

COMR_1 O3 O2 O4 O5 O1 O6 COMR_2

52
61
D2A D3A

70
WH WH
1.0 1.0
=08-KR13
=08/66.5 =08-KR11 =08-KR10
23 11 =08/63.7 31 =08/62.3 21
24 -KR1
/70.1 14 12 34 32 24 22

4
D1 D9 D2 D3 D11 D4 D5 D6 D7 D10 D12 D16
-WX103 1 9 2 3 11 4 5 6 7 10 12 16
/69.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

70

IMM side
+D1 -X103 =
-X103 1 9 2 3 11 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 13 14 15 16
/68.0
0

Robot side
22
emergency stop of
machine

emergency stop of
machine

mould open
position(handling
device)

safety devices of
machine

safety devices of
machine

ejector back position

ejector forward
position

core pullers 1 in
position 1

core pullers 1 in
position 2

reject (optional)

enable operation with

handling device
(automatic)

mould closed

reserved for future

use of EUROMAP

intermediate mould
opening position

no part available

handling device
reference potential
20

=08/67 69
Date 2021/12/24 = 10
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Manipulator interface circuit 1 MA4700III Page 68
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1 -A10
=06/46.1 /68.1

5
LII PT1 PT1 PT1 PT1 PT1 PT1

IN23 IN2 IN1 IN4 IN3 IN6 IN5

52
1.BP.13 / =00/32.1
1.B.30 / =00/32.3

1.B.31 / =00/32.3
61
B

70
WH
1.0

A2
-KR12
A1

4
B219 B218 D19 B+ B220 B223 B222 B225 B224 B
-WX103 17 18 19 15 20 21 22 23 24 15
/68.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

70

IMM side
B B
WH WH
1.0 1.0

+D1
-X103 17 18 26 19 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 30 31 32
/68.0
0

Robot side
WH WH
WH 1.0 1.0 WH WH WH WH WH
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
22
core pullers 1 in
position 2
Enable mould closed

Mould area free

Mould area free

emergency stop of
handling

emergency stop of
handling

robot operation mode

Enable ejector

core pullers 1 in
position 1

reserved for future

use of EUROMAP

opening

reserved for future

use of EUROMAP

reserved for future

use of EUROMAP

reserved for future

use of EUROMAP

injection moudling
machine reference
potetial
Enable ejector back

forward

Enable full mould

20

14
12 11 =08/64.2
24
22 21 =08/64.5
34
32 31 =08/64.8
44
42 41

68 70
Date 2021/12/24 = 10
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Manipulator interface circuit 2 MA4700III Page 69
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1 -A10
=06/46.1 /68.1

5
RO RO CN1 CN1 PT1 PT1

TO54 TO54 H24V_1 HCOM_1 H24V_2 HCOM_2

52
61
C421

70
WH
1.0

A1
-KR1
A2

4
70
C C- B+ B B+ B
WH WH WH WH WH WH
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
0
=00/32.4 / 1.C.6

=00/32.2 / 1.CN.5

=00/32.1 / 1.BP.15

=00/32.3 / 1.B.34

=00/32.1 / 1.BP.16

=00/32.3 / 1.B.35
22
20

14
12 11 /68.1

Robot
mold open position
69 =15/71
Date 2021/12/24 = 10
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Manipulator interface circuit 3 MA4700III Page 70
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1
=06/46.1

5
LII LII LII LII DVO DVO DVO DVO

IN25 IN27 IN26 IN28 011 012 015 016

52
1.BP.14 / =00/32.1

1.B.32 / =00/32.3

C3.3 / =00/31.4

C3.4 / =00/31.4

C4.1 / =00/31.5

C4.2 / =00/31.5
61
B211 B213 B212 B214 B+ B C206 C3 C207 C3 C210 C4 C211 C4
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC401P 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B -XC400P 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B
=04/44.3 =06/55.5

-XC401S 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B -XC400S 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B

4
=04/44.3 =06/55.5

-WJ401 4 10 5 11 6 12 -WJ400 4 14 5 15 6 16 7 17

70
=04/44.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 =06/55.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J40 +J40
-XJ401 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B -XJ400 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B
=04/44.3 =06/55.5

-XSCRA =
-XSCRA
/71.1
1A 1B
-XSCRB =
-XSCRB
/71.2
1A 1B
-XPCRM =
-XPCRM
/71.2
1A
0 1B
-XD206 =
-XD206
/71.5
1A 1B
-XD207 =
-XD207
/71.6
1A 1B
-XD210 =
-XD210
/71.7
1A 1B
-XD211 =
-XD211
/71.8
1A 1B
22
BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU
-WSCRA 1.0 1.0 -WSCRB 1.0 1.0 -WPCRM 1.0 1.0 -WD206 1.0 1.0 -WD207 1.0 1.0 -WD210 1.0 1.0 -WD211 1.0 1.0

+J30-X31
+J30 +P2 =06/55.1
-X100 10 9 12 11 13 14 15 16 x1 x1
/71.1 -D206 -D207 2 1 3
-X100 = x2 x2
2' 1' 3'
-X100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20

/71.1

Core A in Core A out Core B in Core B out

end end end end Core A in Core A out Core B in Core B out
=10/70 =21/72
Date 2021/12/24 = 15
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Neutron circuit1 MA4700III Page 71
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=06-A1
=06/46.1

5
DVO DVO

019 020

52
C5.1 / =00/31.5

61
C223 C224 C5
WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC600 =
-XC600 6A 7A 7B -XC400P 8A 8B 9A 9B 10A 10B
/72.1 =06/55.5

-XD2234 =
-XD2234 1A 2A 2B -XC400S 8A 8B 9A 9B 10A 10B

4
/72.0 =06/55.5

BN GY BK -WJ400 8 18 9 19 10 20

70
-WD2234 0.5 0.5 0.5 =06/55.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+Z3-X132 +J40
-XJ400 8A 8B 9A 9B 10A 10B
=06/55.5
1 2 3
1' 2' 3'
0
22
20

=15/71 &APB=+/73
Date 2021/12/24 = 21
Drawn by Xia Xudong + C3
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Blow circuit MA4700III Page 72
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

W24024 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

52
WBP1 Cable AWM 2464 3x22AWG Hanwei 026A479

WCAT Cable 1.3m Suntek 026A608

WCAT1 Cable 3m Suntek 026A609

WD100 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

61
WD100.1 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD101 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD102 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD103 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

70
WD104 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD122 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD200 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD201 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

4
WD202 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD203 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

70
WD204 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD205 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD206 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD207 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD208

WD209
Cable

Cable
0 ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝)

‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝)
Taiyo

Taiyo
026A516

026A516
22
WD210 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD211 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD300 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD335 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

20

WD2234 Cable ‎RVV3×0.5（棕、灰、黑) Taiyo 026A517

WDP3 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WFAC Cable 6.5m Suntek 026A619

WJ100 Cable RVV 20×0.3（1-20） Taiyo 026A523

&EFS=21+C3/72 74
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Equipment list : W24024 - WJ100 MA4700III Page 73
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

WJ400 Cable RVV 20×0.3（1-20） Taiyo 026A523

52
WJ401 Cable ‎RVV 12×0.3（黑1-12） Taiyo 026A521

WJ410 Cable ‎RVV 12×0.3（黑1-12） Taiyo 026A521

WJ500 Cable RVV 20×0.3（1-20） Taiyo 026A523

WJ501 Cable RVV 20×0.3（1-20） Taiyo 026A523

61
WKS1 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WKS2 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WL1 Cable ‎RVV5×0.5（棕、蓝、灰、黑1-2） Taiyo 026A519

WM1 Cable A2300407 Qiuguan A2300407

70
WM1.1 Cable ‎6M/DB26/M23-17芯-双屏蔽 Haitian A2300208

WM13 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

WM17 Cable RVV4*1 Haitian 026A147

WMF1 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

4
WMF2 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WMF3 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

70
WMF4 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WMF5 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WMF6 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WPANEL PLC accessories 3LC0808M600 Techmation 001A781

WPCRM

WR1
Cable

Cable
0 2×32/0.2

AWM 2464 3x22AWG

Haitian

Hanwei
026018

026A479
22
WR2 Cable AWM 2464 3x22AWG Hanwei 026A479

WR3 Cable AWM 2464 3x22AWG Hanwei 026A479

WS101 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WS102 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

20

WS200 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

WS201_1 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

WS201_2 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

WS202 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

73 75
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Equipment list : WJ400 - WS202 MA4700III Page 74
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

WS203 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

52
WS204 Cable ‎RVV3×0.5（棕、灰、黑) Taiyo 026A517

WS205 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WS206 Cable 3×32/0.2 Haitian 026019

WS209 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

61
WS226 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

WS227 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

WS272 Cable ‎RVV3×0.5（棕、灰、黑) Taiyo 026A517

WS277 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

70
WS413 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WSCRA Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WSCRB Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WTC01 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

4
WTC02 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

WTC03 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

70
WTC04 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

WTC05 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

WTC06 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

WX103 Cable JZ-110 25G*1 CC 026A183

+C1-IV1

+C1-KM1
Power unit

Contactor
0 SC-N6APM-CF
Haitian

Fujichangshu
E9901392

004A175
22
+C1-MF1 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

+C1-MF2 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

+C1-PE1 Grounding copper bar 110X36X8，14*M4,8*M6 Haitian 685002XC

+C1-Q100 Circuit breaker CVS250F3 Schneider 003A271

20

+C1-RC1 Surge absorber 3ZSQ21150TFL Techmation 008027

+C1-X55 Wiring block WFF70 Weidmuller 025A594

+C2-F11 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F21 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

74 76
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN Equipment list : WS203 - =02+C2-F21 MA4700III Page 75
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

+C2-F22 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

52
+C2-F31 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F41 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F42 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F51 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

61
+C2-F52 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F61 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F62 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-K3 Relay MKS3P Omron 015001;015003

70
+C2-K12 Contactor DILEEM-10-G Moeller 004A007

+C2-KH1 Contactor SC-E3PM-CF Fujichangshu 004A172

+C2-KS1 Solid-state relay GTJ48-40A Tianhao 010018

+C2-KS2 Solid-state relay GTJ48-40A Tianhao 010018

4
+C2-MF3 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

+C2-MF4 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

70
+C2-MT1 PE Haitian PE

+C2-PE2 Grounding copper bar 195X36X8，24*M4，11*M6 Haitian 685A011

+C2-Q111 Miniature circuit breaker FAZ-C32/3 Eaton 003145

+C2-Q121 Miniature circuit breaker FAZ-D2/2 Eaton 003A240

+C2-Q131

+C2-Q136
Micro Circuit breakers

Micro Circuit breakers

0 FAZ-D3/1

FAZ-C2/3
Eaton

Eaton
003A495

003A031
22
+C2-RC20 Surge absorber 3ZSQ21150TFL Techmation 008027

+C2-T1 Isolating transformer JBK3-440VA Tengen 011A347

+C2-TB2_2 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C2-TB7_2 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

20

+C2-TB8_2 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C2-TB10_2 Terminal SAKDU 16 Weidmuller WEI.SAKDU 16

+C3-A10 PLC host 2BP_EXDIO Techmation 001A614

+C3-A1 PLC host PILOT5531 Techmation 001A823

75 77
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong Equipment list : =02+C2-F22 - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN =06+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 76
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

+C3-AJ6 Control card ‎J6V AD4+DA2（1驱） Haitian 001A827

52
+C3-AMP0 PLC accessories SPV Techmation 001690

+C3-F1 Circuit breaker S201-Z10 Abb 003A274

+C3-G2 PLC accessories 1PWR_150_A Mingwei 001296

+C3-G3 PLC accessories 1PWR_300_B Cosel 1PWR_300_B

61
+C3-K201 Relay TRS24VDC1COCID2 Weidmuller 015043

+C3-KA1 Safety relay PNOZ X2.8P Pilz 015A023

+C3-KA8 Relay DRM570024L Weidmuller 015A003;015A010

+C3-KA15 Relay DRM570024L Weidmuller 015A003;015A010

70
+C3-KR1 Relay TRS24VDC1COCID2 Weidmuller 015043

+C3-KR10 Relay DRM570024L Weidmuller 015A003;015A010

+C3-KR11 Relay DRM570024L Weidmuller 015A003;015A010

+C3-KR12 Relay DRM570024L Weidmuller 015A003;015A010

4
+C3-KR13 Safety relay PNOZ X2.8P Pilz 015A023

+C3-MF5 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

70
+C3-MF6 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

+C3-MT2 PE Haitian PE

+C3-P3 Current meter XD-02 Rongda 019A025

+C3-PE4 Grounding copper bar CES-KLF5(6-8)101mm Haitian 029A581

+C3-TB1

+C3-TB2
Terminal

Terminal
0 SAKDK 4NV

SAKDK 4NV
Weidmuller

Weidmuller
WEI.SAKDK 4NV

WEI.SAKDK 4NV
22
+C3-TB3 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB6 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB7 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB8 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

20

+C3-TB11 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB12 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB31 Terminal SAKDK 4N Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4N

+C3-U20 PCB 3A*10,NPN Haitian 001A861

76 78
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong Equipment list : =01+C3-AJ6 - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN =00+C3-U20 MA4700III Page 77
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

+C3-X33P Male connector F1.25-B 027044

52
+C3-X33S Female connector F1.25-A 027045

+C3-X34P Male connector F1.25-B 027044

+C3-X34S Female connector F1.25-A 027045

+C3-X35P Male connector F1.25-B 027044

61
+C3-X35S Female connector F1.25-A 027045

+C3-X36P Male connector F1.25-B 027044

+C3-X36S Female connector F1.25-A 027045

+C3-X37P Male connector F1.25-B 027044

70
+C3-X37S Female connector F1.25-A 027045

+C3-XC100P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

+C3-XC100S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

+C3-XC200P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

4
+C3-XC200S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

+C3-XC280P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

70
+C3-XC280S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

+C3-XC400P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

+C3-XC400S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

+C3-XC401P Male connector ‎1-1318114-6（12位） TE Connectivity 022B290

+C3-XC401S

+C3-XC410P
Female connector

Male connector
0 DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 12P

‎1-1318114-6（12位）
TE Connectivity

TE Connectivity
022B186

022B290
22
+C3-XC410S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 12P TE Connectivity 022B186

+C3-XC500P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

+C3-XC500S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

+C3-XC501P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

20

+C3-XC501S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

+C3-XC600 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+C3-XC601 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+C3-XD122 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

77 79
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong Equipment list : =07+C3-X33P - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN =06+C3-XD122 MA4700III Page 78
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

+C3-XD2234 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

52
+C3-XF1 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XF2 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XF3 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XF4 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

61
+C3-XF5 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XF6 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XF7 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XF8 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

70
+C3-XM13 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+C3-XPE Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+C3-XS101 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+C3-XS102 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

4
+Z1-E1 Heater band ‎φ42×35,230V,200W,L=500mm Haitian 862C456

+Z1-E2 Heater band ‎φ100×55，230V，750W，L=400mm Haitian 862C427

70
+Z1-E3 Heater band ‎φ245X70，250V，2400W Yancheng 862A350Q

+Z1-E4 Heater band ‎φ245×70，230V，2400W Yancheng 862A351Q

+Z1-E5 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B436

+Z1-E6 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B437

+Z1-E7

+Z1-E8
Heater band

Heater band
0 ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W

‎φ190×75,230V,1900W
Haitian

Haitian
862B436

862B437
22
+Z1-E9 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B436

+Z1-E10 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B437

+Z1-E11 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B436

+Z1-E12 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B437

20

+Z1-E13 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B436

+Z1-E14 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B437

+Z1-E15 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B436

+Z1-E16 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B437

78 80
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong Equipment list : =21+C3-XD2234 - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN =02+Z1-E16 MA4700III Page 79
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

+Z1-E17 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,2600W Haitian 862B438

52
+Z1-E18 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,2600W Haitian 862B439

+Z1-E19 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,2600W Haitian 862B438

+Z1-E20 862B442

+Z1-R1 Position transducer LWH-400 Novo 002008

61
+Z1-S100 Magnetic proximity switch FN12-10BLA-K30 Sodron 013A044

+Z1-S103 Inductive proximity sensor E2B-S08KN02-WP-C1-HT Omron 013007

+Z1-1TC01 Thermocouple ‎绝K-ф2.3-L100-3.5M 023A140

+Z1-1TC02 Thermocouple 3.0m Rongda 023005

70
+Z1-1TC03 Thermocouple 2.5m Rongda 023004

+Z1-1TC04 Thermocouple K，2.0m Rongda 023003

+Z1-1TC05 Thermocouple K，1.5m Rongda 023002

+Z1-1TC06 Thermocouple K，1.5m Rongda 023002

4
+Z2-1TC00 Thermocouple 4.0m Rongda 023075

+Z2-X1 Socket Socket:3451 Mennekes 022213;022214

70
+Z2-X2 Socket Socket:1385 Mennekes 022211;022212

+Z2-X3 Socket Socket:1385 Mennekes 022211;022212

+Z3-S226 Limit switch HL-5072 Omron 012A017

+Z3-S227 Limit switch HL-5072 Omron 012A017

+Z3-S277

+Z3-X132
Limit switch

Wiring block
0 HL-5072

X5-1003
Omron

Chenxiang
012A017

025000
22
+P1-S200 Limit switch HL-5071 Omron 012A016

+P1-S202 Limit switch HL-5071 Omron 012A016

+P1-S203 Limit switch PSENma1.4p-50+PESNma1.4-10 Pilz 014A090

+P2-R3 Position transducer LWH-225 Novo 002004

20

+P2-S206 Inductive proximity sensor E2B-M12KS04-WZ-C1 Omron 013001

+P3-R2 Position transducer TLH-750 Novo 002013

+P3-S205 Limit switch D4MC-5040 Omron 012001

+P3-S208 Inductive proximity sensor E2B-S08KN02-WP-C1-HT Omron 013007

79 81
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong Equipment list : =02+Z1-E17 - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN =06+P3-S208 MA4700III Page 80
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

+D1-L1 Indicator light ST56MELH-BZ-3-24-RAG Q-Light 017A125

52
+D1-S201_2 Button ‎Φ22-2a2bTN2BKR-2C TEND 016A179

+D1-X103 Connector Weidmuller 022A080

+J10-TB20 Terminal ST16BU Phoenix PHO.ST16BU

+J10-TB21 Terminal ST16BU Phoenix PHO.ST16BU

61
+J10-TB23 Terminal UK2,5B Phoenix PHO.UK2,5B

+J10-XD100 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XD100.1 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XD101 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

70
+J10-XD102 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XD103 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XD104 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XDP3 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

4
+J10-XJ100 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J10-XS100 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

70
+J10-XS103 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J20-X38 Wiring block TB1504 Haitian 025A039

+J20-XJ200 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J20-XS200 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J20-XS201_2

+J20-XS203
Female connector

Female connector
0 DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P

DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P

TE Connectivity

TE Connectivity
022B198

022B198
22
+J28-A2 PLC host 1PNHTP33600GABC45E_1 Techmation P001A041

+J28-S272 Button M22-DDL-WS-GB1/GB0 Eaton 016030

+J28-X24024 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J28-XJ280 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933
20

+J28-XS201_1 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J28-XS202 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J28-XS272 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J30-X31 Wiring block X5-1010 Chenxiang 025001

80 82
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong Equipment list : =07+D1-L1 - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN =06+J30-X31 MA4700III Page 81
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

+J30-X100 Connector 16A Xudong 022199

52
+J40-XD204 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XD205 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XD206 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XD207 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

61
+J40-XD210 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XD211 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XJ400 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J40-XJ401 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

70
+J40-XPCRM Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XS206 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J40-XS209 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XSCRA Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

4
+J40-XSCRB Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J41-XD335 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

70
+J41-XD413 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J41-XJ410 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J41-XS205 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J41-XS208 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J50-XD200

+J50-XD201
Female connector

Female connector
0 DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P

DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P

TE Connectivity

TE Connectivity
022B197

022B197
22
+J50-XD202 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J50-XD203 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J50-XD208 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J50-XD209 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

20

+J50-XD300 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J50-XJ500 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J50-XJ501 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J50-XL1 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 6P TE Connectivity 022B199

81 83
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong Equipment list : =15+J30-X100 - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN =07+J50-XL1 MA4700III Page 82
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

5
Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

+J50-XS204 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

52
+J50-XS226 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J50-XS227 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J50-XS277 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

61
4 70
0 70
22
20

82
Date 2021/12/24 =
Drawn by Xia Xudong Equipment list : =08+J50-XS204 - +
Appr Li Rili
HAITIAN =08+J50-XS277 MA4700III Page 83
Modification Date Name Normalization Zhu Huadong Total pages 83
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5
52
61
4.4 Electrical drawing

70
Machine model MA4700III

4
Company Name Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Co., Ltd.

70
Controller TECH 5530

Version No.
0 V1.0
22
‎页 79
20

&AAB/2
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Title page / cover sheet MA4700III Page 1
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Catalog HT_TOC

Page Page description Version No. Date Drawn by

5
&AAA/1 Title page / cover sheet 2021/7/28
&AAB/2 Catalog : &AAA/1 - &EFS=01+C3/33 2021/7/28

52
&AAB/3 Catalog : &EFS=01+C3/34 - &EFS=08+C3/66 2021/7/28
&AAB/4 Catalog : &EFS=15+C3/67 - &APB/79 2021/7/28
&AAC/5 Specification 2021/7/28
&AAC/6 Specification 2021/1/21 zhuhuadong
&AAC/7 Specification 2021/7/28

61
&ADB/8 Structure identifier overview 2021/7/28
&ADB/9 Structure identifier overview 2021/7/28
&ADB/10 Structure identifier overview 2021/7/28
&MTL/11 Machine outside 2021/7/28

70
&MTL/12 Heater layout 2021/7/28
&MTL+C1/13 Mounting plate layout 1 2021/7/28
&MTL+C2/14 Mounting plate layout 2 2021/7/28
&MTL+C3/15 Mounting plate layout 3 2021/7/28
&EMX3/16 PLC card overview 2021/7/28

4
&EMX3/17 PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =07+C3-A1 2021/7/28
&EMX3/18 PLC diagram : =07+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 2021/7/28

70
&EMX3/19 PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =15+C3-A1 2021/7/28
&EMX3/20 PLC diagram : =15+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 2021/7/28
&EMX3/21 PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 2021/7/28
&EFS=00+C1/22 Main power circuit 1 2021/7/28
&EFS=00+C1/23 Main power circuit 2 0 2021/7/28
&EFS=00+C1/24 Cooling circuit of distribution box 2021/7/28
&EFS=00+C1/25 Mounting plate grounding of the distribution box 2021/7/28
22
&EFS=00+C2/26 220V control circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=00+C2/27 Public terminal strip power supply 2 2021/7/28
&EFS=00+C3/28 24V control circuit 1 2021/7/28
&EFS=00+C3/29 24V control circuit 2 2021/7/28
20

&EFS=00+C3/30 Public terminal strip power supply 1 2021/7/28

&EFS=01+C1/31 Motor circuit 1 2021/7/28
&EFS=01+C1/32 Motor circuit 2 2021/7/28
&EFS=01+C3/33 Motor start circuit 1 2021/7/28

&AAA/1 3
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Catalog : &AAA/1 - &EFS=01+C3/33 MA4700III Page 2
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Catalog HT_TOC

Page Page description Version No. Date Drawn by

5
&EFS=01+C3/34 Motor start circuit 2 2021/7/28
&EFS=01+C3/35 Motor drive control circuit 2021/7/28

52
&EFS=02+C2/36 Solid state relay fan circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=02+C2/37 Electric heating circuit 1 2021/7/28
&EFS=02+C2/38 Heater circuit 2 2021/7/28
&EFS=02+C3/39 Heater start circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=02+C3/40 Heater temperature control circuit 2021/7/28

61
&EFS=02+C3/41 Heater temperature input circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=03+C2/42 Socket circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=04+C3/43 Lubrication circuit 1 2021/7/28
&EFS=05+C3/44 Cooling circuit 2021/7/28

70
&EFS=06+C3/45 Controller wiring circuit 1 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/46 Controller wiring circuit 2 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/47 Location scale circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/48 Hydraulic oil temperature control circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/49 Injection circuit 2021/7/28

4
&EFS=06+C3/50 Storing circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/51 Integral shift circuit 2021/7/28

70
&EFS=06+C3/52 Back pressure circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/53 Mold opening and closing circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/54 Thimble circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/55 Mold adjusting circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/56 Oil level detection circuit 0 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/57 Inspection circuit of oil filter screen 2021/7/28
&EFS=06+C3/58 Cycle start circuit 2021/7/28
22
&EFS=06+C3/59 Circuit for preventing wrong insertion of harness 2021/7/28
&EFS=07+C3/60 Alarm lamp circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=08+C3/61 Front safety door circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=08+C3/62 Rear safety door circuit 2021/7/28
20

&EFS=08+C3/63 Emergency stop circuit 2021/7/28

&EFS=08+C3/64 Hydraulic safety circuit 2021/7/28
&EFS=08+C3/65 Output circuit of safety relay 2021/7/28
&EFS=08+C3/66 Nozzle protecting cover circuit 2021/7/28

2 4
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Catalog : &EFS=01+C3/34 - +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. &EFS=08+C3/66 MA4700III Page 3
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Catalog HT_TOC

Page Page description Version No. Date Drawn by

5
&EFS=15+C3/67 Neutron circuit1 2021/7/28
&EFS=21+C3/68 Blow circuit 2021/7/28

52
&APB/69 Equipment list : W24024 - WJ100 2021/7/28
&APB/70 Equipment list : WJ200 - WS201_1 2021/7/28
&APB/71 Equipment list : WS201_2 - =00+C1-X55 2021/7/28
&APB/72 Equipment list : =02+C2-F11 - +C2-TB10_2 2021/7/28
&APB/73 Equipment list : =06+C3-A1 - =07+C3-X34P 2021/7/28

61
&APB/74 Equipment list : =07+C3-X34S - =06+C3-XF2 2021/7/28
&APB/75 Equipment list : =06+C3-XF3 - =02+Z1-E19 2021/7/28
&APB/76 Equipment list : =02+Z1-E20 - +J10-TB20 2021/7/28
&APB/77 Equipment list : +J10-TB21 - =06+J40-XD205 2021/7/28

70
&APB/78 Equipment list : =15+J40-XD206 - =08+J50-XS227 2021/7/28
&APB/79 Equipment list : =08+J50-XS277 - =08+J50-XS277 2021/7/28

4
0 70
22
20

3 &AAC/5
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Catalog : &EFS=15+C3/67 - &APB/79 MA4700III Page 4
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

The electrical schematic diagram and equipment marking are carried out in accordance with IEC 81346-1

1. The complete device identifier is divided into page structure and display device identifier

5
=04+C3-K3:A1

52
Connection point designation
Equipment identifier
Location designation
(Example: +C3 is cabinet 3)
Higher-level designation
(Example: =04 is the lubrication circuit)

61
A1 A1 A1 A1
-K3 =05-K4 +C1-K5 =06+C2-K6
A2 A2 A2 A2 = 04
+ C3
Number of pages 5
*a *b *c *d Total pages 100

70
*a...The complete device identifier is: =04+C3-K3, it will not be displayed when the function code and location code are the same as the code in the page structure

*b...... The complete device identifier is: =05+C3-K4, it will not be displayed when the position code is the same as the code in the page structure

*c...... The complete device identifier is: =04+C1-K5, it will not be displayed when the function code is the same as the code in the page structure

*d...... The complete device identifier is: =06+C2-K6, which will be displayed when the function code and location code are different from the code in the page structure

4
2. Terminal strip identification
+C2-TB2:3:3

70
Terminal block name Definition
Connection point designation TB1 B
Terminal name TB2 C
Terminal strip identification TB3 B+/B-
Location designation TB6 C+/C-
(Example: +C2 is cabinet 2) TB7 220
TB8 0220
Single terminal TB1：1：2 TB1：1：1 TB9 PE
1 0 TB10 N
-TB1 1 TB11 24
2
TB12 024
TB13 T0
TB14 T1
22
TB19 Heating(Cabinet)
Double-layer terminal, connection point: 1234 are all conductive TB20 Heating(Junction Box)
TB2：3：4 TB2：3：3 TB21 Null Line(Junction Box)
-TB2 1 2 3 4
3
TB23 Thermocouple(Junction Box)
TB31 Short Circuit（Cabinet）
TB2：3：2 TB2：3：1 TB32 Input Short Circuit（Mold Closing Area）
TB33 Output Short Circuit（Mold Closing Area）
20

Double terminal TB31：2：3

TB31：2：4
Connection point: 12 conduction, 34 conduction,
12 and 34 do not conduct each other
1 3
-TB31 1 2
2 4
TB31：1：2
TB31：1：1
Due to the limited printing space on the actual terminal strip, the terminal strip code and connection point code are omitted
For example: TB2: 3: 3, the actual printing is: 2:3
&AAB/4 6
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Specification MA4700III Page 5
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3.Location designation J28 Button box junction box 1

P3 Tail plate P2 Moving plate P1 Fixed plate J29 Button box junction box 2

5
D1 Protection door

52
61
C1 Distribution box 1

4 70
Z3 Frame in the mold closing area Z2 Frame in the injection area

70
J10 Injection junction box 1 J20 Fixed plate junction box 1
J21 Fixed plate junction box 2 J30 Moving plate junction box 1

Z1 Injection seat J40 Tail plate junction box 1

0 J41 Tail plate junction box 2
22
20

J50 Frame junction box 1

J51 Frame junction box 2

5 7
Date 2021/1/21 =
Drawn by zhuhuadong Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Specification MA4700III Page 6
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4. Connector and cable device identifier

5
=06-XC500P:1A

52
=06-XJ500:1A =06-XS205:1A =06-XC600:1A
Connection point designation
Connection point designation Connection point designation Connection point designation Identification of male and female pins:
1 digit serial number Component equipment identifier Serial number, starting at 600 male P, female S (for example, male pin P)
Junction box serial number Connector identification Connector identification 1 digit serial number
Connector identification Higher-level designation Higher-level designation Junction box serial number
Higher-level designation (Example: =06 is the control circuit) Connector identification
Higher-level designation

61
1. Junction box wiring harness male connector 2. Component connectors 3. Cabinet wiring harness male connector (discrete wire) 4. Cabinet wiring harness male and female to plug connectors

WJ500 WS205

70
1 digit serial number
Junction box serial number Component equipment identifier
Cable identification Cable identification
1. Wire harness cable 2. Component cable

Example: Example:

4
Cabinet wiring harness male and female to plug connectors (male):XC501P Cabinet wiring harness male connector (discrete wire):XC600

70
Cabinet wiring harness male and female to plug connectors (female):XC501S
Component connectors:XS205

Wire harness cable:WJ501

Junction box identifier:J50

0
22
Component cable:WS205
Junction box wiring harness male connector:XJ501

Component connectors:XS205

Component cable:WS205
20

Component:S205 Component:S205

6 &ADB/8
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Specification MA4700III Page 7
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Structure identifier overview HT_STRUCTURE_OVERVIEW

Full designation Labeling Structure description

5
&AAA Document type Cover sheet

52
&AAB Document type Table of contents

&AAC Document type Specification

&ADB Document type Structure description

&MTL Document type Panel layout

61
&EMX3 Document type PLC diagram

&EMX4 Document type Safety PLC diagram

&EFS Document type Electrical schematic diagram

&EFA Document type Overview map

70
&EPA Document type Summarized parts list

&APB Document type Device tag list

&EMA1 Document type Terminal-strip overview

&EMA2 Document type Terminal diagram

4
&EMA3 Document type Connection list

&EMB1 Document type Cable overview

70
&EMB2 Document type Cable diagram

&EMX1 Document type Plug overview

&EMX2 Document type Plug diagram

=00 Higher-level designation Power distribution circuit

=01

=02
Higher-level designation

Higher-level designation
0 Power circuit

Heating circuit
22
=03 Higher-level designation Socket circuit

=04 Higher-level designation Lubrication circuit

=05 Higher-level designation Cooling circuit

=06 Higher-level designation Control circuit

20

=07 Higher-level designation Alarm circuit

=08 Higher-level designation Safety circuit

=09 Higher-level designation Automatic door

&AAC/7 9
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Structure identifier overview MA4700III Page 8
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Structure identifier overview HT_STRUCTURE_OVERVIEW

Full designation Labeling Structure description

5
=10 Higher-level designation Robot

52
=11 Higher-level designation Hopper magnet interface

=12 Higher-level designation Mold opening and closing proportional valve

=13 Higher-level designation External socket

=14 Higher-level designation Increased electric power

61
=15 Higher-level designation Core

=16 Higher-level designation Hot runner

=17 Higher-level designation Energy consumption display

=18 Higher-level designation Display device for measuring clamping force

70
=19 Higher-level designation Injection proportioning valve

=20 Higher-level designation Safety confirmation switch interface for return of mold top plate

=21 Higher-level designation Air valve

=22 Higher-level designation Needle valve

4
=23 Higher-level designation Signal interface of volumetric doser

=24 Higher-level designation Electrical interface of peripheral safety equipment

70
=25 Higher-level designation Gas-assisted electrical interface

=26 Higher-level designation Carriage position transducer

=27 Higher-level designation Closed loop control of the temperature at the feeding port

=28 Higher-level designation Neutron and needle valve pressure relief

=29

=30
Higher-level designation

Higher-level designation
0 Injection signal interface

Mold adjustment limit switch

22
=31 Higher-level designation Oil temperature cooling water valve

=32 Higher-level designation Discharge detection

=33 Higher-level designation Feeding platform

=34 Higher-level designation Electrical interface of hydraulic fixture

20

=35 Higher-level designation Unscrewing

=36 Higher-level designation Floodlight

=37 Higher-level designation electric heater oil

8 10
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Structure identifier overview MA4700III Page 9
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Structure identifier overview HT_STRUCTURE_OVERVIEW

Full designation Labeling Structure description

5
+C1 Location designation Distribution box 1

52
+C2 Location designation Distribution box 2

+C3 Location designation Distribution box 3

+Z1 Location designation Injection seat

+Z2 Location designation Frame in the injection area

61
+Z3 Location designation Frame in the mold closing area

+P1 Location designation Fixed plate

+P2 Location designation Moving plate

+P3 Location designation Tail plate

70
+D1 Location designation Protection door

+J10 Location designation Injection junction box 1

+J11 Location designation Injection junction box 2

+J20 Location designation Fixed plate junction box 1

4
+J21 Location designation Fixed plate junction box 2

+J28 Location designation Button box junction box 1

70
+J29 Location designation Button box junction box 2

+J30 Location designation Moving plate junction box 1

+J31 Location designation Moving plate junction box 2

+J40 Location designation Tail plate junction box 1

+J41

+J50
Location designation

Location designation
0 Tail plate junction box 2

Frame junction box 1

22
+J51 Location designation Frame junction box 2
20

9 &MTL/11
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Structure identifier overview MA4700III Page 10
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-M1

=06+P3-S205 =08+P1-S202 =06+J28-S1 =08+J28-S201_1 =06+Z1-S100 =06+Z1-R1

=07+D1-L1

5
=06+P2-R3

=06+Z1-S103

52
=00+C1-MF2

61
=00+C1-MF1

70
=06+Z2-S102

=00+C1-Q100
=08+Z3-S227 =08+Z3-S277 =00+C3-MF5 =00+C2-MF3
=00+C3-MF6 =00+C2-MF4

4
=02+Z1-E1
...... =08+P1-S203
=02+Z1-Ex =08+P1-S200 =06+P3-S208
=04+P2-S209
=08+D1-S201_2 =06+P2-S206

0 70 =06+P3-R2
22
20

=03+Z2-X1
=03+Z2-X2
=03+Z2-X3

=06+Z2-S101 =08+Z3-S226 =04+Z3-M13

=01+Z2-M1

&ADB/10 12
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Machine outside MA4700III Page 11
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5
52
Heater 4 zone Heater 3 zone Heater 2 zone
Heater 1 zone

61
Heater 6 zone Heater 5 zone

E20 E19 E18 E17 E16 E15 E14 E13 E12 E11 E10 E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1

1TC06 1TC05 1TC04 1TC03 1TC02 1TC01

4 70
0 70
22
20

11 +C1/13
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Heater layout MA4700III Page 12
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-M1

5
=01-LC1 =01-KM1

52
61
=00-Q100
70
=01-FR1

=00-X55
=01-IV1

4
0 70
22
20

+/12 +C2/14
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C1
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Mounting plate layout 1 MA4700III Page 13
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
M1

5
52
=00-T1

61
0

T1

11 12
1
2
3
70
=00-Q121

=03-Q111
=05-Q136
=04-Q131

=02-F22

=02-F42

=02-F62
=02-F21

=02-F31

=02-F61
=02-F41

=02-F52
=02-F11

=02-F51
=05-K12
=04-K3

=02-KH1

4
=02-KS1

1 1 1
0 1 1
70 =02-KS2

1 1 1 1 1
22
20

+C1/13 +C3/15
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C2
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Mounting plate layout 2 MA4700III Page 14
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-M1

5
52
61
=06-AMP0
=08-KA1
=01-KA16

=08-KA15
=08-KR11

=00-F1
=08-KA8
=21-XC600

=08-XC601

=00-U20 13 23 33

70
A1 Y1 Y2
Pilz
PZE X4
=04-XC401P =08-XC501P =06-XC400P =06-XC100P

=04-XC410P =08-XC280P =06-XC500P =08-XC200P

CH.1
CH.2

13 23 33 43

19396
14 24 34 44

43 44 A2

14 24 34

4
=00-G2

=00-G3
70
=06-A1

=01-AJ6
Y
0
22
345
12

67
0

89A
EF

BCD
20

=06-P3

+C2/14 &EMX3+/16
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Mounting plate layout 3 MA4700III Page 15
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
Modification
&MTL+C3/15
0

Date
DCOM
+10V
DA1
AD1
DA2
AD2

Name
DCOM_1
ACOM
DA3
+10V

COM
DA4

+24V
PVO
AD3

PI
DCOM_2
1

AD4

Appr
Date
DA5
ACOM_1

Drawn by
DA6
+10V_1
DCOM_3

Normalization
(Potentiometer Input)
AD5
(Proportion Valve Output)
DA7

X1
AD6
DA8
ACOM_2

Li Rili
O01

2021/7/28
+24V

Cui Zhigang
O02

ADMINISTRATOR
IN1 O03
IN2
2

O04
IN3 O05
IN4 O06

TALK2 TALK1
RUN2 RUN1
IN5 O07
IN6 0
EF
12 O08
IN7

BCD
345
89A
67
O09
IN8
O10

TR
IN9 O11

COM

Co., Ltd.
MCAN-
MCAN+
SCAN-
SCAN+
IN10 O12
3

IN11 O13

NET4
NET5
NET1
(PANEL)

IN12 O14
IN13 O15

Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery

IN14
20
O16
IN15 O17
IN16 O18
DVO

IN17 O19
IN18 O20
22
4

IN19 O21
O22

LII
IN20
(Director Valve Output )

0
IN21
IN22
O23
O24
IN23 O25
IN24 O26

(Limit Installation Input)

PLC card overview

O27
70
IN25
IN26 O28
IN27 O29
5

IN28
IN29
4 O30
O31
IN30 O32
IN31 HCOM
70
IN32 HCOM_1
PCOM H24V
P24V
SC
TR1
6

61
TR2
TR3
TC1+ TR4
TC1- TR5
TC2+ TR6
52
PILOT5530

TC2- TR7
TC3+ TR8
TC3-
TC4+
TR9
5
7

TOA52
TC4-
TO52
TC5+
TOA53
TC5-
TO53
TI

TC6+ TOA54
TC6- TO54
RO

TC7+ TOA55
TO55
(Thermocouple Input)

TC7-
(Relay Output )

TC8+
MA4700III
8

Y
TC8- DL
TC9+ MOTON
TC9- MOTOFF
TC10+ ACO
TC10- ACIN
+
=

Page
Total pages
9

PE
X1

79
16
17
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+C3-A1

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Symbolic address Placement
PVO DCOM

52
PVO DA1
PVO DA2
PVO DCOM_1 Proportional back pressure- &EFS/52.1
PVO DA3 Proportional back pressure+ +C3-AMP0:SIN &EFS/52.1
PVO DA4

61
PVO DCOM_2
PVO DA5
PVO DA6
PVO DCOM_3
PVO DA7

70
PVO DA8
DVO 001 Mold close +C3-KA1:13 &EFS/53.3
DVO 002 Mold close fast (differential) +Z3-D201:x1 &EFS/53.7
DVO 003 Mold open +Z3-D202:x1 &EFS/53.6
DVO 004 Injection +C3-KA1:23 &EFS/49.3
DVO 005 Suck back +Z1-D101:x1 &EFS/49.6

4
DVO 006 charge +C3-KA8:21 &EFS/50.5
DVO 007 Injection unit forward +C3-KA8:31 &EFS/51.5

70
DVO 008 Injection unit backward +Z1-D104:x1 &EFS/51.6
DVO 009 Ejector forward +P2-D204:x1 &EFS/54.5
DVO 010 Ejector backward +P2-D205:x1 &EFS/54.6
DVO 011 Core A in +P2-D206:x1 &EFS=15/67.5
DVO 012 Core A out +P2-D207:x1 &EFS=15/67.6
DVO 013 Mold height adjustment forward
0 +Z3-D208:x1 &EFS/55.5
DVO 014 Mold height adjustment backward +Z3-D209:x1 &EFS/55.6
DVO 015 Core B in +J30-X31:2 &EFS=15/67.7
22
DVO 016 Core B out +J30-X31:1 &EFS=15/67.8
DVO 017
DVO 018
DVO 019 Air A (movable die) +Z3-X132:1 &EFS=21/68.1
DVO 020 Air B (fixed die) +Z3-X132:2 &EFS=21/68.1
20

DVO 021 Red alarm lamp +D1-L1:11 &EFS=07/60.1

DVO 022 Mold open slowly (mold open low pressure) +Z3-D203:x1 &EFS/53.8
DVO 023
DVO 024 Oil cooling water +Z2-D122:1 &EFS/48.5
DVO 025 Yellow alarm lamp +D1-L1:21 &EFS=07/60.1

16 18
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =07+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 17
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+C3-A1

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Symbolic address Placement
DVO 026 Green alarm lamp +D1-L1:31 &EFS=07/60.2

52
DVO 027 Mold open from beginning to end +Z3-D300:1 &EFS=08/64.5
DVO 028 Mold close from beginning to end +C3-A1:DVO:027 &EFS=08/64.6
DVO 029
DVO 030
DVO 031 +D1-L1:41 &EFS=07/60.2

61
DVO 032 Tail plate support lubrication +P3-D335:1 &EFS=04/43.6
DVO HCOM 0V &EFS/45.2
DVO HCOM_1
DVO H24V 24V &EFS/45.3
RO SC &EFS=02/39.4

70
RO TR1 Heating 1 +C2-KS1:X1:1 &EFS=02/40.1
RO TR2 Heating 2 +C2-KS1:X2:1 &EFS=02/40.2
RO TR3 Heating 3 +C2-KS1:X4:1 &EFS=02/40.4
RO TR4 Heating 4 +C2-KS1:X5:1 &EFS=02/40.4
RO TR5 Heating 5 +C2-KS2:X2:1 &EFS=02/40.6
RO TR6 Heating 6 +C2-KS2:X4:1 &EFS=02/40.8

4
RO TR7
RO TR8

70
RO TR9
RO TOA52 AMP cooling +C3-TB2:2 &EFS=05/44.6
RO TO52 = +C2-K12:A1 &EFS=05/44.6
RO TOA53 Lubrication +C3-TB6:1 &EFS=04/43.5
RO TO53 = +C2-K3:2 &EFS=04/43.5
RO TOA54 0
RO TO54
RO TOA55 Electric heating +C3-TB7:2 &EFS=02/39.2
22
RO TO55 = +C2-KH1:A1 &EFS=02/39.1
RO Y
RO DL
RO MOTON +C3-KA16:11 &EFS=01/33.3
RO MOTOFF
20

RO ACO
RO ACIN &EFS=02/39.3
PI +10V
PI AD1
PI AD2 Mold Position +C3-A1:PI:ACOM_1 &EFS/47.4

17 19
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. PLC diagram : =07+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 18
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+C3-A1

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Symbolic address Placement
PI ACOM

52
PI +10V_1 Mold Position + &EFS/47.4
PI AD3 Ejector Position +C3-A1:PI:+10V_2 &EFS/47.6
PI AD4
PI ACOM_1 Mold Position - &EFS/47.3
PI +10V_2 Ejector Position + &EFS/47.6

61
PI AD5
PI AD6
PI ACOM_2 Ejector Position - &EFS/47.6
PI +24V_1
LII IN1

70
LII IN2 purge guard closed 2 +C3-KA8:41 &EFS=08/66.5
LII IN3
LII IN4 Rear door closed +C3-KR11:21 &EFS=08/62.1
LII IN5 Front door closed 2 +Z3-S227:11 &EFS=08/61.7
LII IN6
LII IN7 Mold clamp end +P3-S205:NO &EFS/53.1

4
LII IN8
LII IN9 Emergency stop +J28-S201_1:11 &EFS=08/63.1

70
LII IN10
LII IN11 Purge Guard closed +J20-X38:3 &EFS=08/66.2
LII IN12 Ejector backward end +J30-X31:4 &EFS/54.1
LII IN13 Safty relay reset +C3-KA1:42 &EFS=08/65.3
LII IN14 Injection unit forward end +Z1-S100:BN &EFS/51.1
LII IN15 Lubrication oil level check
0 +Z3-M13:2 &EFS=04/43.2
LII IN16 oil filter check +Z2-S101:11 &EFS/57.1
LII IN17 Charge RPM check +Z1-S103:2 &EFS/50.1
22
LII IN18 Mold height adjustment sensor check +P3-S208:2 &EFS/55.1
LII IN19 Tail plate support lubrication detection +P3-S413:11 &EFS=04/43.7
LII IN20 +C3-KA16:21 &EFS=01/33.1
LII IN21 Safety door closed +P1-S202:13 &EFS=08/61.3
LII IN22
20

LII IN23
LII IN24 Hydraulic safety check +C3-KA15:11 &EFS=08/64.1
LII IN25 Core A in end +J30-X100:10 &EFS=15/67.1
LII IN26 Core B in end +J30-X100:12 &EFS=15/67.2
LII IN27 Core A out end +J30-X100:9 &EFS=15/67.1

18 20
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =15+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 19
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+C3-A1

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Symbolic address Placement
LII IN28 Core B out end +J30-X100:11 &EFS=15/67.2

52
LII IN29 Oil level check +Z2-S102:11 &EFS/56.1
LII IN30 Lubrication pressure check +P2-S209:13 &EFS=04/43.4
LII IN31 Cycle start button +J28-S272:13 &EFS/58.1
LII IN32 Cycle stop button +J28-S272:21 &EFS/58.1
LII PCOM 0V &EFS/45.3

61
LII P24V 24V &EFS/45.4
TI TC1+ Temperature zone 1 + +Z1-1TC01:+ &EFS=02/41.1
TI TC1- Temperature zone 1 - +Z1-1TC01:- &EFS=02/41.1
TI TC2+ Temperature zone 2 + +Z1-1TC02:+ &EFS=02/41.2
TI TC2- Temperature zone 2 - +Z1-1TC02:- &EFS=02/41.2

70
TI TC3+ Temperature zone 3 + +Z1-1TC03:+ &EFS=02/41.3
TI TC3- Temperature zone 3 - +Z1-1TC03:- &EFS=02/41.3
TI TC4+ Temperature zone 4 + +Z1-1TC04:+ &EFS=02/41.3
TI TC4- Temperature zone 4 - +Z1-1TC04:- &EFS=02/41.4
TI TC5+ Temperature zone 5 + +Z1-1TC05:+ &EFS=02/41.4
TI TC5- Temperature zone 5 - +Z1-1TC05:- &EFS=02/41.4

4
TI TC6+ Temperature zone 6 + +Z1-1TC06:+ &EFS=02/41.5
TI TC6- Temperature zone 6 - +Z1-1TC06:- &EFS=02/41.5

70
TI TC7+
TI TC7-
TI TC8+
TI TC8-
TI TC9+
TI TC9- 0
TI TC10+ Oil temperature thermocouple + +Z2-1TC00:+ &EFS/48.1
TI TC10- Oil temperature thermocouple - +Z2-1TC00:- &EFS/48.1
22
X1 +24V 24V &EFS/45.1
X1 COM 0V &EFS/45.1
X1 NET1 PANEL &EFS/45.4
X1 NET5 CAT &EFS=01/35.9
X1 SCAN+
20

X1 SCAN-
X1 COM_1
X1 TR
X1 MCAN+
X1 MCAN-

19 21
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. PLC diagram : =15+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 20
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PLC diagram HT_PLC_diagram

PLC card =06+C3-A1

5
Plug DT Connection point designation Function text Symbolic address Placement
X1 IO_EXPAND

52
X1 PE PE &EFS/45.5

61
4 70
0 70
22
20

20 &EFS=00+C1/22
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. PLC diagram : =06+C3-A1 - =06+C3-A1 MA4700III Page 21
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

R / 23.0

S / 23.0

5
T / 23.0

N.00 / +C2/27.5

52
2 4 6
I> I> I>

-Q100
250A 1 3 5

61
70
-X55
232A
-PE1
15

4
1;2

0 70
22
-W01 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 16.0
20

=01/31.1 / R.01

=01/31.1 / S.01

=01/31.2 / T.01
L1 L2 L3 N PE

User power distribution recommendations Motor 1

&EMX3=+/21 23
Date 2021/7/28 = 00
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C1
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Main power circuit 1 MA4700III Page 22
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
R R R
BK BK BK
6.0 1.0 1.0
22.9 / R
S S
BK BK
6.0 1.0
22.9 / S

5
T T T
BK BK BK
6.0 1.0 1.0
22.9 / T

52
61
4 70
0 70
22
20
=02+C2/37.1 / R.02

=02+C2/37.1 / S.02

=02+C2/37.1 / T.02

=03+C2/42.1 / R.03

=03+C2/42.1 / S.03

=03+C2/42.1 / T.03

+C2/26.1 / R.00

+C2/26.1 / T.00

=05+C3/44.1 / R.05

=05+C3/44.1 / S.05

=05+C3/44.1 / T.05
Electric heating Socket Transformer Cooling
22 24
Date 2021/7/28 = 00
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C1
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Main power circuit 2 MA4700III Page 23
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2.0220.1 / +C2/27.3

2.0220.2 / +C2/27.3

2.0220.3 / +C2/27.3

2.0220.4 / +C2/27.3

1.0220.1 / +C3/30.2

1.0220.2 / +C3/30.2
2.220.1 / +C2/27.1

2.220.2 / +C2/27.1

2.220.3 / +C2/27.1

2.220.4 / +C2/27.1

1.220.1 / +C3/30.1

1.220.2 / +C3/30.1
5
52
61
70
+C1-PE1:3 4 +C2-PE2:24 25 26 27

4
PE PE PE PE PE PE
BK BK GNYE BK BK GNYE BK BK GNYE BK BK GNYE BK BK GNYE BK BK GNYE

70
-WMF1 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WMF2 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WMF3 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WMF4 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WMF5 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WMF6 1.0 1.0 1.0

0
22
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

+C1-MF1
M +C1-MF2
M +C2-MF3
M +C2-MF4
M +C3-MF5
M +C3-MF6
M
1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~
3 3 3 3 3 3
20

Middle box fan Middle box fan

Right box fan 1 Right box fan 2 1 2 Right box fan 1 Right box fan 2
23 25
Date 2021/7/28 = 00
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C1
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Cooling circuit of distribution box MA4700III Page 24
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5
52
61
70
+Z2 +C2-PE2
+C2-MT1:PE -PE1:21 +C3-MT2:PE -PE1:22 -PE1:20 +C2/26.4 15 -PE1:10
+C2/26.4
+C3/28.3
=01+C3/35.2
=06+C3/45.5
=06+C3/46.3

4
=03+C2/42.2
+C2/26.4
/24.4

PE PE
0 70
PE PE
22
GNYE GNYE GNYE GNYE
6.0 6.0 16.0 16.0
20

24 +C2/26
Date 2021/7/28 = 00
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Mounting plate grounding of the + C1
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. distribution box MA4700III Page 25
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

+C1/23.7 / T.00

5
+C1/23.6 / R.00

52
1 3
-Q121
2A 2 4

61
+C2-PE2:1

380 O380 PE
BK BK GNYE
1.0 1.0 1.0

70
+C2-PE2:13
380V 0V PE

-T1 PE
440VA GNYE
1.0
220V 0V_1 GND

4
220V
+C2-PE2:2

70
PE
GNYE
1.0

220 O220
RD RD
1.0
0 1.0
22
27.1 / 220

27.3 / 0220
20

220V power supply

+C1/25 27
Date 2021/7/28 = 00
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C2
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. 220V control circuit MA4700III Page 26
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 26

Modification
0

Date
TB7_2
TB2_2
26.3 / 220 =02+C3/40.0 / 2.C.1

Name
+C1/24.1 / 2.220.1 =04+C3/43.5 / 2.C.2
+C1/24.2 / 2.220.2 / 2.C.3
+C1/24.3 / 2.220.3 / 2.C.4

1
1

+C1/24.5 / 2.220.4 / 2.C.5

1

=02/36.1 / 2.220.5 / 2.C.6

Appr
Date
=02/36.2 / 2.220.6 / 2.C.7

Drawn by
/ 2.220.7 +C3/30.5 / C.0

2
2
C
WH
1.0

/ 2.220.8

Normalization
/ 2.220.9
/ 2.220.10
+C3/30.1 / 220.0

Li Rili
3

RD

2021/7/28
1.0
220

Cui Zhigang
ADMINISTRATOR
2

TB8_2
26.3 / 0220
+C1/24.1 / 2.0220.1

Co., Ltd.
+C1/24.2 / 2.0220.2
3

+C1/24.4 / 2.0220.3
1

+C1/24.5 / 2.0220.4
=01+C3/33.5 / 2.0220.5
=02/36.1 / 2.0220.6

Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery

20
=02/36.3 / 2.0220.7
2

=02+C3/39.1 / 2.0220.8
/ 2.0220.9
/ 2.0220.10
+C3/30.2 / 0220.0
3

RD
1.0
O220

22
4

070
-TB10_2
1
5

4
Public terminal strip power supply 2
=02/37.1 / 2.N.1
2
N
BU
6.0

=02/38.1 / 2.N.2 N.00 / +C1/22.9

3
N
BU
6.0

=03/42.2 / 2.N.3
70
4
N
BU
6.0
6

61
52
5
7

MA4700III
8

+
=

Page
Total pages
9

79
27
C2
00
+C3/28
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1.0220.3 / 30.2

1.0220.4 / 30.2
1.220.3 / 30.1

1.220.4 / 30.1

5
52
+C2-PE2:5 6

61
220 O220 PE 220 O220 PE
RD RD GNYE RD RD GNYE
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

70
-G2 G3
150W L N PE 300W L N PE
Switching power supply Switching power supply
+V1 +V2 -V1 -V2 +V1 +V2 -V1 -V2

4
24V 24V

70
CC
WH
1.0

1
-F1
10A 2

24
WH
1.0
0 O24
WH
1.0
C24
WH
1.0
C
WH
1.0
C-
WH
1.0
22
30.1 / 24

30.2 / 024

=04/43.1 / C24

30.5 / C

30.5 / C-
20

+C2/27 29
Date 2021/7/28 = 00
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. 24V control circuit 1 MA4700III Page 28
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 28

Modification
0

Date
-U20

Name
1.1
=06/46.1 / 24A

WH
0.5
24A
1.2
/ PS+
1

Appr
Date
1.3

Drawn by
1.4
1.24.1 / 30.1

Normalization
1
WH
24

1.0

2.1
30.1 / B+

WH
B+

1.0

Li Rili
2.2

2021/7/28

Cui Zhigang
ADMINISTRATOR
2.3
2

2.4
1.C.1 / 30.5
C

2
WH
1.0

3.1
=06/49.6 / C1.1

3.2
=06/49.7 / C1.2

3.3
=06/53.5 / C1.3

3.4
=06/53.6 / C1.4 1.C.2 / 30.5

Co., Ltd.
C
WH
1.0

3-9

4.1
3

=06/49.8 / C2.1

4.2
=06/50.6 / C2.2

Remarks:
4.3

Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery

20
=06/53.8 / C2.3

4.4
=06/55.6 / C2.4

=06/54.6 / C3.1 5.1

22 5.2

=06/54.7 / C3.2
4

5.3

=15/67.6 / C3.3
0
=15/67.7 / C3.4
5.4
6.1

=15/67.8 / C4.1
6.2

70

24V control circuit 2

=15/67.9 / C4.2
6.3

=06/53.7 / C4.3
5

4
6.4

=06/55.7 / C4.4
7.1

=21/68.2 / C5.1
7.2

=08/64.5 / C5.2
70
7.3

/ C5.3
7.4

=07/60.2 / C5.4
6

8.1

61
=06/51.6 / C6.1
8.2

=06/51.7 / C6.2
8.3

/ C6.3
52
8.4

/ C6.4
9.1

=04/43.7 / C7.1
5
9.2
7

/ C7.2
9.3

/ C7.3

/ C7.4
All B+ (inside and outside the box) pass through the terminal strip and then the fuse of the PCB board
9.4 10.1

/ C8.1

/ C8.2
MA4700III

/ C8.3
8

10.2 10.3 10.4

=06/48.6 / C8.4 1.C.3 / 30.6

C
WH

10
1.0

+
=

Page
Total pages
9

79
29
C3
00
30
 29

Modification
0

Date
TB11
TB7
TB3
TB1
28.3 / 24 +C2/27.2 / 220.0 29.2 / B+ =06/45.3 / B

Name
29.1 / 1.24.1 +C1/24.7 / 1.220.1 =01+C1/32.4 / 1.BP.1 =01+C1/32.4 / 1.B.1
=01/35.1 / 1.24.2 +C1/24.8 / 1.220.2 =01/34.1 / 1.BP.2 =01/33.1 / 1.B.2
=01/35.3 / 1.24.3 28.3 / 1.220.3 =06/50.2 / 1.BP.3 =01/34.4 / 1.B.3

1
1
1
1

=06/45.1 / 1.24.4 28.5 / 1.220.4 =06/52.6 / 1.BP.4 =04/43.3 / 1.B.4

1

=06/52.4 / 1.24.5 =02/39.2 / 1.220.5 =06/54.2 / 1.BP.5 =04/43.4 / 1.B.5

Appr
Date
/ 1.24.6 =02/39.3 / 1.220.6 =06/55.2 / 1.BP.6 =04/43.8 / 1.B.6

Drawn by
/ 1.24.7 / 1.220.7 =08/62.4 / 1.BP.7 =06/50.2 / 1.B.7

2
2
2
2

/ 1.24.8 / 1.220.8 =08/64.4 / 1.BP.8 =06/51.1 / 1.B.8

Normalization
/ 1.24.9 / 1.220.9 =08/65.1 / 1.BP.9 =06/52.6 / 1.B.9
/ 1.24.10 / 1.220.10 =08/66.1 / 1.BP.10 =06/53.1 / 1.B.10
/ 1.24.11 / 1.220.11 =15/67.3 / 1.BP.11 =06/54.2 / 1.B.11

Li Rili
3
3
3
3

2021/7/28
/ 1.BP.12 =06/55.2 / 1.B.12

Cui Zhigang
/ 1.BP.13 =06/56.1 / 1.B.13

ADMINISTRATOR
/ 1.BP.14 =06/57.1 / 1.B.14

TB8
/ 1.BP.15 =06/58.2 / 1.B.15
2

4
4

TB12
+C2/27.4 / 0220.0 / 1.BP.16 =08/61.4 / 1.B.16
28.3 / 024 +C1/24.7 / 1.0220.1 / 1.BP.17 =08/61.7 / 1.B.17
=01/35.1 / 1.024.1 +C1/24.9 / 1.0220.2 / 1.BP.18 =08/62.1 / 1.B.18
=01/35.5 / 1.024.2 28.3 / 1.0220.3 / 1.BP.19 =08/62.7 / 1.B.19

1
5
5

=06/45.1 / 1.024.3 28.5 / 1.0220.4 =08/63.3 / 1.B.20

1
=06/52.4 / 1.024.4 / 1.0220.5 =08/64.1 / 1.B.21
=06/46.1 / 1.024.5 / 1.0220.6 =08/64.3 / 1.B.22
/ 1.024.6 / 1.0220.7 =08/64.4 / 1.B.23

2
6

/ 1.024.7 / 1.0220.8 =08/65.1 / 1.B.24

Co., Ltd.
2
/ 1.024.8 / 1.0220.9 =08/65.2 / 1.B.25
3

/ 1.024.9 / 1.0220.10 =08/66.1 / 1.B.26

/ 1.024.10 / 1.0220.11 3 =08/66.2 / 1.B.27
7

/ 1.024.11 =08/66.5 / 1.B.28

3
=15/67.3 / 1.B.29

Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery

20
/ 1.B.30
/ 1.B.31
8

/ 1.B.32
/ 1.B.33
/ 1.B.34
/ 1.B.35
9

22
/ 1.B.36
4

/ 1.B.37
/ 1.B.38
0 / 1.B.39
10

70
5

4
TB6
TB2

TB31

Public terminal strip power supply 1

=01/34.3 / 202.2 202.1 / =01/34.2 28.5 / C- 28.5 / C
=08/62.4 / S11A.2 S11A.1 / =08/61.4 =02/39.4 / 1.CN.1 +C2/27.1 / C.0
=08/62.8 / S21A.2 S21A.1 / =08/61.8 =04/43.5 / 1.CN.2 29.2 / 1.C.1
=08/62.7 / B200A.2 B200A.1 / =08/62.4 =05/44.6 / 1.CN.3 29.3 / 1.C.2
1
1

=08/63.3 / B201A.2 B201A.1 / =08/63.2 =06/45.2 / 1.CN.4 29.8 / 1.C.3

70
=08/64.5 / C300.2 C300.1 / =08/64.5 =04/43.1 / 1.CN.5 =06/45.3 / 1.C.4
1 2 3 4 5 6

=08/64.7 / C300.3 / 1.CN.6 =05/44.6 / 1.C.5

/ B101.2 B101.1 / / 1.CN.7 / 1.C.6
7
2
2

/ B101.3 / 1.CN.8 / 1.C.7

/ C223.2 C223.1 / / 1.CN.9 / 1.C.8
6

61
/ C223.3 / 1.CN.10 / 1.C.9
/ 1.CN.11 / 1.C.10
3
3

8 9 10

52
5
7

MA4700III
8

+
=

Page
Total pages
9

79
30
C3
00
=01+C1/31
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-IV1
/32.1
65KW

5
IN OUT DN15
R S T + - BR PE_2 U V W PE_1 PE T1 T2

52
R14 S14 T14
BK BK BK
25.0 25.0 25.0

61
-PE1:17 -PE1:18

L1' L2' L3'

-FR1
3
PE PE

70
L1 L2 L3 GNYE GNYE
PE 16.0 16.0

R13 S13 T13

BK BK BK
25.0 25.0 25.0

4
-PE1:16

U2 V2 W2
SH RD YE BU GNYE RD BU

70
-LC1 -WM1 10.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 0.75 0.75

90A
PE
U1 V1 W1 GNYE
PE 16.0
+Z2-M1
65KW U V W PE

R12 S12 T12 0

BK BK BK
25.0 25.0 25.0 M
3~
‎Θ
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 x1
22
-KM1 -R0
+C3/33.5 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
-WM1.1 1 X3A T2 T1 GND
x2
+C3/35.7 / WCAT1

R S T
BK BK BK
25.0 25.0 25.0
20
=00/22.6 / R.01

=00/22.6 / S.01

=00/22.6 / T.01

=00+C3/30 32
Date 2021/7/28 = 01
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C1
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Motor circuit 1 MA4700III Page 31
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-IV1
/31.1
2_ 4_ 6_ 8_ 10_
J29

5
1_ 3_ 5_ 7_ 9_ 6 7 19 20

52
61
4 70
WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

0 B B+
22
WH WH
1.0 1.0
=00+C3/30.1 / 1.B.1

=00+C3/30.1 / 1.BP.1
20

31 +C3/33
Date 2021/7/28 = 01
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C1
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Motor circuit 2 MA4700III Page 32
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=06/45.1

5
LII RO

IN20 MOTON

52
B412 12
WH RD
1.0 1.0

61
21 11
-KA16 -KA16
/34.4 24 22 /34.4 14 12
10
RD
1.0

B 11

70
WH RD
1.0 1.0

12 14 +C1 A1
x1

-KR11 -KM1 -RC1

=08/62.7 11 SC-N6APM-CF A2
x2

4
O220
RD
1.0

0 70
=00/30.1 / 1.B.2

=00+C2/27.3 / 2.0220.5
22
20

1/L1 2/T1 +C1/31.1

3/L2 4/T2 +C1/31.1
5/L3 6/T3 +C1/31.2
53 54
83 84
61 62
71 72
Emergency stop
feedback Motor on
+C1/32 34
Date 2021/7/28 = 01
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Motor start circuit 1 MA4700III Page 33
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1.BP.2 / =00/30.1

202.1 / =00/30.5

202.2 / =00/30.5

1.B.3 / =00/30.1

5
52
B
WH
1.0

61
A2
-KA16
A1

B+ 202 202 203

WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC280P 2B 1B -XC200P 3A 4A
=08/63.1 =08/66.1

-XC280S 2B 1B -XC200S 3A 4A

4
=08/63.1 =08/66.1
-WJ280
=06/46.1 -WJ200
=06/58.1 =08/62.3
=08/61.3 12 11 =08/63.3 3 4

70
=08/63.1 0.3 0.3 =08/66.1 0.3 0.3

+J28 +J20
-XJ280 2B 1B -XJ200 3A 4A
=08/63.1 =08/66.1

-XS201_1
=08/63.1
2B 1B -XS201_2
0
=08/63.2
1A 2A
22
-WS201_1 BK BU -WS201_2 BN GY
=08/63.1 0.5 0.5 =08/63.3 0.5 0.5

+J28 41 +D1 41
-S201_1 -S201_2
=08/63.1 42 =08/63.3 42
20

14
12 11 /33.3
24
22 21 /33.1
34
32 31
44
42 41
Emergency stop Emergency stop
1 2
33 35
Date 2021/7/28 = 01
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Motor start circuit 2 MA4700III Page 34
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-AJ6 -A1
=06/46.3 =06/45.1

5
+24V 0V ‎〨 AI0 GND_1 GND +10V AI3 GND_5 Master Slave IN NET5

52
61
+Z2-BP1
Pressure sensor

V +

70
24 O24 PE - O24
24V 0V
WH WH GNYE WH
0.5 0.5 1.0 0.5 -WCAT1 BK -WCAT BK

4
+C2-PE2:7 -PE4:4

70
-WBP1 RD BK WH
/35.3 SH 0.34 0.34 0.34

0
22
=00/30.1 / 1.24.2

=00/30.2 / 1.024.1

=00/30.1 / 1.24.3

=00/30.2 / 1.024.2

=06/47.1 / I101

=06/47.2 / I102

=06/47.2 / I103

+C1/31.2 / WCAT1
20

34 =02+C2/36
Date 2021/7/28 = 01
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Motor drive control circuit MA4700III Page 35
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2.0220.6 / =00/27.3

2.0220.7 / =00/27.3
2.220.5 / =00/27.1

2.220.6 / =00/27.1

5
52
61
4 70
BK BK BK BK

70
-WKS1 1.0 1.0 -WKS2 1.0 1.0

0
22
1 1

-KS1
M -KS2
M
+C3/40.1 1~ +C3/40.5 1~
20

2 2

=01+C3/35 37
Date 2021/7/28 = 02
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C2
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Solid state relay fan circuit MA4700III Page 36
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

R82 / 38.1

S82 / 38.1

5
T82 / 38.1

52
R82 R82 R82 S82 T82 T82
BK BK BK BK BK BK
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

1 1 1 1 1 1

-F11 -F21 -F22 -F31 -F41 -F42

32A 32A 32A 32A 32A 32A
2 2 2 2 2 2
H11 H23 H24 H31 H43 H44

61
BK BK BK BK BK BK
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

X1:3 X2:3 X3:3 X4:3 X5:3 X1:3

-KS1 -KS2
+C3/40.1 X1:4 X2:4 X3:4 X4:4 X5:4 +C3/40.5 X1:4
H1 H21 H22 H3 H41 H42
BK BK BK BK BK BK

70
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

+J10
TB20 1 TB20 2 TB20 3 TB20 4 TB20 5 TB20 6 -TB21 1

4
+Z1 H1 H2 H3 H4 H4
WH WH WH WH WH
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
H1 H2 H3 H3 H4 H4
WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

-KH1 -E1 -E2 -E3 -E4 -E5 -E6 -E7 -E8 -E9 -E10 -E11 -E12
+C3/39.1 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

R S T N
2 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
22
BK BK BK BU
16.0 16.0 16.0 6.0

N N N N N N N N N N N N
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
20
=00+C1/23.5 / R.02

=00+C1/23.5 / S.02

=00+C1/23.5 / T.02

=00/27.5 / 2.N.1

ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

‎1X φ42×35,200W ‎2Xφ245×70,230V,2400W ‎3Xφ190×75,230V,1900W ‎4Xφ190×75,230V,1900W

‎1X Φ100×55,750W ‎1Xφ190×75,230V,1900W
36 38
Date 2021/7/28 = 02
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C2
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Electric heating circuit 1 MA4700III Page 37
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

37.8 / R82

37.8 / S82

5
37.8 / T82

=00/27.5 / 2.N.2

52
R82 R82 S82 T82
BK BK BK BK
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

1 1 1 1

-F51 -F52 -F61 -F62

32A 32A 32A 32A
2 2 2 2
H53 H54 H63 H64

61
BK BK BK BK
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

X2:3 X3:3 X4:3 X5:3

-KS2
+C3/40.5 X2:4 X3:4 X4:4 X5:4
H51 H52 H61 H62
BK BK BK BK

70
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

+J10
TB20 7 TB20 8 TB20 9 TB20 10 -TB21 2

4
+Z1 H5 H5 H6 H6
WH WH WH WH
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
H5 H5 H6 H6
WH WH WH WH

70
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-E13 -E14 -E15 -E16 -E17 -E18 -E19 -E20
2 2 2 2 2 2 0 2 2
22
N N N N N N N
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
20

ZONE 5 ZONE 5

‎4Xφ190×75,230V,1900W ‎4Xφ190×75,230V,2600W

37 +C3/39
Date 2021/7/28 = 02
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C2
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Heater circuit 2 MA4700III Page 38
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=06/45.1

5
RO RO RO RO

TO55 TOA55 ACIN SC

52
200
RD
1.0

61
70
+C2 A1
x1

-KH1 -RC20
SC-E3PM-CF A2
x2

4
O220 220 220 C-
RD RD RD WH

70
1 1 1 1.0

0
=00+C2/27.4 / 2.0220.8

=00/30.1 / 1.220.5

=00/30.1 / 1.220.6

=00/30.5 / 1.CN.1
22
20

1/L1 2/T1 +C2/37.1

3/L2 4/T2 +C2/37.1
5/L3 6/T3 +C2/37.1
53 54
83 84
61 62
71 72

Heating on
+C2/38 40
Date 2021/7/28 = 02
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Heater start circuit MA4700III Page 39
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=06/45.1

5
RO RO RO RO RO RO

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6

52
61
70
C400 C401 C402 C403 C404 C405
WH WH WH WH WH WH

4
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

C401 C403 C404 C405

WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

+C2-KS1 X1:1 X2:1 X3:1 X4:1 X5:1 +C2-KS2 X1:1 X2:1 X3:1 X4:1 X5:1
+C2/37.2 +C2/37.7
+C2/36.1 +C2/38.1
40A X1:2 X2:2 X3:2 X4:2 X5:2 +C2/36.2 X1:2 X2:2 X3:2 X4:2 X5:2
0 40A
22
C C C C C C C C C C
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
=00+C2/27.1 / 2.C.1
20

X1:3 X1:4 +C2/37.2 X2:3 X2:4 +C2/37.3 X3:3 X3:4 +C2/37.4 X4:3 X4:4 X5:3 X5:4 X1:3 X1:4 +C2/37.7 X2:3 X2:4 +C2/38.1 X3:3 X3:4 +C2/38.2 X4:3 X4:4 X5:3 X5:4
X4:3 X4:4 +C2/37.5 X4:3 X4:4 +C2/38.3
X5:3 X5:4 +C2/37.6 X5:3 X5:4 +C2/38.4

Heating 1 Heating 2 Heating 3 Heating 4 Heating 5 Heating 6

39 41
Date 2021/7/28 = 02
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Heater temperature control circuit MA4700III Page 40
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=06/45.1

5
TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI TI

TC1+ TC1- TC2+ TC2- TC3+ TC3- TC4+ TC4- TC5+ TC5- TC6+ TC6-

52
61
4 70
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- 5+ 5- 6+ 6-
RD BK RD BK RD BK RD BK RD BK RD BK

70
-WTC01 0.25 0.25 -WTC02 0.25 0.25 -WTC03 0.25 0.25 -WTC04 0.25 0.25 -WTC05 0.25 0.25 -WTC06 0.25 0.25

+J10
-TB23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
0
22
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 3+ 3- 4+ 4- 5+ 5- 6+ 6-
-WTC01W RD BK -WTC02W RD BK -WTC03W RD BK -WTC04W RD BK -WTC05W RD BK -WTC06W RD BK

+Z1 + - + - + - + - + -
-1TC01 -1TC02 -1TC03 -1TC04 -1TC05 -1TC06
‎ф2.3-L100
20

Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature

zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4 zone 5 zone 6
40 =03+C2/42
Date 2021/7/28 = 02
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Heater temperature input circuit MA4700III Page 41
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=00+C1/23.6 / T.03

=00+C1/23.6 / S.03

5
=00+C1/23.6 / R.03

2.N.3 / =00/27.6

52
61
1 3 5
-Q111
32A
2 4 6

R0 S0 T0 N
BK BK BK BU

70
6.0 6.0 6.0 4.0
T0 T0
BK BK
2.5 2.5

S0 S0
BK BK
2.5 2.5

R0 R0
BK BK

4
2.5 2.5

N N
BU BU
2.5 2.5

70
PE2:12

PE
GNYE
1.0
PE PE
GNYE GNYE
1.0
0 1.0
22
+Z2
L1 L2 L3 N PE L1 L2 L3 N PE L1 L2 L3 N PE
-X1 -X2 -X3
32A 16A 16A
20

External socket External socket External socket

1 2 3
=02+C3/41 =04+C3/43
Date 2021/7/28 = 03
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C2
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Socket circuit MA4700III Page 42
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=00/30.6 / 1.CN.5
-A1
=06/45.1

5
=00/28.4 / C24

LII LII RO RO DVO LII

IN15 IN30 TO53 TOA53 032 IN19

52
1.B.4 / =00/30.1

1.B.5 / =00/30.1

1.B.6 / =00/30.1
C7.1 / =00/29.7
61
1
+C2-Q131
3A 2
43 B209 B C219 C335 C7 B413 B
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC401P = -XC410P =
1 -XC401P 1A 1B -XC410P 1A 1B 2A 2B
+C2-K3 /43.3 2 /43.6
/43.5 4 5 +C2-K3
10
-XC401S = -XC410S =
-XC401S 1A 1B -XC410S 1A 1B 2A 2B

4
/43.3 /43.6

41 C- B276 B -WJ401 C C- -WJ410

WH WH WH WH =06/54.1 1 7 WH WH =06/53.1 1 7 2 8

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 =15/67.1 0.3 0.3 1.0 1.0 =06/55.1 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J40 -XJ401 = +J41 -XJ410 =

-XC601 5A 6A 5B 6B -XJ401 1A 1B -XJ410 1A 1B 2A 2B
/43.3 /43.6

-XM13 =
-XM13
/43.1
1A 2A 1B 2B
0 -XS209 =
-XS209
/43.3
1A 1B
-XD335 =
-XD335
/43.6
1A 1B
-XD413 =
-XD413
/43.7
1A 1B
22
BN GY BU BK BN BU BN BU BN BU
-WM13 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 -WS209 1.0 1.0 -WD335 0.5 0.5 -WS413 0.5 0.5

=00+C2/27.1 / 2.C.2

=00/30.5 / 1.CN.2
+Z3 -M13 +P2 13 +P3 1 11
-S209 P -D335 -S413 P
V1 2
U1 M 1
14 2 12
20

40W
4
5 1 /43.1
6
7 3
9
8 11

Lubrication oil Lubrication Lubrication Lubrication

level check pressure check Lubrication pressure check pressure check
=03+C2/42 =05/44
Date 2021/7/28 = 04
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Lubrication circuit 1 MA4700III Page 43
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

=00+C1/23.8 / T.05
-A1
=06/45.1
=00+C1/23.8 / S.05

5
=00+C1/23.7 / R.05

RO RO

TO52 TOA52

52
61
C419 C

70
WH WH
1.0 1.0

1 3 5 A1
+C2-Q136 +C2-K12
2A DILEEM-10-G A2
2 4 6

4
101 102 103 C-
BK BK BK WH

70
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

+C2-K12
/44.6 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

+C1-PE1:14
0
=00/30.5 / 1.CN.3

=00/30.6 / 1.C.5
104 105 106
22
BN BK GY GNYE
-WMF30 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

+Z2 1 2 3

-MF30
M
400W 3~
20

PE

1/L1 2/T1 /44.1

3/L2 4/T2 /44.1
5/L3 6/T3 /44.2
13 14

Cooling motor AMP cooling

=04/43 =06/45
Date 2021/7/28 = 05
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Cooling circuit MA4700III Page 44
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=01/33.1
=01/35.8
=02/39.1

5
=02/40.1
=02/41.1
=04/43.2
=05/44.5 X1 X1 DVO DVO LII LII X1 X1
/47.1
/48.1 +24V COM HCOM H24V PCOM P24V NET1 PE

52
/48.5
/49.1
/50.1
/51.1
/52.1
/53.1
/54.1
/55.1
/55.5
/56.1
/57.1
/58.1

61
=07/60.1
=08/61.3
=08/61.6
=08/62.1
=08/63.1
=08/64.1
=08/64.3
=08/65.3
=08/66.1
=15/67.1
=21/68.1

70
+C2-PE2:8

4
24 O24 C- C B PE
WH WH WH WH WH GNYE

70
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

0
22
=00/30.1 / 1.24.4

=00/30.2 / 1.024.3

=00/30.6 / 1.CN.4

=00/30.6 / 1.C.4

=00/30.1 / B

46.2 / WPANEL
20

=05/44 46
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Controller wiring circuit 1 MA4700III Page 45
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-AJ6

1.024.5 / =00/30.3
=01/35.1

WPANEL / 45.4
24A / =00/29.1

5
EtherNET

52
61
+C2-PE2:9

24A O24 PE
WH WH GNYE

70
0.5 0.5 1.0

-XC280P 6A 6B -XC601 7A
=08/63.1

-XPE =
-XC280S 6A 6B -XPE 1A

4
=08/63.1 /46.3

-WJ280 6 16

70
=01/34.1 0.3 0.3

+J28
-XJ280 6A 6B
=08/63.1 13
+J28-S1
14 0
-X24024 =
-X24024 1A 1B
/46.1
PE
22
BN BU GNYE
-W24024 0.5 0.5 -WPANEL 1.0 -WFAC BK

+J28-A2
+24V COM_1 NET1 LOCK COM_6 COM_GND NET2
20

45 47
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Controller wiring circuit 2 MA4700III Page 46
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/45.1

5
PI PI PI PI PI PI

ACOM_1 AD2 +10V_1 +10V_2 AD3 ACOM_2

52
I101 / =01/35.5

I102 / =01/35.6

I103 / =01/35.6

61
4 70
70
-PE4
/47.3 1 -PE4:2 -PE4:3
/47.5
=01/35.2

-WR1
/47.1 SH
I101
RD
0.34
I102
WH
0.34
I103
BK
0.34
-WR2
/47.3
0
SH
I203
BK
0.34
I202
WH
0.34
I201
RD
0.34
-WR3
/47.5 SH
I211
RD
0.34
I212
WH
0.34
I213
BK
0.34
22
+Z1 +P3 +P2
-R1 -R2 -R3
2 2 2
20

3 1 3 1 3 1

Screw position Mold Position Ejector Position

46 48
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Location scale circuit MA4700III Page 47
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1 -A1
/45.1 /45.1

5
TI TI DVO

TC10+ TC10- 024

52
61 C8.4 / =00/29.8
C122 C8
WH WH

70
0.5 0.5

-XC600 8A 8B
=21/68.1

-XD122 =
-XD122 1A 1B

4
/48.5

0 70
22
RD BK BN BU
-WTC00W 0.25 0.25 -WD122 0.5 0.5

+Z2 +Z2
-1TC00 1
4.0m -D122
20

Oil temperature Oil cooling

thermocouple water
47 49
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Hydraulic oil temperature control + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. circuit MA4700III Page 48
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/45.1

5
DVO DVO

004 005

52C1.1 / =00/29.2

C1.2 / =00/29.2

C2.1 / =00/29.3
61
C100 C100B C1 C101 C1 C100B C2
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC100P 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B
-KA1 /50.1
=08/65.1 23

24

-XC100S 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B

4
/50.1

C100A
WH -WJ100 4 14 5 15 6 16

70
1.0 /52.9 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J10
-XJ100 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B
11 /50.1
-KA8
=08/66.1 14 12
0 -XD100 =
-XD100
/49.5
-XJ100:4A /49.5
1A 1B
-XD101 =
-XD101
/49.6
1A 1B
-XD100.1 =
-XD100.1
/49.7
1A 1B
22
BN BU BN BU BN BU
-WD100 0.5 0.5 -WD101 0.5 0.5-WD100.1 0.5 0.5

+Z1 x1 x1 x1
-D100 -D101 -D100.1
x2 x2 x2
20

Injection Suck back

48 50
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Injection circuit MA4700III Page 49
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/45.1

5
LII DVO

IN17 006

52
C102
WH
1.0

21

1.BP.3 / =00/30.1

1.B.7 / =00/30.1
-KA8

C2.2 / =00/29.3
=08/66.1 24 22

61
B103 B+ B C102A C2
WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC100P =
-XC100P 1A 2A 2B -XC100P 7A 7B
/50.1 /50.1

-XC100S =
-XC100S 1A 2A 2B -XC100S 7A 7B

4
/50.1 /50.1

-WJ100 1 2 12 7 17

70
/52.9 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J10 -XJ100 =
-XJ100 1A 2A 2B -XJ100 7A 7B
/50.1 /50.1

-XS103 =
-XS103
/50.1
1A 2A 2B
0 -XD102 =
-XD102
/50.5
1A 1B
22
BN BU
-WS103W BK BN BU -WD102 0.5 0.5

2
+Z1 x1
-S103 -D102
- +
x2
20

3 1

Charge RPM
check charge
49 51
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Storing circuit MA4700III Page 50
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/45.1

5
LII DVO DVO

IN14 007 008

52
C103
WH
1.0

31

1.B.8 / =00/30.1
-KA8

C6.1 / =00/29.6

C6.2 / =00/29.6
=08/66.1 34 32

61
B100 B C103A C6 C104 C6
WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC100P 10A 10B -XC100P 8A 8B 9A 9B

/50.1 /50.1

-XC100S 10A 10B -XC100S 8A 8B 9A 9B

4
/50.1 /50.1

-WJ100 10 20 -WJ100 8 18 9 19

70
/52.9 0.3 0.3 /52.9 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J10 +J10
-XJ100 10A 10B -XJ100 8A 8B 9A 9B
/50.1 /50.1

-XS100 =
-XS100
/51.1
1A 1B
0 -XD103 =
-XD103
/51.5
1A 1B
-XD104 =
-XD104
/51.6
1A 1B
22
BN BU BN BU
-WS100W BN BU -WD103 0.5 0.5 -WD104 0.5 0.5

+Z1 BN +Z1 x1 x1
-S100 -D103 -D104
10mm x2 x2
BU
20

Injection unit Injection unit Injection unit

forward end forward backward
50 52
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Integral shift circuit MA4700III Page 51
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1 -AMP0
/45.1

5
PVO PVO
SIN SCOM 24V COM P- P+
DCOM_1 DA3

52
61
P3+ P3- P3
WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5
-P3
0-2A
-XC100P 3B 3A
Ain+ /50.1

A
24V+ Ain- 24V-

-XC100S 3B 3A

4
B+ B /50.1
WH WH -WJ100
1.0 1.0 /49.5
PP3+ PP3- 24 O24 /50.1
WH WH WH WH /51.1 13 3

70
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 /51.5 0.3 0.3

+J10

=00/30.1 / 1.BP.4

=00/30.1 / 1.B.9
-XJ100 3B 3A
/50.1

0 -XDP3 =
-XDP3
/52.8
1B -XDP3
/52.8
1A
22
BU BN
-WDP3 0.5 0.5

+Z1 1
=00/30.1 / 1.24.5

=00/30.3 / 1.024.4

-DP3
2
20

Proportional
back pressure
51 53
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Back pressure circuit MA4700III Page 52
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/45.1

5
LII DVO DVO DVO DVO

IN7 001 003 002 022

52
C200 C202
WH WH
1.0 0.5

1.B.10 / =00/30.2

C1.3 / =00/29.3

C1.4 / =00/29.3

C4.3 / =00/29.5

C2.3 / =00/29.3
61
B205 B C200A C1 C1 C201 C4 C203 C2
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC500P =
-XC410P 3A 3B -XC500P 1A 1B 2A 2B 5A 5B 6A 6B
=04/43.6 -KA1 /53.4
=08/65.1 13

14
-XC500S =
-XC410S 3A 3B -XC500S 1A 1B 2A 2B 5A 5B 6A 6B

4
=04/43.6 /53.4

-WJ500
/55.5
-WJ410 3 9 =08/64.3 1 11 2 12 5 15 6 16

70
=04/43.6 0.3 0.3 =08/64.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J41 +J50 -XJ500 =

-XJ410 3A 3B -XJ500 1A 1B 2A 2B 5A 5B 6A 6B
=04/43.6 /53.4

-XS205 =
-XS205
/53.1
1A 1B
0 -XD200 =
-XD200
/53.4
1A 1B
-XD202 =
-XD202
/53.5
1A 1B
-XD201 =
-XD201
/53.6
1A 1B
-XD203 =
-XD203
/53.7
1A 1B
22
BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU
-WS205 0.5 0.5 -WD200 0.5 0.5 -WD202 0.5 0.5 -WD201 0.5 0.5 -WD203 0.5 0.5

+P3 NC NO +Z3 x1 x1 x1 x1
-S205 -D200 -D202 -D201 -D203
C x2 x2 x2 x2
20

Mold open
slowly (mold
Mold close fast open low
Mold clamp end Mold close Mold open (differential) pressure)
52 54
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Mold opening and closing circuit MA4700III Page 53
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/45.1

5
LII DVO DVO

IN12 009 010

52
1.BP.5 / =00/30.1

1.B.11 / =00/30.2

C3.1 / =00/29.4

C3.2 / =00/29.4
61
B206 B+ B C204 C3 C205 C3
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC400P =
-XC401P 2A 3A 3B -XC400P 1A 1B 3A 3B
=04/43.3 /54.5

-XC400S =
-XC401S 2A 3A 3B -XC400S 1A 1B 3A 3B

4
=04/43.3 /54.5

-WJ400
-WJ401 2 3 9 =15/67.5 1 11 3 13

70
=04/43.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 =21/68.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J40 +J40 -XJ400 =

-XJ401 2A 3A 3B -XJ400 1A 1B 3A 3B
=04/43.3 /54.5

-XS206 =
-XS206
/54.1
1A 2A 2B
0 -XD204 =
-XD204
/54.5
1A 1B
-XD205 =
-XD205
/54.6
1A 1B
22
BN GY BK BN BU BN BU
-WS206 1.0 1.0 1.0 -WD204 1.0 1.0 -WD205 1.0 1.0
+J30-X31 4 5 6
=15/67.7
4' 5' 6' +P2 x1 x1
-WS206W BK BN BU
-D204 -D205
2
x2 x2
+P2
20

-S206
- +

3 1

Ejector Ejector
backward end Ejector forward backward
53 55
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Thimble circuit MA4700III Page 54
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1 -A1
/45.1 /45.1

5
LII DVO DVO

IN18 013 014

52
1.BP.6 / =00/30.1

1.B.12 / =00/30.2

C2.4 / =00/29.4

C4.4 / =00/29.5
61
B208 B+ B C208 C2 C209 C4
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC410P 4A 5A 5B -XC500P 7A 7B 8A 8B
=04/43.6 /53.4

-XC410S 4A 5A 5B -XC500S 7A 7B 8A 8B

4
=04/43.6 /53.4

-WJ410 4 5 11 -WJ500 7 17 8 18

70
=04/43.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 /53.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J41 +J50
-XJ410 4A 5A 5B -XJ500 7A 7B 8A 8B
=04/43.6 /53.4

-XS208 =
-XS208
/55.1
1A 2A 2B
0 -XD208 =
-XD208
/55.5
1A 1B
-XD209 =
-XD209
/55.6
1A 1B
22
BN BU BN BU
-WS208W BK BN BU -WD208 0.5 0.5 -WD209 0.5 0.5

2
+P3 +Z3 x1 x1
-S208 -D208 -D209
- +
x2 x2
20

3 1

Mold height Mold height Mold height

adjustment adjustment adjustment
sensor check forward backward
54 56
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Mold adjusting circuit MA4700III Page 55
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/45.1

5
LII

IN29

52
1.B.13 / =00/30.2

61
B102 B
WH WH

70
0.5 0.5

-XC600 3A 3B
=21/68.1

-XS102 =
-XS102 1A 1B

4
/56.1

0 70
22
BN BU
-WS102 0.5 0.5

+Z2 11
-S102
12
20

Oil level check

55 57
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Oil level detection circuit MA4700III Page 56
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/45.1

5
LII

IN16

52
1.B.14 / =00/30.2

61
B101 B
WH WH

70
0.5 0.5

-XC600 1A 1B
=21/68.1

-XS101 =
-XS101 1A 1B

4
/57.1

0 70
22
BN BU
-WS101 0.5 0.5

+Z2 11
-S101 P
12
20

oil filter
check
56 58
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Inspection circuit of oil filter + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. screen MA4700III Page 57
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
/45.1

5
LII LII

IN31 IN32

52
1.B.15 / =00/30.2

61
B272 B273 B
WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC280P 7A 8A 8B
=08/63.1

-XC280S 7A 8A 8B

4
=08/63.1

-WJ280 7 8 18

70
=01/34.1 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J28
-XJ280 7A 8A 8B
=08/63.1

-XS272 =
-XS272
/58.1
1A 2A 2B
0
22
BN GY BK
-WS272 0.5 0.5 0.5

+J28 13 21
-S272
14 22
20

Cycle stop
button
Cycle start
button
57 59
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Cycle start circuit MA4700III Page 58
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5
52
61
70
-XF1 = -XF2 = -XF3 = -XF4 = -XF5 = -XF6 = -XF7 = -XF8 =
-XF1 -XF2 -XF3 -XF4 -XF5 -XF6 -XF7 -XF8
/59.2 /59.3 /59.3 /59.4 /59.5 /59.5 /59.6 /59.7

-XC100S 1B -XC200S 5A -XC280S 3A -XC400S 2B -XC401S 2B -XC500S 3B -XC501S 5B -XC410S 4B

4
/50.1 =08/66.1 =08/63.1 /54.5 =04/43.3 /53.4 =08/62.6 =04/43.6

XG1:x1 XG2:x1 XG3:x1

70
WH WH WH
0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC200P 5B -XC280P 3B -XC501P 5A

=08/66.1 =08/63.1 =08/62.6

0
22
20

58 =07/60
Date 2021/7/28 = 06
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Circuit for preventing wrong + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. insertion of harness MA4700III Page 59
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=06/45.1

5
DVO DVO DVO DVO

021 025 026 031

52
C5.4 / =00/29.6

61
C220 C221 C222 C753 C5
WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC501P 6A 6B 7A 8A 7B
=08/62.6

-XC501S 6A 6B 7A 8A 7B

4
=08/62.6

-WJ501 6 16 7 8 17

70
=08/62.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J50
-XJ501 6A 6B 7A 8A 7B
=08/62.6

-XL1 =
-XL1
/60.1
1A 1B 2A 3A 2B
0
22
-X33P = BN BU GY BK1 BK2
-WL1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
-X33S =
-X34P =
-X34S =
-X35P = -X33P 1 -X34P 1 -X35P 1 -X36P 1 -X37P 1
-X35S = /60.0 /60.0 /60.0 /60.0 /60.0
-X36P = -X33S 1 -X34S 1 -X35S 1 -X36S 1 -X37S 1
-X36S = /60.0 /60.0 /60.0 /60.0 /60.0
20

-WL1W RD YE GN BN BK
-X37P =
-X37S =
+D1 11 21 31
41

-L1
12 22 32
42

Alarm lamp
=06/59 =08/61
Date 2021/7/28 = 07
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Alarm lamp circuit MA4700III Page 60
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1 -KA1 -A1 -KA1

=06/45.1 /65.1 =06/45.1 /65.1

5
LII LII
Safety door closed S34 S12 Front door closed 2 S22

IN21 IN5

52
S34
WH
1.0

1.B.16 / =00/30.2

S11A.1 / =00/30.5

1.B.17 / =00/30.2

S21A.1 / =00/30.5
61
B202 B S11A S12 B227 B S21A S22
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC280P 4B 5B 4A 5A -XC501P 3B 4B 3A 4A
/63.1 /62.6

-XC280S 4B 5B 4A 5A -XC501S 3B 4B 3A 4A

4
/63.1 /62.6

-WJ280 14 15 4 5 -WJ501 13 14 3 4

70
=01/34.1 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 /62.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J28 +J50
-XJ280 4B 5B 4A 5A -XJ501 3B 4B 3A 4A
/63.1 /62.6

-XS202
0
-XS202 =
/61.3
1B 2B 1A 2A
-XS227 =
-XS227
/61.6
1B 2B 1A 2A
22
BU BK BN GY BU BK BN GY
-WS202 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 -WS227 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

+P1 13 33 +Z3 11 21
-S202 -S202 -S227 -S227
/61.4 14 /61.3 34 /61.8 12 /61.7 22
20

Front door Front door Front door Front door

closed closed closed 2 closed 2
=07/60 62
Date 2021/7/28 = 08
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Front safety door circuit MA4700III Page 61
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1 -KA1
=06/45.1 /65.1

5
LII S11 S52 S21

IN4

52
1.B.19 / =00/30.2
S11S52
WH
1.0

B200A.1 / =00/30.5

B200A.2 / =00/30.5
S11A.2 / =00/30.5

1.BP.7 / =00/30.1

S21A.2 / =00/30.5
B

61
WH
1.0

A2
-KR11
A1
B200 S11 S11A B200A B+ B200A B200B S21A S21
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC501P =
-XC200P 7A 8A 7B 8B -XC501P 1B 2B 1A 2A
21 /66.1 /62.6
-KR11
/62.7 24 22
-XC501S =
-XC200S 7A 8A 7B 8B -XC501S 1B 2B 1A 2A

4
/66.1 /62.6

B -WJ501
WH -WJ200 7 8 17 18 =07/60.1 1 11 2 12

70
1.0 =01/34.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 /61.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J20 +J50 -XJ501 =

-XJ200 7A 8A 7B 8B -XJ501 1B 2B 1A 2A
/66.1 /62.6

-XS200
0
-XS200 =
/62.3
1A 2A 1B 2B
-XS226 =
-XS226
/62.6
1B 2B 1A 2A
22
BN GY BU BK BU BK BN GY
-WS200 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 -WS226 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
=00/30.2 / 1.B.18

+P1 23 13 +Z3 11 21
-S200 -S200 -S226 -S226
/62.4 34 /62.3 14 /62.8 12 /62.7 22
Rear door closed Rear door closed 2
20

14
12 11 =01/33.3
24
22 21 /62.1
34
32 31
44
42 41
Rear door Rear door Rear door Rear door
closed closed closed 2 closed 2
61 63
Date 2021/7/28 = 08
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Rear safety door circuit MA4700III Page 62
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=06/45.1

5
LII

IN9

52
B201A.1 / =00/30.6

B201A.2 / =00/30.6

1.B.20 / =00/30.2

61
B201 B201A B201A B
WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC280P =
-XC280P 2A 1A -XC200P 3B 4B
/63.1 /66.1

-XC280S =
-XC280S 2A 1A -XC200S 3B 4B

4
/63.1 /66.1

-WJ280 2 1 -WJ200 13 14

70
=01/34.1 0.3 0.3 =01/34.3 0.3 0.3

+J28 -XJ280 = +J20

-XJ280 2A 1A -XJ200 3B 4B
/63.1 /66.1

-XS201_1 =
-XS201_1
/63.1
2A 1A
-XS201_2 =
-XS201_2
/63.2
1B
0 2B
22
-WS201_1 GY BN -WS201_2 BU BK
=01/34.1 0.5 0.5 =01/34.3 0.5 0.5

+J28 11 +D1 11
-S201_1 -S201_2
=01/34.1 12 =01/34.3 12
20

Emergency stop Emergency stop

62 64
Date 2021/7/28 = 08
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Emergency stop circuit MA4700III Page 63
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1 -A1
=06/45.1 =06/45.1

5
LII
Hydraulic safety check DVO DVO

IN24 027 028

52
1.B.22 / =00/30.3
C300
WH
0.5

1.BP.8 / =00/30.1

1.B.23 / =00/30.3

C300.3 / =00/30.6
C5.2 / =00/29.6
B

61
WH
1.0

=00/30.6 / C300.1
A2
-KA15 =00/30.6 / C300.2
A1
B204 B204A B+ B C300 C5 C333 C300
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC500P 3A 4A 4B -XC500P 9A 9B -XC500P 10A 10B

11 =06/53.4 =06/53.4 =06/53.4
-KA15
/64.3 14 12

-XC500S 3A 4A 4B -XC500S 9A 9B -XC500S 10A 10B

4
=06/53.4 =06/53.4 =06/53.4

B
WH -WJ500 3 4 14 -WJ500 9 19 10 20

70
1.0 =06/53.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 =06/53.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J50
-XJ500 3A 4A 4B 9A 9B 10A 10B
=06/53.4

-XS204
0
-XS204 =
/64.3
1A 2A 2B
-XD300 =
-XD300
/64.5
1A 1B
-XS277 =
-XS277
/64.6
1A 1B
22
BN GY BK BN BU BN BU
-WS204 0.5 0.5 0.5 -WD300 0.5 0.5 -WS277 0.5 0.5

2 3
+Z3 1 +Z3 11
=00/30.3 / 1.B.21

-S204 -D300 -S277

+ -
2 12
20

4 1

14
12 11 /64.1
24
22 21
34
32 31
44
42 41 Mold close from
Hydraulic beginning to
safety check Mold open from beginning to end end
63 65
Date 2021/7/28 = 08
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Hydraulic safety circuit MA4700III Page 64
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-KA1 -A1
=06/49.3 =06/45.1
=06/53.3
/61.4

5
/61.7
/62.3
A1 A2 41 42 LII

IN13

52
61
4 70
B+ B B B124
WH WH WH WH

70
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

0
22
=00/30.1 / 1.BP.9

=00/30.3 / 1.B.24

=00/30.3 / 1.B.25

20

Safty relay
reset
64 66
Date 2021/7/28 = 08
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Output circuit of safety relay MA4700III Page 65
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=06/45.1

5
LII LII

IN11 IN2

52
1.B.26 / =00/30.3

1.BP.10 / =00/30.2

1.B.27 / =00/30.3
B

61
WH
1.0

A2
-KA8
A1
B203A B+ B203 B B122
WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0

-XC200P =
-XC200P 1A 2A 1B 2B
/66.1 41
-KA8
/66.1 44 42
-XC200S =
-XC200S 1A 2A 1B 2B

4
/66.1
-WJ200 1 2 11 12
=01/34.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

70
+J20 -XJ200 =
-XJ200 1A 2A 1B 2B
/66.1

-XS203 =
-XS203 1A 2A 1B 2B
/66.1

+J20-X38
-WS203
1
BN
0.5

2
GY
0.5

3
BU
0.5

4
BK
0.5
0 B
22
1' 2' 3' 4' WH
wh bn bu bk 1.0
-WS203W 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+P1 wh bu
=00/30.3 / 1.B.28

-S203
bn bk
20

14
12 11 =06/49.3
24
22 21 =06/50.5
34
32 31 =06/51.5
44
42 41 /66.4
Purge Guard purge guard
closed closed 2
65 =15/67
Date 2021/7/28 = 08
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Nozzle protecting cover circuit MA4700III Page 66
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=06/45.1

5
LII LII LII LII DVO DVO DVO DVO

IN25 IN27 IN26 IN28 011 012 015 016

52
1.BP.11 / =00/30.2

1.B.29 / =00/30.3

C3.3 / =00/29.4

C3.4 / =00/29.4

C4.1 / =00/29.5

C4.2 / =00/29.5
61
B211 B213 B212 B214 B+ B C206 C3 C207 C3 C210 C4 C211 C4
WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC401P 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B -XC400P 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B
=04/43.3 =06/54.5

-XC401S 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B -XC400S 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B

4
=04/43.3 =06/54.5

-WJ401 4 10 5 11 6 12 -WJ400 4 14 5 15 6 16 7 17

70
=04/43.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 =06/54.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+J40 +J40
-XJ401 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B -XJ400 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 7B
=04/43.3 =06/54.5

-XSCRA =
-XSCRA
/67.1
1A 1B
-XSCRB =
-XSCRB
/67.2
1A 1B
-XPCRM =
-XPCRM
/67.2
1A
0 1B
-XD206 =
-XD206
/67.5
1A 1B
-XD207 =
-XD207
/67.6
1A 1B
-XD210 =
-XD210
/67.7
1A 1B
-XD211 =
-XD211
/67.8
1A 1B
22
BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU BN BU
-WSCRA 1.0 1.0 -WSCRB 1.0 1.0 -WPCRM 1.0 1.0 -WD206 1.0 1.0 -WD207 1.0 1.0 -WD210 1.0 1.0 -WD211 1.0 1.0

+J30-X31
+J30 +P2 =06/54.1
-X100 10 9 12 11 13 14 15 16 x1 x1
/67.1 -D206 -D207 2 1 3
-X100 = x2 x2
2' 1' 3'
-X100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20

/67.1

Core A in Core A out Core B in Core B out

end end end end Ejector backward Core A in Core A out Core B in Core B out
=08/66 =21/68
Date 2021/7/28 = 15
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Neutron circuit1 MA4700III Page 67
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-A1
=06/45.1

5
DVO DVO

019 020

52
C5.1 / =00/29.5

61
C223 C224 C5
WH WH WH

70
0.5 0.5 0.5

-XC600 =
-XC600 6A 7A 7B -XC400P 8A 8B 9A 9B 10A 10B
/68.1 =06/54.5

-XD2234 =
-XD2234 1A 2A 2B -XC400S 8A 8B 9A 9B 10A 10B

4
/68.0 =06/54.5

BN GY BK -WJ400 8 18 9 19 10 20

70
-WD2234 0.5 0.5 0.5 =06/54.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

+Z3-X132 +J40
-XJ400 8A 8B 9A 9B 10A 10B
=06/54.5
1 2 3
1' 2' 3'
0
22
20

=15/67 &APB=+/69
Date 2021/7/28 = 21
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery + C3
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Blow circuit MA4700III Page 68
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
W24024 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

52
WBP1 Cable AWM 2464 3x22AWG Hanwei 026A479

WCAT Cable 1.3m Suntek 026A608

WCAT1 Cable 3m Suntek 026A609

WD100 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

61
WD100.1 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD101 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD102 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD103 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

70
WD104 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD122 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD200 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD201 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

4
WD202 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD203 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

70
WD204 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD205 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD206 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD207 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD208

WD209
Cable

Cable
0 ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝)

‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝)
Taiyo

Taiyo
026A516

026A516
22
WD210 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD211 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WD300 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WD335 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

20

WD2234 Cable ‎RVV3×0.5（棕、灰、黑) Taiyo 026A517

WDP3 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WFAC Cable 6.5m Suntek 026A619

WJ100 Cable RVV 20×0.3（1-20） Taiyo 026A523

&EFS=21+C3/68 70
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Equipment list : W24024 - WJ100 MA4700III Page 69
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
WJ200 Cable RVV 20×0.3（1-20） Taiyo 026A523

52
WJ280 Cable RVV 20×0.3（1-20） Taiyo 026A523

WJ400 Cable RVV 20×0.3（1-20） Taiyo 026A523

WJ401 Cable ‎RVV 12×0.3（黑1-12） Taiyo 026A521

WJ410 Cable ‎RVV 12×0.3（黑1-12） Taiyo 026A521

61
WJ500 Cable RVV 20×0.3（1-20） Taiyo 026A523

WJ501 Cable RVV 20×0.3（1-20） Taiyo 026A523

WKS1 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WKS2 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

70
WL1 Cable ‎RVV5×0.5（棕、蓝、灰、黑1-2） Taiyo 026A519

WM1 Cable A2300407 Qiuguan A2300407

WM1.1 Cable ‎6M/DB26/M23-17芯-双屏蔽 Haitian A2300208

WM13 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

4
WMF1 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WMF2 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

70
WMF3 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WMF4 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WMF5 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WMF6 Fans and accessories 2m Fulltech 021001

WMF30

WPANEL
Cable

PLC accessories
0 RVV4*1

3LC0808M600
Haitian

Techmation
026A147

001A781
22
WPCRM Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WR1 Cable AWM 2464 3x22AWG Hanwei 026A479

WR2 Cable AWM 2464 3x22AWG Hanwei 026A479

WR3 Cable AWM 2464 3x22AWG Hanwei 026A479

20

WS101 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WS102 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WS200 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

WS201_1 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

69 71
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. Equipment list : WJ200 - WS201_1 MA4700III Page 70
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
WS201_2 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

52
WS202 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

WS203 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

WS204 Cable ‎RVV3×0.5（棕、灰、黑) Taiyo 026A517

WS205 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

61
WS206 Cable 3×32/0.2 Haitian 026019

WS209 Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WS226 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

WS227 Cable RVV4×0.5(BN、BU、BK、GY) Taiyo 026A518

70
WS272 Cable ‎RVV3×0.5（棕、灰、黑) Taiyo 026A517

WS277 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WS413 Cable ‎RVV2×0.5(棕、蓝) Taiyo 026A516

WSCRA Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

4
WSCRB Cable 2×32/0.2 Haitian 026018

WTC01 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

70
WTC02 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

WTC03 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

WTC04 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

WTC05 Cable KX:2×0.25 Rongda 026A093

WTC06

+C1-IV1
Cable

Power unit
0 KX:2×0.25 Rongda

Haitian
026A093

E9901392
22
+C1-KM1 Contactor SC-N6APM-CF Fujichangshu 004A175

+C1-MF1 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

+C1-MF2 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

+C1-PE1 Grounding copper bar 110X36X8，14*M4,8*M6 Haitian 685002XC

20

+C1-Q100 Circuit breaker CVS250F3 Schneider 003A271

+C1-R0 Braking resistor RXLG-500 Hengda E10091

+C1-RC1 Surge absorber 3ZSQ21150TFL Techmation 008027

+C1-X55 Wiring block WFF70 Weidmuller 025A594

70 72
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Equipment list : WS201_2 - +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. =00+C1-X55 MA4700III Page 71
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
+C2-F11 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

52
+C2-F21 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F22 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F31 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F41 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

61
+C2-F42 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F51 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F52 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-F61 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

70
+C2-F62 Fuse 25/110X38 Weidmuller 003125;008054

+C2-K3 Relay MKS3P Omron 015001;015003

+C2-K12 Contactor DILEEM-10-G Moeller 004A007

+C2-KH1 Contactor SC-E3PM-CF Fujichangshu 004A172

4
+C2-KS1 Solid-state relay GTJ48-40A Tianhao 010018

+C2-KS2 Solid-state relay GTJ48-40A Tianhao 010018

70
+C2-MF3 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

+C2-MF4 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

+C2-MT1 PE Haitian PE

+C2-PE2 Grounding copper bar 195X36X8，24*M4，11*M6 Haitian 685A011

+C2-Q111

+C2-Q121
Circuit breaker

Miniature circuit breaker

0 FAZ-C32/3

FAZ-D2/2
Eaton

Eaton
003145

003A240
22
+C2-Q131 Micro Circuit breakers FAZ-D3/1 Eaton 003A495

+C2-Q136 Micro Circuit breakers FAZ-C2/3 Eaton 003A031

+C2-RC20 Surge absorber 3ZSQ21150TFL Techmation 008027

+C2-T1 Isolating transformer JBK3-440VA Tengen 011A347

20

+C2-TB2_2 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C2-TB7_2 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C2-TB8_2 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C2-TB10_2 Terminal SAKDU 16 Weidmuller WEI.SAKDU 16

71 73
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Equipment list : =02+C2-F11 - +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. +C2-TB10_2 MA4700III Page 72
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
+C3-A1 PLC host PILOT5530 Techmation 001A779

52
+C3-AJ6 Control card ‎J6V AD4+DA2（1驱） Haitian 001A827

+C3-AMP0 PLC accessories SPV Techmation 001690

+C3-F1 Circuit breaker S201-Z10 Abb 003A274

+C3-G2 PLC accessories 1PWR_150_A Mingwei 001296

61
+C3-G3 PLC accessories 1PWR_300_B Cosel 1PWR_300_B

+C3-KA1 Safety relay PNOZ X2.8P Pilz 015A023

+C3-KA8 Relay DRM570024L Weidmuller 015A003;015A010

+C3-KA15 Relay DRM570024L Weidmuller 015A003;015A010

70
+C3-KA16 Relay DRM570024L Weidmuller 015A003;015A010

+C3-KR11 Relay DRM570024L Weidmuller 015A003;015A010

+C3-MF5 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

+C3-MF6 Fans and accessories 120*120 Fulltech 021028

4
+C3-MT2 PE Haitian PE

+C3-P3 Current meter XD-02 Rongda 019A025

70
+C3-PE4 Grounding copper bar CES-KLF5(6-8)101mm Haitian 029A581

+C3-TB1 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB2 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB3 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB6

+C3-TB7
Terminal

Terminal
0 SAKDK 4NV

SAKDK 4NV
Weidmuller

Weidmuller
WEI.SAKDK 4NV

WEI.SAKDK 4NV
22
+C3-TB8 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB11 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB12 Terminal SAKDK 4NV Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4NV

+C3-TB31 Terminal SAKDK 4N Weidmuller WEI.SAKDK 4N

20

+C3-U20 PCB 3A*10,NPN Haitian 001A861

+C3-X33P Male connector F1.25-B 027044

+C3-X33S Female connector F1.25-A 027045

+C3-X34P Male connector F1.25-B 027044

72 74
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Equipment list : =06+C3-A1 - +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. =07+C3-X34P MA4700III Page 73
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
+C3-X34S Female connector F1.25-A 027045

52
+C3-X35P Male connector F1.25-B 027044

+C3-X35S Female connector F1.25-A 027045

+C3-X36P Male connector F1.25-B 027044

+C3-X36S Female connector F1.25-A 027045

61
+C3-X37P Male connector F1.25-B 027044

+C3-X37S Female connector F1.25-A 027045

+C3-XC100P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

+C3-XC100S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

70
+C3-XC200P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

+C3-XC200S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

+C3-XC280P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

+C3-XC280S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

4
+C3-XC400P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

+C3-XC400S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

70
+C3-XC401P Male connector ‎1-1318114-6（12位） TE Connectivity 022B290

+C3-XC401S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 12P TE Connectivity 022B186

+C3-XC410P Male connector ‎1-1318114-6（12位） TE Connectivity 022B290

+C3-XC410S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 12P TE Connectivity 022B186

+C3-XC500P

+C3-XC500S
Male connector

Female connector
0 ‎1-1318114-9（20位）

DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P

TE Connectivity

TE Connectivity
022B289

022B188
22
+C3-XC501P Male connector ‎1-1318114-9（20位） TE Connectivity 022B289

+C3-XC501S Female connector DYNAMIC D-2100 REC HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022B188

+C3-XC600 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+C3-XC601 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933
20

+C3-XD122 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+C3-XD2234 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+C3-XF1 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XF2 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

73 75
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Equipment list : =07+C3-X34S - +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. =06+C3-XF2 MA4700III Page 74
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
+C3-XF3 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

52
+C3-XF4 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XF5 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XF6 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XF7 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

61
+C3-XF8 Foolproof accessory 641994-1 TE Connectivity 022B287

+C3-XM13 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+C3-XPE Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+C3-XS101 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

70
+C3-XS102 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+Z1-E1 Heater band ‎φ42×35,230V,200W,L=500mm Haitian 862C456

+Z1-E2 Heater band ‎φ100×55，230V，750W，L=400mm Haitian 862C427

+Z1-E3 Heater band ‎φ245X70，250V，2400W Yancheng 862A350Q

4
+Z1-E4 Heater band ‎φ245×70，230V，2400W Yancheng 862A351Q

+Z1-E5 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B436

70
+Z1-E6 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B437

+Z1-E7 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B436

+Z1-E8 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B437

+Z1-E9 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B436

+Z1-E10

+Z1-E11
Heater band

Heater band
0 ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W

‎φ190×75,230V,1900W
Haitian

Haitian
862B437

862B436
22
+Z1-E12 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B437

+Z1-E13 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B436

+Z1-E14 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B437

+Z1-E15 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B436

20

+Z1-E16 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,1900W Haitian 862B437

+Z1-E17 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,2600W Haitian 862B438

+Z1-E18 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,2600W Haitian 862B439

+Z1-E19 Heater band ‎φ190×75,230V,2600W Haitian 862B438

74 76
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Equipment list : =06+C3-XF3 - +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. =02+Z1-E19 MA4700III Page 75
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
+Z1-E20 862B442

52
+Z1-R1 Position transducer LWH-400 Novo 002008

+Z1-S100 Magnetic proximity switch FN12-10BLA-K30 Sodron 013A044

+Z1-S103 Inductive proximity sensor ‎PM08-02N（2米） Omron 013007

+Z1-1TC01 Thermocouple ‎绝K-ф2.3-L100-3.5M 023A140

61
+Z1-1TC02 Thermocouple 3.0m Rongda 023005

+Z1-1TC03 Thermocouple 2.5m Rongda 023004

+Z1-1TC04 Thermocouple K，2.0m Rongda 023003

+Z1-1TC05 Thermocouple K，1.5m Rongda 023002

70
+Z1-1TC06 Thermocouple K，1.5m Rongda 023002

+Z2-1TC00 Thermocouple 4.0m Rongda 023075

+Z2-X1 Socket Socket:3451 Mennekes 022213;022214

+Z2-X2 Socket Socket:1385 Mennekes 022211;022212

4
+Z2-X3 Socket Socket:1385 Mennekes 022211;022212

+Z3-S226 Limit switch T4VH336-02Z Schmesal 012007

70
+Z3-S227 Limit switch T4VH336-02Z Schmesal 012007

+Z3-S277 Limit switch T4VH336-02Z Schmesal 012007

+Z3-X132 Wiring block X5-1003 Chenxiang 025000

+P1-S200 Limit switch T4VH336-20Z Schmesal 012006

+P1-S202

+P1-S203
Limit switch

Limit switch
0 HL-5071

PSENma1.4p-50+PESNma1.4-10
Omron

Pilz
012A016

014A090
22
+P2-R3 Position transducer LWH-225 Novo 002004

+P2-S206 Inductive proximity sensor PM12-04N Omron 013001

+P3-R2 Position transducer TLH-750 Novo 002013

+P3-S205 Limit switch D4MC-5040 Omron 012001

20

+P3-S208 Inductive proximity sensor ‎PM08-02N（2米） Omron 013007

+D1-L1 Indicator light ST56MELH-BZ-3-24-RAG Q-Light 017A125

+D1-S201_2 Emegency stop button M22-PV/K01PV6 Moeller 017A086;017A087;017A087;017A087

+J10-TB20 Terminal ST16BU Phoenix PHO.ST16BU

75 77
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Equipment list : =02+Z1-E20 - +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. +J10-TB20 MA4700III Page 76
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
+J10-TB21 Terminal ST16BU Phoenix PHO.ST16BU

52
+J10-TB23 Terminal UK2,5B Phoenix PHO.UK2,5B

+J10-XD100 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XD100.1 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XD101 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

61
+J10-XD102 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XD103 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XD104 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XDP3 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

70
+J10-XJ100 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J10-XS100 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J10-XS103 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J20-X38 Wiring block TB1504 Haitian 025A039

4
+J20-XJ200 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J20-XS200 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

70
+J20-XS201_2 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J20-XS203 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J28-A2 PLC host 1PNHTP33600GABC45E_1 Techmation P001A041

+J28-S201_1 Emegency stop button M22-PV/K01PV6 Moeller 017A086;017A087;017A087;017A087

+J28-S272

+J28-X24024
Button

Female connector
0 M22-DDL-WS-GB1/GB0

DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P

Eaton

TE Connectivity
016030

022B197
22
+J28-XJ280 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J28-XS201_1 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J28-XS202 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J28-XS272 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

20

+J30-X31 Wiring block X5-1010 Chenxiang 025001

+J30-X100 Connector 16A Xudong 022199

+J40-XD204 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XD205 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

76 78
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Equipment list : +J10-TB21 - +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. =06+J40-XD205 MA4700III Page 77
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
+J40-XD206 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

52
+J40-XD207 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XD210 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XD211 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XJ400 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

61
+J40-XJ401 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J40-XPCRM Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XS206 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J40-XS209 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

70
+J40-XSCRA Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J40-XSCRB Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J41-XD335 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J41-XD413 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

4
+J41-XJ410 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J41-XS205 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

70
+J41-XS208 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J50-XD200 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J50-XD201 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J50-XD202 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J50-XD203

+J50-XD208
Female connector

Female connector
0 DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P

DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P

TE Connectivity

TE Connectivity
022B197

022B197
22
+J50-XD209 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J50-XD300 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

+J50-XJ500 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933

+J50-XJ501 Male connector DYNAMIC D-3500 TAB HSG 20P TE Connectivity 022A933
20

+J50-XL1 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 6P TE Connectivity 022B199

+J50-XS204 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J50-XS226 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

+J50-XS227 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 4P TE Connectivity 022B198

77 79
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Equipment list : =15+J40-XD206 - +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. =08+J50-XS227 MA4700III Page 78
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Equipment list HT_DEVICE_LIST -V1

Equipment identifier Designation Type No. Manufacturer ERP code

5
+J50-XS277 Female connector DYNAMIC D-3500 REC HSG 2P TE Connectivity 022B197

52
61
4 70
0 70
22
20

78
Date 2021/7/28 =
Drawn by ADMINISTRATOR Ningbo Haitian Huayuan Machinery Equipment list : =08+J50-XS277 - +
Appr Li Rili Co., Ltd. =08+J50-XS277 MA4700III Page 79
Modification Date Name Normalization Cui Zhigang Total pages 79